G.C.C of Auditorium
VOLUME - I
NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY,ODISHA
KATHAJODI CAMPUS,
NARAJ,
CUTTACK.
TENDER DOCUMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION AUDITORIUM OF
NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY CAMPUS WORKS
NAME OF THE WORK
: CONSTRUCTION OF STEEL WORKS FOR
AUDITORIUM OF NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY,
CUTTACK
(Completion period 12 Months)
PLACE OF SUBMISSION
OF THE TENDER PAPER
:
At the office of the
The Vice Chancellor
National Law University ODISHA .
Naraj, Cuttack - 753015, ODISHA
ARCHITECT/ PMC:
STRUCTURAL ASSOCIATE :
M/S. RATH ARCHITECTONIC
PLOT NO. 104, MADHUSUDAN NAGAR
UNIT – 4, BHUBANESWAR-751001
PH NO.-(0674)2390940,2395340.
GLOBAL ENGINEERING SERVICES
607, MAYURESH COSMOS
C.B.D., BELAPUR, NAVI MUMBAI
PIN: 400706
CONSTRUCTION OF STEEL WORKS FOR AUDITORIUM
NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY ODISHA,
INDEX
Sl.
No.
Section No.
Description
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
6.
7.
8.
8.
9.
9.
10.
10.
11.
11.
12.
12.
13.
13.
14.
14
Notice Inviting Tender
Instruction to bidders
Check List
Pre qualification application format
General rules and instructions for the
Guidance of Tender
Special Conditions of Contract
Safety Code, Maintenance of records,
Mobilization of Advance, Letter of
Acceptance.
Form for Mobilization Advance, Bank
guaranty performance.
Performa of monthly progress reports,
receipt of material at site, perform of cube
test.
Performa of measurement book, Performa
of running bill form, form for secured
advance and certificates
Form for payment of advance on materials,
memorandum for payment, Performa of
site order book.
Form for applications by contractor for
extension of time, Performa of hindrance
register.
Technical Specification of materials and
approved material list.
List of the Tendered Drawings.
Sl.
No.
Section No.
Description
1.
ANNEXURE - A Bill of Quantity (B.O.Q.)
Page No.
03 – 07.
08 – 16.
17.
18 – 30.
31 – 63.
64 – 70.
71 – 74.
75 – 79.
80 – 83.
84 – 86.
87 – 92.
93 – 94.
95-410
411-431
Page No.
1 - 55
2
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 1
__________________________________________________________Notice Inviting Tender
CONTRACT DATA
A. GENERAL INFORMATIONS
Sl. No.
1.
Item
Name of the work
2.
3.
Employer
Employer’s Representative
Details
Construction of steel works for Auditorium of
National Law University, Odisha.
National Law University, Odisha ( NLUO)
PMC / Project Management Consultant
(PMC)
B. BID INFORMATION
Sl. No.
1.
2.
3.
Item
Intended completion period /
Time period assigned for
Completion.
Last Date and time of submission
of BID
Cost of Bid Documents
i. Bank draft amount
ii. In Favor of
4
iii. Payable at
BID Security
i. Amount
ii. In favor of
5.
6.
iii. Payable at
Pre-Bid Meeting
BID validity period
7.
8.
Currency of Contract
Language of Contract
Details
12 (Twelve months) English calendar months.
Date : 09.09.2015
Time: 3 : 00 P.M. (15 : 00 hrs).
Rs. 10, 500 . 00 (Rupees Ten Thousand Five
Hundred Only)
The Registrar,
National Law University, Odisha, Naraj,
Cuttack-753015, Odisha
Cuttack
Rs. 35, 00, 000 . 00 (Rupees Thirty five Lakhs
Only)
The Registrar,
National Law University, Odisha, Naraj,
Cuttack-753015, Odisha
Cuttack
Date: 10.08.2015 at NLUO at 3 : 30 PM.
4 (Four) months from the opening of price
bid.
Indian National Rupee
English
3
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 1
__________________________________________________________Notice Inviting Tender
NOTICE INVITING TENDER
National Law University ODISHA invites sealed tenders from the contractors on item rate basis
for the Construction of National Law University Campus Works of Auditorium for the proposed
National Law University Campus at Naraj, Cuttack, ODISHA. Details of tenders are as under.
a.
Name of the work
:
Construction of steel works for Auditorium
of National Law University , Odisha
Campus
b.
Time allowed for completion
:
12 Months for the total works from the date
of issue of LOI.
Time period to be fixed 12Months for the Auditorium work, which includes the following work
with operational from the date of execution of work as per the following
The above said work to be completed by 12Months from the date of issue of LOI.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Earnest money deposit
Security deposit
Sale of tender document
Cost of Tender document
:
:
:
:
Rs.35,00,000.00
5% of the contract value
28.07.2015
Rs 10,500.00 (Rupees Ten thousand five
hundred only)
g.
Last date & time of receipt of tender
:
09.09.2015 at 3:00 P.M.
h.
Pre bid meeting
i.
Address at which the tenders are to be
submitted
:
10.08.2015 At NLUO, Naraj Site at
3:30 P.M.
The Vice Chancellor
.
National Law University ODISHA .
Naraj, Cuttack - 753015, ODISHA
j.
Date & time of opening tenders:
09.09.2015 at 4 : 00 P.M (16 : 00 Hrs)
k.
Place of opening tenders:
At the office of
The Vice Chancellor
.
National Law University Odisha .
Naraj, Cuttack - 753015, ODISHA.
4
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 1
__________________________________________________________Notice Inviting Tender
l.
Validity of offer:
4 (Four) months from the opening of price
bid.
m.
Liquidated Damages.
0.5% of the estimated contract value shown
in the tender per week subject to a
maximum of 5% of the accepted tender
amount.
In case the date of opening of tenders is declared as a holiday , the tenders will be opened on the
next working day at the same time.
National Law University Odisha has the right to accept/ reject any / all tenders without assigning
any reasons.
For and behalf of National Law University Odisha .
n. Technical Bid Criteria
Reputed contractors who successfully executed similar works may apply on or before
09.09.2015, 03:00P.M. their tender can only be opened.
1. Basic criteria for pre-qualification of contractors/Firms:
a. Intending contractors/firms should have minimum 7 years experience
in the construction field.
b. Intending contractors/firms should have successfully completed one similar
type of works in for Government/PSUs/ CPWD/PWD (State), reputed corporate
etc. during last seven years.
c. Intending contractors/firms should have successfully completed similar type
of works as under as on 31.03.2015 for Government/PSUs/ CPWD/PWD (State)/
reputed corporate etc. during last 5 ( five ) years. :
i. One similar works costing not less than Rs Rs.20.0 Crores in last five
years
OR
ii. Two similar works each costing not less than Rs.14.0 Crores in last five
years.
OR
iii. Three similar works each costing not less than Rs.9.0 Crores in last five
years
5
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 1
__________________________________________________________Notice Inviting Tender
d. Intending contractors/firms should be financially capable and should submit
solvency certificate for an amount of Rs. 3.0 Crore from any Nationalized
Bank.
e. Annual turnover of the renderer during last three financial year (201213,2013-14,2014-15 should be at least Rs. 30.00 Crores in one of the year or
the total turnover last three financial year as mentioned should be minimum
Rs. 50.00 Crores.
f. Intending contractors/firms must have sufficient experienced personnel,
technical knowhow, establishment, plant/equipment to complete the steel
structure project well in time.
2. The interested Contractors/firms may apply in the prescribed format (as per Annexure I)
The eligible Contractors/firms may obtain prescribed format from
a. Office of The Vice Chancellor, National Law University Odisha, Naraj,
Cuttack - 753015, ODISHA (from 10 AM to 5 PM from Monday to Friday
and 10 AM to 2 PM on Saturday) or,
The prescribed format duly filled in with all necessary particulars as stated in the
prescribed format along with attested copies of certificates/credentials regarding jobs
undertaken at various organizations should be submitted in a sealed cover super
scribing “Prequalification of Contractors for construction Auditorium building work
at NLUO” at the following address on or before 09.09.2015 by 03:00PM The Vice
Chancellor, National Law University Odisha. Naraj, Cuttack - 753015,
ODISHA.
3. Selection will be made based on particulars and documents furnished by the applicant
as required and satisfactory verification carried out by the PMC / NLUO. Incomplete
information in the application will lead to summary rejection. If any information
furnished by the applicant is found incorrect at a later stage, they shall be liable to be
debarred from tendering/taking up the work. NLUO reserves the right to verify the
particulars furnished by the applicant independently.
4. Issue of tender documents to the Contractors/firms will be restricted to those
considered eligible from the applicant and no further press notice in this regard will
be issued. NLUO reserves the right to accept or reject any or all applications without
assigning any reasons whatsoever.
5. For any other clarifications, intending agencies may contact at The Vice Chancellor
above mentioned address before the last date of submission during working hours as
mentioned above.
6
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 1
__________________________________________________________Notice Inviting Tender
6. Incomplete applications and applications not filled properly with requisite details are
liable for rejection and NLUO will not entertain any further communication in such
cases.
7. The NLUO reserves the right to accept or reject any or all applications without
assigning any reasons whatsoever.
8.
Pre-bid meeting with all contractors shall be held at NLUO site Office at Cuttack,
seven days from issue of publication i.e. on dt 10.08.2015 at 03:30 PM at NLUO site
office at Cuttack, wherein contractors can clarify any doubts /discrepancies in
documents Tendered drawings , and indicate only missing or any item taken extra in
the description of item, Tendered drawings or any details conveying different
meaning at different places, other missing details or any missing item in Tendered
drawings/ Specifications / Conditions. All queries needs to be put up in writing to
the “ The Vice Chancellor, NLUO, Cuttack within 7 days from the date of issue of
this document. No further clarifications shall be given by NLUO and contractor shall
not claim any extra payment in future. Also contractor shall not be entitled for any
claim on such issues at later date.
All the queries should be brought out during the Pre-bid meeting only in writing.
All the queries shall deliberated and corrective action if any shall be taken during the
Pre- Bid meeting.
9. No interest shall be paid on Earnest Money Deposit and Retention money or any
other securities.
10. Amendment of Bidding Documents:
i.
Any addendum thus issued shall be part of the bidding documents and
shall be notified in the website www.nluo.ac.in.
11. All pages of tender document should be signed by Contractor, NLUO, PMC
The Vice Chancellor
National Law University Odisha.
Naraj, Cuttack - 753015, Odisha
7
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 2
___________________________________________________________Instruction to Bidder
TENDERS SHOULD BE SUBMITTED AS FOLLOWS :
1. Tenders are to be submitted on the printed forms issued by us. The Contractor should
quote the rates in figures as well as in words. Special care should be taken to write the
rates in figures only in such a way that interpolation is not possible. The total amount
should be written both in figures and in words . In case of figures, the words . “Rs”
should be written before the figure of rupees and words “p” after the decimal figures e.g.
Rs. 2.15 “p” and incase of words, the words the word “Rupees” should precede and the
word “Paise” should be written at the end, Unless the rate is in whole rupees and
followed by the words “only” it should invariably be upto two decimal places . While
quoting the rate in schedule of quantities , the words “Only” should be written closely
following the amount and it should not be written in the next line. The amount of each
item shall be worked out and the requisite total shall be given. All corrections shall be
attested by the initials of the Tenderers . In case of any discrepancy / difference, the rate
quoted in words in the original copy of the tender and the amount derived there from
shall prevail and be binding . Tenders which should be placed in sealed cover with the
name of the project and date of opening of tender written on the envelopes will be
received by the office of The Vice Chancellor, National Law University ODISHA, Naraj,
Cuttack - 753015, ODISHA till 09.09.2015 upto 03:00P.M hrs in a sealed envelope of
appropriate size containing the documents as under :
2. ENVELOPE MARKED “PART-A”
Envelope marked “PART-A” shall contain the following Documents :
a. Forwarding letter without mentioning the cost of Tender value arrived at with
quoted rates.
b. Earnest money deposit furnished in the form of Crossed demand Draft / Banker’s
cheque drawn in favor of “The Registrar, NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY
ODISHA ” and payable at Cuttack from any nationalized bank for the amount
indicated in the Notice Inviting Tender.
c. Any comment which the tenderer desires to make in the form of a statement as
brief as possible and with reference to the items.
d. Latest three years photocopies of upto date Income Tax and Sales tax Clearance
Certificate.
e. The term and conditions which are of commercial and technical nature if any that
the tenderer wishes to stipulate.
8
f. Any other papers the tenderers wishes to submit.
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 2
___________________________________________________________Instruction to Bidder
g. Nothing on previous experience, whether A,B or C
h. Class contractor submission of documents showing:
1. Nature and names of those the firm, if a partnership whether registered.
2. Previous project done with documentary support.
3. ENVELOPE MARKED “PART-B”
Envelope marked” PART-B” shall contain the Priced Tender Volume in duplicate –
Marked “ORIGINAL” & “DUPLICATE”, on the body of the tender paper issued Non
compliance of this provision may result in rejection of the tender .
4. ENVELOPE MARKED “PART-C”.
Envelope marked No-PART”A” & “B” shall be put in large envelope of adequate size
marked “PART-C” which shall be properly sealed. This envelope, which shall be,
endorsed on the outside face “TENDER CONSTRUCTION OF STEEL WORKS FOR
AUDITORIUM OF NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY CAMPUS WORKS AT NARAJ,
CUTTACK, ODISHA FOR NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY ODISHA ”.
Outer envelope (Marked “PART-C”) containing the separate tender documents as
mentioned herein above shall be opened in the office of The Vice Chancellor, National
Law University ODISHA , Naraj, Cuttack - 753015, ODISHA 09.09.2015 at 4 : 00 P.M
in the presence of the representatives of the PMC & NLUO with those tenderers who
chose to remain present.
Envelope “PART-A” containing earnest money deposit shall be opened first and if the
Earnest money deposit is not found as prescribed the tender shall be rejected and other
sealed envelope will be returned unopened to the representatives of the concerned tender
if present. Then the covering letter without mentioning the tender amount arrived from
the quoted rates and other documents as specified herein above will be scrutinized and
comments/conditions which has financial implication will be evaluated and the same may
be discussed with the tenderers .
The date of opening of Envelope “PART-B” containing the priced tender volumes in
original and duplicate will be intimated by NLUO.
The acceptance of the tender will be made by the N.L.U.O and will announced the name
of the person/ firm whose tender is accepted. No reason will be given for acceptance /
rejection of the tenders.
FOR AND ON BEHALF OF
NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY ODISHA ,
9
NARAJ, CUTTACK, ODISHA
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 2
___________________________________________________________Instruction to Bidder
1.0 Scope of work.
Sealed tenders are invited by “National Law University Campus at Naraj, Cuttack, ODISHA,
for the Auditoriumof National Law University Odisha Campus Works at Naraj, Cuttack
ODISHA.
1.1
Site & location.
The proposed work is to be carried out at Naraj, Cuttack, ODISHA .
2.0
Tender Document.
2.1.
The work has to be carried out strictly according to the conditions stipulated in the tender
consisting the following documents and the most workman like manner.
Instruction to tenderers.
General condition of contract.
Special Condition of Contract.
Technical Specifications.
Additional specification.
Tendered drawings.
Price Bid.
2.2.
The above documents shall be taken as complementary & mutually explanatory of one
another but in case of ambiguities or discrepancies , shall take precedence in the order
given below.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
2.3.
Price Bid.
Additional Specifications.
Technical Specifications.
Tendered drawings.
Special Condition of Contract.
General Condition of Contract.
Instruction to Tenderers.
Complete set of tender document including Tendered drawings can be obtained in
person from the National Law University Campus at Naraj, Cuttack, ODISHA, for the
Auditorium of National Law University Campus Works at Naraj, Cuttack ODISHA ,
between 10.00 to 17.00 hrs. on any day except holiday during the period mentioned in
the Notice Inviting Tender on payment of Rs. 10,500.00 by means of demand draft
drawn in favor of “The Registrar, National Law University ODISHA” Naraj, Cuttack,
ODISHA.
10
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 2
___________________________________________________________Instruction to Bidder
2.4. The tender documents are not transferable.
3.0
Site Visit.
The Tenderer must obtain himself on his own responsibility and his own expenses all the
information and data which may be required for the purpose of filling his tender document
and enter into a contract for the satisfactory performance of the work. The tenderer is
requested satisfy himself regarding the availability of water, power, transport and
communication facilities, the character quality and the site quantity of materials, labour, the
law & order situation, climatic conditions local authorities requirement, traffic regulations
etc.
4.0
Scope of Demolition work
a. The contractor shall undertake demolition of the building under supervision of the
PMC/N.L.U.O’s representatives without causing damage to neighboring structure, public
utilities, lives and properties of the neighbors, persons engaged in supervision and
demolition of work. The owner will not be held liable for any willful damage and loss
caused to lives and properties as mentioned above and the contractor shall remain liable
to indemnify on account of any loss and damages.
b. The contractor shall engage only skilled persons and supervisor who are conversant with
demolition procedure, practice and safety rules.
c. The contractor shall arrange for disposal of the demolished materials from site in an
organized and systematic manner without causing hindrance to N.L.U.O premises/ public
and traffic.
d. Any precious material, item of antique nature found in the process of demolition shall be
returned to the owner, should in the opinion of the owner the material so retrieved are of
adequate significance and value.
e. The contractor shall pay the net salvage value to owner on account of demolition work in
the form of a bank draft / bank Guarantee issued from a nationalized bank during the
executive of the contract agreement.
f. The demolition shall include the removal of all structures up to bottom of foundation
including taking our foundation and refilling the same with consolidated earth and
leveling the site as directed by the consultant.
11
g. Articles of the following nature are considered to be the property of the NLUO and shall
not be within the scope of the contract and shall not be taken away by the contractor.
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 2
___________________________________________________________Instruction to Bidder
Tube well with hand pump
Electrical accessories with fans, lights etc.
Loose furniture made of timber or steel, work station, partitions etc.
Trees and plantations
h. All buildings and structures including services over ground and underground related to
the building and structures inclusive of foundations within the area to be cleared except
those mentioned as stated above shall be dismantled and removed away from the site.
Simultaneously with dismantling, all debris are to be removed from the site in,
conformity with the local bye laws and municipality regulation.
i. Any services running through the site but serving other areas / sites shall be diverted by
the NLUO prior to handing over the site or on receipt of intimation from the contractor
during dismantling of existing structure. The diverted services should in no way be
disturbed. If any disruptions of the services occur due to activities of the contractor, it
will have to be restored by the contractor forthwith at their own cost.
j. a:
The contractor shall not be allowed to use any area outside the area to be cleared
for stacking of materials or any other purpose, whatsoever.
Salvaged materials shall not be stored on the site except upon the specific
approval of the PMC/NLUO.
b:
The work of dismantling and removal of dismantled materials must be done in such a
way so as to cause no damage to any neighboring structures, properties or disturbance to
public. The contractor must take all precautions, necessary for the safety of public and
properties around the area and against injury to or loss of life to his workmen. Any such
damage or loss shall be the Contractor’s liability.
k. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS:
i.
The demolition work should be carried out as per I.S. Code of Practice No.
4130:1967 (Safety Code of Demolition of Buildings).
ii.
The contractor shall provide all necessary plants and materials, labour,
transport etc. required for complete the proposed demolition and removal of
the materials.
iii.
The contractor shall obtain necessary permission from the Municipality and/or
any other authority that may be required for demolition of the structures etc.
12
Necessary fees if required shall be paid by the Contractor and no separate
payment on this account will be made to him.
iv.
The contractor shall provide in suitable places substandard barriers in
boarding and such additional safeguards that may be required to protect the
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 2
___________________________________________________________Instruction to Bidder
public from injury or damage of any kind due to the work under this contract and
shall maintain such protection until the completion of this work. He shall arrange to
pay all Municipal fees and other legal charges that may have to be paid and keep the
NLUO free from any liability in this respect.
v.
vi.
No encroachment of roads will be allowed for storing dismantled materials to
avoid inconvenience of operation of the N.L.U.O activity, vehicular traffic
and pedestrians.
Shelter or stay for the labourers has to be arranged by the Contractor.
The tenderer will be fully responsible for considering the financial effect of any or all the factors
while submitting the tender.
5.0.
Earnest Money.
5.1.
The tenderers are requested to submit the earnest money of Rs. 35,00,000.00 in the form
of Demand draft drawn in favor of “ The Registrar, National Law University ODISHA,
payable at Cuttack.
5.2.
EMD in any other form other than as specified above will not be accepted. Tender not
accompanied by the EMD is liable to be rejected.
5.3.
No interest will be paid on the EMD.
5.4.
EMD of unsuccessful tenderers will be refunded with in 30 days of award of contract.
5.5.
EMD of successful tenderer will be retained as a part of security deposit.
6.0.
Initial Security Deposit.
The successful tenderer will have to submit a sum of equivalent 1% of the contract value
less EMD by means of D/D drawn in favor of “ The Registrar, National Law University
ODISHA payable at Cuttack within a period of 15 days of the acceptance of tender.
7.0.
Security Deposit.
7.1.
Total security deposit shall be 5% of the contract value. Out of this 2% of contract value
is in the form of initial security deposit which includes the EMD. Balance 3% shall be
deducted from the running account bill of the work at the rate of 5% of the respective
running account bill i.e. deduction from each running bill account will be 5% till total
13
5% of contract value is reached. 50% of the total security shall be paid to the contractor
on the basis of PMC certifying the virtual completion. The Balance 50% would be paid to
the contractor after the defect liability period as specified in the contract.
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 2
___________________________________________________________Instruction to Bidder
7.2.
No interest shall be paid to the amount retained by the N.L.U.O as Security
Deposit.
8.0.
Signing of the Contract Document.
The Successful tenderer shall be bound to implement the contract by signing an
agreement and condition of contract attached herewith within 30 days from the receipt of
intimation of acceptance of his tender by the N.L.U.O. However, the written acceptance
of the tender by the N.L.U.O will constitute a binding agreement between the N.L.U.O
and successful tenderer whether such formal agreement is subsequently entered into or
not.
9.0
Validity of Tender.
Tender shall remain valid and open for acceptance for a period of Four (4) months from
the date of opening of price bid. If the tenderer withdraws his/her offer during the validity
period or makes modifications in his/her original offer which are not acceptable to the
N.L.U.O without prejudice to any other right or remedy the N.L.U.O shall be at liberty to
forfeit the EMD.
10.0.
Liquidated Damage.
The liquidated damages shall be 0.5% per week subject to a maximum of 5% of contract
value.
11.0
INTERIM PENALTY
11.1
The time allowed for carrying out the work as entered in the tender shall be strictly
observed by the Contractor and shall be deemed to be of the essence of the contract on
the part of the contractor and shall be reckoned from the 10th day after the date on which
the order to commence the work is issued to the Contractor.
11.2
The work shall throughout the stipulated period of the contract be proceeded with all due
diligence. Before commencing the work, the Contractor shall submit a detailed
programme of work prepared in accordance with the aforesaid time schedule (Bar Chart),
to the PMC, NLUO for approval. Upon NLUO’s acceptance of the same, the Contractor
shall proceed with the work with all the diligence and regularity. the work programme
shall be verified on the first working day of each month by the Project Director, and in
case it is not adhered to in any item of work stated therein, or the agreed programme
14
remains uncommented, incomplete, or delayed, the Contactor shall be liable to pay
compensation for interim delay, an amount of. Rs. 10,000.00 per day of default during
the first 15 days and there after the penalty will be Rs. 25,000.00 per day. The interim
penalty is refunded on making good the delay.
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 2
___________________________________________________________Instruction to Bidder
12.3
This amount shall be recovered from each interim bill of the Contractor, the deductions
thus made being refunded only upon the Contractor making good the delay to bring the
work in agreement with the detailed programme of work. However, if in the opinion of
the NLUO, the delay (in any particular item of work in the whole) is of a minor nature
only, and occurring due to reason beyond control, the amount so being withheld may be
waived by NLUO at his sole discretion. Provided always that the entire amount withheld
shall stand forfeited if the entire project is not completed by the due date or extended
date of completion.
12.0. Rate and Prices.
12.1.
This is item rate tender.
12.1.1. The tenderers shall quote their rates for individual items both. If no rate is quoted for a
particular item the contractor shall not be paid for that item when it is executed. The total
amount must be written both in words and figures.
The amount of each item shall be calculated and the requisite total is given. In case of
discrepancy between the unit rate & the total amount calculated from multiplication of
unit rate and the quantity the unit rate quoted will govern and the amount will be
corrected.
12.1.2. The tenderers need not quote their rates for which no quantities have been given. In case
the tenderers quote their rates for such items those rates will be ignored and will not be
considered during execution.
12.1.3. The tenderers should not change the units as specified in the tender. If any unit is
changed the tenders would be evaluated as per the original unit & the contractor would be
paid accordingly.
The tenderer should not change or modify or delete the description of the item. If any
discrepancy is observed he should immediately bring to the knowledge of the PMC/
N.L.U.O.
12.1.4. Each page of the BOQ shall be signed by the authorized person and cutting or
overwriting shall be duly attested by him.
12.1.5. Each page shall be totaled and the grand total shall be given.
15
12.1.6. The rate quoted shall be firm and shall include all costs, allowances, taxes, levies.
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 2
___________________________________________________________Instruction to Bidder
SUBMISSION OF DOCUMENTS BEFORE COMMENCE MENT OF WORK
12.1.7 Before commencement of work the contractor shall submit the following documents(a) Performance Bank Guarantee
(b) Copy of the valid labour license.
(c) Copy of labour cess registration under building & other construction workers welfare
Cess Act,1996.
(d) Copy of the ST/WCT/TOT/VAT Registration number along with the copy of document.
(e) Copy of EPF Code no./Regd no.
(f) Contractors all risk policy/Erection all Risk Policy
(g) Insurance under Workmen Compensation Act
(h) Copy of Service Tax Registration No.
(i) Copy of ESIC registration as applicable
The release of first Payment(Running Bill or any other Advance Except Mobilization
Advance ) shall be subject to submission of above mentioned Documents.
16
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 3
____________________________________________________________________Check List
Sl
No.
Particulars
Reference to
DTCN
Clause No.
Cost of tender paper. Rs.
10,000.00 and (5% Odisha VAT)
Rs. 500.00 Separatly
EMD
Copy of valid registration
certificate
Copy of valid VAT (Odisha
VAT) clearance certificate
Copy of PAN card
Work experience: List of project
under execution / executed that
are similar in nature to the work
M.O.U ( Memorandum of
Understanding duly notarized)
with eligible registered electrical
contractor having valid H.T / L.T
license.
Qualification of key personnel
engaged.
List of plants and equipments
Water Tanker
Truck & Tipper
Welding Machine
Generator
Mini Batcher
5 Ton Capacity winch Machine
Concrete Vibrator : Needle and
Plate Type
Complete staging, shuttering,
centering arrangement
Sect -2, 2.3
Whether
furnished
Yes
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
i
ii
iii
iv
v
vi
vii
viii
Reference to
page No.
No
Sec- 2, 5
Sect – 2,
12.1.7
Sect – 1, 0
Sec – 5, 48.0
Requirement
17
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 4
_____________________________________________Pre- Qualification Application Format
ANNEXURE -I
PARTICULARS OF THE FORM TO BE
FURNISHED FOR THE PURPOSE OF
PRE-QUALIFICATION OF CONTRACTORS/FIRMS.
1)
Name of the Organization
2)
Address
3)
Year of Establishment
4)
Status of the firm
(Whether Company/Firm/Proprietary)
5)
Name of Directors/Partners/Proprietor.
i)
ii)
iii)
6)
Whether registered with Registrar Companies/
Registrar of Firms. If so, mention number and date.
7)
a) Name and address of Bankers.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
b) Enclose Solvency Certificate from the Bankers.
c) Furnish the details of NPA or dispute with Bankers, if any.
18
8)
Whether registered for sales tax purposes. If so, mention number and date. Furnish
also copies of sales tax clearance certificate.
9)
Whether an assessee of Income Tax. If so, mention permanent account number.
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 4
_____________________________________________Pre- Qualification Application Format
10)
Furnish copies of audited Balance Sheet and Profit & Loss Account (Audited) for the last
three years i.e., as on
31.03.1531.03.14 31.03.13-
11)
If you are registered in the panel of other Organizations/Statutory Bodies, such as
CPWD, PWD.MES, Banks etc., furnish their names, category and date of registration.
i)
ii)
iii)
12)
13)
14)
iv)
v)
vi)
Detailed description and value of works done during last 7 years
(As per proforma – 1 in a separate sheet)
Specify turnover in last 3 years. In Rs. Lakhs
2014-15
2013-14
2012-13
Furnish the names with address of three responsible persons who will be in a
position to certify about the quality as well as past performance of your organization.
i)
ii)
15)
Furnish the details of the litigation, if any, with the employers.
16)
Other relevant information (As per proforma – 2 & 3)
It is certified that the information furnished is authentic. We understand that the Bank reserves
the right to reject any or all applications without assigning any reasons thereof.
Date:
Signature of the applicant)
Including title & capacity
19
In which application is made with seal.
Place:
Note: Where copies are required to be furnished these is to certified copies preferably by
the concerned agencies or a Government Officer.
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 4
_____________________________________________Pre- Qualification Application Format
Enclosure to Annexure I
PROFORMA – 1
PARTICULARS IN RESPECT OF WORKS EXECUTED DURING LAST 7 YEARS (See
the note below)
Sl
No
Name of
work/Project
with Address
Short
Description
of work
Executed0.
Name &
Address
of
Owner
Value of
Work
Executed
1
2
3
4
5
Stipulated time Actual time
of Completion
of
With date of
Completion
commencement with date
of
completion
6
Name of
PMC/
Consulting
Engineer
with Phone
&
Mobile no.
8
7
Note: Attested copies of work completion certificates issued by the employer to be
enclosed for verification by the NLUO.
Name and Signature with Seal
Enclosure to Annexure I
PROFORMA – 2
KEY PERSONNEL PERMANENTLY EMPLOYED.
Sl
No.
Name
Designation
Qualification
Experience
1
2
3
4
5
Years
With the
Firm
6
Any
other
7
20
Name and Signature with Seal
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 4
_____________________________________________Pre- Qualification Application Format
Enclosure to Annexure I
PROFORMA – 3
OTHER RELEVANT INFORMATION
SL. No.
i)
Particulars
WORK FORCE
Permanently Employed
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
ii)
No.
Any other
Years with the firm.
Masons.
Civil Engineers.
Mechanics.
Electricians
Mate/Helpers
Others.
WORKSHOP FACILITIES.
Location Land Area
Type of Structure
Type of Facilities.
a)
b)
iii)
LIST OF MAJOR CONSTRUCTIONAL EQUIPMENT
IN POSSESSION OF THE FIRM. (Please furnish in detail)
Name and Signature with Seal
21
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 4
_____________________________________________Pre- Qualification Application Format
ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT
(Subject to Approval by NLUO )
This agreement is made on the _____________ day of ___________2015 between
“NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY ODISHA” represented by its REGISTRAR
_______________ (hereinafter called “NLUO”) which expression shall include their
representatives, executors, administrators and assignees of the ONE PART AND
M/s _______________________ a Company registered under Companies Act of 1956
having its registered office at ______________________ represented by its
____________(herein called “THE CONTRACTOR”) which expression shall include
his/their heirs principle partners, executors, administrators and assignees of the OTHER
PART.
WHEREAS NLUO is desirous of constructing NLUO Project at Naraj, Cuttack-753015,
ODISHA and has caused Tendered drawings, Specifications, terms and conditions,
Description of works , etc. describing the work to be done.
AND WHEREAS the said Tendered drawings, specifications, terms & conditions, ,
Description of works etc. have been signed by or on behalf of the parties here to.
AND WHEREAS THE CONTRACTOR has agreed and accepted to execute upon and
subject to the conditions set forth herein and to the conditions set forth in contract
conditions all of which are collectively (hereinafter referred to as “The said Conditions”),
the works shown upon the said Tendered drawings and described in the said
specifications therein amounting to the sum of Rs.____________ (Rupees
_______________) or such other sum as shall become payable hereunder (hereinafter
referred as The Said Contract Amount).
AND WHEREAS THE CONTRACTOR has deposited Rs. _________________ (Rupees
___________________________________) as Earnest Money for the Proposed
Auditoriumof NLUO, to be retained with NLUO for the due performance of this
Agreement.
NOW IT IS HEREBY AGREED AS FOLLOWS:
1.
In consideration of the lump sum of Rs. ______________ (Rupees
________________) to be paid at the time and in the manner set forth in said
conditions THE CONTRACTOR will upon and subject to the said conditions
execute and complete the works shown upon the said Tendered drawings and such
further detailed Tendered drawings as may be furnished to them by NLUO and
22
described in the said specifications and the said Description of works including
rectification of any defect therein inconformity in all respect with the provision of
the contract.
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 4
_____________________________________________Pre- Qualification Application Format
2.
NLUO shall pay to THE CONTRACTOR the said Contract amount of
Rs.__________ (Rupees _________________) or such other sum as shall become
payable at the time and the manner hereinafter specified in the said conditions as
authorized by NLUO.
3.
The said Tendered drawings, Description of works and conditions of contract and
other documents herein mentioned shall form the basis of this CONTRACT , and
the decision of the said NLUO as mentioned in the conditions of contract in
reference to all matters of dispute as to the materials, workmanship, the intended
or interpretation of the clause of this Agreement, or any other document attached
hereto shall be final and binding.
4.
The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as
an integral part of the Agreement. (Viz)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
This form of Agreement.
Letter of Intent _____________dt. ______________
Tender schedule, Notice Inviting Tender, Form of Tender, Conditions of
Contract, Specifications and Tender Tendered drawings.
(iv)
Following Correspondence.
(a)
__________________________
(b)
__________________________
and the parties hereto will respectively abide by and submit themselves to the
Conditions and stipulations and perform the agreements on their parts respectively
in such conditions, specifications.
5.
NLUO AND THE CONTRACTOR bind themselves, their partners, and
successors in interest, executors, administrators and assigns of administers and
assigns of such other party in respect of all covenants of this Agreement.
6.
The said contract comprise the works above mentioned and all subsidiary works
connected therewith within the same site, as may be ordered to be done from time
to time by the said NLUO even though such works may not be shown on the
Tendered drawings or described in the said specifications or the Description of
works but may be fairly intended for Successful completion & functioning of the
project. No escalation is payable in the total project. Abnormal increase in the
cost of materials or abnormal delay in completion of the project shall not be
compensated for by escalation. It is explicitly instructed that the Civil Contractor
shall provide for all necessary assistances as supply of tools, machinery,
23
scaffolding materials to all and such other agencies directly engaged by NLUO in
time for the execution and completion of the Works.
7.
NLUO reserves to himself the right of altering the Tendered drawings and nature
of work and of adding to or omitting any items of work or of having portions of
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 4
_____________________________________________Pre- Qualification Application Format
the same carried out departmentally or otherwise be carried out without prejudice
to this contract and the contractors shall not be entitled to any remuneration or
compensation on such work. NLUO reserves the Option of supplying Cement,
Steel, finishing materials like Tiles, factory fabricated Windows with grills and
glass and such other materials/ items as preferred by NLUO at the appropriate
time at the agreed rate and deduct it from the contract value. The contractor shall
not have any right to object to same.
8.
The contractor shall not assign, sublet or transfer his/their interest in this
agreement without the written consent of NLUO.
9.
The contractor shall afford every reasonable facility to the representatives of the
said NLUO for inspection, checking or otherwise to the site to enable them to
find out the actual carrying out of all works in the manner laid down in the said
conditions.
10.
If the Contractor shall fail to comply with any of his obligations hereunder or
shall he wind-up or his business shall be dissolved or any receiver is appointed or
any attachment is made in respect of any of his properties or the Contractor shall
otherwise fail or neglect to complete the said work within the stipulated period,
then or on the happening of any such event the “NLUO” shall be entitled to
cancel this Contract and to get the unfinished work done at the cost & risk of the
Contractor by a third party & if NLUO suffers any Losses in this regard NLUO
shall look to the contractor for the same viz., payment or reimbursement to such
losses. The decision of the said NLUO in regard to the quantum of such losses
will be final and binding on parties hereto. Upon such termination of this Contract
or there shall be adjustment of any payment made to the Contractor by NLUO the
Contractor shall, if required refund any such amounts to NLUO.
11.
Time shall be considered as the essence of this CONTRACT and THE
CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence the work in accordance with the
said conditions and to complete the entire and all the works connected thereto or
as ordered from time to time within the time period stipulated herein and to
execute the same diligently and consistently throughout the entire time period so
specified and the Contractor shall strictly adhere to the detailed programme for
completion of work.
24
12.
All disputes arising out of or in any way connected with this agreement shall be
deemed to have arisen in Cuttack and only the courts of Cuttack shall have
jurisdiction to determine the same.
13.
All payments by NLUO under CONTRACT will be made at NLUO, Office of
“The Registrar” NLUO . The Contractor is required to open a Bank account in the
same bank as of NLUO for timely payments.
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 4
_____________________________________________Pre- Qualification Application Format
14.
It is the responsibility of the contractor to ensure timely depositing of sales tax on
work contract tax as per the prevailing rate during the tenure of contract period.
The contractor shall be responsible for any delayed/partial payment of WCT,
VAT, service Tax and all other taxes as required under statute and other
prevailing laws.
15.
As per Service Tax rules, applicable on construction, Service Tax is to be paid by
the service provider (the contractor in this case). As per section of the Central
Exercise act 1944, as extended to Service Tax, every person making Service Tax
payments, shall be presumed to have passed on the incidence of such tax to client,
availing the taxable service. Accordingly Service Tax incidence. % (Prevailing
rates) has been passed. This statutory liability will be deposited by us along with
each RA Bill and challan shall be submitted to NLUO on before submitting next
bill, In case Service Tax rate is reduced / scrap than Service Tax loaded in the
lump-sum contract value shall be reimbursed to NLUO.
16.
Contractor shall provide the vouchers for full quantity of any of the material
brought for the project whenever asked by NLUO and be inclusive of Service tax
and VAT in the rates.
17.
The contractor will carry out the testing of any of the materials at his own cost
from a recognized laboratory as approved by NLUO as per the relevant IS Codes
before it is used in the work.
18.
As per Terms & Condition of Contract no decreases or increase in Cement &
Steel price/cost shall be considered by NLUO, subject to fulfillment of
contractor condition. Necessary deduction towards Income tax & WCT shall be
deducted and deposited. The effect of this has been loaded in contract value and
no additional amount/claim is payable by NLUO.
19.
All parts of this contract have been read to us and fully understood by us.
As witness thereof the parties hereto have hereunto set their hands the day and
year first above written.
Signed by the said NLUO: ____________________________
25
In the presence of witness:
Name: ________________________
Name: _______________________
Occupation : ___________________
Occupation : ___________________
Address : ____________________ Address : ____________________
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 4
_____________________________________________Pre- Qualification Application Format
Signed by the said CONTRACTOR : ___________________________________
In the presence of witness:
Name: ________________________
Name: _______________________
Occupation : ___________________
Occupation : _______________
Address : ____________________ Address : ____________________
26
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 4
_____________________________________________Pre- Qualification Application Format
FORM OF TENDER
To
The Vice Chancellor
National Law University ODISHA ,
Naraj, Cuttack - 753015, ODISHA.
Sub : Tender for Construction of National Law University Campus Works for National Law
University Odisha at Naraj, Cuttack, ODISHA.
Dear Sir,
I/We, have seen the site, read and examined and clearly understood the content in the following
documents related to the Construction of National Law University Campus Works for National
Law University Odisha at CUTTACK, ODISHA.
a)
Notice Inviting Tender.
b)
Instruction to the Tenderers.
c)
Articles of Agreement.
d)
General conditions of contract.
e) Special conditions of contract.
f) Particulars specifications and special clauses forming part of schedule of quantities.
g) Tendered drawings.
h) Modifications/Amendments to the tender documents if any.
I/We hereby tender for execution of the works referred to in the aforesaid document upon the
terms and conditions contained or referred to there in and in accordance in all respects with the
specifications, designs, Tendered drawings and other relevant details at the rates quoted in Bill of
Quantity and within the period of completion as stipulated in schedule.
27
In consideration of I/We being invited to tender, I/We agree to keep the tender open for
acceptance for 2 months from the due date of submission thereof and not to make any
modifications in its terms and conditions which are not acceptable. A sum of Rs-----------------------------------------------------------------------------is hereby forwarded in
the form of demand
draft No. ---------------- -----dt.------------------ issued by --------------------------(name of Bank) as
earnest money in favor of National Law University ODISHA which amount is not to bear any
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 4
_____________________________________________Pre- Qualification Application Format
interest. If I/We fail to keep the tender open as aforesaid or make any modifications in the terms
and conditions of the tender which are not acceptable to National Law University ODISHA ,
I/We agree that National Law University ODISHA shall without prejudice to any other right or
remedy be at liberty to forfeit the said earnest money absolutely. Should this tender be accepted,
I/We hereby agree to abide by and fulfill all the terms and conditions and provisions of the
aforesaid documents.
If after the tender is accepted, I/We fail the commence the execution the works as provided for in
the terms and conditions of contract. I/We agree that National Law University ODISHA shall
without prejudice to any of their rights and remedies, be at liberty to forfeit the said earnest
money absolutely.
Witness----------------------------- signature in the capacity of ------------------------------date ------------------------ Duly authorize to sign the tender on behalf of ---------------------------------------------------------------Address-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Time -------------------------------Dated------------------------------Telephone No.----------------------------------------------------------------------------------.
(Seal)
Tender submitted on ----------------------------------- Before ----------------------------------------P.M.
28
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 4
_____________________________________________Pre- Qualification Application Format
“ANNEXURE-A.”
FORMAT OF GUARANTEE TO BE EXECUTED BY THE FIRM /
CONTRACTOR IN RESPECT OF THE WORK OF PRE - CONSTRUCTION
ANTI -TERMITE TREATMENT.
This agreement made this ................................. day of ................................... Two thousand ten
................................................ Between National Law University ODISHA , Constituted under
the Govt. of ODISHA Act - 4 of 2008. having its head office at Naraj, Cuttack - 753015,
ODISHA, of the one part. (Herein after called “the NLUO”).
WHEREAS THIS AGREEEMENT is supplementary to a contractor (hereinafter called the
contract dated ........ / ........ / 201............ and made between the NLUO of the one part and the
Guarantor of the other part) whereby firm/Contractor interalia undertook to render the
buildings/structures completely free from any infestation of termites. And whereas the
Guarantors agreed to give guarantee to the effect that the said buildings/structures shall remain
free from any infestation of termites for a minimum period of ten years from the date of
completion of pre-construction anti-termite treatment carried out as per the relevant I.S. Code
Now the Guarantor hereby agree to make good all defects and render the buildings / structures
free from any infection of termites, during this period of guarantee and to the satisfaction work at
his own cost, and within one week from the date of issue of notice from the NLUO, calling upon
him to rectify the defects. In case the guarantor fails to commence the work as per above notice
and the work is got done through some other contractor. That if the Guarantor fails to execute the
pre-construction anti-termite treatment or commits breach there under than the Guarantor will
indemnify the principal and his successors against all loss, damage cost, expense or otherwise
which may be incurred by him by any reason of any default on the part of the guarantor in
performance and observance of this agreement. As to the amount of loss and / or damage and/or
cost incurred by the NLUO the decision of the NLUO will be final and binding.
In witness whereof these presents have been executed by the obligator ---------------------------------------------------- and by ------------------------------------- and for on behalf of the NLUO on the
day, month and year first above written.
Signed, and delivered by ------------------------------------------------- (N.L.U.O) by the hand of Shri
-------------------------------------- in the presence of -----------------------------------------Signed and
delivered by the hand of -----------------------------------------------------------(Contractor) in the
presence of ------------------------------------------------------------------
29
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 4
_____________________________________________Pre- Qualification Application Format
“ANNEXURE-B”
FORMAT OF GUARANTEE TO BE EXECUTED BY THE
FIRM/ CONTRCTOR IN RESPECT OF THE WORK
OF WATER PROOFING TREATMENT.
This agreement made this ................................. day of ................................... Two thousand ten
................................................ Between National Law University ODISHA , Constituted under
the Govt. of ODISHA Act - 4 of 2008. having its head office at Naraj, Cuttack - 753015,
ODISHA. of the one part. (Herein after called “the NLUO”).
WHEREAS THIS AGREEMENT is supplementary to a contract (hereinafter called the contract
dated ----/----/ 201… and other part) whereby firm / Contractor interalia under took that the
basement with retaining walls, roofs, stair roof, underground reservoir, overhead reservoir and
sunken floors of the NLUO's Building shall be in water proof condition for a period of ten (10)
years viz. from dated of handing over of the completed works to the National Law University
ODISHA and whereas the Guarantors agree to give guarantee to the effect that the said
buildings / structures shall remain free from any leakage / seepage for a minimum period of ten
(10) years from the date of handing over of the building.
Now the Guarantor hereby agree to make good all defects and render the building / structures
free from any leakage / seepage, during this period of guarantee and to the satisfaction of the
NLUO. The guarantor also agrees to take up such rectification work at his own cost, and within
one week from the date of issue of notice from the NLUO, calling upon him to rectify the
defects. The decision of the NLUO as to the cost payable by the guarantor will be final and
binding in case the guarantor fails to commence the work as per above notice and the work is got
done through some other contractor. That if the Guarantor fails to execute the water proofing
works or commits breach there under then the Guarantor will indemnify the principal and his
successors against all loss, damage cause, expense or otherwise which may be incurred by him
any reason of any default on the part of the guarantor in performance and observance of this
agreement. As to the amount of loss and or damage and/ or cost incurred by the NLUO the
decision of the NLUO will be final and binding.
In witness whereof these presents have been executed by the obligator ---------------------- and by
---------------------------- and for on behalf of the NLUO on the day, month and year first above
written.
Signed, and delivered by National Law University ODISHA by the hands of Shri--------------------------------------- in the presence of ----------------------------------------------------------------------Signed, and delivered by National Law University ODISHA by the hands of Shri / M/s.-------------------------------------------- (Contractor ) in the presence of ----------------------------------------------------------------------30
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
GENERAL RULES AND INSTRUCTIONS
FOR THE GUIDANCE OF TENDERERS.
1.
Tenders are hereby invited on behalf of National Law University ODISHA , Cuttack for
the Construction of National Law University Campus Works at Naraj, Cuttack, ODISHA.
2.
Contract documents consisting of the plans, complete specifications, the schedule of
quantities of the various classes of work to be done, and the set of conditions of contract to
be complied with by the person whose tenders may be accepted, which will also be found
in the form of tenders is to be duly signed. The site for the work is available for inspection
with the prior permission of PMC/ NLUO.
3.
Tenders for Auditorium sealed cover, with written “TENDER OF CONSTRUCTION
AUDITORIUM OF NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY CAMPUS AT NARAJ,
CUTTACK, ODISHA. FOR NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY ODISHA ” written on
the envelopes will be received by The Vice Chancellor National Law University ODISHA
, at Naraj, Cuttack - 753015, ODISHA. up to 09.09.2015 by 03.00PM. and will be opened
by him in his office at 04:00 PM on the same day.
4.
Tenders are to be on the prescribed tender documents which can be obtained from the
office of National Law University ODISHA , at Naraj, Cuttack - 753015, ODISHA on
payment of Rs. 10,500/- only in form of DD in favor of Registrar National Law University
ODISHA payable at Cuttack.
In case the said papers are downloaded from NLUO website then the amount of Rs.
10,500/- only will be paid at the time of submission of the tender document.
The time allowed for the carrying out of the work will be 12months from the date of
receipt of LOI.
5.
The contractors should quote in figures as well as in words the rate, and amount tendered
by them. The amount for each item should be worked out and the requisite totals given.
(a)
6.
When there is a difference between the rates in figures and in words the rate which
corresponds to the amounts worked out by the contractor, shall be taken as correct
figure.
(b) When the amount of any item is not worked out by the contractor or it does not
correspond with the rate written either in figures or in words, then the rate quoted by
the contractors in works shall be taken as correct.
(c) When the rate quoted by the contractor in figures and in words tallies but the amount
is not worked out correctly, rate quoted by the contractor shall be taken as correct
and not the amount.
When a contractor signs a tender in an Indian Language the tendered amount and the total
tendered should also be written in the same language. In the case of illiterate contractors
the rates or the amounts tendered should be attested by a witness.
31
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
7.
The last date of Issue of tender form will be on 05.09. 2015 at 4.00 PM.
8.
Earnest money Rs. 35,00,000/- (Rupees Thirty Five Lakh only)
in form DD(Demand
draft) of as mentioned herein before in favor of “The Registrar, National Law University
ODISHA must accompany each tender and each tender is to be in a sealed cover super
scribed" Tender for Construction of National Law University Campus Works at
CUTTACK " and addressed to The Vice Chancellor, National Law University ODISHA ,
at Naraj, Cuttack - 753015, ODISHA.
9.
The contractor, whose tender is accepted will be required to furnish by way of security
deposit for the due fulfillment of his contract, such sum as will amount.
Initial Security Deposit : The amount of Initial security deposit shall be 1% of accepted
tender amount including EMD. The initial security deposit is to be paid by the contractor to
the N.L.U.O within 12 (Twelve) days of intimation to him of the acceptance of tender. The
initial security deposit will be kept in the N.L.U.O account & refunded to the contractor
any interest along with retention money as stipulated in the contract.
From each running bill an amount at the rate of 5% of the Work done value of the running
bill shall be recovered as retention money , till the total retention amount including the
EMD & ISD amounts already with the N.L.U.O become 5% of the value of the contract
amount. This amount is called as Total Security Deposit-which consists of Three
components:
A]
B]
C]
EMD- Earnest Money Deposits.
ISD-Initial Security Deposits.
RM-Retention Money.
The total security deposit will be kept with the N.L.U.O. 50% of the total security deposit
amount shall be refunded without interest to the contractor on issue of virtual completion
certificate by the PMC/ N.L.U.O & the contractor’s removal of his materials, equipment,
labour force, temporary sheds, stores, site office etc.
The remaining 50% of the total security deposit may be refunded 15 days after the end of
defect liability period (i.e 6 months), provided the contractor has carried out all the works
& attended to rectification of all defects in accordance with the conditions of the contract.
The Security Deposit shall be collected as detailed in clause No. 1 of the General
Conditions of the contract.
The EMD of the contractor whose tender is accepted, shall be forfeited in full in case he
does not remit the initial Security Deposit within the stipulated period or start the work by
the stipulated date mentioned in the award letter.
32
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
10.
11.
The acceptance of a tender will rest with the N.L.U.O only which does not bind itself to
accept the lowest tender, and reserves to itself the authority to reject any or all of the
tenders received without the assignment of a reason. All tenders in which any of the
prescribed conditions are not fulfilled or are incomplete in any respect are liable to be
rejected.
Canvassing in connection with tenders is strictly prohibited and the tenders submitted by
the contractors who resorts to canvassing will be liable to rejection.
12.
All rates shall be quoted on the proper form of the tender alone.
13.
14.
An item rate tender containing percentage below/above will be summarily rejected.
On acceptance of the tender, the name of the accredited representative(s) of the contractor
who would be responsible for taking instructions from the NLUO/PMCs shall be
communicated to the NLUO with in 7 (seven) days of acceptance. The accredited person
duly qualified engineer.
15.
Special care should be taken to write the rates in figures as well as in words and the
amounts in figures only, in such a way that interpolation is not possible. The total amount
must be written both in figures and in words. In case of figures, the words "Rs." should be
written before the figure of rupees and works "p" after the decimal should preceded and the
word "Paise" should be written at the end", unless the rate is in whole rupees and followed
by the words "only", it should invariably be up to two decimal places, While quoting the
rate in schedule of quantities, the work "only "should be written closely following the
amount and it should not be written in the next line.
16.
The N.L.U.O does not bind itself to accept the lowest or any tender and reserves to itself
the right of accepting the whole or any part of the tender and the tenderer shall be bound to
perform the same at the rate quoted.
17.
Sales tax, service tax or any other tax etc on materials or on finished works like work's
contract tax, Turn-over Tax, etc. in respect of this contract shall be payable by the
contractor and the N.L.U.O will not entertain any claim whatsoever in this respect.
18.
The Contractor shall give a list of his relatives if any working with the N.L.U.O along with
their designations and addresses.
19.
No employee from the date of the N.L.U.O is allowed to work as a contractor for a period
of two years of his retirement from N.L.U.O service, without the previous permission of
the N.L.U.O. This contract is liable to be cancelled if either the contractor or any of his
employee is found at the N.L.U.O as aforesaid before submission of the tender or
engagement in the contractor’s service.
33
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
20.
The tender for works shall remain open for acceptance for a period of 4 (Months) months
from the date of opening of tenders. If any tenderer withdraws his tender before the date
prior of, then N.L.U.O shall be at liberty to forfeit Earnest Money paid along with the
tender.
21.
The tender for the work shall not witnessed by contractor or contractors who himself/
themselves has/have tendered or who may and had/have tendered for the same work.
Failure to observe this condition would tender of the contractor tendering as well as
witnessing the tender liable to summary rejection.
22.
It will be obligatory on the part of the tenderer to tender and sign the tender documents for
all the component parts and that, after the work is awarded, he will have to enter into an
agreement for which component with the competent authority in the N.L.U.O.
23.
The tenderer, apart from being a competent contractor must associate himself with
agencies of the appropriate class who are eligible to tender for (i) Electrical (ii) Sanitary
and Water supply installations and (iii) Horticulture.
The Vice Chancellor
.
National Law University ODISHA .
Naraj, Cuttack - 753015, ODISHA
APPENDIX
1.
Name of work
:
Construction of National Law University
Campus Works (Amphetheatre) at Naraj for
National Law University ODISHA .
2.
Location
:
At: Naraj, Cuttack, ODISHA
3.
Scope of work
:
As above and further detailed in the General
Conditions of contract.
4.
Defects Liability Period
:
12 (Twelve) months from issuing of date of
completion certificate.
5.
Date of Commencement
:
Fifteen days from the date of issue of work
order or the date of handing over site,
whichever is later.
34
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
6.
Time of completion
:
12months for the total work.
Time period to be fixed 12months for Auditorium.
7.
Liquidated damages
:
0.5% of the accepted tender amount per
week subject to a ceiling of 5% of the
accepted tender amount.
8.
Value of works for Interim certificate:
minimum of one bill in every fortnight.
9.
Period of honoring Certificate
:
a) 15 (fifteen) days for R.A. Bills from the
date of receipt of certificate from the
PMC/PMC.
10.
Total Security Deposit
:
5% of the gross value of work done &
claimed in each bill provided the total
security deposit i.e. ISD+ retention money
shall both together not exceeding 5% of the
contract value or 5% of final bill whichever
is more.
11.
Initial Security Deposit:
1% of the accepted tender amount including
EMD.
35
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT.
1.0. Definitions:
“Contract means the documents forming the tender and the acceptance thereof and the formal
agreement executed between National Law University ODISHA (client) and the contractor,
together with the documents referred therein including these conditions , the specifications,
designs, Tendered drawings & instructions issued from time to time by the PMC/ N.L.U.O and
all these documents taken together shall be deemed to form one contract and shall be
complementary to one another.
1.1.
In the contract the following expression shall, unless the context otherwise
requires, have the meaning hereby respectively assigned to them.
1.1.1 “N.L.U.O” shall mean National Law University ODISHA (client) having it’s office at
Naraj, Cuttack - 753015, ODISHA. & includes the client’s representatives, successors &
assigns.
1.1.1(a). “PMC/ Consultant” shall
mean
“M/s. RATH
ARCHITECTONIC”, Plot
No. 104, Madhusudan Nagar, Unit-IV, Bhubaneswar-751001.
1.1.1(b). “PMC” shall mean “M/s. RATH ARCHITECTONIC”, Plot No. 104, Madhusudan
Nagar, Unit-IV, Bhubaneswar-751001.
1.1.2. “PROJECT DIRECTOR” shall mean an Engineer appointed by the N.L.U.O as their
representative to give instructions to the contractor.
1.1.3. “The Contractor” shall mean the individual or firm or company whether incorporated or
not, undertaking the works and shall include legal representative of such individual.
1.1.4. ‘Engineer In Charge’ shall mean the representative of the PMC/consultant.
1.1.5. ‘Tendered drawings’ shall mean the Tendered drawings prepared by the PMCs and then
issued by the Engineer and referred to in the specifications and any modifications of such
Tendered drawings as may be issued by the Engineer from time to time ‘Contract value
shall mean the value of the entire work as stipulated in the letter of acceptance of tender
subject to such additions thereto or deductions there from as may be made under the
provision herein after contained.
1.1.6. ‘Specifications’ shall mean the specifications referred to in the tender and any
modifications thereof as may time to time be furnished or approved by the PMC
consultant “Month” means calendar month.
1.1.7. “Week” means seven consecutive days.
1.1.8. “Day” means a calendar day beginning and ending at 00Hrs and 24 Hrs respectively.
36
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
DEFECT LIABILITY PERIOD
1.1.9. The Defect Liability Period shall commence from the date of virtual completion as
mentioned in the Certificate of Virtual Completion issued by NLUO. The duration of the
Defect Liability Period shall be one years after the date of issue of virtual completion
certificate by NLUO to the Contractor. i.e. (one year after all the works as per the scope
of work including completion of all buildings, external development works are complete.
CLAUSE
1.0.
Total Security Deposit
Total Security deposit comprises of
Earnest money deposit
Initial Security deposit
Retention Money.
a)
Earnest money Deposit
The tenderer shall furnish EMD of Rs. 35,00,000/- in the form of Demand Draft drawn in
favor of “The Registrar, National Law University ODISHA. No tenders shall be
considered unless the EMD is so deposited in the required form. No interest shall be paid
on this EMD. The EMD of the unsuccessful tenderer shall be refunded soon after the
decision to award the contract is taken without interest. The EMD shall stand absolutely
forfeited if the tenderer revokes his tender at any time the period when he is required to
keep his tender open acceptance by the NLUO or after it is accepted by the NLUO the
contractor fails to enter into a formal agreement or fails to pay the initial security deposit
as stipulated or fails to commence the commence the work within the stipulated time.
b)
Initial Security Deposit (ISD)
The amount of ISD shall be 1% of accepted value of tender including the EMD in the
form of D/D drawn on any scheduled Bank and shall be deposited within
15 (fifteen)
days from the date of acceptance of tender.
c)
Retention Money
Besides the ISD as deposited by the contractor in the above said manner the retention
money shall be deducted from the running account bill at the rate of 5% of the gross
value of work done by the contractor and claimed in each bill provided the total security
deposit i.e. The ISD plus Retention Money shall both together not exceed 5% of the
contract value ,50% of the total security deposit shall be refunded to the contractor
without any interest on issue of Virtual Completion certificate by the PMC/consultant.
37
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
The balance 50% of the total security deposit shall be refunded to the contractors without
interest within fifteen days after the end of defects liability period provided the contractor
has satisfactorily attended to all defects in accordance with the conditions of contract
including site clearance.
2.0
Language
The language in which the contract documents shall be drawn shall be in English.
3.0
i)
ii)
iii)
a)
b)
Errors, omissions and discrepancies
In case of errors, omissions and/ or disagreements between written and scaled dimensions
on the Tendered drawings or between the Tendered drawings and specifications etc.,
apply in the following order.
Between scaled and written dimension (or description) on a drawing, the latter shall be
adopted.
Between the written or shown description or dimensions in the Tendered drawings and
the corresponding one in the specification the former shall be taken as correct.
Between written description of the item in the specifications and descriptions in bills of
quantities of the same item, the former shall be adopted.
In case of difference between rates written in figures and words, the rate in words shall
prevail.
between the duplicate / subsequent copies of the tender, the original tender shall be taken
as correct.
4.0
Scope of work
The contractor shall carryout complete and maintain the said work in every respect in
strict accordance with this contract and with the decision to the satisfaction of the
N.L.U.O to be communicated through the PMC/ Consultant at the directions of the
N.L.U.O from time to time issue further Tendered drawings and / or written instructions,
details directions and explanations which are hereafter collectively referred to as PMC’s /
consultant’s instructions in regard to the variation or modification of the design, quality
or quantity of work or the addition or omission or substitution of any work. Any
discrepancy in the Tendered drawings or between the BOQ and / or Tendered drawings
and / or specifications. The removal from the site of any material brought thereon buy the
contractor and any substitution of any other materials therefore the removal and / or reexecution of any work executed by him. The dismissal from the work of any person
employed / engaged there upon.
5.0
i) Letter of Acceptance
Within the validity period of the tender the N.L.U.O shall issue a letter of acceptance
either directly or through the PMC by registered post or otherwise depositing at the
address of the contractor as given in the tender to enter into a Contract for the execution
of the work as per the terms of the tender. The letter of acceptance shall constitute a
binding contract between the NLUO and the contractor.
38
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
ii) Contract Agreement
On receipt of intimation of the acceptance of tender from the NLUO/ PMC the successful
tenderer shall be bound to implement the contract and within fifteen days thereof he shall
sign an agreement in non judicial stamp paper of appropriate value.
6.0
Ownership of Tendered drawings
All Tendered drawings, specifications and copies thereof furnished by the NLUO through
its consultant / PMC are the properties of the NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY,
ODISHA. They are not to be used for any work.
7.0
Detailed Tendered drawings and instructions
The NLUO through its consultants/PMC shall furnish with reasonable promptness
additional instructions by means of Tendered drawings or otherwise for the proper
execution of the work. All such Tendered drawings and instructions shall be consistent
with the contract documents, true developments thereof and reasonably inferable there
from. The work shall be executed in conformity therewith and the contractor prepare a
detailed programme schedule indicating therein the date of start and completion of
various activities on receipt of the work order and submit the same to the NLUO through
the consultant /PMC.
7.1
Copies of agreement
Two copies of agreement duly signed by both the parties with the Tendered drawings
shall be handed over the contractors.
8.0
Liquidated damages:
a.
b.
c.
d.
9.0
If the contractor fails to maintain the progress required to complete the work and clear the
site including vacating their office on or before the contracted or extended date or
completion without justification in support of the cause of delay or
Delay in completion.
The defect which suppose to be rectified as per the advice of National Law
University ODISHA / Project Management Consultant within the stipulated period.
Non specified material.
Payment of labour & statutory uses. and he may be called upon without prejudice to any
other right of remedy available under the law to the NLUO on account of such
breach
to pay a liquidated damages at the rate of 0.5% of the contract value which subject to a
maximum of 5% of the contract value.
Materials, Appliances and Employees
39
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
Unless or otherwise specified the contractor shall provide and pay for all materials,
labour, water, power, tools, equipment transportation safety measure and any other
facilities that are required for the satisfactory execution ad completion of the work.
Unless otherwise specified all materials shall be new and both workmanship and
materials shall be best quality. The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline
and good order among his employees and shall not employ on the work any unfit person
of anyone not skilled in the work assigned to him. Workman whose work or behavior is
found to be unsatisfactory by the NLUO/PMC/ PMC he shall be removed from the site
immediately.
10.0.
Permits, Laws & Regulations:
Permits & Licenses required for the execution of the work shall be obtained by the
contractor at his own expense. The contractor shall give notices & comply with the
regulations, laws, ordinances rules, applicable to the contract. If the contractor observes
any discrepancy between the Tendered drawings and specifications, he shall promptly
notify the NLUO in writing under intimation of the PMC/ Consultant. If the contractor
performs any act, which is against the law , rules & regulations he shall meet all the costs
arising there from and shall indemnify the NLUO any legal action arising there from.
Labour licenses and they should have P.F No. of their employee which will submitted to
NLUO.
11.0
Setting Out Work:
The contractor shall set out the work and shall be responsible for the true and perfect
setting out of the same and for the correctness of the positions, levels, dimensions and
alignment of all parts thereof and get it approved by the PMC/ Consultant before
proceeding with the work. If at any time any error in this respect shall appear during the
progress of the works, irrespective of the fact that the layout had been approved by the
PMC/ Consultant the contractor shall be responsible for the same and shall at his own
expenses rectify such error, if so, required to satisfaction of the NATIONAL LAW
UNIVERSITY, ODISHA.
12.0.
Protection of works and Property:
The contractor shall continuously maintain adequate protection. Of all his work from
damage and shall protect the NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY, ODISHA’s properties
from injury or loss arising in connection with contract. He shall make good any such
damage, injury, loss, except due to causes beyond his control and due to his fault or
negligence.
He shall take adequate care and steps for protection of the adjacent properties. The
contractor shall take all precautions for safety and protections of his employees on the
40
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
works and shall comply with all applicable provisions of government & local bodies
safety laws & building codes to prevent accidents, or injuries to persons or property on ,
about or adjacent to this place of work. The contractor shall take insurance covers as per
clause 24.0 at his own cost. The policy may taken in joint names of contractor and the
NLUO and the original policy may be lodged with the NATIONAL LAW
UNIVERSITY, ODISHA.
13.0
Inspection of work:
The NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY, ODISHA/ PMC/ Consultant or their
representatives shall at all reasonable times have free access to the work site and/or to
the workshop, factories or other places where materials are lying or from where they are
obtained and the contractor shall give every facility to the NATIONAL LAW
UNIVERSITY, ODISHA, PMC / Consultant and their representatives necessary for
inspection & examination and test of the materials an workmanship. No person unless
authorized by the NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY, ODISHA/PMC/Consultant except
the representative of Public authorities shall be allowed on the work at any time. The
proposed work either during it’s construction stage or it’s completion can also be
inspected by the Chief Technical Examiner’s Organization a wing of Central Vigilance
Commission.
14.0.
Assignment & Subletting
The whole of work included in the contract shall be executed by the contractor and he
shall not directly entrust and engage or indirectly transfer, assign or underlet the contract
any part or share thereof or interest therein without the written consent of the NLUO
through the PMC and no undertaking shall relieve the Contractor from the responsibility
of the contractor from active superintendence of the work during it’s progress.
15.0.
Quality of Material, Workmanship & Test
All materials and workmanship shall be the best of respective kinds described in the
contract and in accordance with PMC /Consultant. The PMC / Consultant instructions
and shall be subject from time to time to such tests as the PMC / Consultant may direct at
the places of manufacture or fabrication or on the site or an approved testing laboratory.
The contractor shall provide such assistance, instruments, machinery, labour and
materials as are normally required for examining measuring sampling and testing any
material or part of work before incorporation in the work for testing as may be selected
and required by the PMC / Consultant.
ii) Samples
All samples of adequate numbers, size, shades & pattern as per specifications shall be
supplied by the contractor without any extra charges. If certain items proposed to be used
41
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
are of such nature that samples cannot be presented or prepared at the site detailed
literature/ test certificate of the same shall be provided to the satisfaction of the PMC/
Consultant. Before submitting their sample / literature the contractor shall satisfy himself
that the material / equipment for which he is submitting the sample/ literature meet with
the requirement of tender specification. Only when the samples are approved in writing
by the PMC/ consultant the contractor shall proceed with the procurement and installation
of the particular material / equipment. The approved samples shall be signed by the PMC/
Consultant for inspection / comparison at any time. The PMC/ Consultant shall take
reasonable time to approve the samples for reasons of its not meeting the specifications
or other discrepancies inadequacy in furnishing samples of best qualities from various
manufacturers and such other aspects causing delay on the approval of the materials /
equipment etc. shall be to the account of the contractor.
iii) Cost of tests
The cost of making any test shall be borne entirely by the contractor if such tests is
required be done or any provided specification or in BOQ.
iv) Cost of tests not provided for
If any test is ordered by the PMC/ Consultant which is either
a) If so intended by or provided for or ( in the cases above mentioned) is not so
particularized , or though so intended or provided for but ordered by the PMC / PMC
to be carried out by; an independent person at any place other than the site or the
place of manufacture or fabrication of the materials tested or any Government /
approved laboratory, then the cost of such test shall be borne by the contractor.
16.0
Obtaining information related to execution of work
No claim by the contractor for additional payment shall be entertained which is
consequent upon failure on his part to obtain correct information as to any matter
affecting the execution of the work not any or the obtaining incorrect information or the
failure to obtain correct information relieve him from any risks or from the entire
responsibility for the fulfillment of contract.
17.0
Contractor’s superintendence
The contractor shall give necessary personal superintendence during the execution of the
works and as long, thereafter, as the PMC/ Consultant may consider necessary until the
expiry of the defects liability period, stated hereto.
18.0
Quantities
42
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
The bill of quantities (BOQ) unless or otherwise stated shall be deemed to have been
prepared in accordance with the Indian Standard Method of Measurements and
quantities. The rate quoted shall remain valid for variation of quantity against
individual item to any extent subject to maximum variation of the contract value by
25%. All the amount paid under clause 19,20 hereof as well as amounts of prime cost
and provisional sums, if any, shall be excluded.
ii)
Variation exceeding 25%
The items of works executed in relation to variation exceeding 25% shall be paid on the
basis of provisions of clause 21 (e) thereof.
19.0
Works to be measured
The PMC/ Consultant may from time to time intimate to; the contractor that he required
the work to be measured and the contractor shall forthwith attend or send a qualified
representative to assist the PMC in taking such measurements and calculation and to
furnish all particulars or to give all assistance required by any of them. Such
measurements shall be taken in accordance with the Mode of measurements detailed in
the specifications. The representative of the PMC / Consultant shall take joint
measurements with the contractor’s representative and the measurements shall be entered
in the measurement book. The contractor or his authorized shall sign all the pages of the
measurement book in which the measurements have been recorded in token of his
acceptance. All the corrections shall be duly attested by both representatives. No over
writings shall be made I the M book should the contractor not attend or neglect or omit
to depute his representative to take measurements them the measurements recorded by
the representative of the PMC/ Consultant shall be final. All authorized extra work;
omissions and all variations made shall be included final. All authorized extra work;
omissions and all variations made shall be included in such measurement.
20.0
Variations
No alteration, omission or variation ordered in writing by the PMC/ Consultant shall
vitiate the contract. In case the NLUO/ PMC thinks proper at any time during the
progress of works to make any alteration in, or additions to or omissions from the works
or any alteration in the kind or quality of the materials to be used therein, the PMC/
NLUO shall give notice thereof in writing to the contractor or shall confirm in writing
within seven days of giving such oral instructions the contractor shall alter to, add to, or
omit from as the case may be in accordance with such notice, but the contractor shall not
do any work extra to or make any alterations or additions to or omissions from the works
or any deviation from any of the provisions of the contract, stipulations, specifications or
contract drawing without previous consent in writing of the PMC/ NLUO and the value
43
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
of such extras, alterations, additions or omissions shall in all cases be determined by the
PMC/ NLUO and the same shall be added to or deducted from the contract value, as the
case may be.
21.0
Valuation of Variations
No claim for an extra shall be allowed unless it shall have been executed under the
authority of the PMC/ Consultant with the concurrence of the NLUO as herein
mentioned. Any such extra is herein referred to as authorized extra and shall be made in
accordance with the following provisions.
a)
(i)
The net rates or prices in the contract shall determine the valuation of the extra
work where such extra work is of similar character and executed under similar
conditions as the work priced herein.
(ii) Rates for all items, wherever possible should be derived out of the rates given in
the priced BOQ.
b) The net prices of the original tender shall determine the value of the items omitted,
provided if omissions do not vary the conditions under which any remaining items of
works are carried out, otherwise the prices for the same shall be valued under sub-clause
(C) hereunder.
c)
Where the extra works are not of similar character and / or executed under similar
conditions as aforesaid or where the omissions vary the conditions under which any
remaining items of works are carried out, then the contractor shall within 7 days of the
receipt of the letter of acceptance inform the PMC/ Consultant of the rate which he
intends to charge for such items of work, duly supported by analysis of the rate of rates
claimed and the PMC / consultant shall fix such rate or prices as in the circumstances in
his opinion are reasonable and proper, based on the market rate.
d)
Where extra work cannot be properly measured or valued the contractor shall be
allowed day work prices at the net rates stated in the tender of the BOQ or, if not, so
stated then in accordance with the local day work rates and wages for the district
provided that in either case, vouchers specifying the daily time (and if required by the
PMC/ Consultant) the workman’s name and materials employed be delivered for
verifications to the PMC/ Consultant at or before the end of the week following that in
which the work has been executed.
e)
It if further clarified that for all such authorized extra items where rates cannot be
derived from the tender ,the Contractor shall submit rates duly supported by rate
analysis as per OPWD worked on the “market rate basis” for material, labour, hire /
running charges of equipment and wastages etc. plus 15% towards establishment
44
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
charges, contractor’s overheads and profit. Such items shall not be eligible for escalation.
22.0
Final Measurement
The measurement and valuation in respect of the contract shall be completed
within six months of the virtual completion of the work.
23.0
Virtual completion certificate (VCC)
On successful completion of entire works covered by the contract to the full
satisfaction of the NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY, ODISHA, the
contractor shall ensure that the following works have been completed to the
satisfaction of the NLUO .
a)
clear the site of all scaffolding, wiring,
contractor’s labour, equipment and machinery.
pipes,
surplus
materials,
b)
Demolish, dismantle and remove the contractor’s site office, temporary
works, structures including labour sheds/camps and constructions and other
items and things whatsoever brought upon or erected at the site or any land
allotted to the contractor by the NLUO and not incorporated in the
permanent works.
c)
Remove all rubbish, debris etc, from the site and the land allotted to the
contractor by the NLUO and shall clear, level and dress, compact the site as
required by the NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY, ODISHA.
d)
Shall put the NLUO in undisputed custody and possession of the site and all
land allotted by the NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY, ODISHA.
e)
Shall hand over the work in a peaceful manner to the NATIONAL LAW
UNIVERSITY, ODISHA.
f)
All defects / imperfections have been attended and rectified as pointed out
by the NLUO to the full satisfaction of NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY,
ODISHA.
Upon the satisfactory fulfillment by the contractor as stated above, the
contractor shall be entitled to apply to the PMC is satisfied of the
completion of the work. Relative to which the completion certificate has
been sought, the PMC shall within fourteen (14) days of the receipt of the
45
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
application for virtual completion certificate, issue a VCC in respect of the
work for which the VCC has been applied.
This issuance of VCC shall be without prejudice to the NATIONAL LAW
UNIVERSITY, ODISHA’s rights and contractor’s liabilities under the
contract including the contractor’s liability for defects liability period nor
shall the issuance of VCC in respect of the works or work at any site be
construed as a waiver of any right or claim of the NLUO against the
contractor in respect of works or works at the site and in respect of which the VCC
has been issued.
23.1
Work by other agencies
The NLUO/ PMC/ Consultant reserves the rights to use premises and any
portion of the site for execution of any work not included in the scope of
this contract which it may desire to have carried out by other persons
simultaneously and the contractor shall not only allow but also extend
reasonable facilities for the execution of such work. The contractor
however shall not be required to provided any plant or material for the
execution of such work except by special arrangement with the NATIONAL
LAW UNIVERSITY, ODISHA. Such work shall be carried out in such
manner as not to impede the progress of the works included in the contract.
24.0
Insurance of works
24.1
Without limiting his obligations and responsibilities under the contract the
contractor shall insure the insurance is being covered in the joint names of
the NLUO and the contractor against all loss of damages from whatever
cause arising other than the excepted risks, for which he is responsible
under the terms of contract and in such a manner that the NLUO and
contractor are covered for the period stipulated and are also covered during
the period of maintenance for loss or damage arising fro a clause, occurring
prior to the commencement of the period of maintenance and for any loss or
damage occasioned by the contractor in the course of any operations carried
out by him for the purpose of complying with his obligations under clause.
a)
The works for the time being executed to the estimated current Contract
value thereof, or such additional sum as may be specified together with the
materials for incorporation in the works at their replacement value.
46
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
b)
The constructional plant and other things brought on to the site by the
contractor to the replacement value of such constructional plant and other
things.
c)
Such insurance shall be effected with an insurer and in terms approved by
the NLUO which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld and the
contractor shall whenever required produce to the PMC/ Consultant the
police if insurance and the receipts for payment of the current premiums.
24.2
Damage to persons and property
The contractor shall, except if and so far as the contract provides otherwise
indemnify the NLUO against all losses and claims in respect of injuries or
damages to any person or material or physical damage to any property
whatsoever which may arise out of or in consequence of the execution and
maintenance of the works and against all claims proceedings, damages,
costs, charges and expenses whatsoever in respect of or in relation thereto
except any compensation of damages for or with respect to :
a)
The permanent use or occupation of land by or any part thereof.
b)
The right of NLUO to execute the works or any part thereof on, over, under,
in or through any lands.
c)
Injuries or damages to persons or properties which are unavoidable result of
the execution or maintenance of the works in accordance with the contract.
d)
Injuries or damage to persons or property resulting from any act or neglect
of the NLUO their agents, employees or other contractors not being
employed by the contractor or for or in respect of any clams, proceedings,
damages, costs, charges and expenses in respect thereof or in relation
thereto or where the injury or damage was contributed to by the contractor,
his servants or agents such part of the compensation as may be just and
equitable having regard to the extent of the responsibility of the
NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY,ODISHA, employees, or agents or other
contractors for the damage of injury.
47
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
24.3
Contractor to indemnify NLUO
The contractor shall indemnify the NLUO against all claims, proceedings,
damages cost, charges and expenses in respect of the matters referred to the
provision sub-clause 24.2 of this clause.
24.4
Contractor’s superintendence
The contractor shall fully indemnify and keep indemnified the NLUO
against any action, claim or proceeding relating to infringement or use of
any patent or design or any alleged patent or design rights and shall pay any
royalties which may be payable in respect of any article or part thereof
included in the contract. In the event of any claim made under of action
brought against NLUO in respect of such matters as aforesaid the contractor
shall be immediately notified thereof and the contractor shall be at liberty,
at his own expenses to settle any dispute or to conduct any litigation that
may arise there from, provided that the contractor shall not be liable to
indemnify the NLUO if the infringement of the patent or design or any
alleged patent or design right is the direct result of an order passed by the PMC/
PMC in this behalf.
24.5
Third Party Insurance
24.5.1 Before commencing the execution of the work the contractor but without
limiting his obligations and responsibilities under clauses 24.0 of GCC
shall insure against his liability for any material or physical damage, loss,
or injury which may occur to any property including that of NATIONAL
LAW UNIVERSITY, ODISHA, or to any person, including any employee of
the NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY, ODISHA, by or arising out of the
execution of the works or in the carrying out of the contract, otherwise than
due to the mattes referred to in the provision to clause 24.0 thereof.
24.5.2 Minimum amount of Third Party Insurance
Such insurance shall be effected with an insurer and in terms approved by
the NLUO which approval shall not be reasonably withheld and for at least
the amount stated below. The contractor shall, whenever required produce
to the PMC/ Consultant the policy or polices of insurance cover and receipts
for payment of the current premiums.
48
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
The minimum insurance cover for physical property, injury, and death
is Rs. 5.0 lakhs per occurrence with the number of occurrences limited
to four. After each occurrence contractor will pay additional premium
necessary to make insurance valid for four occurrences always.
25.6
Accident or Injury to workman:
25.6.1 The NLUO shall not be liable for in respect of any damages or
compensation payable at law respect or in consequence of any accident or
injury or any workmen or other person in the employment of the contractor
or any sub-contractor, save and except an accident or injury resulting from
any act or default of the NLUO against all such damages and compensation,
save and expect as aforesaid, and against all such damages and
compensation,
save and except as aforesaid, and against all claims,
proceedings, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever in respect thereof in
relation thereto.
25.6.2. Insurance against accidents etc. to workmen
The contractor shall insure against such liability with an insurer approved
by the NLUO during the whole of the time that any persons are employed by
him on the work and shall, when required, produce to the PMC/ Consultant
such police of insurance and receipt for payment of the current premium.
Provided always that, in respect of any persons employed by any subcontractor the contractor’s obligation to insure as aforesaid under this subclause shall be satisfied if the sub contractor shall have insured against the
liability in respect of such be persons in such manner that NLUO is
indemnified under the policy but the contractor shall require
such require sub-contractor to produce to the PMC/ Consultant when such
policy of insurance and the receipt for the payment of the current premium.
25.6.3 Remedy on contractor’s failure to insure:
If the contractor fails to effect and keep in force the insurance referred to
above or any other insurance which he may be required to effect under the
terms of contract, then and in any such case the NLUO may effect and keep
in force any such insurance and pay such premium or premiums as may be
necessary for that purpose and from time to time deduct the amount so paid
by the NLUO as aforesaid from any amount due or which may become due
to the contractor, or recover the same as debt from the contractor.
49
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
25.6.4 Without prejudice to the others rights of the NLUO against contractors. In
respect of such default, the NLUO shall be entitled to deduced from any
sums payable to the contractor the amount of any damages costs, charges
and other expenses paid by the NLUO and which are payable by the
contractors under this clause. The contractor shall upon settlement by the
Insurer of any claim made against the insurer pursuant to a policy taken
under this clause, proceed with due diligence to rebuild or repair the works
destroyed or damaged, In this event all the monies received from the Insurer
in respect of such damage shall be paid to the contractor and the Contractor
shall not be entitled to any further payment in respect of the expenditure
incurred for rebuilding or repairing of the materials or goods destroyed or
damaged.
26.0
Commencement of Works:
The date of commencement of the work will be reckoned as the date of
handing over site by joint signature of contractor, PMC & NLUO or fifteen
days from the date of issue of letter of acceptance of the tender by the
NLUO whichever is later.
27.0
Time for completion
Time is essence of the contract and shall be strictly observed by the
contractor. The entire work shall be complete within a period of 12
calendar months from the date of commencement. If required in the contract
or as directed by the PMC / consultant. The contractor shall complete
certain portions of work before completion of the entire work. However the
completion date shall be reckoned as the date by which the whole work is
completed as per the terms of the contract.
28.0
Extension of time
If, in the opinion of the PMC /consultant, the work be delayed for reasons
beyond the control of the contractor, the PMC/ Consultant may submit a
recommendation to the NLUO to grant a fair and reasonable extension of
time for completion of work as per the terms of contract. If the contractor
needs an extension of time for the completion of work or if completion of
work is likely to be delayed for any reasons beyond the due date of
completion as stipulated in the contract, the contractor shall apply to the
NLUO through the PMC /consultant in writing at least 21 Days before the
expiry of the scheduled time and while applying for extension of time he
shall furnish the reasons in detail and his justification if any, for the delays
The PMC/ PMC shall submit their recommendations to the NLUO in the
prescribed format for granting extension of time. While granting extension
50
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
of time the contractor shall be informed the period extended time which will
ualify for levy of liquidated damages. For the balance period in excess of
original stipulated period and duly sanctioned extension of time by the
NLUO the provision of liquidated damages as stated under clause 8 shall
become applicable. Further the contract shall remain in force even for the
period beyond the date of completion irrespective whether the extension is
granted or not.
29.0
Rate of progress
The entire of the material, plant and labour to be provided by the contractor.
The mode, manner and speed of execution and maintenance of the works are
to be of a kind and conducted in a manner to the satisfaction of the PMC
should the rate of a progress of the work or any part thereof be at any time
be in the opinion of the PMC too slow to ensure the completion of the
whole of the work by the prescribed time or extended time for completion
the PMC shall thereupon take such steps as considered necessary by the
PMC, to expedite progress so as to complete the works by the prescribed
time or extended time. Such communications from the PMC neither shall
relieve the contractor from fulfilling obligations under the contract not he
will be entitle to raise any claims arising out of such directions.
30.0 Work during nights and holidays
Subject to any provision to the contrary contained in the contract no
permanent work shall save as herein provided be carried on during the night
or on holidays without the permission in writing of the PMC/ Consultant,
save when the work is unavoidable or absolutely necessary for the saving of
a life or property or for the safety of the work in which case the contractor
shall immediately advise the PMC/ Consultant. However the provisions of
the clause shall not be applicable in the case of any work which becomes
essential to carry by rotary or double shifts in order to achieve the progress
and quality of the works being technically required / continued with the
prior approval of the PMC/ Consultant at no extra cost to the NATIONAL
LAW UNIVERSITY, ODISHA.
All work at night after obtaining approval from competent authorities shall
be carried out without unreasonable noise an disturbance.
51
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
31.0
No compensation or restrictions of work
If at any time after acceptance of the tender NLUO shall decide to abandon
or reduce the scope of work for any reason whatsoever and hence not
required the whole or any part of the work to be carried out. The PMC shall
give notice in writing to that effect to the contractor and the contractor shall
act accordingly. In the matter. The contractor shall have no claim to any
payment of compensation or otherwise whatsoever, on account of any profit
or advantage which he might have derived from the execution of the work
fully but which he did not derive in consequence of the foreclosure of the
whole or part of the work.
Provided that the contractor shall be paid the charges on the cartage only of
materials actually and confide brought to the site of the work by the
contractor and rendered surplus as a result of the abandonment, curtailment
of the work or any portion thereof and then taken back by the contractor,
provided however that the PMC / Consultant shall have in such cases the
option of taking over all or any such materials at their purchase price or a
local current rate whichever is less.
“In case of such stores credit shall be given to him at the rates not
exceeding those at which were originally issued to the contractor after
taking into consideration and deduction for claims on account of any
deterioration or damage while in the custody of the contractor and in this
respect the decision of PMC / Consultant shall be final.
32.0
Suspension of work
i)
The contractor shall, on receipt of the order in writing of the PMC/
Consultant (whose decision shall be final and binding on the contractor)
suspend the progress of works or any part thereof for such time and in such
manner as PMC/ Consultant may consider necessary so; as not to cause any
damage or injury to the work already done or endanger the safety thereof for
any of following reasons.
a)
On account any default on the part of the contractor, or
b)
For proper execution of the works or part thereof for reasons other than the
default of the contractor, or
c)
for safety of the works or part thereof.
52
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
The contractor shall, during such suspension properly protect and secure the
works to the extent necessary and carry out the instructions given in that
behalf by the PMC/ Consultant.
ii)
If the suspension is ordered for reasons b) and c) in sub – Para I) above:
The contractor shall be entitles to an extension of time equal to the period
of every such suspension. No compensation whatsoever shall be paid on this
account.
33.0
Action when the whole security deposit is forfeited
In any case in which under any clause or clauses of this contract, the
Contractor by the PMC/ Consultant shall have the power to adopt any of the
following course as they may deem best suited to the interest of the
NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY, ODISHA.
a)
To rescind the contract (of which rescission notice in writing to the
contractor by the PMC/ Consultant shall be conclusive evidence) and in
which case the security deposit of the contractor shall be forfeited and be
absolutely at the disposal of NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY, ODISHA.
b)
To employ labour paid by the NLUO and to supply materials to carry out the
work, or any part of the work, debiting the contractor with the cost of the
labour and materials ( the cost of such labour and materials as worked out
by the PMC/ Consultant shall be final and conclusive against the contractor)
and crediting him with the value of the work done, in all respects in the
same manner and at the same manner and at the same rates as if it had been
carried ;out by the contractor under the terms of this contract the certificate
of PMC/ Consultant as to the value of work done shall be final and
conclusive against the contractor.
c)
To measure up the work of the contractor, and to take such part thereof as
shall be unexecuted, out of his hands, and to give it to another contractor to
complete in which case any expenses which may be incurred in excess of the
sum which would have been paid to the original contractor, if the whole
work had been executed by him (of the amount of which excess the
certificates in writing of the PMC/ Consultant shall be final and conclusive)
shall be borne by original contractor and may be deducted from any money
due to him by NLUO under the contract or otherwise, or from his security
deposit o the proceed of sale thereof, or sufficient part thereof.
53
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
In the event of any of above courses being adopted by the NLUO the
contractor shall have no claim to compensation for any loss sustained
by him by reasons of his having purchased or procured any material or
entered into any engagements or make any advances on account of, or with a
view to the execution of the work or the performance of the contract and in
case the contract shall be rescind under the provision aforesaid, the
contractor shall not be entitled to recover or to be paid any sum or any work
thereto for actually performed under this contract, unless, and until the
PMC/ Consultant will have certified in writing the performance of such
work and the value payable in respect thereof, and he shall only be entitled
to be paid the value so certified.
34.0
NLUO has right to terminate the contract
If the contractor being an individual or a firm commit any ‘Act of
insolvency’ or shall be adjusted an insolvent or being an incorporated
company shall have an order for compulsory winding up voluntarily or
subject to the supervision of Govt. and of the Official Assignee of the
liquidator in such acts of insolvency of winding up shall be unable within
seven days after notice to him to do so, to show to the reasonable
satisfaction of the PMC / Consultant that he is able to carry out and fulfill
the contract, and to give security therefore if so required by the PMC /
Consultant.
Or, if the contractor (whether an individual firm or incorporated company)
shall suffer execution to be issued or shall suffer any payment under this
contract to be attached by or on behalf of any of the creditors of the
contractor.
Or, shall assign or sublet this contract without the consent in writing of the
NLUO through the PMC / consultant or shall charge or encumber this
contract or any payment due to which may become due to the contractor
there under :
(a) has abandoned the contract; Or
(b) has failed to commence the work, or has without any lawful excuse
under these conditions suspended the progress of the works for 14 (fourteen)
days after receiving from the NLUO through the PMC / Consultant written
notice to proceed, or
54
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
(c) has failed to proceed with the works with such diligence and failed to
make such due progress as would enable the works to be completed within
the time agreed upon. Or has failed to remove materials from the site or to
pull down and replace work within seven days after written notice from the
NLUO through PMC that the said materials were condemned and reject by
the PMC under these conditions. Or has neglected or failed persistently to
observe and perform all or any of the acts, matters or things by this contract
to be observed and performed by the contractor for seven days after written
notice shall have been given to the contactor to observe or perform the same
or has to the detriment of good workmanship or in defiance of the NLUO‘s
or PMC
Consultant’s instruction to the contrary subject any part of the contract.
Then and in any of said cases the NLUO and or the PMC/ consultant , may
not withstanding any previous waiver, after giving seven days notice in
writing to the contractor determine the contract, but without thereby
affecting the powers of the NLUO or the PMC/ consultant or the obligation
and liabilities of the contractor the whole of which shall continue in force as
fully as if the contract had not been so determined and as if the works
subsequently had been executed by or on behalf of the contractor. And
further the NLUO through the PMC/ Consultant their agents or employees
may enter upon and take possession of the work and all plants, tools,
scaffoldings, materials, sheds, machineries lying upon the premises or on
the adjoining lands or roads use the same by means of their own employees
or workmen in carrying on and completing the work or by engaging any
other contractor or persons to complete the work and the contractor shall not
in any was interrupt or do any act, matter or thing to prevent or hinder such
other contractor or other persons employed for completing and finishing or
using the materials and plants for the work.
When the works shall be completed or as soon thereafter as convenient the
NLUO or the PMC/ consultant shall give a notice in writing to the
contractor to remove his surplus materials and plants and should the
contractor fail to do so within 14 days after receipt thereof by him the
NLUO sell the same by public auction after due publication, and shall
adjust the amount realized by such auction. The contractor shall have no
right to question any of the act of the NLUO incidental to the sale of the
materials etc.
35.0
Certificate of Payment
The contractor shall be entitled under the certificates to be issued by the
PMC/NLUO to the contractor within 10 working days from the date of
55
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
certificate to the payment from NLUO from time to time . The NLUO shall
recover the statutory recoveries other dues including the retention amount
from the certificate of payment.
The scrutiny commit can verify as and when required after verify by PMC.
Provided always that the issue of any certificate by the PMC/ consultant
during the progress of works or completion shall not have effect as
certificate of satisfaction or relive the contractor from his liability under
clause.
The PMC/Consultant shall have power to withhold the certificate if the
work or any part thereof is not carried out to their satisfaction.
The PMC/ Consultant may be any certificate make any correction required
in previous certificate.
The NLUO shall modify the certificate of payment as issued by the PMC/
consultant from time to time while making the payment.
The contractor shall submit interim bills only after taking actual
measurement and properly recorded in the measurement Book.
The contractor shall not submit interim bills when the approximate value of
work done by him less than 75 lacs and the minimum interval between two
such bills shall be 15 days or less.
The final bill may be submitted by contractor within a period of one month
from the date of virtual completion and PMC/ Consultant shall issue the
certificate of payment within a period of two months. The NLUO shall pay
the amount within a period of three months from the date of issue of
certificate provided there is no dispute in respect of rates and quantities.
The contractor shall submit the interim bills in the prescribed format with
all details.
56
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
36.0
PAYMENT TERMS & CONDITIONS :
Upto 85% of the total R.A. Bill submitted may be paid within 9 (nine) working days
from the date of submission of R.A. Bills to NLUO, subject to the cross check of
measurement and certification by PMC. The balance payment shall be paid only after
deducting the necessary statutory dues and complete verification of Bill by NLUO /
PMC.
37.0
MOBILISATION :
Mobilization advance will be paid up to 10% of the contract value against the
submission of bank guarantee from a nationalized bank as per the Performa enclosed. The
format of getting this payment as mentioned which signed and duly confirm from any
Nationalized Bank. The mobilization advance shall be recovered in prorate basis from
each running bill when the work done value reaches 15% of the contract value and up to
85% of the contract value.
38.0
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE :
The performance guarantee is 10% of the total contractor value which is submitted in
form of Bank Guarantee from a Nationalized Bank. Which is valid for 12 (twelve)
months beyond the completion period which will be submitted with in the 15 days from
the date of agreement as per the Performa enclosed.
39.0
Settlement of disputes and Arbitration.
i. Except where otherwise provided in the contract all questions and disputes
relating to own connection with the interpretation, execution or enforcement of
the contract shall be refer to arbitration, abolition and conciliation Act 1996 .
ii thing whatsoever in any way arising out of or relating to the contract, designs,
Tendered drawings, specifications, estimates, instructions orders or these
conditions or otherwise concerning the work or the execution or failure to
execute the same whether arising during the progress of the work or after the
cancellation, termination, completion or abandonment thereof shall be dealt with
as mentioned hereinafter.
If the contractor considers that he is entitled to any extra payment or compensation in
respect of the works over and above the amounts admitted as payable by the PMC or
incase the contractor wants to dispute the validity of any deductions or recoveries made
or proposed to be made from the contract or raise any dispute, the contractor shall
forthwith give notice in writing of his claim, or dispute to the Vice Chancellor,
National Law University ODISHA, Naraj, Cuttack - 753015, ODISHA and endorse a
57
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
copy of the same to the PMC, within 30 (thirty) days from the date of disallowance
thereof or the date of deduction or recovery. The said notice shall give full particulars
of the claim, grounds on which it is based and detailed calculations of the amount
claimed and contractor shall not be entitled to raise any claim nor shall the N.L.U.O be
any way liable in respect of any claim by the contractor unless notice of such claim
shall have been given by the contractor to the Vice Chancellor, National Law
University ODISHA, Naraj, Cuttack - 753015, ODISHA in the manner and within the
time as aforesaid. The contractor shall be deemed to have waved and extinguished all
his rights in respect of any claim not notified to the Vice Chancellor, National Law
University ODISHA, Naraj, Cuttack - 753015, ODISHA in writing in the manner and
within the time aforesaid.
ii)
Except where the decision has become final, binding and conclusive in terms of the
contract, all disputes or differences arising out of the notified claims of the contractor as
aforesaid and all claims of the N.L.U.O shall be referred for adjudication through
arbitration by the Sole Arbitrator appointed by the Vice Chancellor, National Law
University ODISHA, Naraj, Cuttack - 753015, ODISHA. It will also be no objection to
any such appointment that the arbitrator so appointed is a N.L.U.O Officer and that he
had to deal with the matters to which the Contract relates in the course of his duties as
N.L.U.O Officer. If the arbitrator so appointed is unable or unwilling to act or resigns
his appointment or vacates his office due to any reason whatsoever another sole
arbitrator shall be appointed in the manner aforesaid by the said, Vice Chancellor,
National Law University Odisha, Naraj, Cuttack - 753015, ODISHA. Such person shall
be entitled to proceed with the reference from the stage at which it was left by his
predecessor.
It is a term of this contract that the party invoking arbitration shall give a list of disputes
with amounts claimed in respect of each disputes with amounts claimed in respect of
each dispute along with the notice for appointment of arbitrator.
It is also a term of this contract that no person other than a person appointed by such
National Law University Odisha, Naraj, Cuttack - 753015, ODISHA as aforesaid
should act as arbitrator.
The conciliation and arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the provisions of
the arbitration & Conciliation Act 1996 or any statutory modification or reenactment
thereof and the rules made thereunder.
It is also a term of the contract that the arbitrator shall be deemed to have entered on the
reference on the date he issues notice to both the parties calling them to submit their
statement of claims and counter statement of claims. The venue of the arbitration shall
58
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
be such place as may be fixed by the arbitrator in his sole discretion. The fees, if any, of
the arbitrator shall , if required to be paid
before the award is made and published, be paid half and half by each of the parties.
The cost of the reference and of the award (including the fees, if any of the arbitrator)
shall be in the discretion of the arbitrator who may direct to any by whom and in what
manner, such costs or any part thereof, shall be paid and fix or settle the amount of
costs to be so paid.
40.0
Water Supply
The contractor shall make his own arrangement for water required for the
work and nothing extra will be paid for the same. This will be subject to the
following conditions.
(i)That the water used by the contractor shall be fit for construction purposes
to the satisfaction of the PMC/ Consultant.
(ii) The contractor shall make alternative arrangement for the supply of
water if the arrangement made by the contractor for the procurement of
water in the opinion of the PMC/ consultant is unsatisfactory.
40.1
The contractor shall construct temporary well/ tube well in NLUO
land
for taking water for construction purposes only after obtaining permission
in writing from the NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY,ODISHA.
The
contractor has to make his own arrangement for
drawing & distributing
the water at his own cost. He has to make necessary arrangements to avoid
any accidents or damages caused due to
construction
and
subsequent
maintenance of the wells. He has to obtain necessary approval from local
authorities, if required, at his
own cost. He shall restore the ground to its
original condition after wells are dismantled on completion of work.
Or
and over the well to the NLUO without any compensation as directed by the
PMC/consultant.
41.0
Power Supply
The contractor shall make his own arrangements for power and supply /
distribution system for driving plant or machinery for the work and for
lighting purpose at his own cost, The cost of running and maintenance of the
plants are to included in his tender prices. He shall pay all fees and charges
required for the power supply and include the same in his tendered rates and
hold the owner free from all such costs. He has to obtain necessary approval
from the appropriate authorities, if required.
59
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
42.0
Treasure trove etc.
Any treasure trove, coin or object antique, which may be found on the site,
shall be the property of NLUO and shall be handed over to the N.L.U.O
immediately.
43.0
Method of measurement
Unless otherwise mentioned in the schedule of quantities or in mode of
measurement, the measurement will be on the net quantities or work
produced in accordance with up to date. Rules laid down by the Bureau of
Indian Standards. In the event any dispute / disagreement the decision of the
PMC/ Consultant shall be final and binding on the contractor.
44.0
Maintenance of registers
The contractor shall maintain the following registers as per the enclosed
Performa at site of work and should produce the same for inspection of
NLUO/ PMC consultant whenever desired by them. The contractor shall also
maintain the records / registers as required by the local authorities /Govt.
from time to time.
i)
Register for cement / paint / lead / specific materials.
ii)
Register for steel
iii)
Register for secured advance
iv)
Register for bulkage of sand
v)
Register for silt test
vi)
Register for sieve analysis for fine aggregate
vii)
Register for sieve analysis for course aggregate
viii)
Register for slump test
ix)
Register for concrete cube test
x)
Register for hindrance to work
xi)
Register for consumption of cement
60
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
xii)
Register for running account bill
xiii)
Register for labour
45.0
Price Variation Adjustment (P.V.A.)
No price variation shall be considered within the Contract Period or within
the Extended contract period.
1.
Immediately on award of contract, the contractor shall register with the
appropriate authority obtain Sales Tax Registration No. and produce the
details thereof to the N.L.U.O within 30 days of the award of the work and
in no case later than the submission of his first running bill.
2.
The successful tenderes may also note that the N.L.U.O reserves the right to
deduct Sales Tax on works contract applicable and to be levied under
relevant Act, from the bills and amount due to them from N.L.U.O and remit
the same directly to the Government in case they are not submitting the
proof / evidence of having paid the Sales Tax on work executed under this
contract.
46.0
Force Majeure
46.1
Neither contractor nor NLUO shall be considered in default in performance
of their obligations if such performance is prevented or delayed by events
such as but not to war, hostilities revolution, riots, civil commotion, strikes,
lockout, conflagration, epidemics, accidents, fire, storms, floods, droughts,
earthquakes or ordinances or any act of god or for any other cause beyond
the reasonable control of the party affected or prevented or delayed.
However a notice is required to be given within 30 days from the happening
of the event with complete details, to the other party to the contract, if it is
not possible to serve a notice; within the shortest possible period without
delay.
46.2
As soon as the cause of force majeure has been removed the party whose
ability to perform its obligations has been affected, shall notify the other of
such cessation and the actual delay incurred in such affected activity
adducing necessary evidence in support thereof.
46.3
From the date of occurrence of a case of force majeure obligations of the
party affected shall be suspended during the continuance of any inability so
caused. With the cause itself and inability resulting there from having been
remove, the agreed time of completion of the respective obligations under
61
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
this agreement shall stand extended by a period equal to the period of delay
occasioned by such events.
46.4
Should one or both parties be prevented from fulfilling the contractual
obligations by a state of force majeure lasting to a period of 6 months or
more the two parties shall each other to decide regarding the future
execution of this agreement.
47.0
Local laws, Acts, Regulations:
The contractor shall strictly adhere to all prevailing labour laws inclusive of
contract labour (regulation and abolition act of 1970) and other safety
regulations. The contractor shall company with the provision of all labour
legislation including the latest requirements of all the Acts, laws any other
regulations that are applicable to the execution of the project.
i)
Minimum wages Act 1948 (Amended)
ii)
Payment of wages Act 1936 (Amended)
iii)
Workmen’s compensation Act 1923 (Amended)
iv)
Contract labour regulation and abolition act 1970 and central rules 1971
(Amended)
v)
Apprentice act 1961 (Amended)
vi)
Industrial employment (standing order) Act 1946 (Amended)
vii)
Personal injuries
modifications
viii)
Employees’ provident fund and miscellaneous provisions Act 1952 and
amended thereof.
ix)
Shop and establishment act.
x)
Shop and establishment act.
xi)
Royalty shall be charged as applicable by Govt. of Odisha.
xii)
Any other act or enactment relating thereto and rules framed there under
from time to time.
48.0
Supply of man power for supervision of the Project.
(Compensation
insurance)
act
1963
and
other
62
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
The contractor shall ensure the supply of the manpower with required
qualification for this project. These engineer and supervisor will look after
day to day activities of work. They will also maintained the required
documents to be submitted to PMC on regular basic and endorse it.
MINIMUM REQUIREMENT OF
FROM THE CONTRACTOR SIDE.
49.0
TECHNICALREPRESENTATIVE
Sl.
No.
Minimum
Qualification of
technical
representative
Discipline
Designation
Minimum
Experience
Minimum
1
Degree
Civil
Project
Manager
15 Years
1 No.
2
Degree
Civil
Sr.
Engineer
10 Years
2 Nos.
3.
Diploma
Civil
Billing
Engineer
8 Years
2 Nos.
4.
Diploma
Civil
Quality
Control
Engineer
8 Years
2 Nos.
5.
Diploma
Civil
Safety
Engineer
6 Years
1 Nos.
6.
Supervision
Staff
Civil,
Electrical,
P.H
and
Drainage
work.
5 Years
6 Nos.
Accidents.
The contractor shall immediately on occurrence of any accident at or about
the site or in connection with the execution of the work report such accident
to the PMC/ Consultant& NLUO. The contractor shall also such report
immediately to the competent authority whenever such report is required to
be lodged by the law and take appropriate actions thereof.
63
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 5
__________________________________________________General Conditions of Contract
50.0
51.0
51.1
Idle Labour.
Whatever the reasons may be, no claim for idle labour, additional establishment cost of
hire & labour charges of tools and plants would be entertained under any circumstances.
EXTRA ITEMS, VARIATIONS, THEIR VALUATION AND CLAIMS
If any item is ordered on the Contractor by NLUO which is neither in the tender
document, Description of works in the Schedule, specifications, it shall be treated as extra
item. The Contractor shall carry out and complete the said work on prior approval from
the NLUO/ PMC in every respect to the satisfaction of NLUO. The rates of extra items
shall be derived on the following basis of precedence:
(i)
OPWD /CPWD Procedure and market rate of materials(including
carriage), labour,
(ii)
As per the market rates evaluated by NLUO.
Extra items on market rates will be applicable only when certificate is issued by PMC/
Project Director .The rates for extra item will be finalized before execution of the item.
64
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 6
__________________________________________________Special Conditions of Contract
SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
Scope of work
1.0
2.0
The scope of work is to carry out all works in connections with Construction
of Auditoriumof National Law University Campus Works at Naraj, Cuttack,
ODISHA.
Address of site
The site is located at Naraj, Cuttack, ODISHA.
3.0
Dimensions and levels
All dimensions and levels shown on the drawing shall be verified by the
contractor on the site and he will be held responsible for the accuracy and
maintenance of all the dimensions and the levels. Figured dimensions are in
all cases to accepted and no dimension shall be scaled. Large scale details
shall take precedence over small-scale Tendered drawings. In case of
discrepancy the contractor shall ask for clarification from the PMC/
Consultant before proceeding with the work.
4.0
Notice of operation
The contractor shall not carryout any important operation without the
Consent in writhing from the PMC/ Consultant.
5.0
Consultant records
The contractor shall keep and provide to the PMC/ Consultant full and
accurate records of the dimensions and positions of all new work and any
other information necessary to prepare complete drawing recording details
of the work as constructed.
6.0
Safety of adjacent structures and trees
The contractor shall provide and erect to the approval of the PMC/
Consultant such supports as may be required to protect effectively all
structures and protective guards to trees which may be endangered by the
execution of the works or otherwise take such permanent measures as may
be required by the PMC to protect the trees and structures.
65
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 6
__________________________________________________Special Conditions of Contract
7.0
Temporary works
Before any temporary works are commenced the contractor shall submit at
least 7 days in advance to the PMC /consultant for approval complete
Tendered drawings of all temporary works he may require for the execution
of the works. The contractor shall carry out the modifications relating to
strength, if required by the PMC/ Consultant may require in accordance with
the conditions of contract at his own cost. The contractor shall be solely
responsible for the stability and safety of all temporary works and
unfinished works and for the quality of the permanent works resulting from
the arrangement eventually adopted for their execution.
8.0
Temporary roads
The contractor shall provide access roads to the site from the nearest main
road at no extra cost and as directed by the PMC/ Consultant. The contractor
shall also responsible for proper maintenance of this access road and would
take all care to see that existing services, if any, are maintained in working
order at his own cost. The laying and maintaining the temporary roads
within the site area shall be the contractor’s responsibility and the
contractor shall take such measures that necessary and as directed by the
PMC/ Consultant.
9.0
Water, power and other facilities
a)
The rate quoted by the contractor shall include all expenses that are required
for providing all the water required for the work and the contractor shall
make his own arrangements for the supply of good quality water suitable for
the construction and good quality drinking water for their workers. If
necessary the contractor has to sink a tube well / open well and bring water
by means of tankers at his own cost for the purpose. The NLUO will not be
liable to pay any charges in connection with the above.
a)
The rate quote in the tender shall include the expenses for obtaining and
maintaining power connections and shall pay for the consumptions charges.
b)
The contractors for other trades directly appointed by the NLUO shall be
entitled to take power and water connections from the temporary water and
power supply obtained by the contractor. However the concerned contractor
shall make their own arrangements to draw the supply and pay directly the
actual consumption charges at mutually agreed rates between them. All
municipal charges for drainage and water connection for construction
purposes shall be borne by the contractor and charges payable for permanent
66
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 6
__________________________________________________Special Conditions of Contract
connections, if any, shall be initially paid by the contractor and the NLUO
will reimburse the amount on production of receipts.
a)
The NLUO as well as the PMC/ Consultant shall give all possible assistance
to the contractors to obtain the requisite.
b)
Permission from the various authorities, but the responsibility for obtaining
the same in time shall be of the contractor.
10.0
Office accommodation
a)
The contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary offices, workshops,
stores, shelters, sanitary facilities, canteens and other temporary structures
for themselves in connection with the work at the site at their own cost after
getting the approval from the PMC/ Consultant.
b)
A site office for the use of NLUO & PMC shall be provided by the
contractor at his own as per the requirement given by NLUO & PMC.
c)
All temporary buildings and facilities as mentioned above shall be removed
on completion of the work or at any other earlier date as directed by the
PMC/ Consultant.
All the expenses for obtaining statutory approvals and maintenance of the
above facilities as well as running expense shall be borne the contractor at
no extra cost. It is also the responsibility of the contractor to obtain
statutory approvals for providing the above facilities.
11.0
Facilities for contractor’s employees
The contractor shall make his own arrangement for the housing and welfare
of his staff and workmen including adequate drinking water facilities. The
contractor shall also make she arrangements at his own cost for transport
where necessary for his staff and workmen to and from site of work at his
own cost.
12.0
Lighting of works
The contractor shall at all times provide adequate and approved lighting as
required for the proper execution and supervision and inspection of work.
13.0
Fire fighting arrangements
i)
The contactor shall provide suitable arrangement for firefighting at his own
cost. For this purpose he shall provide requisite number of fire extinguishers
67
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 6
__________________________________________________Special Conditions of Contract
and adequate number of buckets, some of which are to be always kept filled
with sand and some with water. These equipments shall be provided at
suitable prominent and easily accessible places and shall be properly
maintained.
ii)
Any deficiency in the fire safety or unsafe conditions shall be corrected by
the contractor at his own cost and to the approval of the relevant authorities.
The contractor shall make the following arrangements at his own cost but
limited to the following.
a)
Proper handling, storage and disposal of combustible materials and waste.
b)
Work operations which can create fire hazards.
c)
Access for firefighting equipments.
d)
type, number and location of containers for the removal of surplus materials
and rubbish.
e)
Type, size, number and location of fire extinguishers or other firefighting
equipment.
f)
General housekeeping.
14.0
Site order book
A site order book shall be maintained at site for the purpose immediate
verification of between the NLUO/PMC /PMC. Any communication
relating to the works may be conveyed through. Records in the site order
book. Such a communication from one party to the other shall be deemed to
have been adequately served in terms of contract. Each site order book shall
have machine numbered pages in triplicate and shall carefully maintained
and preserved by the contractor and shall be made available to the PMC/
Consultant as and when demanded. Any instruction which the PMC/
Consultant may like to issue to the contractor or the contractor may like to
bring to the PMC/ Consultant two copies of such instructions shall be taken
from the site order book and one copy will be handed over to the party
against proper acknowledgment and the second copy will be retained for
their record.
15.0
Temporary fencing / barricading
The contractor shall provide and maintain a suitable temporary fencing /
barricading and gates at his cost to adequately enclose all boundaries of the
site for the protection of the public and for the proper execution and
security of the work and in accordance with the requirement of the PMC/
68
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 6
__________________________________________________Special Conditions of Contract
Consultant and regulations of local authorities. These shall be altered,
relocated and adopted from time to tome as necessary and removed on
completion of the work.
16.0
Site meetings
Site meetings will be held to review the progress and quality evaluation.
The contractor shall depute a senior representative along with the site
representative and other staff of approved sub-contractors and supplies as
required to the site meetings and ensure all follow up actions. Any
additional review meetings shall he held if required by the PMC/
Consultant.
17.0
Disposal of refuse
The contractor shall cart away all debris, refuse etc. arising from the work
from the site and deposit the same as directed by the PMC/ Consultant at his
own cost. It is the responsibility of the contractor to obtain from the local
authorities
concerned
to the effect that all rubbish arising out of
contractor’s activities at the construction site or any other off-site activities
borrow pits has been properly disposed off.
18.0
Contractor to verify site measurement
The contractor shall check and verify all site measurement whenever
requested by other specialists contractors or other sub contractors to enable
them to prepare their own shop Tendered drawings and pass on the
information with sufficient promptness as will not in any way delay the
works.
19.0
Displaying the name of the work
The contractor shall put up a name board of suitable size as directed by the
PMC/ Consultant indicating therein the name of the project and other details
as given by the PMC/ Consultant at his own cost and remove the same on
completion of work.
20.0
Bar bending schedule
The contractor shall prepare a detailed bar bending schedule for all
reinforced concrete works and got them approved by the PMC/ Consultant
well in advance.
21.0
As built Tendered drawings
69
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 6
__________________________________________________Special Conditions of Contract
i)
For the Tendered drawings issued to the contractor by the PMC. The PMC/
Consultant will issue two sets of Tendered drawings to the Contractor for
the items for which some changes have been made. From the approved
Tendered drawings as instructed by the NLUO/ PMC. The contractor will
make the changes made on these copies and return these copies to the PMC/
Consultant for their approval. In case any revision is required or the
corrections are not properly marked the PMC/ Consultant will point out the
discrepancies to the contractor. The contractor will have to incorporate
these corrections and / or attend to discrepancies either on the copies as
directed by the PMC/ Consultant and resubmit to his for approval. The
PMC/ Consultant will return one copy duly approved by him.
ii)
For the drawing prepared by the contractor.
The contractor will modify the drawing prepared by him wherever the
changes are made by the NLUO/ PMC/ Consultant. And submit two copies
of such modified drawing to the PMC/ Consultant for approval. The PMC/
Consultant will return one copy of the approved drawing to the contractor.
If the contractor found any doubt in the drawing they must inform the
Engineer in Charge within three days from the date of submission of
Tendered drawings otherwise it will not consider as a reason of delay of
work for Tendered drawings.
22.0
Approved make
The contractor shall provide all materials from the list of approved makes
and ISI marked at his own cost and also appoint the specialized agency for
the waterproofing, anti-termite, aluminium doors and windows and any
other item as specified in the tender . The PMC/ Consultant may approve
any make / agency within the approved as given at the time of tender list as
given in the tender after inspection of the sample / mock up.
23.0
Procurement of materials
The contractor shall make his own arrangements to procure all required
materials and ISI marked for the work. All wastages and losses in weight
shall be to the contractor’s account.
24.0
Excise duty, taxes, levies etc.
The contractor shall pay and be responsible for payment of all taxes, duties,
levies, royalties, fees, cess or charges in respect of the works
70
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 6
__________________________________________________Special Conditions of Contract
including but not limited to sales tax, tax on works contract excise duty, and
octroi, payable in respect of materials, equipment plant and other things
required for the contact. All of the aforesaid taxes, duties, levies, fees and
charges shall be to the contractor’s account and the NLUO shall not be
required to pay any additional or extra amount on this account. Variation of
taxes, duties, fees levies etc if any, till completion of work shall be deemed
to be included in the quoted rates and no extra amount on this account.
Variation of taxes, duties, levies etc, if any, till completion of work shall be
deemed to be included in the quoted rates and no extra claim on this account
will in any case be entertained. If a new tax or duty or levy or cess or
royalty or octroi is imposed under as statue or law during the currency of
contract the same shall be borne by the contractor.
25.0
Acceptance of tender
The NLUO shall have the right to reject any or all tenders with out
assigning any reason. They are not to bound to accept the lowest or any
tender and the tenderer or tenderers shall have no right to question the act
of the NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY, Odisha. However adequate
transparency would be maintained by the NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY,
Odisha.
71
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 7
_____Safety Code, Maintenance of records, Mobilization of Advance, Letter of Acceptance
SAFETY CODE
1.
First aid appliances including adequate supply of sterilized dressing and
cotton wool shall be kept in a readily accessible place.
2.
An injured person shall be taken to a public hospital without loss of time in
cases where the injury necessitates hospitalization.
3.
Suitable and strong scaffolds should be provided for workmen for all works
that cannot safely be done from the ground .
4.
No portable single ladder shall be over 8 meters in length. The width
between the side rails shall not be less than 30 cm. (clear) and at the
distance between two adjacent rungs shall not be more than 30 cm. When a
ladder is used an extra mazdoor shall be engaged for holding ladder.
5.
The excavated material shall not be placed within 1.5 meters of the edge of
the trench or half of the depth of trench whichever is more. All trenches and
excavations shall be provided with necessary fencing and lighting.
6.
Every opening in the floor of a building or in a working platform be
provided with suitable means to prevent the fall of persons or materials by
providing suitable fencing or failing whose minimum height shall be one
metre.
7.
No floor , roof or other part of the structure shall be so overloaded with
debris or materials as to render it unsafe.
8.
Workers employed on mixing and handling material such as asphalt , cement
mortar or concrete and lime mortar shall be provided with protective
footwear and rubber hand-gloves.
9.
Those engaged in welding works shall be provided with welder’s protective
eye shields and gloves.
10.
i)
No paint containing lead or lead products shall be used except in the
form of paste or readymade paint.
ii)
Suitable facemasks, should be supplied for use be the workers when the
paint is applied in the form of spray or surface having lead paint dry
rubbed and scrapped.
11.
Overall shall be supplied by the contractor to the painters and adequate
facilities shall be provided to enable the working painters to wash during
the periods of cessation of work.
72
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 7
_____Safety Code, Maintenance of records, Mobilization of Advance, Letter of Acceptance
12.
Housing machines and tackle used in the works, including their attachments,
anchorage and supports shall be in perfect condition
13.
The ropes used in hoisting or lowering material or as a means of suspension
shall be of durable quality and adequate strength and free from defects.
N.L.U.O’S UNIVERSITY CAMPUS WORK PROJECTS - MAINTENANCE OF
RECORDS
A.
Registers at the site office of the N.L.U.O’s Engineer :
1.
Drawing register.
2.
Hindrance Register.
3.
Concrete cube Test Register.
4.
File and Register for extra / variation items.
5.
Materials tests Register and file.
6.
Site Order Book (triplicate).
7.
Site visit & Instructions Register.
8.
Certified true copies of the contracts.
MOBILISATION ADVANCE
At the request of the Contractor mobilization advance to a maximum of 10.0 % (Ten
Percent) of the contract amount against Bank Guarantee from a Nationalized Bank shall
be paid by NLUO . This shall be paid in two equal installments against equivalent Bank
Guarantee . The First Installment of mobilization advance of 5 % ( five percent) of
contract value shall be paid at the time of award of work and on certification of proper
and satisfactory mobilization at site. Balance mobilization advance of 5% (five percent)
of contracts value against Bank Guarantee bonds from Nationalized Bank shall be
payable after submitting the 1st RA bill. However the first installment of mobilization
advance will be release on the finalization of bar chart duly approved by NLUO and
signed by the
73
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 7
_____Safety Code, Maintenance of records, Mobilization of Advance, Letter of Acceptance
Contractor, and Project Director, receipt of certificate from Project Director and PMC/
PMC regarding satisfactory mobilization at site.
RECOVERY OF MOBILISATION ADVANCE
i)
Initial mobilization advance shall be recovered from the RA bills In Pro-rata
basis when the work done value reaches 15% of the contract value till the work
done value reaches 85% of the contract value.
PROFORMA OF LETTER OF ACCEPTANCE OF TENDER
REGISTERED A.D.
To,
M/s …………………………….
……………………….
Dear Sirs,
NAME OF THE WORK
Please refer to your letter No. __________________ dated __________________ on the
captioned subject. We are pleased to inform that your tender for the above mentioned work has
been accepted by our clients NLUO at the rates quoted by you for a total cost of
Rs.___________________(Rupees __________________________________________)
In this connection, it may please be noted that the following letters will form part of the contract
document:
i)
Your letter No. ________________
___________________
dated
_______________
addressed
to
ii)
iii)
You are requested to all on us to execute the formal agreement within 15 days from the date of
receipt of the LOA or the date of handing over the site whichever is later.
You are requested to submit Initial Security Deposit of Rs._________ by means of DD drawn in
favour NLUO within a period of _______________
You are also requested to start the work at once in consultation with ________________. Please
note that the time allowed for completion of work is _______________ months, which shall be
reckoned from 15th day of receipt of this letter or date of handing over the site whichever is later.
Please note that time will be the essence of the contract.
74
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 7
_____Safety Code, Maintenance of records, Mobilization of Advance, Letter of Acceptance
You are further requested to take out necessary insurance covers, indemnity bonds, labour
permissions at your cost in terms of clause __________ and ____________ conditions of the
contract.
Please acknowledge receipt of this letter.
PMCs
COPY to Vice Chancellor of NLUO , for information.
Place :………………….
Date :…………………..
75
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 8
____________________Form for mobilization of advance, Bank guaranty for performance
LETTER OF GUARANTEE FOR MOBILISATION ADVANCE
(TO BE STAMPED AS A SECURITY BOND)
The Vice Chancellor
National Law University ODISHA .
Naraj, Cuttack - 753015, ODISHA
.
Dear Sir,
N.L.U.O’s Proposed National Law University Campus Works at Naraj, Cuttack.
WHEREAS
(1) You have awarded a contract for civil work in respect of the construction of your N.L.U.O’s
own National Law University Campus Works
at Naraj, Cuttack to our constituents
_______________________________a Company / firm having its registered office/office at
________________________ (hereinafter referred to as “the Contractors”, which expression
shall include its successors and assigns) in terms of which the National Law University
ODISHA has agreed to advance to the contractors a sum of Rs. ___________ (Rupees
_________________ only) as and by way of mobilization advance in order to enable them
for making arrangements for producing necessary materials for the construction work and for
tools, plant, equipment, etc.
(2) The Contractors have vide their letter dated ____________ requested the National Law
University ODISHA to grant them a sum of Rs. ___________ (Rupees ________________
only) as and by way of mobilization advance which the National Law University ODISHA
has agreed to grant subject to the terms and conditions as set out in their letter No.
_____________ dated ____________.
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 7
_____Safety Code, Maintenance of records, Mobilization of Advance, Letter of Acceptance
(3) One of the terms of the said letter dated _____________ requires the Contractors to furnish
bank guarantee satisfactory to the National Law University ODISHA to secure the said
advance.
(4) It is agreed by and between the parties to the said contract that the said bank guarantee may
be furnished by us.
NOW THEREFORE THIS LETTER OF GUARANTEE WITNESSES that in consideration of
the National Law University ODISHA on our request agreeing to advance a sum of Rs.
____________ (Rupees _________________ only) as a and by way of mobilization advance s
76
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 8
____________________Form for mobilization of advance, Bank guaranty for performance
ubject to the terms and conditions as set out in the National Law University ODISHA ’s letter
No. _____________ dated ______________ addressed to the Contractor, we the (Name of bank)
hereby agree and undertake to the National Law University ODISHA as follows:
(i)
that the Contractors shall duly perform and discharge their obligations under the said
contract to the full satisfaction of the National Law University ODISHA and that they
shall utilize the said mobilization advance exclusively for the purpose of making
preliminary construction of the aforesaid project for the National Law University
ODISHA at Naraj, Cuttack and for no other purpose.
(ii)
that in case the Contractors do not repay principal amount or pay the interest on said
advance on the due dates or do not present their Running Bills for payment to the
National Law University ODISHA so that the National Law University ODISHA is not
in a position to adjust the said advance from out of the bills payable to the contractors or
the contractors fail to repay the said advance or pay interest thereon or any part thereof on
due dates or on demand, by the National Law University ODISHA or on the occurrence
of any of the events specified in the said contract that may lead to the termination of the
contract, we the (Name of the bank) hereby guarantee and undertake to pay to the
National Law University ODISHA on demand without demur the said sum of
Rs.___________________ (Rupees ____________________ only) or such unadjusted
portion thereof together with interest @ ____________ % per annum accrued due
thereon within a period of one week from the date of receipt of the demand from the
National Law University ODISHA .
(iii)
that any statement made by the National Law University ODISHA and the amount
mentioned in the demand notice given to us shall not be called in question by us and shall
be a conclusive proof regarding the amount that is payable by us under this guarantee and
that we shall not demand any proof thereof.
(iv)
that we will make the payment pursuant to the demand notice issued by the National Law
University ODISHA , notwithstanding any dispute that may exist or arise between the
National Law University ODISHA and the Contractors or any other person.
(v)
that this guarantee shall not be revoked by us without prior consent in writing of the
National Law University ODISHA .
WE HEREBY FURTHER AGREE THAT:
(a) any forbearance, act or omission on the part of the National Law University ODISHA in
enforcing any of the conditions of the said contract or granting of any time or the showing of
any indulgence by the National Law University ODISHA to contractors in respect of the
completion of the building or any other matter in connection therewith shall not discharge us
77
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 8
____________________Form for mobilization of advance, Bank guaranty for performance
(b) in any way and our obligations under this guarantee shall be discharged only by payment in
full of the sums guaranteed hereunder.
(c) Our liability under these presents shall not exceed the sum of Rs. _________ (Rupees
_________________________ only) and interest @ ______% per annum accruing due
thereon.
(d) Our liability under this guarantee shall not be affected by any infirmity or irregularity on the
part of the contractors in entering into the said contract or by the dissolution or change in the
constitution of the contractor firm.
(e) Our liability under these presents will terminate on the issue of the Virtual
Completion Certificate by the PMCs/N.L.U.O pursuant to the said contract and unless a
claim, suit or action is filed against us within 6 months thereafter all the rights of the National
Law University ODISHA against us under this guarantee shall be
forfeited and we shall be released and discharged from all our obligations and liabilities
hereunder.
Yours faithfully,
For and on behalf of
(National Law University ODISHA )
(Authorized Official)
N.B.: This guarantee will require stamp duty as applicable in the state, where it is executed and
shall be signed by the official whose signature and authority shall be verified.
78
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 8
____________________Form for mobilization of advance, Bank guaranty for performance
BANK GUARANTEE FOR PERFORMANCE
Whereas the NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY ODISHA, CUTTACK (hereinafter called NLUO
which expression shall include its successors and assigns) having awarded a work
order/contract/supply
order
No…………………….,
……………………….
dated
………………………… & …………………………… (hereinafter called the contract) to
…………………………………………….(hereinafter called the contractor/supplier) at a total
price of Rs……………………………… subject to the terms and conditions contained in the
contract.
WHEREAS, the terms and conditions of the contract require the contractor (Contractor) to
furnish
a
bank
guarantee
for
Rs…………………….
(Rupees
……………………………………………………………………………… only) being 10% of
the total value of the contract for proper execution and due fulfillment of the terms and
conditions contained in the contract.
We, ………………………………………………………………………(Nationalized “Bank”)
having our registered office at ……………………………………………………………..do
hereby unconditionally and irrevocably undertake to pay to NLUO immediately on demand in
writing and without protest/or demur the amount mentioned in the guarantee. Any such demand
made by NLUO on the bank shall be final and conclusive. However, the Bank’s liability under
this guarantee shall be limited to Rs………………………………. in the aggregate and the bank
hereby agrees to the following terms and conditions:i)
This guarantee shall be continuing guarantee and irrevocable for all claims of NLUO as
specified above and shall be valid during the period specified for the performance of the
contract
including
the
period
of
maintenance/warranty
i.e.
up
to
…………………………….
ii)
We, the said bank further agree with NLUO that NLUO shall have the fullest liberty
without our consent and without affecting in any manner our obligations and liabilities
hereunder to vary any of the terms and conditions of the said contract or to extend time for
performance of contract by the contractor from time to time or to postpone for any time or
from time to time any of the powers exercisable by NLUO against the contractor/supplier
under the contract and forbear or enforce any of the terms and conditions relating to the
said contract and we shall not be relieved from our liability by reason of any such
variations or extension being granted to the contractor or for any forbearance, act or
omission on the part of NLUO or any indulgence by NLUO to the contractor or by any
such matter or thing whatsoever, which under the law relating to the sureties would, but for
this provision, have effect of so relieving us.
iii)
This guarantee/undertaking shall be in addition to any other guarantee or security
whatsoever NLUO may now or at anytime have in relation to the performance of the
works/equipment and the company shall have full re-course to or enforce this security in
79
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 8
____________________Form for mobilization of advance, Bank guaranty for performance
preference to any other security or guarantee which the NLUO may have or obtained and
there shall be no forbearance on the part of the NLUO in enforcing or requiring
enforcement of any other security which shall have the effect of releasing the Bank from its
full liability. It shall not be necessary for NLUO to proceed against the said
contractor/supplier before proceeding against the Bank.
iv)
This guarantee/undertaking shall not be determined or affected by the liquidation or
winding up, dissolution or change of constitution or insolvency of the supplier/contractor,
but shall in all respects and for all purposes be binding and operative until payment of all
moneys payable to NLUO in terms thereof are paid by the Bank.
v)
The Bank hereby waives all rights at any time inconsistent with the terms of this Guarantee
and the obligations of the bank in terms hereof, shall not be otherwise affected or
suspended by reason of any dispute or disputes having been raised by the
supplier/contractor (whether or not pending before any Arbitrator, Tribunal or Court) or
any denial of liability by the supplier/contractor stopping or preventing or purporting to
stop or prevent any payment by the Bank to NLUO in terms hereof.
We, the said Bank, lastly undertake not to revoke this guarantee during its currency except with
the previous consent of NLUO in writing. Unless a claim is made in writing within sixty days
after the date of expiry of this guarantee i.e. ……………………………., we shall be relieved
from all liabilities under this guarantee thereafter.
Notwithstanding anything contained herein:
1. Our liability under this Bank guarantee shall not exceed ……………………………….
((Rupees
………………………………………………………………………………………………
……… only).
2. This Bank Guarantee shall be valid up to ………………………… and we are liable to
pay the guaranteed amount or any part thereof under this Bank Guarantee only if you
serve upon us a written claim or demand on or before …………………………………..
(including claim period).
Signed
this
………………………………
at……………………………………
WITNESS
day
of
…………………………….
For and on behalf of Bank
Signature & Seal
80
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 9
____Performa of monthly progress report, Receipt of materials at site, Perform of cube test
PROFORMA OF MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORT
Name of work
:
Progress report for the month
:
Report No.
:
Sr.
Description
No
A. General Building Work:
1. Foundation work
2. Reinforcement fabrication
3. Shuttering work
4. Reinforced cement concrete
5. Masonry work
6. Wood work
7. Plastering work
8. Flooring work
9. Glazing work
10. Roof treatment work
11. Painting work
B. PEST CONTROL TREATMENT
C. SECURITY EQUIPMENT WORK
D. SANITARY AND PLUMBING
WORK:
1. Water supply
2. Drainage work
3. Fittings and fixtures
E. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
WORK
F. AIRCONDITIONING WORK
G. OTHER TRADES
Details of location where
work is done
Approximate
quantity executed
81
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 9
____Performa of monthly progress report, Receipt of materials at site, Perform of cube test
RECEIPT OF MATERIALS AT SITE
Sl No.
Description
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cement (M.T)
Mild Steel M.T)
Tor Steel (M.T)
Coarse
aggregate
(cu.mt.)
Fine aggregate
(cum)
Teak wood
(cum)
Bricks (Nos.)
Tiles (Nos.)
5.
6.
7.
8.
Opening
balance
Sl
No.
Description of work
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
General Building Works.
Security equipment work.
Pest control treatment work.
Sanitary & Plumbing work.
Electrical work.
Air conditioning work.
Other works.
Receipt
during
month
Date of
commence
ment
Consumpt
ion during
month
Due date of
completion
Closing
balance
Total
quantity
received
till date
Percentage progress
achieved.
82
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 9
____Performa of monthly progress report, Receipt of materials at site, Perform of cube test
PROFORMA OF CONCRETE CUBE TEST REPORT
1. Name of the Project___________________________________________
2. Name of the Contractor________________________________________
Sr.
No.
Date of
casting
1
2
Identification Mark and location
in which the representative
concrete is placed
3
Crushing strength as
on the 28th day
7
Mix
proportion
Date of
testing
Crushing
strength as on
the date of test
6
4
5
Average crushing strength
(Average of 3 companion cubes)
as on the 28th day
8
Remarks
Signature of the site
Engineer
9
10
83
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 10
____________Performa of measurement book, Running Bill, Secured advance, Certificate
PROFORMA OF MEASUREMENT BOOK
1st page:
NATIONAL LAW UNIVERSITY ODISHA
………………….office,
Measurement Book No.
(Pages 1 to ………………….)
This book is issued to Shri……………………………………………………………….
Signature of Vice Chancellor , NLUO
Certified that this book contains………………………pages
Signature of the official
To whom the book is issued
MEASUREMENT BOOK
Item
Description
No.
Engineer NLUO .
Checking/Test checking Engineer
PAGES NOS. 1 TO ……………
Measurements.
Quantity
Remarks
No.L B D/H
PMC/Consultant.
Contractor
Date of checking/Test checking
NOTE:
Checking and test checking pertains to items wherever initialed.
84
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 10
____________Performa of measurement book, Running Bill, Secured advance, Certificate
I - RUNNING A/C BILL
i) Name of Contractor/Agency
:
ii) Name of work
:
iii) Sr. No. of this bill
:
iv) No. and date of previous bill
:
v) Reference to Agreement No.
:
vi) Date of written order to commerce
:
vii) Date of completion as per agreement
:
Sr no.
Item Description
Unit
Rate (Rs.)
1
2
3
4
Upto previous R/A Bill
Qt. Amount (Rs.)
6
Upto date (Gross)
Qty. Amount (Rs.)
7
Present Bill
Qty. Amount (Rs.)
8
As per tender
Qty. Amount (Rs.)
5
Remark
9
Note: 1) If part rate is allowed for any item, it should be
indicated with reasons for allowing such a rate.
2. If adhoc payment is made, it should be mentioned
specifically.
-------------------------Net value since previous
bill
85
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 10
____________Performa of measurement book, Running Bill, Secured advance, Certificate
II -ACCOUNT OF SECURED ADVANCE, IF ADMISSIBLE ON MATERIALS HELD
AT SITE BY THE CONTRACTOR
No.
1
Item
2
Quantity
3
Unit
4
Amount
5
Remarks
7
Total value of materials at site
Secured Advance @ …………………….% of above value
B
CERTIFIED (I) That the materials mentioned above have actually been brought by the
contractor to the site of the work and no advance on any quantity of any of this item is
outstanding on their security, (ii) that the materials are of imperishable nature and are all
required by the contractor for use in the work in connection with the items for which rates
of finished work have been agreed up on.
Dated signature of Site Engineer
NLUO Preparing the bill
Designation_____________
Dated signature of N.L.U.O’s PMCs
-----------------------------------------------------(Name of the PMCs)
Dated signature of Contractor.
86
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 10
____________Performa of measurement book, Running Bill, Secured advance, Certificate
CERTIFICATE
The measurements on the basis of which the above entries for the Running Bill No.____ were
made have been taken jointly on _________________________________________
and are recorded at pages________________to _____________________of measurement book
No.__________________.
_______________________
_____________________ _________________
Signature and date of
Signature and date of PMC’s Signature and date of
Contractor
site engineer.
The work recorded in the above-mentioned measurements has been done at the site satisfactorily
as per tender Tendered drawings, conditions and specifications.
PMC/Consultant.
N.L.U.O’s Engineer
87
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 11
Form for payment of advance on materials, Memorandum for payment, Performa of site
order book
PROFORMA OF UNDERTAKING IN CONNECTION WITH PAYMENT OF
ADVANCE ON MATERIALS BROUGHT BY THE CONTRACTOR TO THE SITE
The undertaking made this …………….day of ………….2012………………between the National Law
University ODISHA ,………………………………………and having its …………………Office at
……………………………………………………(hereinafter called the NLUO) of the one part and
………………………………..(Hereinafter called the contractors of the other part.)
The NLUO and the Contractors have entered into an Agreement date………………….hereinafter called
as the said agreement and in terms of Clause No……………………….of the conditions in the
agreement, the NLUO has agreed that the Contractors will be paid an advance of 75% of the cost of
non-perishable building materials brought by the Contractor to the site for consumption in the works at
the discretion of the NLUO.
The Contractors have applied to the NLUO that they be allowed advance on the security of materials
absolutely belonging to them and brought by them to the site of work. The NLUO has agreed to do so on
the terms and conditions hereinafter set out.
Now this letter of Undertaking witnesses that in consideration of the side agreement and in consideration
of the amount paid/payable to the Contractors by the NLUO and/or any further advances as may be
made to the contractors as aforesaid, the Contractors hereby agree with the NLUO and undertake as
under
i)
The amount advanced by the NLUO to the Contractors as aforesaid and all or any further
sum or sums advanced as aforesaid shall be employed by the Contractors in or towards
expediting the execution of the said works and for no other purpose whatsoever
ii)
That the materials which have been offered to and accepted by the NLUO as security are
absolutely the Contractor’s own property and free from encumbrances of any kind and
the Contractor will not make any application for or receive a further advance on the
security of materials which are not absolutely his own property and free from
encumbrances of any kind and the Contractors indemnify the NLUO against all claims to
any materials in respect of which an advance has been made to them as aforesaid.
iii)
That the materials on the security of which any further advance or advances may
hereafter be made as aforesaid (hereinafter called the said materials) shall be used by the
Contractors solely in the execution of the said works in accordance with the directions of
Vice Chancellor, NLUO of the NLUO and in accordance with the terms of the said
agreement.
iv)
That the contractors shall take at their own cost all the necessary and adequate
arrangement for the proper watch, safe custody and protection against all risks of the said
88
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 11
Form for payment of advance on materials, Memorandum for payment, Performa of site
order book
materials and that until used in construction as aforesaid. The said materials shall remain
at the site of the said works in the Contractor’s custody and on their own responsibility
and shall at all times be open to Inspection to the
NLUO’s Engineers or any officer authorized by the NLUO. In the event of the materials
or any part thereof being stolen destroyed or damaged, the Contractor will further replace
the same with other materials of like quality or repair and make good the same as
required by the NLUO.
v)
That the said materials shall not any account be removed from the site of the said works
except with the written permission of the Vice Chancellor, NLUO the NLUO.
v)
That the advances shall be repayable in full when or before the Contractors receive
payment from the NLUO of the price payable to them for the said works under the terms
and the provisions of the said agreement provided that if any intermediate payments are
made to the Contractors on account of work done, then on occasion of each such
payment, the NLUO will be at liberty to make as recovery from the Contractor’s bill for
such payment by deducting there from the value of the said materials then actually used
in the construction and in respect of which recovery has not been made deviously, the
value for this purpose being determined in respect of each description of materials as the
rates at which the amounts of the advances made under these presents were calculated.
vi)
That if the contractors shall at any time make any default in the performance or observance
in any respect of any of the terms and provisions of the said agreement or of these
presents, the total amount of advance or advances that may still be owing to the NLUO,
shall immediately, on the happening of such default, be repayable by the Contractors to
the NLUO together with interest thereon at 12% per annum from the date or respective
dates of such advance or advances to the date of repayment and with all costs, charges,
damages and expenses incurred by the NLUO in or for the recovery thereof or the
enforcement of this security or otherwise by reason of the default of the Contractors and
the contractors hereby covenant and agree with the NLUO to repay and pay the same
respectively to him accordingly.
vii)
That the contractors hereby charge all the said materials with the repayment to the NLUO
of the sum or sums advanced as aforesaid and all costs, charges, damages and expenses
payable under these presents PROVIDED ALWAYS and it is hereby agreed and declared
that notwithstanding anything in the said agreement and without prejudice to the powers
contained therein if and whenever the covenant for payment and repayment hereinabove
contained shall become enforceable and the money owing shall not be p aid in
accordance therewith, the NLUO may at any time thereafter adopt all or any of the
following courses as he may deem best:
a) Seize and utilize the said materials or any part thereof in the completion of the
89
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 11
Form for payment of advance on materials, Memorandum for payment, performa of site
order book
said works on behalf of the contractors in accordance with the provisions in that
behalf contained in the said agreement debiting the contractor with the actual cost of
such completion and the amount due in respect of advances under these presents and
crediting the Contractors with the value of work done as if he had carried it out in
accordance with the said agreement and at the rates thereby provided. If the balance is
against the Contractors, they are bound to pay the same to the NLUO on demand.
b) Remove and sell by public auction the seized materials or any part thereof and out of
the moneys arising from the sale, retain all the sums aforesaid repayable or payable to
the NLUO under these presents and pay over the surplus (if any) to the Contractor.
c) Deduct all or any part of the money owing out of the Security Deposits or any sum
due to the Contractor under the said agreements
viii)
That except in the event of such default on the part of the contractors as aforesaid, no
interest shall be payable on the said advance.
ix)
That in the event on any conflict between the provisions of these presents and the said
agreement, the provisions of these presents shall prevail and in the event of any dispute or
difference arising over the construction of effect of these presents the settlement of which
has not been herein before expressly provided for the same shall be referred to the
officer-in-charge, NLUO, whose decision shall be final and no appeal shall lie against his
decision before any court, arbitrator or authority.
x)
The provision of this undertaking shall be deemed to be supplemental to the said
agreement.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Contractors have set their hands to these presents the day and
year first hereinabove written.
Signed, sealed and delivered by the said contractors in the presence of
Witness:
Signature
Name
Address
Witness:
Signature
Name
Address
90
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 11
Form for payment of advance on materials, Memorandum for payment, Performa of site
order book
IV. MEMORANDUM FOR PAYMENT
R.A BILL No. _________________________
Total amount due since previous bill
(D) (A+B)*
Rs.______________
2.
P.V.A. on account of escalation in
price of steel, cement and other
materials and labour as detailed in
separate statements enclosed
Rs._____________
3. DEDUCTIONS:
(i) Secured advance paid in the previous
R.A. bill
Rs.______________
(ii) Retention money on value of works
as per accepted tenders : upto date
amount
Rs.______________
Less : Already recovered
(-) Rs.______________
Balance to be recovered
Rs.______________ Rs.______________
(iii Mobilization advance, if any
(a) Outstanding amount
(Principal + interest) as on date
Rs.______________
(b) To be recovered in this bill
Rs.______________
(iv) Any other departmental material cost
to be recovered as per contract, if
any
Rs.______________
(v) Any other departmental service
charges to be recovered if any, as per
contract (water, power etc.) Enclose
statement
Rs.______________
Total deduction as per contractor
Rs.______________ (-) Rs.______________
Net amount payable as per contract (E-F)
Rs.______________ (G)
1.
(Rupees ……………………………………….) in words
The bill amounting to ……………………………………………… (both figures and words) has
been scrutinized by me after due test check of the measurement of works as required and is
recommended for payment.
Dated signature of N.L.U.O’s Engineer
In charge of the project
91
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 11
Form for payment of advance on materials, Memorandum for payment, Performa of site
order book
STATUTORY DEDUCTIONS:
1.
2.
Total amount due (E)
Less : Income Tax payable
NET PAYABLE :
Rs.______________
Rs.______________
Rs.______________
The figure given in the Memorandum for Payment has been verified and the bill passed for
payment ………………………………………………………………………….. (words and
figures).
Date : …………………………..
Signature of NLUO Officer
*For A & B refer Running Bill.
92
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 11
Form for payment of advance on materials, Memorandum for payment, Performa of site
order book
PROFORMA OF SITE ORDER BOOK
Name of the work ______________________________
Date of Commencement _________________________
Sr.
No.
Remarks/
Instructions of
the Site
Engineer/ PMC
Dated Initials
of Site
Engineer/
PMC
1.
2.
3.
Initials of the
Contractor for
having
received the
instructions
4.
Action
taken
with date
Dated
initials of
the Site
Engineer
Remarks of the
PMCs
PMC/NLUO
Officials
5.
6.
7.
93
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 12
Form for applications by contractor for extension of time, Performa of hindrance register
PROFORMA FOR APPLICATION BY CONTRACTOR
FOR EXTENSION OF TIME
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Name of the Contractor
Name of the work as given in the agreement
Agreement WO
Tender amount
Date of commencement of work
Period allowed for completion of work
Date of completion as per agreement
Period for which extension of time has been given
Date
a)
b)
c)
Month
Year
1st extension vide N.L.U.O’s
Letter No.
2nd extension vide N.L.U.O’s
Letter No.
3rd extension vide N.L.U.O’s
Letter No.
9. Reasons for which extensions have been previously given (copies of the previous
applications should be attached)
10. Period for which extension is applied for and the reasons thereof including hindrances,
time for extra work assigned, if any etc.
Signature of Contractor
94
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 12
Form for applications by contractor for extension of time, Performa of hindrance register
PROFORMA OF HINDERANCE REGISTER
Name of work
Name of contractor
Agreement No.
Sr.
No.
Nature of
hindrance
1.
2.
:
:
:
Date of state of work
Period of completion
Date of completion
Date of
occurrence of
hindrance
3.
Date of which
hindrance was
removed
4.
:
:
:
Period of
hindrance
Signature
SE / PE
Remarks
5.
6.
7.
SE = Site Engineer/ NLUO
PE = Project Engineer (PMC/ PMC)
95
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
___________________________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF MATERIALS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Materials shall be of the approved quality best obtainable. A list of materials of approved
brand and manufacturer is indicated in the annexure. Testing of materials of approved
brand may have to be done at the discretion of PMC & NLUO.
In case, some reason or other materials are required to be obtained from any manufacturer
other than those listed, then prior approval from PMCs will be necessary supported by
relevant test certificates qualifying the required standard. Further tests as directed by the
N.L.U.O's Engineer shall also be carried out by the Contractor at their own cost, if
required.
Sample of all materials shall be got approved by Employee/PMC before placing order &
the approved sample shall be carefully preserved in an appropriate manner at the site office
for verification from time to time.
For standard bought out item, the size manufactured by the firms listed shall prevail when
there is discrepancy in the size mentioned in the schedule without any financial adjustment.
Materials shall be tested in any approved Testing laboratory conforming to the
requirements and frequency indicated in the list of "Mandatory Tests". The test certificate
in original shall be submitted to the Site Engineer and entire charges connected with testing
including charges for requested tests if ordered shall be borne by the Contractor.
It shall be obligatory for the Contractor to furnish certificate, from manufacturer or the
material supplier, that the work has been carried out by using their material and as per their
recommendations.
All materials supplied by the NLUO/ any other specialist firms shall be properly stored and
the Contractor shall be responsible for its safe custody until they are required on the works
and till the completion of work.
All equipment & facilities for carrying out field tests on materials shall be provided by the
Contractor without any extra cost .
8.
EARTH FILLING:
8.0
shall be selected earth suitable for filling as approved by the PMC/NLUO and preferable
free from building rubbish or organic decomposed material. They shall be obtained either
from excavation or brought from outside, as specified in the schedule of items.
Black
Cotton soil shall not be used for filling.
8.1
Filling shall be done in layers not exceeding 200 mm in depth. Earth used shall be free
from roots; grass and rubbish and all lumps and clods exceeding 80 mm in any direction
shall be broken down. Each layer shall be watered with optimum moisture content to
achieve 90% consolidation. Consolidation shall be done by mechanical rammers or roller
of minimum half-ton weight. Where the roller cannot work, wooden or steel rammers of
seven to ten kg weight with flat base of 20 sqcm or 20 cm dia should be used. Labour for
ramming shall be atleast 1 for every 6 diggers. In embankment or banking, every third
layer of earth shall be rolled and consolidated with power roller of minimum eight-ton
weight.
96
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
8.2
Section – 13
CEMENT :
Cement shall comply in every respect with the requirements of the latest publication of I.S.
269 / I.S.455. The use of cement other than ordinary Portland cement / Blast furnace slag
cement may be allowed with prior approval of PMC & Employee if not mentioned in the
approved list of materials. * (Not less than 43 grade of approved make)
The weight of cement shall be taken as 1440 kg per cum (90 Lbs / cft) cement shall be
measured by weight and in whole bags and each undisturbed and sealed 50 kg Bag being
considered equivalent to 35 liters (1.2cft.) in volume. Care should be taken to see that each
bag contains full quantity of cement. When part bag is required cement shall be taken by
weight or measured in measuring boxes.
No other make of cement but that approved by the N.L.U.O's Engineer/PMC will be
allowed on works. Test certificates to show that cement is fully complying the
specifications shall be submitted by the Contractor to the N.L.U.O's Engineer /
PMC. Notwithstanding this cement brought on site shall be retested in an approved testing
laboratory every 30 M.T. or part thereof to ensure quality of materials used. In case
manufactures test certificate is not submitted the frequency of test shall be reduced to 30
M.T. or part thereof Cement ordered for retesting shall not be used for any work pending
results of retest.
Cement shall be restored in order to prevent deterioration by dampness or intrusion of
foreign matters. It shall be stored in such a way as to allow the removal & used. Cement
deteriorated & / or clodded shall not be used on work but shall be removed at once from
the site. However, the N.L.U.O’s Engineer/PMC whose decision in this regard shall be
final and binding shall determine slowing use of warehouse set cement. The site Engineer
at site will maintain cement register.
8.3
FINE AGGREGATE :
Sand shall be from natural source or crushed stone screenings, if allowed chemically inert,
clear, hard, durable and well graded and free from excessive dirterious materials. The silt
content shall be within 8%. If it excess washing shall be done in an approved manner to
bring it within allowable limit. Sand will be used as per relevant I.S. specification.
The fine aggregate shall be stacked carefully on a clean hard dry surface so that it will not
mixed up with deleterious foreign materials. If such a surface is not available a platform of
planks or corrugated torn sheets or brick floor or a thin layer of lean concrete shall be
prepared.
8.4
COARSE AGGREGATE:
shall consist of crushed or broken stone 95% of which shall be retained on 4.75mm IS test
Sieve. It shall be obtained from crushing Granite, Quartzite, Trap, Basalt or similar
approved stones. Coarse aggregate shall be chemically inert when mixed with cement and
shall be roughly cubical in shape and free from soft friable, thin laminated or flaky pieces.
97
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
8.5
Section – 13
STEEL REINFORCEMENT :
MILD STEEL BARS
Mild steel reinforcement bar shall conform to I.S. 226-1962 "Standard quality " or I.S.
432-1966 Grade. Other qualities of Steel shall not be accepted.
8.6
HIGH STRENGTH DEFORMED BARS :
Where of deformed high strength reinforcement bars are specified, the contractor use one
of the following :
a.
b.
"Tor steel" as per I.S. 1786-1956
For a total requirement of less than 10 Mt. Steel may be obtained from recognized
dealers with prior approval of PMC. It will be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor shall try to obtain test certificate from the manufacturers. Over and above
the Contractor at his own cost shall arrange to get materials tested from any
recognized govt. laboratory to ensure & satisfy the PMC/ Owner regarding
compliance of the materials to relevant Indian standard Codes. Sources of supply
once approved by the
PMC/Owner shall not be changed without their prior consent. Tests to be conducted
as per list of mandatory tests.
8.7
BRICKS :
The Bricks shall be class designation of 75 kg/cm2 of regular and uniform size, shape and
color, uniformly well burnt throughout but not over burnt. They shall be free from cracks
or other flaws.
They shall show a fine grained, uniform homogenous and dense texture on facture and be
free from lumps of lime laminations, cracks, air holes, soluble salts causing efflorescence
or other defects which may in any way impair their strength, durability, appearance
usefulness for the purpose intended. They shall not have any part under burnt. They shall
not break even thrown on the ground on their flat face in a saturated condition from a
height of 600cm.
The size of brick shall (250mm x 125 x 75mm) or (230mm x 115mm x 65mm) only.
Tolerance on dimensions up to ( + or -) 8 % shall be permitted.
After immersion in water, absorption by weight shall not exceed 20 percent of the dry
weight of the brick when tested according to I.S. No -1077-1970.
The brick shall have a minimum average compressive strength of 75 kg/cm2 as specified in
the nomenclature of the item.
The bricks to be used for the work shall be approved by the Owner/ PMCs before hand.
98
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
8.8
Section – 13
WATER :
Water for mixing Cement/lime/ Surkhi mortar or concrete shall not be salty or brackish and
shall be clean, reasonable clean and free from objectionable quantities of slit traces of oil,
acid and injurious alkali, salts, organic matter and other deleterious materials which will
either weaken the mortar or concrete on cause efflorescence or attack the steel in
reinforced cement concrete water shall be obtained from sources approved by the PMC
portable water is generally considered satisfactory for mixing and curing concrete, mortar,
masonry etc. Where water other than Municipal source is used this shall be tested in an
approved testing laboratory to establish its suitability. All charges connected herewith shall
be borne by the Contractor.
8.9
TIMBER :
Unless otherwise specified, timber for carpentry / joinery works of all description shall be
Sal / Piasal or equivalent hard wood, seasoned naturally or artificially as indicated in
Schedule. These shall be free from knots, shakes, fissure, flaws, sub-cracks and other
defects to a reasonable extend. PMC's decision in this regard is final and binding. The
moisture content for timber will be used as per relevant I.S. specification normally should
not exceed for the following limits :i)
Timber for frames
:
12%
ii) Timber for Planking/Shutters etc.
:
8%
In measuring cross-sectional dimensions of timber or the frames/ shutters styles, rails or a
panel members, tolerances up to 1.5mm shall be allowed for each planed surface.
All fully fabricated timber shall be seasoned at site of work for a period of not less than
two months to allow for any shrinkage that may take place unless sit kiln seasoned.
The decision regarding acceptance/ rejection of material on the basis of aforesaid norms
lies with the PMC/ Owner which is final and binding on the Contractor.
8.10 FLUSH DOORS :
All flush doors shall be I.S.I. stamped (confirming to IS-2202, Pt-1) and obtained from
approved manufacturer as listed shall be solid core exterior grade unless otherwise
specified.
8.11 TEAK WOOD PANNELED SHUTTERS
Teak wood door shutter shall generally conform to standard laid in I.S. 1002 or the latest
revision for requirements of materials, construction workmanship and shall be of specified
thickness and of 1st class C.P. teak wood or as specified of approved design with stiles, top,
bottom and lock rail generally as per drawing. Wherever shown, each panel shall be in a
99
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
single width piece, but when two or more pieces have to be used and are permitted, all of
them shall be of equal width and shall be jointed with a tongue and groove joint with
chamfered edges glued together and reinforced with metal dowels.
8.12 ALUMINIUM DOORS/WINDOWS :
Aluminum doors and windows shall be obtained from approved manufacturer. Aluminum
sections for fabricating frame work doors, windows, jallies, etc. shall be of extruded
sections conforming to I.S 1948, 1949 or latest edition or as per Tendered drawings or as
manufacturer by Indian Aluminum co. Ltd. or approved equivalent. The alloy used shall
conform to I.S designation H.E. 9 WP of I.S. 733.
8.13 FLOOR TILES :
Plain cement tiles, vitrified tiles shall be compacted by mechanical vibrator and
hydraulically pressed and shall be of choice shade & shall have desired pattern of chip
distribution. The size and thickness of tiles shall be as approved by the N.L.U.O's
Engineer. For neutral shade tiles, gray cement shall be used.
8.14 CERAMIC TILES :
White or colored Ceramic tiles shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer and shall
be flat an true to shape. The tiles shall be free from cracks, crazing, spots, chipped edges
and liners. The Glazing and color shall be uniform shade and unless otherwise specified the
tile shall be as per manufacturer's specification.
8.15 MARBLE :
Marble slabs for flooring, dado veneering etc shall be of the kinds specialized in the item
such as white of pink Makrana, Chittor black . Bhansalana black, jaisalmer baroda green;
atiaalka (pepsu ) gray etc. Marble from which the homogenous in texture. free from cracks
decay weathering and flaws .Before starting the work the contractor shall be get the
sample of marble slab approved by the PMC and NLUO .
The Slabs shall be machine polished.
8.16 KOTA /GRANITE :
Shall be of selected, qualified ,hard, sound, dense , homogenous texture ,free from cracks,
decay weathering and flaw stone slabs shall be approved by the PMC and NLUO. They
shall be machine polished where specified and shall conform to the required sizes .
Thickness shall be as specified item .
8.16 A: SAND STONE:
100
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
i ) Providing and fixing 50mm sand stone work of approved shade in areas of tread of
gallery in cement mortar 1 : 3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) including cutting, polishing and
required moulding with white cement mortar 1:2 (1 white cement : 2 stone dust) with an
admixture of pigment matching the stone shade etc., complete as per the direction of the
Engineer-in-charge.
ii) Providing and fixing 50mm thick sand stone as approved sample in cladding in
specification sizes as per drawing of approved coloured and quality for external walls
columns and wherever specification with DRY cladding using S.S angle and stainless
steel clamps of required thick of grade 304 of approved make, anchor blots /dash
fasteners, necessary adhesive for grouting of clamps in stone maintenance groves in stone
slabs as per drawing and filling the same with non-staining , non-streaking silicon joint
sealants of approved make including baker rod dairying, drilling, anchoring, grouting,
scaffolding edge polishing, chamfering etc. complete. as per the direction of the
Engineer-in-charge.
8.17 GLAZING :
Glass used for glazing shall be sheet glazier unless otherwise specified clear or obscured
as directed by the PMC /NLUO of best approved quality ,free from flaws speck, bubbles
and shall be 2.9mm thick up to 0.6 x 0.60 m size it shall be 5.5mm thick unless otherwise
specified in the schedule of quantities.
8.18 U.P.V.C RAIN WATER PIPES :
UPVC (working pressure 4 Kg. per sq cm) rain water pipes confirming to IS : 4985
including jointing with seal ring conforming to IS : 5382 leaving 10 mm gap for thermal
expansion
8.19 PAINTS :
Enamel paint, Acrylic emulsion paint , anti-corrosive primer , read lead water proof,
external weather coat shall be from an approved manufacture as listed Ready mixed paint
shall be from an approved a manufacture without any admixture shall be used expect for
addition of thinner if recommended by the manufacturer.
8.20 CEMENT ADMIXTURES :
Cement admixture are to be obtained from manufacture with the explicit approval of the
PMC the use admixture contain calcium chloride, fluorides, nitrates and sulphates is
prohibited The PMC's decision as regards use of admixture of admixture is final and
binding .
101
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
8.21 HARDWARE FITING :
The hardware fitting iron or aluminum /brass shall be obtained from approved
manufacturer and invariable is ISI stamped the M.S. iron fitting are to be oxidized &
aluminum fittings anodized in natural color mat satin finish even if not otherwise
specified.
8.22 POLYSULPHIDE SEALANT :
Polysulphide sealant should be obtained from approved manufacture as listed .
8.23 MORTAR
Cement mortar to be prepared in accordance with IS:2250. It shall be made of cement and
sharp coarse sand and shall be made in small quantities so as to be used within 30
minutes. The cement and sand in the required proportion., and classification shall be first
mixed dry thoroughly and then water added and mixed to a sufficiently thick consistency
as required by the Engineer. No left over mortar shall be used. Mortar which has partially
set shall not be retempered by mixing additional material or water.
The unit of measurement for cement shall be of a bag of cement weighing 50 Kg. and
shall be taken as 0.035 cu.m. Other ingredients in specified proportion shall be measured
in boxes of 25 x 35 x 40 cm size. Sand shall be measured on the basis of dry volume. In
case of damp sand, its quantities shall be increased suitably to allow for bulkage
8.24
SAND
This shall be dry coarse sand of approved quality conforming to IS:383. 100% of the sand
shall pass through I.S. sieve No. 240 and not more than 15% to 35% through Sieve
No.30. Sand shall have a fineness modulus between 2.1 to 2. Sand shall be clean angular
free from dust, clay or any other impurities. Percentage of clay or total impurities shall
not be more than 5% by weight.
Sand for use in masonry mortar shall conform to IS:2116 including grading. Sand for
use in plaster shall conform to IS:1542 including grading.
8.25
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR
Supplying ,fitting and fixing of Automatic sliding door operator - supply of automatic
sliding door Set 1 operator of approved make as per approved Tendered drawings.
Compliant with European standards and produced according to the guidelines for poweroperated windows, doors and gates, BGR 232, the UVV and the VDE regulations. TÜV
design tested, tested according to the low voltage guidelines, fulfils DIN 18650 standards.
The track profile should be separate from the main profile for enabling reduction in
vibration insulation.
102
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
8.26
Section – 13
AUTOMATIC ALUMINIUM PORFORATED ROLLING SHUTTER
Supplying, fitting and fixing of perforated rolling shutters of 1. 77 mm. 1 layer slate of
Aluminum material, Perforated with honeycomb holes with approved colour white /
beige, Rubber insert between slates,80 mm. guide rail with brushed inserts, Internal
tubular motor, Remote controlled operation as well as manual opening in case of power
failure, Bottom slate with rubber, Nylon guide roller, Metal cover at the top, Manual
electrical switch, Thickness => at least 1 mm., Surface treating with Powder coating
and Tubular Motor of required specification.
8.27
STAINLESS STEEL SLIDING GATE
Supplying and fixing of stainless steel sliding gate of size L-3mtr. Height -2.4 mtr with
outer frame made of 75 x 75 mm sq. pipe S.S 304 grade 16 swing, vertical support made
by 50 x 50 mm.sq. pipe S.S 304 grade 16 swing, horizontal crossings made by 40 x 40
mm sq.pipe S.S.304 grade 16 swing complete set with locking system, S.S guider for
tubeless castor wheel with all necessary fittings.etc
8.28
STAINLESS STEEL OPENABLE GATE
Supplying and fixing of stainless steel open able gate of size L-1.2mtr. Height -1.8 mtr
with outer frame made of 75 x 75 mm sq. pipe S.S 304 grade 16 swing, vertical support
made by 50 x 50 mm.sq. pipe S.S 304 grade 16 swing, horizontal crossings made by 40 x
40 mm sq. pipe S.S.304 grade 16 swing complete set fitted with heavy duty cylindrical
hinges and locking system, with all necessary fittings.etc
8.28
POWDER COATED M.S. TUBULAR SECTION
Supply and installation of Aerofoil fins made up of aluminium extrusions with a wall thickness ≥
1.8 mm. The fin ends are closed with end caps made from aluminium plates 3 to 4 mm thickness.
The entire system is fixed to a sub frame of 50mm x 50mm powder coated MS Tubular section
complete
103
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
SECTION - I
EARTH WORK
1.0 INDIAN STANDARDS
All relevant Standards as specified elsewhere in this Volume are applicable.
Indian Standards to be followed are :
1)
IS 1498
Classification and identification of soils for
general engineering purpose.
2)
IS 3764
Safety code for excavation Work
3)
IS 4081
Safety code for blasting and related drilling
operation.
4)
IS 6313
Part –1 Code of practice for anti-termite measures in
buildings : constructional measures.
Part –2 Code of practice for anti-termite measures in
buildings : Pre constructional chemical treatment measures.
5)
1.1
SP 27
Hand book of method of measurement of buildings
works.
GENERAL :
The excavation will generally refer to open excavation of foundation area wet or dry in all
sorts of soils at any depth, unless otherwise specified except hard rocks for which separate
provisions are made.
1.2
EXAMINE THE SITE :
The Contractor shall visit and ascertain the nature of the ground to be excavated and the
work to be done and shall accept all responsibility for the cost of the work involved.
1.3
SETTING OUT :
The Contractor shall clear the entire site of jungles, bushes, grass, vegetation growth &
trees & generally level the site and set out the center line of the building or other involved
works & get the same approved from Owner/ PMC. It shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to install substantial references marks, bench marks etc. and maintain them as
long as required by the Owner /PMC. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for
proper setting out, alignment, elevation and dimension of each and all parts of the works.
104
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
1.4
Section – 13
GROUND LEVEL AND SITE LEVEL :
Before starting the excavation the existing ground level of the entire plot shall be taken by
the Contractor in consultation with the Owner/PMC and a proper record of these levels
kept, which the Contractor & the NLUO/PMC shall jointly sign.
1.5
EXCAVATION
Excavation shall be carried out in any type of soil met at the site for items and to the
lines, levels and contours as directed by the Engineer
Excavated materials shall not be deposited within 1.5M from edge of the excavation.
Suitable type of shoring and strutting, wherever necessary, shall be provided to avoid any
collapse of earth or cutting in slope as per site requirement and as directed by the
Engineer.
Pits shall not be excavated to final founding level unless concreting work is imminent.
Last 15 cms. shall be excavated prior to providing, blinding layer with lean concrete (M5,
unless otherwise specified in drawing). The contractor shall not undertake any concreting
in foundation until the excavated pit is approved by the Engineer.
If any bottom of excavation is left exposed and has become deleteriously affected by
atmosphere or water, it shall be dewatered and excavated to sound base, and shall be
filled up to the required level with lean concrete of grade M-15 at the cost of Contractor.
Similarly excess excavation than the required level also to be filled up with lean concrete
at the cost of Contractor.
Any obstacle, encountered during excavation shall be reported to the Engineer and shall
be dealt as directed. Removal of buried piping or cables shall not be done without prior
permission of Engineer and contractor shall provide all measures to protect such lines.
Cost of such protective measures are deemed to have been included in the unit rates for
excavation.
The contractor shall take adequate protective measures to ensure that the excavation
operations do not damage the adjoining structures or dislocate underground services.
Excavated material shall be deposited within radius of 50M or as specified in the item of
work. Selected excavated material, on approval by Engineer shall be back-filled in layers
of maximum 15 cms. Watering, compacting shall be done as specified in method of
backfilling.
The Contractor shall arrange to cut or transplant any trees coming in the alignment of the
excavation or other work after obtaining prior approval and complying with all
requirements of the concerned authority and remove the same wherever required. Unless
otherwise stated no separate payment shall be made for the same.
The Contractor shall provide suitable drainage arrangements to prevent surface water
entering foundation pits. The contractor shall engage pumps or other approved means to
keep excavation free of water.
105
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
In cases, where during excavation, side slips occur, for reasons not attributable to the
Contractor or in cases of pumping out water accumulated due to unforeseen reasons like
watermains / drains broken accidentally by other agencies, springs etc., suitable payment
shall be made separately at the rates mutually agreed.
Lowering of water table by well point system or other such special measures shall be paid
separately against relevant item in the B.O.Q. or by mutual agreement.
1.6
SOIL CLASSIFICATION
PAYMENT
FOR
PURPOSE
OF
MEASUREMENT
AND
All materials to be excavated shall be classified by Engineer, into one of the following
classes and shall be paid for at the rate approved for that particular class of material. No
distinction shall be made whether the material is dry, moist or wet. The decision of
Engineer regarding the classification of the material shall be final and binding on
Contractor and not be a subject matter of any appeal or arbitration.
Any earth work shall be classified under any of the following categories; in accordance
with IS-1200 part I.
a.
Ordinary soils
b.
These shall include all kinds of soils containing kankar, sand, silt, hard and soft
murrum and/or shingle, gravel, clay, loam, peat, ash, shale, etc.. which can
generally be excavated by spade, pick axes and shovel, and which is not classified
under "soft and decomposed" and "hard rock" defined below.
This shall also include embedded rock, rubble not longer than 500 mm in one
direction and not more than 300 mm in the other two directions. Removal of such
ordinary soils by mechanical excavators, shovels, draglines etc. shall be payable
at the rate for 'Ordinary soils'.
Soft and Decomposed Rock
This shall include rock, boulders, slag, chalk, slate, hard mieacschist, laterite and
all other materials which in the opinion of Engineer is rock, but does not need
blasting and could be removed with picks, hammer, crow bars, wedges and
pneumatic breaking equipment. The mere fact that Contractor resorts to blasting
for reasons of his own, shall not qualify for classification under 'hard rock'. This
shall also include excavation in macadam and tarred roads and pavements. This
shall also include rock boulders longer than 500 mm in one direction and not
more than 500 mm in any one of the other two directions.
Hard Rock
106
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
This shall include all rock occurring in large continuous masses, which cannot be
removed except by blasting for loosening it. Hardened varieties of rock with or
without veins and secondary minerals, which, in the opinion of engineer require
blasting shall be considered as hard rock. Boulders of rock occurring in such sizes
and not classified under (a) and (b) above shall also be classified as hard rock.
This will also include reinforced cement concrete (reinforcement to be cut
through, but not separated from concrete).
1.6
EXCAVATION AND PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION
FOR CONCRETE, OTHER HARD ROCK :
Excavation shall include removal of all materials of whatever nature, including moorum,
soft rock, boulders, old foundations, concrete, asphalt or paved surface etc. at all depths &
whether wet for dry necessary the construction of foundation & sub-structure including
mass excavation for underground reservoir, cess pits, septic tanks etc. where applicable
exactly in accordance with lines, levels, grades and curves shown in the Tendered
drawings or as directed by the Owner/PMC, he shall at his own expenses till the extra
depth or width in cement concrete in proportion as directed by the Owner/PMC but in no
case with concrete of mix leaner than (1:4:8) cement concrete.
The Contractor shall report to the Owner/PMC when the excavations are ready to receive
concrete. No concrete shall be placed in foundations until the contractor has obtained
Owner/PMC approval. In case, the excavation is done through different strata of soil and if
the same is payable as per provision in the Schedule of Quantities the contractor shall get
the dimensions of the strata decided by the Owner/PMC for payment. if no specific
provisions is made in the Schedule of Quantities it will be presumed that excavation shall
be in all types of strata & the contractor's rate shall cover for the same which are treated as
a single entity.
After the excavation is passed by the Owner / PMC & before laying the concrete, the
Contractor shall get the depth & dimensions of excavation levels, and nature of strata (As
applicable as per Schedule of Quantities) like hard rock, soft rock etc.) measurement
recorded from the Owner/PMC.
1.7
EXCAVATION IN HARD ROCK :
Rock which is in solid beds, which can only be removed whether by blasting or by
wedging or chiseling shall be treated as hard rock. A boulder or detached rock measuring
one cubic meter or more shall also be treated as hard rock if the same cannot be removed
with blasting. wedging or chiseling.
Where hard rock is met with and blasting operations as considered necessary, the
Contractor shall intimate about the same to the PMC.
107
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
The Contractor shall obtain license from District Public Authorities for carrying out
blasting work as well as for obtaining, transporting and steering explosives as per
“explosives Rules 1940” or amended. He shall purchase the explosives, fuses detonators,
etc., only from a licensed dealer. He shall maintain the account of explosive etc. purchase
and used by him. He shall be responsible for safe custody and a proper accounting of
explosive materials. The PMC shall have access to check to store of explosives and
accounts thereof .
Blasting shall normally be done with gun power, Dynamite, Gelatin or any other high
explosive shall only be used in special cases with written permission of the PMC and
District/Public authorities concerned under the "Explosive Rules"
Blasting operations shall be carried out under supervision of a responsible representative of
the Contractor during hours to be approved in writing by the PMC/District Authorities. The
representative shall be conversant with the rules of blasting .
Proper precautions for safety of persons shall be taken red flag shall be prominently
displayed around the area to be blasted and all people work except those actually light
fuses shall be withdrawn to a safe distance of not less than 10 meters from the blast.
Blasting shall not be done within 100 meters of an existing masonry or any other kind of
structure unless special precautions are taken by heavy blanketing.
Where blasting is not practicable or prohibited, excavation shall be done by wedging or
chiseling and it shall be restricted to the quantity required to enable the necessary
foundations, etc., to be put in. In case the dimension of trenches, exceed those shown in
Tendered drawings or as directed by dimension of trenches, exceed those shown in
Tendered drawings or as directed by the PMC, the excess quantity shall not be paid for.
The item also covers bailing out sub-solid or rain water including pumping at any stage of
the work, shoring, strutting etc.
1.8
SHORING :
The sides of the excavation, if required, should be protected by shoring in such a way as is
necessary to secure them from failing in and the shoring shall be maintained in position a
long as necessary. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper design of the shoring
to hold the sides of the excavation in position and ensuring safety and injury to persons
and properties etc. The shoring shall be removed as directed after the items for which it is
required are completed
1.9
PROTECTION:
If instructed by the Owner/PMC all foundation pits and similar excavations shall be strong
fenced and marked with red lights at bring in charge of watchman to avoid accidents,
adequate protective measures shall be taken to see that the excavation does not affect or
damage adjoining structures. All measures required for the safety or the excavations, the
Contractor at his own cost shall take the people working in and near the foundation
trenches and people in the vicinity. The Contractor will be entirely responsible
108
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
for any injury or damage to property caused by his negligence or accident due to his
constructional operations.
1.10 STACKING OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS :
All materials excavated will remain to property of the Owner. The excavated materials at
first instance shall be stored as directed by the PMC/Owner and stacked appropriately by
the sides of trenches in conformity with standard safety codes before they are disposed off
and leveled within the site at locations directed by the PMC/Owner. Materials suitable and
useful for back filling or leveling of the plot or other use shall be stacked in convenient
places in such a way so as not to obstruct free movement of man, animals encroach on the
area required for constructional purposes. The cost on account of disposal within the site
will not be additionally paid for.
1.10 BACKFILLING :
All shoring and form work shall be removed after their necessity ceases & trash of any
sorts shall be cleaned out from the excavation shall be refilled to the original surface with
approved excavated materials in a layers 25.00cm, in thickness watered & rammed with
iron and wooden rammers weighing 7-8 kg., with a base of 20cm.square or 20cm.
diameter. The filling shall be done after concrete or masonry is fully set and done in such a
way as not to cause undue thrust on any part of the structure where suitable excavated
materials is to be used for refilling it shall be brought from the place where it is
temporarily stacked and used in refilling.
No excavation of foundation shall be filled or covered up until all measurements of
excavations, masonry concrete and other works below ground level are jointly recorded.
Black cotton soil shall not be used for backfilling or in plinth filling.
1.11 DEWATERING :
Rate for excavation shall include bailing or pumping out water which may accumulate in
the excavation during the progress of work whether from seepage , springs, rain or any
other means. Pumping out water shall be done in such approved manner as to preclude the
possibility of any damage to the foundation trench concrete or masonry or any damage to
the foundation trench concrete or masonry or any adjacent structure. When water is met in
foundation trenches of in tank excavations, when water is met in foundation trenches of in
tank excavations, pumping out water shall be from auxiliary pit of adequate size dug
slightly outside the building excavations. The depth of auxiliary pit shall be refilled with
approved excavated materials after the dewatering is over.
The excavation shall be kept free from water:
a.
During inspection and measurement.
b.
When concrete and/or masonry are in progress and till they come above the natural
water level and
c.
Till the Owner/PMC consider that the concrete mortar is sufficiently set.
109
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
1.12 SURPULS EXCAVATED MATERIALS :
All excavated materials certified as surplus and not useful shall be removed by the
Contractor confirming to local civic regulations from the site in an approved manner at
locations to be arrange made by him and shall be paid as a separate item as in schedule of
quantities.
The Contractor shall only undertake the item of removal of surplus excavated materials
when specific instruction in this regard has been obtained from the NLUO/ PMC.
110
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
SECTION -II
PLAIN AND REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE
1.0
INDIAN STANDARDS
All relevant Standards as specified elsewhere in this Volume are applicable.
Indian Standards to be followed are:
(1) IS 269
Specification for Ordinary and low heat, Portland cement.
(2) IS 383
Specification for Coarse and fine aggregates from natural
sources for concrete.
(3) IS 456
Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
(4) IS 460
Specification for test sieves:
(Part I, II & III)
i)
ii)
iii)
Wire cloth test service
Perforated plate test sieve
Method of examination of test sieve
(5)
IS 516
Method of test for strength of concrete
(6)
IS 1199
Method of Sampling and analysis of concrete.
(7)
IS 1489
Specification for Portland pozzolana cement
(8)
IS 1542
Specification for Sand for plaster
(9)
IS 2116
Specification for Sand for masonry mortars
(10) IS 2386
Method of test for aggregate concrete.
(Part I, II, & III)
i)
ii)
iii)
(11) IS 2646
Particle size and shape
Estimation of deleterious materials
and organic impurities
Specific gravity, density, voids,
absorption and bulking
Specification for Integral cement waterproofing
compound.
111
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
(12) IS 3025
Methods of Sampling and test (Physical and Chemical for
water used in Industry
(13) IS 3068
Specification for Broken brick (burnt clay) coarse
aggregate for use in lime concrete
(14) IS 4031
Method of Physical test for hydraulic cement
(Part i to xii)
(15) IS 4032
Method of chemical analysis for hydraulic cement.
(16) IS 6452
Specification for high Alumina cement for structure use.
(17) IS 6909
Specification for super sulphated weather
(18) IS 7861
Code of practice for extreme weather concreting
i)
Recommended practice for hot weather concreting
ii)
Recommended practice for cold weather
concreting
(19) IS 8041
Specification for Rapid hardening Portland cement.
(20) IS 8112
Specification for high strength ordinary port land cement.
(21) IS 9103
Specification for admixture for concrete.
(22) IS 11433
Specification for one part gun grade
i)
Poly sulphate based joint sealant:
general requirements.
(23) IS 12118 (part I)
Specification for two parts poly sulphate based sealant :
general requirements.
(24) IS 1343
Specification for Prestressed Design
(24) SP 23
Handbook on concrete mix
(25) SP 24
Explanatory handbook on Indian Standards code for plain
and reinforced concrete (IS 456)
112
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
(26) SP 27
Section – 13
Handbook of method of measurement of building works
Plain and reinforced cement concrete :
The provisions for Indian Standards for Plain and Reinforced concrete, mild steel, hot
rolled deformed bars, cold twisted bars etc. to be used reinforcement, cement of different
qualities, coarse and fine aggregates, water to be used in concrete and other Indian
Standards specifications should be generally applicable except where they are varied by
the requirements of these specifications. It shall be the intent o f these specifications to
ensure that all concrete placed at various locations of the job should be durable, should
wear and practically impervious to water. It should free from defects like cracking, honey
combing etc.
The Contractor under the Supervision of an Engineer shall carry out all concrete work.
I.S. code under reference should mean the latest code together with amendments in
circulations at the time of awards of the contract.
1.1
INGREDIENTS TO BE USED IN CONCRETE AND REINFORCED CONCRETE
WORK :
Ingredients to be used in concrete should confirm to the specifications as indicated under
"Technical Specification for materials" given earlier.
As regards admixture, this may be used with prior approval of PMC/ Consultant.
1.2
MIX PROPORTION : (Normal Volumetric mix)
The mix proportions shall be selected to ensure that workability of the fresh concrete is
suitable for the conditions of handling and placing, so that after compaction it surrounds all
reinforcements and completely fills the form .
The determination of the proportions of cement aggregates and water to attain the required
strength shall be made as follows for volumetric mix :-
1.2.1 TABLE - "A" :
GRADES OF CONCRETE :
1:1:2
1:1.5:3
1:2:4:
Compressive strength of 15cm Cube.
Kg/Cm2
Kg/cm2
7 day
28days
210
315
175
265
140
210
113
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
1.2.2. VOLUMETRIC MIX CONCRETE :
Volumetric mix concrete may be used for concrete of grades 1:1:2, 1:1.5:3, 1:2:4. The
Proportion of materials for volumetric mix concrete shall be in accordance with Table "B".
The Proportions of fine to coarse aggregates should be adjusted from upon limit to lower
limit progressively as the grading of the fine aggregates become finer and the maximum
size of coarse aggregates become larger. Graded coarse aggregate shall be used .
The cement content in the mix specified in Table "B" of any volumetric mix be
proportionately increased to overcome the difficulties of placement & compaction, so that
the water cement ratio as specified is not changed.
In the case of vibrated concrete, the limit specified may be suitable reduced to avoid
segregation.
The quantity of water used in the reinforced concrete work should be sufficient, but not
more than sufficient to produce a dense concrete of adequate workability for it purpose,
which will surround and properly grip all the reinforcement. Workability of concrete
should be controlled by maintaining a water content that is found to give a concrete which
is just sufficiently wet to be placed and compacted without difficulty with the means
available.
TABLE "B" PROPORTIONS FOR VOLUMATRIC MIX CONCRETE :
Grade of
Concrete
Total quantity of dry
Aggregate by mass per
cement.
be
taken as the sum of
the individual masses
of fine and Coarse
aggregate (in cum.).
1
2
1:5:10
0.70
1:4:8
1:3:6
1:2:4
1:1.5:3
0.53
0.40
0.24
0.22
Proportion of
Fine aggregate
to coarse
aggregate(By volume)
3
Generally 1:2
but subjected to an upper
of 1:1.5 and lower limit
1:2.5 on approval of site
Engineer/PMC.
Quantity
water per 100kg of
100kg of cement to
(Maximum)
litres.
4
120
90
68
64
60
114
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
1.3
Section – 13
MIXING :
Concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer. The mixer should comply with I.S. 1791.
The mixing shall be continue until there is a uniform in color and consistency. If there is a
segregation after unloading from the mixer the concrete should be one and half to two
minutes generally. In exceptional circumstances such a mechanical breakdown of mixer, or
when the quantity of concrete is very small, hand mixing may be permitted, subject to
adding 10% extra cement. When hand mixing is permitted, it should be carried out on a
water tight platform and care shall be taken to ensure that mixing is continued until the
concrete is uniform in color and consistency.
1.3.1 Workability of concrete should be controlled by direct measurement of water content and it
should be checked at frequent intervals, of nominal mix workability measured by slump
test may have the values given in Table D.
TABLE "D"
Sl.No
Type of work
When Vibrated
1.
Mass concrete in R.C.C.
foundation footings retaining
walls and road slabs.
Beams, slabs, columns
with simple reinforce
cement
Tees section with
congested reinforcement
2.5 cms. (1")
2.
3.
2.5 cms to 5 cms
(1" to 2")
5 cms to 10 cms
Note : should conditions governing slump and workability change pointing to advisability of
increased slumps, this shall be done by decreasing the amount of aggregate and not by
increasing the amount of water.
1.4
1.4.1 TRASPORTING :
Concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the form work as rapidly as possible by methods
which prevent the segregation of loss of any of the ingredient and maintain the required
workability in no case more than 30 minutes shall elapse between mixing and consolidation in
its position. During hot and cold weather ,concrete shall be transporting in deep containers other
suitable method to reduce the loss of water by evaporation in hot weather and hat loss in cold
weather may also be adopted.
115
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
1.4.2 PLACING :
The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid rehandling The concrete shall be placed and compacted before setting. Commences and should
not be subsequently disturbed method of placing should not be to preclude segregation care
should be taken to avoid displacement of reinforcement or movement of form work .Concrete
shall not be drooped into position from a height greater than 2.0 meter
1.4.3 COMPACTION :
Concrete should be thoroughly compacted and fully worked around the reinforcement
embedded fixtures into corners of the form work mechanical vibrators should general be used
as per I.S –2505, I.S- 2514 and I.S-4656 over vibration or vibration of very wet mixes is
harmful and should be avoid under vibration is harm full .
When the vibration is to be applied external the design of form work and the disposition of
vibrators should receive special consideration to ensure efficient compaction and surface
blemishes .
Beams and columns shall be vibrated using immersion vibrators then section like walls of
water tanks, chajjas aprons etc. should be vibrated using surface vibrators it is better to vibrate
in smaller intervals for short period of time rather than at wider intervals for longer periods of
time the vibrator shall be used only to aid compaction and not push concrete laterally in the
forms .
1.4.4 CONSTRUCTION JOINT :
Construction joints shall in general conform to the relevant clauses of IS:456.
When the placing of concrete is interrupted and a construction joint is formed, provision shall be
made for interlocking with the succeeding layer by the embedment or saturated wooden blocks
or strips, smoothened on four sides to facilitate their removal. Prior to the next pour the wooden
pieces shall be loosened and removed in such a manner as to avoid damage to the concrete.
Such construction joints, if the contractor feels are necessary, shall be approved by the Engineer
and shall be so located and formed as to least impair the strength and the appearance of the
structure.
They shall be made in the positions as specified or as approved. Such joints shall be truly vertical
or horizontal as the case may be except that in an inclined or curved member the joints shall be
strictly at right angles to the axis of the member.
Construction joints shall be rebated to an approved profile and an approved water stop shall be
placed in the joints when specified.
Construction joints shall be made horizontally in the foundations and 75 mm below the lowest
beams soffit at the head of columns. Concrete in the ribs and slab of small tee and other beams
116
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
shall be placed in one operation but for large beams concrete in the rib upto a level 25mm below
the slab, soffit shall be placed first. Concrete in haunches or splays on beams.
or braces and concrete in the head of adjoining position of the column shall be placed at the same
time and at junction of walls and slabs shall be placed at the same time as that in the slab.
Construction joints in slab and beams shall be located at one third span and keyed and dowelled
as specified.
1.4.4A. Cold Joint
An advancing face of a concrete pour, which could not be covered by fresh concrete before
expiry of initial setting time (due to an unscheduled stoppage or delay on account of breakdown
in plant, inclement weather, low rate of placement or any other reason), is called a cold joint. The
Contractor should always remain vigilant to avoid cold joints.
If, however, a cold joint is formed due to unavoidable reasons, the following procedure shall be
adopted for treating it:a)
If concrete is so green that it can be removed manually and if vibrators can
penetrate the surface without much effort, fresh concrete can be placed directly against
the old surface. The old concrete should be covered by fresh concrete as quickly as possible
and the joint thoroughly and systematically vibrated.
b)
In case concrete has hardened a bit more than (a) but can still be easily removed by
a
light hand pick, the surface will be raked thoroughly and the loose concrete
removed completely without disturbing the rest of the concrete in depth. A rich mortar
layer 12 mm in thickness, will be placed on the cold joint fresh concrete shall
be
placed on the mortar layer and the joint will be thoroughly and
systematically
vibrated penetrating the vibrator deep into the old layer of concrete.
c)
In case the concrete at the joint has become so stiff that it cannot be remolded
mortar or slurry does not rise in spite of extensive vibration, the joint will be
harden for at least 12-24 hrs. It will then be treated as a regular construction
after cutting the concrete to required shape and preparing the surface.
and
left to
joint,
1.4.5 PROTRECTION OF CONCRETE & CURING :
Newly placed concrete shall be protect by approved means from rain, sun and dries, winds.
Exposed faces of concrete shall kept continuously in a damp or wet conditional by ponding or
by covering with a layer of wet sacking canvas hessian or similar absorbent material and kept
constantly wet for at least 10 to 15 days (10 days in winter or concrete mere spring of water
vertical surface shall not be allowed approved curing compounds may be used in lieu of moist
curing with the permission of the PMC /Consultant. Such compound shall be applied of all
exposed surface of the concrete as soon as possible after the concrete placed below ground
shall be protected from failing earth during and after placing .Approved means shall be taken
to protect immature concrete from damage by debris excessive loading, vibration, abrasion
delectation grounds water mixing with earth or other material floatation and other influence
117
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
that may in pair the strength and durability of concrete horizontal surface that may impair the
strength and durability of concrete means of bund .
1.4.6
Precast Concrete
1.4.6.1 All provisions, not specifically excluded and not in conflict with provisions of Section
2: Concrete and Formwork, Section: 4 Reinforcement and Section 7: Structural Steelwork
shall apply to precast concrete.
1.4.6.2 All precast units shall be cast on suitable bed or platform with firm foundation and
free from wind. Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of the level or
shape of the bed or platform.
1.4.6.3 Embodiments
Contractor shall not do concreting unless Electrical conduits, pipes, fixtures etc. wherever
required, are laid by the concerned agency. Embedded items shall be placed and
maintained in correct position while concreting. Embedded items shall be properly
anchored to develop required strength.
1.4.6.4 Striking Forms
Side shutters shall not be struck in less than 16 hours after depositing concrete and no
precast unit shall be lifted until the concrete reaches a strength of at least twice the stress
to which the concrete may be subjected to at the time of lifting.
1.4.6.5 Curing
All precast work shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun for at least 7 days after
casting and during that period each unit shall be kept constantly watered or preferably
completed immersed in water if the size of the unit so permits.
1.4.6.6 Expansion and Isolation Joints
Expansion and isolation joints in concrete structures shall be provided at specific places
as per details indicated on the Tendered drawings. The materials and types of joints shall
be as specified herein after, if not, otherwise mentioned in the Tendered drawings.
In case of liquid retaining structures, additional precautions shall be taken to prevent
leakage of liquids as may be specified on the Tendered drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. All materials are to be procured from reliable manufactures and must have the
approval of the Engineer. Where it is the responsibility of the Contractor to supply the
material, the Engineer may demand test certificates for the materials and/or instruct the
Contractor to get them tested in an approved laboratory free of cost to the Owner. Joints
shall be formed true to line, level, shape, dimension and quality as per Tendered drawings
and specifications.
Prior approval of the method of forming the joints should be obtained from the Engineer
before starting the work.
118
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
1.4.6.7 Bitumen Board/Expanded Polystyrene Board.
Bitumen impregnated fiber board of approved manufacturer as per IS:1838 may be used
as fillers for expansion joints. It must be durable and waterproof. It shall be compressible
and possess a high degree of rebound. The dimensions of the board should be equal to
that of the joint being formed. It should, preferably be manufactured in one piece,
matching the dimension of the joint and not prepared by cutting to size smaller pieces
from larger boards at site. At the exposed end, the joint shall be sealed with approved
sealing compound to a depth of at least 25mm after application of an approved primer.
The sealing compound and the primer shall be applied as specified by the manufacturer.
1.4.6.8 Metal Sealing Strips / water stops
Metal sealing strips shall be either G.I, Aluminium or Copper and formed. straight, U shaped, Z
shaped or any other shape and of thickness as indicated in the drawing and schedule of items
and/or as instructed by the Engineer.
The transverse joints will be gas welded using brass rods and approved flux and will be tested
by an approved method to establish that it is leak proof, longer lap lengths and different method of
brazing which will render it leak proof, will be adopted by the contractor without any additional
cost to the Owner.
The edges shall be neatly crimped and bent to ensure proper bond with the concrete.
a)
G.I Strips
G.I strip shall be minimum 1.5mm thick and 150 mm in width unless specified otherwise. The
standard of Galvanizing shall be as per relevant India Standards for heavy duty work. At the
joints, the overlapping should be for a minimum length of 50mm.
b) Aluminium strips shall be minimum 18 SWG thick and 300 mm wide unless specified
otherwise and shall conform to IS:737 of 19000 grade or 31000 grade (Designation as per
IS:6051). A minimum lap of 50mm length is required at the joints.
1.4.6.9 Non-metallic Sealing Strips / water stops
These will be normally in rubber or P.V.C can be of shape having any combination of the
following features:a)
Plain
b)
Central bulb
c)
Dumb-bell or flattened ends
d)
Ribbed and Corrugated Wings
e)
V shaped
As these types of seals can be easily handled in very large lengths unlike metal strips, transverse
joints will be allowed only under unavoidable circumstances and with the specific approval of the
119
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Engineer. The method of forming these joints, laps etc. shall be as specified by the Manufacturer
and/or as approved by the Engineer taking particular care to match the central bulbs and the
edges accurately.
120
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
1.4.6.10
Section – 13
Installation & Jointing Techniques of non metallic sealing strips.
One of the main advantages of PVC water-stops is that they can be installed very easily.
The jointing can be carried out by simple heat fusion/welding process. The installation
consists of embedding one half of he water-stop across its width in concrete leaving the
second half open. After completion of the first half, the concrete would be poured and the
second half would also be embedded leaving the centre bulb free for expansion and
contraction.
It is important that during pouring of concrete the water-stops should not be deformed
due to impact. The concrete should be properly vibrated so that it develops intimate
contact with the water-stops Care should be taken so as not to reduce effective cross
section of the water-stops.
It is necessary that PVC water-stops are placed near the centre of the concrete walls.
During installation, PVC water-stops are often required to be jointed. there are essentially
two types of joints :
1)
Straight Joints
2)
Mitred Joints
Straight joints are very simple and can easily be carried out at the site.
Fabrication of PVC water-stops can be carried out by means of simple tools. they are:
1.
Hand saw or sharp knife for cutting.
2.
Heating source like blow lamp or any other means.
3.
A metal strip plate of suitable width and about 500 - 600 mm length with
holding device like a wooden handle.
4.
Metal or wooden templates with suitable marking/grooves for 45 Deg.C
deg.C angle cuttings.
simple
and 90
The following jointing method is recommended :
1.
Water-stops are cut by means of cutting device. Clean cuts provide the best
results.
2.
The metal strip is heated to about 200 Deg.C which would be adequate to melt the
water-stops material. The strip should not be overheated so as to prevent charring
of PVC material.
121
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
3.
Two ends of PVC water-stops to be joined are pressed uniformly against the hot metal
strip. When sufficient fusing of PVC is attained, the metal strip removed and both the
ends are pressed together. It is necessary to ensure that the entire cross
section
is
uniformly heated and fused. It also essential to attain alignments of the complete cross
section and particularly of centre bulbs both the ends are well pressed until the joint
cools down to ambient temperature.
4.
The metal strip should be cleaned by means of wire brush and cotton waste before the
next welding is carried out
1.5
FACILITES FOR PREPRATION AND TESTING OF AT SITE :
In order to exercise the required degree of consultant control over the concrete material and
their preparation the contactor is expected to set up and maintain at his own expense a testing
laboratory at site. He shall apparatus required for sensitive testing of concrete materials and
in particulars he is to have the following equipment in the site laboratory :i.
ii.
iii.
concrete testing machine of capacity 60t/100t
A set of standard sieves and sieves vibrator
Measuring cylinder adequate number of cubes and cylinder moulds and slump
cones.
iv
vibrating table
v.
weight balance
vi. weighing balance.
vii. oven and other apparatus for drying aggregate
vii. Vicat's apparatus.
viii. Curing tanks for cubes
1.6
SAMPLES, TESTING AND ACCPETANCE OF CONCRETE :
Samples from fresh concrete shall be taken as per I.S.1199 and cubes shall be made cured
and tested at 7 days and 28 days in accordance with IS- 516.
Test shall be conducted for compressive strength on 15 cm x 15cm x15cm cubes of
concrete for concrete .companion specimen shall be cast from a signal batch of
concrete & shall be of the same age at the same time of testing ,in all be compressive
strength specified in table alone be the criteria for accepting for acceptance or rejection
of the concrete.
1.6.1 Six test specimen shall be made from testing three at 7days and three at 28 days the
specimen shall be tested as per I.S 516 the samples tested at its laboratory generally but
may be tested in any other test house /laboratory of Govt recognized institute also.
122
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
1.6.2 Concrete of each grade shall be assessed separately and shall be assessed daily for
compliance concrete is liable to be rejected if it is porous or honey -combed .its placing
has been interrupted without providing a proper construction joint the reinforcement has
been displaced beyond the tolerance specified or construction tolerance have not been
met However ,the hardened may be accepted after carrying out suitable remedial
measure to minimum to the satisfaction of the Engineer -in charge.
1.6.3 If nominal mix concrete made in accordance with the aggregate cement prop. given for a
particular grade does not yield specified strength , such concrete shall be classified to
nearest to the appropriate lower grade .Nominal mix concrete proportioned for a given
grade shall not lower be placed in higher grade than the minimum specified.
1.6.4 If the deficiency in the opinion of the PMC /consultant is such as to necessitate removal of
the concrete from the structure. Then on being so directed by the PMC /NLUO the
contractor at his own expense shall remove and replace by the concrete of specified
strength.
1.6.5 However when the strength is so deficient as to call for removal, PMC /NLUO before
ordering removal provided the contractor agree ,may direct for "load tests" or standard
tests which shall be carried out by the contractor at his own cost in the manner as will be
directed by the PMC /consultant and if the result is such that on all consideration the can
be retained then it may be accept at adequate.
STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE :
Seven days test :
The average compressive strength of the three specimens tested at seven days shall satisfy
the specified strengths given in Table A, for the appropriate mix. As a guidance the
difference between the maximum and the minimum strength of the three specimens shall
not exceed 15% of the average strength. In case seven days result is not satisfactory all
further work structurally interlinked with the concrete represented by the samples shall be
stopped unless otherwise decided by Engineer.
Twenty eight days test :
Acceptance criteria of twenty eight days shall be as follows:
a)
b)
If the average compressive strength of three cubes is more than the compressive
strength indicated in Table A, the concrete shall be accepted at full rates.
If the average compressive strength of three cubes is less than the specified but not
less than 85% of the specified strength. the concrete may be accepted at reduced rate
or prorate basis up to 80% of original rate of items.
123
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
c)
If the average compressive strength of three cubes is less than 85% of the specified
strength, PMC/site Engineer shall reject and get dismantled and defective portion of
the work represented by the sample along with the structurally connected work as
considered necessary at the risk and cost of the Contractor.
In case of (b) and (c) above , PMC/ Site Engineer, If he so decides may order the
additional tests like fore test, ultrasonic test, rebound hammer test, load test of structure of
part of structure etc. to be carried out. All the charges in connection with these additional
tests shall be borne by the contractor if on the basis of these additional tests the PMC/site
Engineer is satisfied about he structural adequacy of the concrete, he may accept the work
at reduced rates.
CONCRETE ORDERED TO BE DISMANTLED
Where the PMC / Site Engineer does not accept the poor or defective concrete the
contractor at his expense will dismantle the portion of structure and reconstruct the same
to the PMC / Site Engineer's satisfaction. Concrete thus dismantled will not be measured and
paid for . The additional work if and required to be carried out for re-concreting. shall be to
the contractor's account.
QUANTITY OF DEFECTIVE CONCRETE REPRESENTED BY CUBES
In all cases of defective concrete as revealed by works test cubes strength failing below
the specified strength. the quantity of concrete thus affected and represented by the cubes
shall be decided by the PMC/Site Engineer whose decision shall be final and binding on
the contractor.
HONEY COMB IN.
a)
b)
Where honey combed surfaces are noticed in the concrete the contractor shall not
patch up the same until examined by the N.L.U.O's Engineer and decision given
regarding the acceptance with rectification of rejection of the same. If contractor
with rectification or rejection of the same. If contractor patches up such defects
without the knowledge of the N.L.U.O's Engineer, the N.L.U.O's Engineer will be at
liberty to order demolition of the concerned concrete members to the extent be
considers necessary. In such case, the contractor at his expense, shall reconstruct
demolished work. demolished work shall not be measured and paid for.
If in the opinion of the N.L.U.O's Engineer the honey combing is harmful to the
structure and where so directed by the PMC /Site Engineer, the full structural
members affected by dismantled and reconstructed to PMC/Site Engineer's approval at
Contractor's expense. The demolished concrete will not be measured and paid for .
CONCRETING UNDER SPECIAL CONDITIONS :124
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
The specifications and references given in I.S.456-2000. for concreting in extreme weather
condition under water concreting, concrete in sea water, concrete in aggressive soil and water
should be adhered to.
2.0
The form work shall conform to the shape, lines and dimensions as shown on the
plans and be so constructed as to remain sufficiently rigid during the placing and
compacting of the concrete and shall be sufficiently water tight to prevent loss of
cement slurry from the concrete. If directed be the PMC/NLUO, building paper or
polythene sheets shall be used by the Contractor to ensure water tightness without
additional costs to the NLUO. Form work or centering shall be constructed on wet
concrete and laborers without deflection and retain its form during laying, ramming
and setting of concrete. Timber used shall be properly seasoned so as to prevent
wrapping when wetted.
All props either timber or steel shall be straight and or full height and no joints
shall be allowed. Props shall be braced with wooden battens and where additional
staging is necessary extra care should be taken to use bigger diameter props with
bracing at a 4 or 5 levels. All props shall be supported on sole plates and double
wedges. At the time of removing props, wedges shall be gently cased off and not
knocked out :All rubbish, chippings, shavings and saw dust shall be removed from the interior of
the forms before the concrete shall be cleaned and thoroughly wetted or treated if
considered necessary, with non sticking mineral oil or any other approved materials.
Care shall be taken that oil or such approved materials is kept out of contract with
the reinforcement.
All form work shall be removed without shock or vibration and shall be ceased off
caref1ully in order to allow the structure to take up its load gradually. Forms shall
not be disturbed until concrete has adequately hardened to take the superimposed
load.
3.1
CLEANING OF REINFORCEMENT :-
Before steel reinforcement is placed in position, the surface of the reinforcement shall be
cleaned of rust, dust, grease and any other objectionable substances.
3.2
BAR BENDING SCHEDULE OF REINFORCEMENT :-
On receipt of structural drawing Contractor shall prepare bar bending
reinforcement and shall be got approved by the NLUO/PMC.
3.3
schedule of
CUTTING OF REINFORCEMENT :-
Before Steel reinforcement bars are cut, the contractor shall study the lengths of bars
required as per drawing and shall carry out cutting only to suit the sizes required as per
Tendered drawings.
125
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
3.4
Section – 13
PLACING AND SECURITY :-
Reinforcement bars shall be accurately placed & secured in position and firmly supported
or wedged by pre-cast concrete blocks of suitable thickness, at sufficiently close intervals
that they will not sag between the supports or get displaced during the placing of concrete
or any other operation of the work. It is most important to maintain reinforcement in its
correct position without displacement and to maintain the correct specified cover. The
Contractor shall be responsible for all costs for rectification required in case the bars are
displaced out of their correct position.
3.5
BINDING WIRE :-
The reinforcement shall securely bond where ever cross or when ever required for with 18
gauge soft annealed steel wire.
3.6
WELDING:-
Welding of bars shall not be carried out unless specifically authorized in writing by the
NLUO/PMC as per I.S. code of practice in place of splicing. However, no extra payment
shall be allowed for the same.
3.7
BEND ETC:-
Bends , cranks etc., in steel reinforcement shall be carefully for made. Care being taken to
keep bends out of winding, otherwise all rods shall be truly straight. If any bend shows
signs of or site minimum radius of nine times diameter of the bar shall be used unless
otherwise specified in the Tendered drawings. However in respect of standard hooks the
radius of bend shall be two times the diameter of bar. Heating of reinforcement of bars to
facilitate bending will not be permitted. The bars shall always be bend cold. In case of
mild steel reinforcement bars of larger sizes where colds bending is not possible they may
be bend by heating with written permission of the NLUO/PMC. Bar when bent shall not
be heated beyond very red colour and after bending shall be allowed to cool slowly
without quenching. The bars damaged or weakened in any way in bending shall not be
used on the work. High strength deformed bars shall in no case be heated to facilitate
bending cranking.
3.8
INSPECTION OF REINFORCEMENT :-
No concreting
in position and
given to the
opinion of the
shall be commenced until the NLUO/PMC have inspected the reinforcement
until their approval have been obtained. A notice of at least 72 hours shall be
NLUO/PMC by the contractor for inspection of reinforcement. If in the
NLUO/PMC any materials is incorrectly spaced,
126
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
bend or otherwise defective. The contractor shall immediately remove such materials from
the site and replace with new and rectify any other defects in accordance with the
instruction of the NLUO/PMC and to their entire satisfaction.
3.9
STOCK PILING OF STEEL :-
Reinforcement steel required shall be stock pilled well in advance of need in the work. The
Contractor shall stockpile advance of need in the work. The contractor shall stockpile
1/3rd requirement within15 days of commencement 2/3rd requirement at 1/4th contract time
and full requirement a 1/2 contract time.
3.10 COVER FOR REINFORCEMNT :Cover shall be measured from the outer surface of main reinforcement. Cover shall be as
follows.:a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
At each end of a reinforcing bar 25 mm or twice the diameter of such rod or bar
whichever is greater.
For longitudinal reinforcing bar in beam 25mm or the diameter of such rod or bar
whichever is greater.
For tensile, compressive shear or other reinforcement in a slab 13 mm or the diameter of
such reinforcement whichever a greater.
For reinforcement in any other member such as a lintel, chajja, canopy 13 mm or the
diameter of such reinforcements whichever is greater.
For main reinforcement in isolated footings (side a bottom) clear cover shall be
50mm.
For column bars clear cover shall be 40 mm, unless otherwise specified in drawing.
For bars in slabs of strips footings and mat foundation clear cover shall be 50mm.
Beam bars shall be placed over slab in the case of beam & slab type foundation
For any other types. covers as specified in I.S. 456 shall be provided.
3.11 FORM WORK :MATERIALS AND DESIGN:a.
The from work shall be of timber or plywood or steel. If any particular material or
materials be specified in the Schedule of quantities for form work such particularly
specified material or materials shall be used in work. The form work shall be so
constructed as to remain sufficiently rigid during placing of the concrete and shall be
sufficiently tight to prevent, loss of liquid from the concrete. The forms shall have
sufficient strength and rigidity to hold concrete and withstand the pressure of ramming
and vibration without excessive deflection of the prescribed lines and more so when
the concrete is vibrated. The surface of the forms in contact with concrete shall be
127
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section –13
clean, rigid, watertight and smooth. Suitable devices shall be used to hold corners,
adjacent ends and edges of panels of other forms together in accurate alignment.
If steel formwork is used the slab shuttering to be done with steel plates made out of
2mm sheets with pressed flanges and stiffener with standard shuttering made in
60mm width and 115, 100,90,80cm lengths with adjusters made in 40, 25 cm widths and
115, 90,80,60cm lengths.
If tubular telescopic steel props are used then all steel scaffold tubes are to be of
40mm nominal bore mild steel continuous weld. props must be braced in both directions
by tube and right angle couplers at approximately 250mm above prop nut when
extended beyond 3.6m. All scaffolds fittings conform to I.S.2750:1968.
Timber shuttering :If timber is used it shall not be less than 30mm thick fixed on to rigid supporting
materials and scaffolding.
If shuttering plywood is used it should conform to IS-4990-1993. The plywood may be
fixed on to a timber frame or straight on to the rigid supporting materials and
scaffolding. The minimum thickness for straight surface should be 9mm and for
curved surfaces, minimum 6mm thick.
b.
The form work shall conform to the shape, lines and dimensions to suit the RCC
members as shown on Tendered drawings and to be so constructed. Form work shall be
adequately designed to support the full weight of workers, fresh placed concrete without
yielding settlement or deflection and to ensure good and truly aligned concrete finished
in accordance with the construction Tendered drawings. A camber in all directions of
6mm for every 5m span in all slab and beam centering shall be given to allow for a
unavoidable sagging due to compression or other causes.
c.
The form work shall be so designed that the sides of the beams shall be first struck
leaving the soffit of beams and the supporting props in position. Props shall be
designed to allow accurate adjustment and to permit of their being struck without
jarring the concrete.
d.
Temporary opening shall be provided at the base of column form and at other points
where necessary to facilitate cleaning and observation immediately before concrete is
deposited.
e.
Vertical shuttering : The vertical shuttering shall be carried down to such solid surface
as is sufficiently strong to afford adequate support and shall remain in position until the
newly constructed work is about to support itself. Props shall be securely braced
against lateral deflection. Where timber props are used like bullies, they shall be of a
minimum diameter of 10cm. and shall be straight and adequately strong. The spacing of
such struts shall be designed to carry loads imposed on it without undue deflection of
128
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
the members supported by the props. The spacing of props shall be approved by the
site Engineer and any alterations suggested by him shall be carried out at
contractor's expense. Bracing shall be provided as directed without extra cost.
Contractor shall allow in his rates providing props and struts for any height shown in
the working Tendered drawings issued to contractor from time to time.
3.12 WATER TIGHTNESS :
It is the contractor's responsibility to ensure that the forms are checked for water tightness
just before concreting operation starts and to make good any deficiencies.
3.13 CLEANING AND TREATMENT OF FORMS:
All rubbish, particularly chippings, shavings and sawdust shall be removed from the interior
of the forms before the concrete is placed and the form work in contract with the concrete
shall be cleaned and thoroughly wetted or treated with an approved composition. Care
shall be taken that such approved composition is kept out of contract with the
reinforcement.
3.14
STRIPPING :
Forms shall left in place until their removal is authorized by the site Engineer and shall
then be removed with care so as to avoid injury to concrete. In no circumstances shall
forms be struck until the concrete reaches a strength of at least twice the stress to which
concrete may be subjected at the time of striking. The strength referred to shall be that of
concrete using the same cement and aggregates with the same proportions, and cured
under conditions of temperature and moisture similar to those existing on the work where
possible, the form work shall be left longer, as it would assist the curing.
3.15
STRIPPING TIME :
In normal circumstances (generally where temperatures are above 20° C) and where
ordinary cement is used , forms shall be struck after expiry of the following periods given
in table VI.
TABLE-VI
___________________________________________________________________
LOCATION
Striking
time in days for
Ordinary
pozzolana/
Portland cement
129
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
a.
Vertical sides of walls,
24
slabs , beams and columns
b.
Bottoms of slabs up to 4.5m span
7-14
c.
Bottoms of slabs above 4.5m span,
bottoms of beams up to 6m span
rib bottoms up to 6m span
14-21
d.
Bottoms of beams over 6m span and
arch rib bottoms above 6m span
21-30
Note 1: In case the shuttering for the part of the structure is supported or suspended from
the shuttering of the concrete member already cast then the shuttering of the concrete
member (already cast) supporting the new shuttering shall not be removed until the
concrete of the supported /suspended member is matured.
Note 2: Special care shall be taken while striking of the shuttering for (i) canopies (ii) chajja
(ii) cantilever slabs and beams and (iv) retaining walls, so as to ensure stability of
these structural elements. Relevant notes given in the structural Tendered drawings in
this connection shall be strictly followed.
3.16 FORM WORK IN LIFTS FOR CONTINUOUS SURFACES :
Where forms for continuous surface are placed in successive units (as for example in
columns or walls), the forms shall fit tightly over the completed surfaces so as to prevent
leakage or mortar from the concrete and do maintain accurate alignment of the surface.
3.17 PROCEDURE FOR REMOVING THE FORM WORK :
All form work shall be removed without such shock or vibration as would damaged the
reinforced concrete. Before the soffit and struts are removed, the concrete surface shall be
exposed where necessary in order to ascertains that the concrete has sufficiently hardened.
Proper precautions shall be taken to allow for the decrease in the rate of hardening that
occurs with all cements in the cold weather. For cantilevers props shall be removed from
the tip towards support. Special notes given in relevant structural drawing shall be strictly
adhered to in order of avoid mishaps.
3.18 TOLERANCES :
The following shall be the maximum permissible tolerances :a.
b.
c.
d.
On general setting out dimensions up to 4m length, a tolerance up to 3mm will be
allowed.
On lengths or more than 4m tolerance of not more than 5mm will be allowed.
On the cross sectional dimensions of columns, beams, slabs, facia, chajja,
mullions, grilles, fins, louvers and such other members tolerance of more than
2mm will not be allowed.
the top surface of concrete floor slab shall be within 4mm of the level and line
shown on the Tendered drawings.
130
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
e.
Section – 13
Column and walls and other vertical members shall not be more than 3mm out
of plumb in their storey height and not more than 6mm out of plumb in their
full height.
If the work is not carried out within the tolerances set out above in (a) to (e), the cost
of all rectification measures or dismantling and reconstructing as decided by the
Site Engineer shall be borne by the contractor. In case work is dismantled, the same
shall not be measured and paid for.1
131
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
SECTION -III
BRICK MASONRY
1.0
1.1
BRICK WORK :
GENERAL :
All brick work should be carried out as shown on the Tendered drawings with set
backs, projections, curvatures, cuttings etc. No additional cost for use of cut bricks
shall be allowed. Wherever the proportion of cement mortar has not been
specifically mentioned, cement mortar in the proportion of (1:6) shall be used. Flat
brick shall be provided wherever required without any extra cost. Brick work shall be
kept wet while in progress till mortar has properly set. On holidays or when work
is stopped the top of all unfinished masonry shall be kept wet. Should the mortar
become dry, white or powdery, for want or curing, work shall be pulled down and
rebuilt at the contractor's expenses.
1.2
BRICK MASONRY :
a.
SOAKING :
Bricks required for masonry shall be thoroughly soaked in clean water before use for at
least six hours until air bubbles cease to come out. The practice of dipping the bricks in
water just before use shall not be allowed. The soaked bricks shall be kept on wooden
planks or brick platform to avoid earth being smeared on them
b.
BATS :
No bats or out bricks shall be used in the work unless absolutely necessary around
irregular openings or for adjusting the dimensions of different course and for
closures, in which case full bricks shall be laid at corners, the bats being placed on
the middle of the courses.
c.
LAYING :
Brick work shall be laid in English Bond unless otherwise specified. Half or cut bricks
shall not be used except where needed to complete the bond. Each course shall be
perfectly straight horizontally and transversely. The walls shall be taken up truly plumb;
if battered, the batter is to be truly maintained. The level of the brick work in vertical
walls shall be checked up at every one metre interval.
Bricks shall be laid with frogs upward. While laying, bricks shall be thoroughly bedded
and flushed in mortar and tapped into position with a wooden mallet and the superfluous
mortar removed.
Walls of all structures shall be carried up regularly in all cases, leaving no part, one metre
lower than another. If this cannot be adhered to the brick work shall be racked back at an
132
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
angle not more than 45°, so as to maintain a uniform and effectual bond, but racking back
should not start within 60 cm of a corner.
Partially or totally set exposed surface of the masonry shall be cleaned, roughened and
lightly wetted so as to obtain the best possible bond with new work. All loose bricks and
mortar shall be removed. All masonry walls shall be bonded. Each course at corners and
intersections and shall be bonded or anchored to connecting work.
No deductions or additions in measurement shall be made on any account for the
following :
a) Ends of dissimilar materials(i.e joints, beams, lintels, posts, girders, rafters,
trusses, corbels, steps etc.) upto 500 sq.cm. in section and
b)
d.
Opening upto 0.1 sq.m in section. However, full deduction from masonry
work shall be made for notches kept in the wall for pipeline.
At all angles forming the junction of any two walls, the brick shall, at each alternate
course, be carried into each of the respective walls so as to thoroughly unite the work.
The brick work shall not be raised more than 14 courses per day.
All iron fixtures, pipes, conduits, drains, sleeves, bolts, hold fasts for doors and windows
etc. which are required to be built in walls, shall be embedded in cement mortar or
cement concrete as specified as the work proceeds.
All uneven, irregular and disturbed brick work shall be pulled down and rebuilt with
fresh bricks at the contractor's expenses.
JOINTS :
Thickness of joints shall be restricted to 6mm in first class brick work and 10mm in
second class brick work (unless any wider vertical joints upto 13mm are necessary to
give the required thickness of the wall).
All bed joints shall be normal to the pressure acting upto them i.e. horizontal in vertical
walls, radial in arches and at right angles to the face in battered relating walls. The vertical
joints in alternate course shall come directly one over the other and shall be truly vertical.
Care shall be taken that all joints are fully mortared (proportion as specified Schedule of
Items) well flushed up and in case where no pointing is to be done neatly struck as the
work proceeds. The joints in faces which are to plastered or pointed shall be squarely raked
out to a depth of 12 mm while the mortar is still green. The raked joint shall be well
brushed to remove the loose particles. At the junction of concrete and masonry wall, G.I.
Chicken wire mesh, 150 mm wide and 22 SWG shall be provided, prior to plastering. After
the work, the faces of brick work shall be cleaned with wire brush so as to remove any
splashes of mortar during the course of raising the brick work
e.
UNIFORM FACING :
133
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Brick work shall be carried up regularly in all cases where the nature of work will
admit, not leaving any part 60mm. lower than another but where building at different
levels is necessary the bricks shall be stepped so as to give later at uniform level
& effectional bond. Horizontal courses should be to line and level, and face plumb or
to latter as shown on the plan.
f.
SCAFFOLDING :
The scaffolding must be strong and rigid, stiffened with necessary cross bearers and
always checked and beared on the sills which closed board ceilings and swings to
prevent and injury of persons or materials. The Contractor shall have to allow other
trades to make reasonable use of his scaffolding as directed by the NLUO/PMC, if
for the interest of work the contractor have to erect scaffolding in the other
properties including local bodies. Corporation, the arrangement for the same including
the cost of licensing fees etc., shall to be borne by ht e contractor and the NLUO
should be kept free form any liability on this account. But log holes shall be made
good by bricks to match the face work when out logs are removed after ensuring
that the holes behind are solidly filled in with (1:4:8) cement concrete.
All brick works shall be kept will watered for 14 days after laying If white
pozzolana cement issued for mortar the curing shall be extended by one week at
contractor's expenses.
2.0
HALF BRICK WORK :
The mortar for half brick thick walls shall be as specified. For half brick thick long walls 2
nos. 6mm dia mild steel bars shall be provided every third course according to standard
practice. M.S. bars shall be paid extra.
3.0
BRICK FLAT SOLING :
For soling, the bricks shall be picked off approved, sound, hard, durable, dense, free from
soft spots, cracks, decay and other defects. Brick bat shall not be used. All necessary
trimming or filling for laying of the soling in line and required grade shall be done . The
sub-grade shall be marked by stacking and strings for required depth for laying of soling.
The cushioning as well as filling of joints shall be done with local sand.
The bricks shall be laid on flat (Unless otherwise specified ) touching each other. Brick
shall be laid in parallel rows breaking bond or in herring bond pattern as directed and
firmly embedded true to line and filled with local sand. The joint should not be less that
12mm.
134
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
SECTION -IV
PLASTERING
1
2
3
Scaffolding for carryout plastering work shall be double scaffolding having two sets of
vertical supports so that the scaffolding is independent of the walls.
Preparing of surface
The surface to be plastered shall be thoroughly cleaned so that it is free from dust,
dirt, salts, etc. The joints of masonry work shall be raked out to the depth of at
least 12 mm. Cement concrete surfaces shall be cleaned with wire brush. The
surface in both cases shall be washed properly and kept wet for 4 hours before
plastering is commenced.
Mortar
Cement and sand shall be thoroughly mixed in the proportion specified and water
shall be added to form an easily workable paste. In no case shall mortar which has
been allowed to stand for more than an hour after mixing to be used.
4
Application of Plaster
Plaster, when more than 12 mm thick, shall be applied in two coats a base coat
followed by the finishing coat. Thickness of the base coat shall be sufficient to fill
up all unevenness in the surface, no single coat, however, shall exceed 12 mm in
thickness. The lower coat shall be thicker than the upper coat, the overall
thickness of the coats shall not be less than the minimum thickness shown on the
Tendered drawings. The undercoat shall be allowed to dry and shrink before
applying the second coat of plaster. The undercoat shall be scratched or
roughened before it is fully hardened to form a mechanical key. The method of
application shall be 'thrown on' rather than 'applied by trowel'.
The entire plastering job inside and outside shall be a thoroughly sound and
workmanlike job. All corners and angles shall be true to plumb or level. All plane
surface shall be levelled or plumbed and shall contact a 3 m straight edge in its
entire length with not more than 3 mm variation either way.
The plastering shall start from top and gradually worked down towards floor. It
shall not, at any place, be thinner than specified. To ensure even thickness, plaster
in about 15 cm wide strip shall be first applied horizontally and vertically at not
more than 2 meter interval over the entire surface to serve as gauge. The surface
of these gauged areas shall be truly in the plumb and plane of finished plaster
surface. The mortar shall then be applied on the wall or other surface between the
gauges and finished even. All corners shall be rounded to a radius of 12 mm
135
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
unless otherwise specified. Rounding or chamfering corners, junctions etc. where
required shall be done without extra payment. The contractor shall not be paid for
any extra thickness of plaster than as specified.
In case of sand-faced and rough cast plaster, specific instructions in the
specification of the same shall be followed for coats and finishing techniques. In
case of neat cement and neeru finish plaster specific instructions in the
specification of the same shall be followed.
5
Any cracks which appear in the surface and all portions which sound hollow
when tapped or are found to be soft or other defects shall be cut out in rectangular
shape and redone as directed to match smooth and even with the original surface.
Curing
Curing shall start 24 hours after the plaster is laid. It shall be kept wet for 7 days.
During this period it shall be suitably protected from all damages at the
contractor's expense as directed.
6
12 mm and 15mm Finished Plaster in CM as specified
Plaster shall be smooth finished with neat cement slurry.
7
12mm and 15mm Plaster in CM 1:6
After completion of plaster for the panel in hand. Neeru shall be applied as
given below:
7.1 Preparation
Fat lime of best quality shall be slaked and mixed with sufficient water to
form a thick paste. It shall then be passed through a fine 3 mm mesh to
remove all un slaked particles and foreign matter and allowed to mellow
under water for at least 10 days. The surplus water on top shall then be
allowed to run off and the top layer of lime formed into putty shall be
skimmed off and well mixed sand and jute. The proportion of sand shall
be of 1 cu.m. fine washed sand (passing through I.S. sieve No.60) to 4
cu.m. of lime putty. The jute shall be finely chopped and shall be used in
the proportion of 1 kg. per cu.m. of mortar.
7.2
The mixture shall be properly ground to fine paste between two stones or
in a mill. The 'neeru' thus prepared shall be kept moist until used and no
more than what can be consumed in 15 days shall be prepared at a time.
136
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
7.3
The 'Neeru' as prepared above shall be applied to the prepared surface
with a steel trowel to a thickness not exceeding 3 mm and rubbed and
polished to perfectly smooth and even finish working from top to bottom.
While toweling is going on, soap stone powder contained in thin muslin
bags shall be dusted over the surface and worked in.
7.4
Ready mix Neeru, if used, shall be obtained from approved manufacturer.
A sample plaster finish shall be carried out at site and approved by
Engineer prior to ordering the material at site. Manufacturer's instructions
shall be followed in the sample as well as in the actual work.
8. 12 mm Water-proof Plaster in CM 1:6
9.
Water proof-cement plaster shall be specified herein before for cement plaster work
except for the following.
In the preparation of cement and sand mortar, cement shall be mixed with 2% approved
waterproofing compound or as per manufacturer's instructions and as directly by the
Engineer.
18 mm Sand-face Plaster
10.
Sand face plaster shall consist of two layers. The first layer shall be generally 12 mm
average thick cement plaster with cement sand of 1:4 mix (1 cement : 4 sand) and shall
be rough finished carried out by wire brush scarifying on wet plaster. Over this a second
layer, average 6 mm thick, of cement sand plaster in the proportion of 1:2 mix shall be
applied. The second layer of plaster shall be laid only after the first layer has sufficiently
dried. The surface of the sand face plaster shall be finished rough with sponge or as
directed by the Engineer.
Rough Cast Cement Plaster
The cement shall be thoroughly mixed with sand and gravel in the proportion of 1 cement
: 2 sand : 1 aggregate. The gravel shall be of a size passing through 6 mm mesh but
retained completely on 2 mm mesh. The constituents shall be thoroughly mixed dry until
the mix is homogeneous. Water shall then be added gradually to the required extent and
the material turned over sufficiently to give a homogeneous mass of uniform colour.
Mortar shall be applied to the wall in 2
coats with force to a thickness of 18 mm and finished to a uniform surface. No more
mortar shall be prepared than can be used up with half an hour.
11.
11.1
POINTING
Scope
137
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
11.2
Section – 13
Work includes providing, mixing CM 1:3 and applying cement pointing on masonry
surfaces indicated in the item, including all materials, labour, plants, tools, equipment,
scaffolding racking etc. required to complete the job in all respects.
Type of pointing
Pointing shall be of the type specified such as "flush", "recessed" (weathered, keyed,
ruled etc.), "tuck" etc.
11.3 Preparation of surface
All joints in masonry shall be raked out at least 12 mm deep when the mortar is firm but
not wet. The joints shall be brushed clean of dust with wire brush and wetted thoroughly
for 6 hours before pointing is commenced.
11.4
Application & Finishing
12.
The mortar shall be pressed into raked out joints with a point trowel and finished either
flush, sunk or raised according to type of pointing specified in the Tendered drawings or
as directed. The superfluous mortar shall be cut off from the edges of the lines and the
surfaces of masonry shall be cleaned of all mortar. Finish shall be free of slick spots, cut
faces and other blemishes.
Finished work of pointing shall be to exact size and shape stipulated with edges straight,
neat and clean. No smearing of cement mortar shall be allowed and the entire work shall
be carried out in most workmanlike manner.
Drip Mould
13.
Drip mould shall be provided on underside and not more than 50 mm from outer edge in
chajjas and projection of roof slab and at places indicated by the Engineer and shall be of
minimum 10 mm in depth and 20 mm in width and well rounded from either in plaster or
concrete while casing. It shall be neat finished. The size and shape shall have to be
approved by the Engineer.
Damp Proof Course
Unless otherwise specified Damp-proof course shall be 40 mm thick 'artificial stone' in
proportion 1:1V23 cement, sand, stone chips (10 mm down) with admixture of a
waterproofing compound as approved by the Engineer.
SECTION -V
FLOOR FINISHING
1.1. GENERAL :
The thickness of the under layer shall be measured with a permissible tolerance of + /3mm. The thickness of top layer after polishing shall be measured with a tolerance of + / 1.5mm.
138
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
1.2 UNDER LAYER :
Section – 13
Cement concrete of specified mix shall be used. The panels shall be of uniform size, and
unless otherwise directed, generally not exceeding 1.5 sqm. in area & 1.2 meter in length
for inside situations. In exposed situation the length of any side of the panel shall
preferable be not more that 1.25 meters or as directed. Cement slurry @ 2 Kg. per Sqm.
shall be applied before laying of under layer over the cement concrete / R.C.C. surface.
1.3
STRIP FIXING :
Glass strips or aluminum strips as given in the schedule shall be fixed with their top at
proper levels.
1.4
TOP LAYER.
Mortar : The mix for terrazzo topping consist of grey cement with or without pigment,
marble power, marble aggregate (marble chips) & water. The cement & marble powder
shall be mixed in the prop. of 3 (Three) parts of cement power mix, the proportion of
aggregate by volume shall be as follows :
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Size of Aggregate
Proportion of Aggregates
to binding mix.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------For predominantly grade ,0.00 and 1
2.00 parts
For predominantly grade, 2 and 2
1.75 parts
For predominantly grade,4 and 5
1.75 parts
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Grade No.
Size of aggregate
Minimum thickness
of top layer in mm.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------00
1-2
6
0
1-4
9
1
4-7
9
2
7-10
12
where aggregate of size larger than 10 mm are used the minimum thickness of topping
shall not be less than 1.5 times the maximum size of the chips. Where large chips such as
20mm or 25mm are used they shall be used only with a flat shape and bedded on the flat
face so as to keep the maximum thickness of wearing layer. Before starting the work, the
Contractor shall get the sample of marble chips approved by the PMCs. The cement to be
used shall be ordinary grey cement. White cement, colored cement or cement with
admixture of coloring matter of approved quality in the ratio to get the required shade as
ordered by the PMC. Coloring matter of approved quality in the ratio specified shall be
mixed dry thoroughly with the cement & marble powder and then marble chips added &
mixed as specified above. The full quantity of dry mixture of mortar required for a room
139
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
shall be prepared in a lot in order to ensure and protect from moisture. The dry mortar
shall be mixed with water in the usual way as and when sufficient water to make it
workable.
The terrazzo topping shall be laid while the under layer is still plastic, but has hardened
sufficiently to prevent cement from rising to the surface. This is normally achieved
between 18 to 24 hours after the under layer has been laid. A cement slurry preferable of
the same color as the topping shall be brushed on the surface immediately before laying is
commenced. It shall be laid to a uniform thickness slightly more than that specified in
order to get the specified finished thickness after rubbing. The surface of the top layer shall
be trowelled over, pressed and brought true to required level by a straight edge and steel
floats in such a manner that the maximum amount of marble chips come up and are spread
uniformly over the surface.
1.5
POLISHING, CURING AND FINISHING :
Polishing shall be done by machine. About 36 hours after laying the top layer, the surface
shall be watered and ground evenly with machine fitted with special rapid cutting grit
blocks (carborundum stone) of coarse grade (No. 60) till the marble chips are evenly
exposed and the floor is smooth. After the first grinding, the surface shall be thoroughly
washed to remove all grinding mud and covered with a grout of cement of/and coloring
matter in same mix and proportion as the topping in order to fill any pin holes that appear.
The surface shall be allowed to cure for 5 to 7 days & then ground with machine fitted with
fine grit blocks (No. 120). The surface is cleaned and repaired as before and allowed to
cure again for 3 to 50 days. Finally the third grinding shall be done with machine fitted
with fines grade grit blocks (No. 320) to get even and smooth surface without pin holes,
The finished surface should show the marble chips evenly exposed.
Where use of machine for polishing is not feasible or possible, rubbing and polishing shall
be done by hand, in the same manner as specified for machine polishing except that
carborandum stone of coarse grade (No. 60) shall be used for the 1st rubbing stone of
medium grade (No. 80) for second rubbing and stone of fine grade (No. 120) for final
rubbing and polishing.
After the final polish either by hand, oxalic acid shall be dusted over the surface @ 33 gm
per square meter sprinkled with water and rubbed hard with a namdah block (Pad of
woolen rags). The following day. the floor shall be wiped with a moist rag & dried with a
soft cloth and finished clean.
Curing shall be done by suitable means, such as laying moist sawdust or ponding water.
1.6
PRECAUTIONS :
Flooring in lavatories and bathrooms shall be laid after fixing of water closet and squatting
pans & floor traps. Traps shall be plugged, while laying the floors opened after floors are
cured and cleaned. Any damage done to W.C.'s squatting pans and flow traps during the
execution of work shall be made good by the Contractor.
140
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
During cold weather, concreting shall not be done when the temperature falls below four
degree centigrade. The concrete placed shall be protected against frost by suitable
coverings. Concrete placed shall be protected against frost by suitable coverings. Concrete
damaged by frost shall be removed and work redone. During hot weather, precautions
shall not exceed Thirty Eight degree centigrade. No concreting shall be laid within half an
hour of the closing time or the day. Unless permitted by the Engineer-in-charge.
The floor shall be protected from any damage during the execution of work.
2.0
CERAMIC TILES FLOORING :
2.1
PREPARATION OF SURFACE AND LAYING :
Sub-grade concrete or the R.C.C. slab on which the tiles are to be laid shall be cleaned,
wetted and mopped. The bedding for the tile shall be with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3
coarse sand ) or as specified in the specification. The average thickness of the bedding
shall be 20mm while the thickness under portion of the tiles shall not be less than 12mm.
Mortar shall be spread, temped and corrected to proper levels and allowed to harden
sufficiently to offer a fairly rigid cushion for the tiles to be set to enable the mason to place
wooden plank across and squat on it.
Over this mortar bedding neat grey cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be spread
at the rate of 3.3 kg. of cement per square meter over such an area as soaked in water
washed clean and shall be fixed in this grout one after another, each tiles gently being
tapped with a wooden mallet till it is properly bedded and in level with the adjoining tiles.
The joint shall be kept as thin as possible and in straight lines or to suit the required
pattern.
The surface of flooring during laying shall be frequently checked with a straight edge
about 2m. long, so as to obtain a true surface with their required slops.
Where full size tiles cannot be fixed these shall be cut (Sawn) to the required size, and their
edge rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true joints.
Tiles which are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall shall enter not less than 10mm. under
plaster, skirting or dado.
After tiles have been laid surplus cement grout shall be cleaned off.
Painting and Polishing :- The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement grout with wire
brush or trowel to a depth of 2mm to 3mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints
shall then be flush pointed with white cement added with pigment if required to match the
color of tiles. The floor shall be washed and finished clean. The finished floor shall not
sound hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.
3.0
CERAMIC TILES IN SKIRTING AND DADO :-
3.1
PREPARATION OF SURFACES :141
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
The joints shall be raked out to a depth of at least 15mm in masonry walls, while the
masonry is being laid. In case of concrete walls, the surfaces shall be hipped and
roughened with wire brushes. The surface shall be cleaned thoroughly, washed with water
and kept wet before skirting work is commenced.
3.2
LAYING :12mm. thick plaster of cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand ) of mix as specified
shall be applied and allowed to harden. The plaster shall be roughened with wire brushes or
by scratching diagonally closed intervals.
The tiles should be soaked in water, washed clean and a coat of cement slurry applied
liberally at the back of tiles and set in the bedding mortar. The tiles shall be tamped and
corrected to proper plane and lines. The tiles shall be set in the required pattern and butt
jointed. The joints shall be as fine as possible. Top of skirting of dado shall be truly
horizontal and joints vertical except where otherwise indicated.
Skirting & dado shall rest on the top of the flooring, Where full size tiles cannot be fixed
these shall be cut (Sawn) to the required size and their edges rubbed smooth.
3.3
CURING AND FINISHING :
The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement grout with wire brush or trowel to a depth
of 2mm to 3mm & all dust & loose removed. Joints shall then be flush pointed with white
cement added with pigments if required to match the color of tiles. The surfaces shall then
be kept wet for seven days. After curing the surface shall be washed and finished clean.
The finished work shall not sound hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.
4.0
ARTIFICIAL STONE FLORING :
Selection of materials, methods of mixing, placing and compacting shall generally conform
to the specification under plain and reinforced cement concrete described earlier. A stiff
mix consistent with workability shall be used.
4.1
PREPARATION OF SURFACE :
Before the operation for laying topping is started the surface of base concrete shall be
thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, loose particles, caked mortar, droppings and laitance of any
by scrubbing with coir or steel wire brush where the concrete has hardened so much that
roughening of surface by wire brush is not possible, the surface shall be roughened by
chipping or hacking at close intervals. The surface shall then be cleaned with water & kept
for 12 hours and surplus water shall be removed by mopping before the topping is laid.
4.2
LAYING :
142
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
The screed strips shall be fixed over the base concrete dividing it into suitable panels.
Before placing the concrete for topping, neat cement slurry shall be thoroughly brushed
into the prepared surface of the base concrete just ahead of the finish. Concrete of specified
proportion and thickness shall be laid in alternate panels to required level and shape and
thoroughly tamped.
4.3
FINISHING THE SURFACE :
After the concrete has been fully compacted it shall be finished by toweling or floating with
neat cement rendering Finishing operations shall start shortly after the compaction of
concrete and the surfaces shall be trowelled three times at intervals so as to produce a
uniform and hard surface. The satisfactory resistance of floor to wear depends largely upon
the care with trowelling is carried out. The time interval allowed between successive
trowelling is very important. Immediately trowelling shall be done to give a level surface.
Excessive trowelling in the earlier stages shall be avoided as this tends to brings a layer
rich in cement to line surface. Sometime after the first trowelling, the duration depending
upon the temperature, atmospheric conditions and the of cement used, the surface shall be
retrowelled to close any pores in the surface and to bring to surface shall be retrowelled to
close any pores in the surface and to bring to surface and to scrap off any excess water in
concrete or laitance. No dry cement shall be used directly on the surface to absorb
moistures or to stiffen the mix. The final trowelling shall be done well before the concrete
has become too hard but at such a time that considerable pressure is required to make any
impression on the surface if directly by the PMC approved minerals pigment shall be
added to the rendering to give desired color and shade to the flooring at no extra cost.
5.0 MARBLE STONE FLOORING/ITALIAN MARBLE STONE FLOORING :
5.1
DRESSING OF SLABS :
Every stone shall be hand/machine cut to the required size and shape, fine chisel dressed
on all sides of the stone shall be fully in contact with it. The top surface shall also be fine
chisel dressed to remove all waviness. The sides and top surface of slabs shall be machine
rubbed or table rubbed with coarse sand before paying. All angles and edges of the marble
slab shall be true, square and free from chipping and the surface shall be true and plane.
The thickness of the slabs shall be as specified in the description of the item, Tolerance of
+/-2mm. shall be allowed.
5.2
LAYING :
The sub-grade concrete or the R.C.C. slab on which the slabs are to be laid shall be
cleaned, wetted & mopped. The bedding for the slabs shall be with cement mortar 1:4 (1
cement :4 coarse sand).
The averages thickness of the bedding mortar under the slab shall not be less than 20mm.
The slabs shall be laid in the following manner :143
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Mortar of the specified mix shall be spread the area of each slab, roughly to the average
thickness specified in the item. The slab shall be washed clean before laying. It shall be
laid on top, pressed, trapped with wooden mallet and brought to level with the adjoining
slabs. It shall be lifted and laid aside. The top surface of the mortar is allowed to harden bit
and cement slurry of honey like consistency cement per sqm. The edges of the slab already
paved shall be buttered with grey or white cement with or without admixture of pigment to
match the shade of the paved, shall then be lowered gently back in position and tapped
with wooden mallet till it is properly bedded in a joint as possible. Subsequent slabs shall
be laid in the same manner. After each slab has been laid, surplus cement or the surface of
the slabs shall be cleaned off. The flooring shall be cured for a minimum period of seven
days. The surface of the flooring as laid shall be true to levels and slopes as
instructed by the PMC/ Owner.
The slabs shall be matched as shown in Tendered drawings or as instructed by the
PMC/Owner. Slabs which are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall shall enter not
less than 12 mm. under the plaster, skirting or dado, The junction between wall
plaster and floor shall be finished neatly and without variness.
5.3
POLISHING AND FINISHING :Slight unevenness at the meeting edges of slabs shall then be removed by fine
chiseling and finished in the same manner as specified in Para 7.3 above.
6.0
MARBLE STONE IN SKIRTING, DADO, RISERS STEPS ETC.
6.1
PREPARATION OF SURFACE :The masonry joints shall be raked or concrete surfaces hacked and roughened. If
considered necessary , the wall surface shall be cut uniformly to the requisite depth
so that the skirting face shall have the projection from the finished face of wall as
shown in Tendered drawings or as required by the PMC/ Owner. No additional
cost on this account shall be paid.
6.2
LAYING :
The risers of steps and skirting shall be set in grey or white cement admixed with
or without pigment to match the shade of the stone as specified in the description
of the item with the line of the slab of such a distance from the wall that the
average width or the gap shall be 20mm. and at no place the width shall be less
than 15mm. If necessary, the slab shall be held in position by temporary M.S. hooks
fixed in to the wall at intervals. The skirting or riser face shall be checked for plane
and plumb and corrected . The skirting shall thus be left to harden then the rear of
the skirting or riser slab shall be packed with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse
sand) or other mixed as specified in the description of the item. The fixing hooks
shall be removed after the mortar filling the gap has acquired sufficient strength.
The joints shall be as fine as possible . The top line of skirting and risers shall be
truly horizontal and joints truly vertical, except where otherwise indicated.
144
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
The risers and skirting slab shall be matched as shown in drawing or as instructed
by the PMC/ Owner.
6.3
CURING. POLISHING AND FINISHING :
It shall be as specified in Para 8.3 as far possible except that cement slurry with or
without pigment shall not be applied on the surface and polishing shall be done with
hand. The face and lop skirting shall be polished.
7.0
SAND STONE IN SKIRTING, DADO, STEPS ETC.
7.1
PREPARATION OF SURFACE :The masonry joints shall be raked or concrete surfaces hacked and roughened. If
considered necessary , the wall surface shall be cut uniformly to the requisite
depth so that the skirting face shall have the projection from the finished face of
wall as shown in Tendered drawings or as required by the PMC/ Owner. No
additional cost on this account shall be paid.
7.2
LAYING :
The trades of steps and skirting shall be set in appropriate cement admixed with
or without pigment to match the shade of the stone as specified in the description
of the item with the line of the slab of such a distance from the wall that the
average width or the gap shall be 20mm. and at no place the width shall be less
than 15mm. If necessary, the slab shall be held in position by temporary M.S. hooks
fixed in to the wall at intervals. The skirting or riser face shall be checked for plane
and plumb and corrected . The skirting shall thus be left to harden then the rear of
the skirting or riser slab shall be packed with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse
sand) or other mixed as specified in the description of the item. The fixing hooks
shall be removed after the mortar filling the gap has acquired sufficient strength.
The joints shall be as fine as possible . The top line of skirting and risers shall be
truly horizontal and joints truly vertical, except where otherwise indicated.
The risers and skirting slab shall be matched as shown in drawing or as instructed
by the PMC/ Owner.
7.3
CURING. POLISHING AND FINISHING :
It shall be as specified in Para 8.3 as far possible except that cement slurry with or
without pigment shall not be applied on the surface and polishing shall be done with
hand. The face and lop skirting shall be polished.
145
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
SECTION -VI
EXTERNAL AND INTERNAL PAINTING WORKS
1.1
Section – 13
SCAFOLDING :
Wherever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be erected on double supports tied
together by horizontal pieces, which scaffolding planks shall be fixed. No. ballies.
bamboos or planks shall rest on or touch the surface which is being white washed.
For all exposed brick work or tile work, double scaffolding having two sets of vertical
supports shall be provided. The supports shall be sound and strong, tied together
with horizontal pieces over which scaffolding planks shall be fixed.
Note: In case of special type of brick work, scaffolding shall be got approved from
PMC/ Owner in advance.
Where ladders are used, pieces of old gunny bags shall be tied on their tops to avoid
damage or scratches to walls.
For white washing the ceiling , proper stage scaffolding shall be erected.
1.2
APPLICATION :
The white wash shall be applied with moon brush to the specified number of coats. The
operation of each coat shall consist of a stock of the brush given from the top
downwards, another from the bottom upward over the first stroke, and similarly one
stroke horizontally from the right & another from the left before it dries.
Each coat shall be allowed to dry before the next one is applied. Further each coat
shall be inspected and approved by the PMC / Owner before the subsequent coat is
applied. No portion of the surface shall be left out initially to be patched up later
on.
For new work, three or more coats shall be applied till the surface presents a
smooth & uniform finish through which the plaster does not show. The finished dry
surface shall not show signs of cracking and peeling nor shall it come off readily
on the hand when rubbed.
For old work, after the surface has been prepared as described, in Para 1.2 and a coat
of white wash shall be applied over the patches and repairs. Then a single coat or
two more coats of whit e wash as stipulated in the description of the item shall be
applied over the entire surface. The whit e washed surface should present a uniform
finish through which the plaster patches do not appear. The washing on ceiling
should be done prior to that on walls.
1.3
PROTECTIVE MEASURES :
Doors, windows, floors, articles of furniture etc., & such other parts of the building
not to be white washed shall be protected from being splashed upon. Splashing and
froopings, if any, shall be removed by the contractor at his own cost and the
surfaces cleaned. Damages if any to furniture of fittings and fixtures shall be
recoverable from the Contractor.
146
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
2.1
Section – 13
Surface Preparation.
This includes scraping uneven surface, damaged plaster, etc. with carborundum
papers of suitable number till hard, clean surface is obtained. This is to be
repeated till the work is approved by the Engineer. Putty shall be used to cover
holes and unevenness on the surface.
2.2
Preparation and application of Putty.
Putty will be prepared as under. It shall be prepared from English whiting chalk,
linseed oil, white zinc and plater of paris in the prop. of 7:1:2:1. However, exact
proportion shall be decided as per site condition. Water, if required, can be added
as per the instructions and requirements to have proper consistency and stickness.
Putty should be smooth and free from any coarse ingredient, etc.
Application of putty should be started only after approval of surface area by the
Engineer. It should be applied on the whole surface to make the surface smooth.
No lumps should be allowed to dry completely.
After drying, the surface should be scraped with sand/emery paper till smooth
surface is obtained.
If no proper smoothness is obtained again apply primer, putty, etc. and repeat the
process as mentioned above, till the surface is perfect smooth as per instructions.
After application of first coat of putty, the surface shall be allowed to dry for 24
hours. sand papering shall then be done to give smooth surface.
Subsequent applications of putty and sand papering shall be done till the Engineer
is satisfied about final surface, which should be absolutely even, leveled and
smooth.
2.3
Primer application
Primer should be a cement primer, or as per manufacturer's specification
(manufacturer same as that of distemper). These tins should be opened in
presence of the Engineer. Before applying primer on the surface, its consistency
must be approved by the Engineer and shall be same as specified by the
manufacturer. Primer should be applied with smooth brushes on surface to cover
entire surface properly. There should be no brush marks, stripes, etc. when
applied on the surface. This surface should be allowed to dry at least for 24 hours
before next application.
On the surface so prepared, two coats of oil bound distemper of selected shade shall be applied
only after inspection by the Engineer. A horizontal and vertical travel of brush together will be
considered as one coat of paint. Each coat of paint shall be applied only after inspection of
Engineer. No brush marks shall be visible on the surface at the end of final coat. Final surface
shall be smooth, even or roller finish and uniform in colour and texture.
147
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
2.4
Section – 13
Acrylic Emulsion Paint
Paint shall be of approved quality and shades
Surface preparation, primer and putty application shall be as per clause 2.1,2.2,2.3
Two coats of Acrylic emulsion paints shall be applied as per manufacturer's specification. The
surface on finishing shall present a flat velvety smooth finish.
3.7
Synthetic Enamel Painting
Surface preparation shall be by hand cleaning. Primer shall be zinc cromate or zinc phosphate
(pigmented in alkyed or phenolic medium of approved make, British or Asian Paints) of
minimum 38 microns dry film thickness. The coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved make,
British Luxol-3 or Asian apcolite, of total 100 microns DFT shall be applied as directed by the
Engineer.
4.1 COMMERCIAL WORK :
Painting shall not be started until the PMC/ Owner has inspected the items of work
to be painted , satisfied himself about their proper quality and given his approval to
commence the painting work. Painting of external surface should not be done in
adverse weather conditions like hail storm and dust storm.
Painting except the priming coat, shall generally be taken in and after practically
finishing all other builders work. The rooms should be thoroughly swept out and
the entire building cleaned up at least one day in advance of the painting work being
started.
4.2
PREPARATION OF SURFACE :
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and dusted . All rust, dirt, scales, smoke and
grease shall be thoroughly removed before painting is started. The prepared surface
shall have received the approval of the PMC /Owner after inspection, before painting
is commenced.
4.3
APPLICATION :
Before pouring into smaller container for use, the paint shall be stirred thoroughly in
the containers. When applying also, the paint shall be continuously stirred in the
smaller container so that its consistency is kept uniform.
If for any reasons , thinning is necessary in case of ready mixed paint, the brand of
thinner recommended by the manufacturer or as instructed by the PMCs/ NLUO
shall be used.
The painting shall be laid on evenly and smoothly by means of crossing and
smoothly by means of crossing and laying off , the latter in the direction of the
grain of wood. The crossing & laying of consists of covering the area over with
paint, brushing the surface hard for the first time over and ten brushing alternately in
opposite direction, two or three times and then finally brushing lightly in a direction
148
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
at right angles to the same. In this process, no brush marks shall be left after laying
off is finished. The full process of crossing and laying off will constitute one coat.
Where so stipulated the painting shall be done by spraying. Spray machine used
may be (a) high pressure (small air aperture) type (b) a low pressure (large air
aperture) type, depending on the nature and location of work to be carried out.
Skilled and experienced workmen shall be employed for this class of work. Paints
used shall be brought to the requisite consistency by adding a suitable thinner.
Spraying should be done only when dry condition prevails. Each coat shall be allowed to
dry thoroughly and rubbed smooth before the next coat is applied. This should be
facilitated by through ventilation. Each coat except the last coat, shall be lightly rubbed
with sand paper or with pumice stone and cleaned off dust before the next coat is laid.
No left over paint shall be put back into the stock tins. When not in use the container shall
be kept properly closed.
No hair marks from the brush or clogging of paint puddles in the corners of panes, angles
of moldings etc., shall be left on the work.
In painting doors and windows, the putty round, the glass panes must also be painted, but
care must be taken to see that no paint stains etc. are left on the glass top of shutters and
surfaces in similar hidden location shall not be left out in paint.
In painting steel work, special care shall be taken while painting over bolts, nuts, rivets,
overlaps etc.
The additional specifications for primer & other coats of paints shall be as according to the
detailed specifications under the respective headings.
4.4
BRUSHES AND CONTAINERS :
After work, the brushes shall be completely of paint and linseed oil rinsing with turpentine.
A brush in which paint has dried up is ruined and shall on no account be used for painting
work. The containers when not in use, shall be kept closed and free from air so that paint
does thicken and also shall be kept safe from dust , When the paint has been used, the
containers shall be washed with turpentine and wiped dry with soft clean cloth, so that they
are clean, and can be used again.
5.0
PRIMING COAT ON WOOD, IRON OR PLASTERED SURFACE :
5.1
PREPARATION OF SURFACE :
i.
WOODEN SURFACE
The wood work to be painted shall be dry and free from moisture. The surface shall be
thoroughly cleaned. All unevenness shall be rubbed down smooth with sand paper and
shall be well ducted, Knots, if any, shall be covered with preparation of red lead made by
grinding red lead in water and filled materials with same shade as paint shall be used where
specified .
The surface treated for knotting shall be dry before painting is applied. After the priming
coat is applied, the holes and indentations on the surface shall be stopped with glaziers
149
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
putty or wood putty. The primer shall be prepared on site or shall be of approved brand and
manufacture as specified in the item. Paint shall be anti-corrosive bitumastic paints,
aluminum paint or other types of a paint as specified in the description of the item.
Stopping shall not be done before the priming coat is applied as the wood will absorb the
oil in the stopping and then latter is therefore liable to crack.
ii.
IRON AND STEEL SURFACE :
All rust and scales shall be removed by scrapping or by brushing with steel wire brushes.
Hard skin of oxide formed on the surface of wrought iron during rolling which become
loose by rusting, shall be removed.
All dust and dirt shall be thoroughly wiped away from the surface.
If the surface is wet, it shall be dried before priming coat is undertaken
iii.
OKASTERED SURFACE :
The surface shall ordinarily not be painted until it has dried completely. Trial patches of
primer shall be laid at intervals and where drying is satisfactory, painting shall then be
taken in hand. Before primer is applied, holes and undulations, shall be filled up with
plaster of Paris and rubbed smooth.
5.2
APPLICATION :
The primer shall be applied with brush, worked well in to the surface and spread even
smooth. The painting shall be done by brushing and laying off as described in cement paint
above.
6.0
Painting with ready mixed paint/synthetic enamel paint :
6.1
Painting on new surface :
The surface, which has not been painted earlier, or the paint has been removed by paint
remover, burning, caustic soda etc., shall be considered to the new surfaces.
6.2
PREPARATION OF SURFACE :
i.
WOOD WORK :
The surface shall be cleaned and all unevenness removed as specified in wooden
surface. Knots if visible shall be covered with a preparation of red lead. Holes, and
indentations of the surface shall be filled in with glazier's putty and rubbed smooth
before painting is done. The surface should be thoroughly dry before painting.
ii.
IRON AND STEEL WORK :
150
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
The priming coat shall have dried up completely before painting is started. Rust &
scaling shall be carefully removed by scrapping or by brushing with steel wire
brushes. All dust and dirt shall be carefully & thoroughly wiped away.
iii.
PLASTERED SURFACE :
The priming coat shall have dried up completely before painting is started. All dust
or dirt that has settled on the priming coat shall be thoroughly wiped away before
painting is started.
6.2
APPLICATION :
The specification described in cement paint shall hold good as far as applicable. The
number of coats to be applied will be as stipulated in the item. The painted surface
shall present a uniform appearance and glossy/mat finish as described in schedule
of quantities free from streaks , blisters etc.
6.4
PAINTING AN OLD SURFACE :
The surface which has been painted earlier shall be considered to be old surface.
6.5
PREPARATION OF SURFACE :
i.
WOOD WORK :
If the old paint is sound and firm and its removal is considered necessary the
surface shall be rubbed down with pumice stone after it has been cleaned of all
smoke and grease by washing with lime and rinsing with water and drying. All dust
and loose pint shall be completely removed. The surface shall then be washed with
soap and water.
If the old painted surface is blistered or flaked badly, paint shall be completely
removed with the application of a paint remove following the specification of the
manufacturer. The paint remover shall be of a brand and manufacturer approved by
the PMC / Owner. It shall be free from alkaline matter and non caustic so that it
can be handled by workmen without injury. It shall be of non flammable quality as
far as possible and such removal shall be paid for separately. Holes and cracks if
any shall be stopped with glazier's putty or wood putty. Further the painting itself
shall be treated as on new surface and paid for accordingly.
ii.
IRON AND STEEL WORK :
If the old paint is sound and firm and its removal is considered unnecessary, it shall
be rubbed with wire brushes and any loosened paint taken off. All dust shall be
thoroughly wiped away. This surface shall then be wiped finally with mineral
151
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
turpentine to remove grease and perspiration of hand marks etc., and then allowed
to dry.
If the old painted surface is in bad condition and blistered and flaked, the old
paint shall be completely removed and the surface prepared as described in above .
Such removal shall be paid for separately. The painting including the priming coat
shall be treated as on new work and paid for accordingly.
7.0 FRENCH SPIRIT POLISHING :
Pure cello varying from pale orange to lemon yellow colour free from resin or
dirt shall be dissolved in methylated spirit at the rate of 140 gm. of shellac to 1
liter of spirit. Suitable pigment shall be added to get the required shade.
7.1
POLISHING NEW SURFACES :
Preparation of surface - The surface shall be cleaned. All unevenness shall be rubbed
down smooth with sand paper and well dusted. Knots if visible shall be covered
with a preparation of red lead and glue sized and used hot. Holes and
indentations of the surface shall be sloped with glaziers putty. The surface shall be
then given a coat of wood filler made by ming whiting (Ground Chalk in
methylated spirit at the rates of 1.5 kg. of whiting per liter of spirit). The surface
shall again be rubbed down perfectly smooth with glass paper and wiped clean.
7.2
APPLIACATION :
The number of coats of polish to be applied shall be as decided by the PMC to get
the desired finish. A pad of woolen cloth covered by the fine cloth shall be used to
apply the polish. The pad shall be moisture with the polish and rubbed hard on the
wood, in a series of overlapping circles applying the mixture sparingly but uniformly
over the entire area to give an even level surface. A trace of linseed oil on the
face of the pad facilitates this operation. The surface shall be all owed to dry and
the pad shall be covered with a fresh piece of clean fine cotton cloth slightly
damped with methylated spirit and rubbed lightly and quickly with circular
motions. The finished surface shall have a uniform texture.
152
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
SECTION -VII
CARPENTARY AND JOINERY WORKS
1.0
GENERAL :
Arrangement for procurement of timber section shall be made with the receipt of
order of facilitate natural air seasoning at site.
The Contractor shall invariably submit test certificate in cases where seasoned and
treated timber have been specified. Arrangements for test check at site for random
samples shall be made by the contractor.
No timber material shall be painted till such time it has been approved by the
PMC/NLUO. A coat of primer shall immediately be applied on receipt of approval
from the PMC/ NLUO. The final painting shall be done as indicted in the schedule
or as directed by the PMC/NLUO, when all other works are generally completed and
PMC/NLUO has given approval to proceed with final painting.
If after finishing and erection of wood work any undue shrinkage or cracks due to
bed workmanship or material is found, the contractor shall remove the same & supply
better and approved materials at his own cost.
All wood savings, cuttings and other rubbish shall be removed and the site left
clear as the work progress. All precautions against fire shall also be taken by the
contractor.
2.0
WORKMANSHIP :
2.1
FRAME :
The workmanship shall be first class and to the approval of the PMC/NLUO .
Scantlings and boarding shall accurately be sawn and shall be of the required
width and thickness with allowable tolerance. All carpenter's work shall be wrought (
Planed) except where otherwise described. The workmanship and joinery shall be
accurately set out in strict accordance with the Tendered drawings and shall be
framed together and securely fixed in approved manner with properly made joints.
All work is to be properly tennoned, shouldered, wedged, pinned, bided, etc. and
properly glued with approved quality adhesive to the satisfaction of the PMC/Owner.
All wedges of timber frames shall be protected from being damaged during
construction by providing rough timber casing securely fixed and other adequate
protective measures.
Door/ Windows frames shall have cut rebates. Planted rebates unless shown in
drawing shall not be permitted.
All fully fabricated timber shall be air- seasoned at site for about two months to
allow for any shrinkage that may take place. As such it is desirable that the
fabrication of frames is started with the commencement of the project work.
153
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
The faces of frames or any timber coming in contact with masonry or concrete or
embedded in ground shall be treated with hot tar primer or crested before they are
placed in position.
No frames shall be painted until it is inspected by the PMC/NLUO and passed.
Immediately after it is passed it shall be given a coat of primer. the final painting or
polishing shall be done only when advised by the PMC/NLUO.
2.2
ANCHOR FASTNER
Three anchor fastner shall be fixed to each post of the door frame . The M.S. anchor
shall be of 150 mm or as required at site and shall be fixed to the frames by means
of screws and not nails . The other end of the anchor fastner shall be fixed into
jambs with [1:2:4] P.C.C. of dimensions as directed. Ends of anchor fastner will be
fish tailed. Corner straps of M.S. sheets shall be provided and fixed on corners with
screws.
Whenever asked for metal fastener or bolts as directed shall be used for rough
ground, framing, hangers etc.
The rates quoted for wood work and joinery shall include the cost for all types of
anchor fastner directed ( Horns for frames shall be cut and shall not be used as
anchor fastner) cement grouting and fixing to frame work with screws etc. all
materials, wastages , labour, T&P hoisting and fixing in position at all heights and
depths, providing two coats of creosote /so lignum air seasoning of wood.
2.3 FLUSH DOOR
Providing and fixing ISI marked 35 mm thick flush door shutters decorative type, core of
block board construction with frame of 1st class hard wood and well matched commercial
board shutters with ISI marked Stainless Steel butt hinges with necessary screws etc. all
complete. The door shall be finished with approved shade enamel paint of two coats over a
coat of primer. 4 mm thick teak wood leaping shall be provided periphery of the door with teak
wood beading design and including all fittings etc. complete
2.4 Providing, fitting and fixing of M.S. door as per approved design with all fitting fixture
including two coats of approved coloured enamel paint over a coat of primer etc. all
complete and as per the direction of Engineer-in-charge.
2.5 TEAK DOOR
Providing and fixing of 38 mm thick teak wood pannel shutter.(main entrance door ).
38 mm style and 22 mm to 25 mm thick pannel plank complete with iron fitting and wooden
hinged cleats etc. fitted and fixed in position for doors and windows including wood polish as
per drawing etc. all complete and as per the direction of Engineer-in-charge.
2.7
SHUTTERS :
154
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Shutters shall be planed at site to match the finished dimension between rebates of
frames leaving and uniform gap of not more than 3mm. between the frame and the
shutter end. shutters shall be hung by screws, as per drawing and specification and
properly threaded in. The finished work shall be true to plumb and true to shape.
The shutters. shall be so fixed, that while closing , the left hand leaf of the shutters
is closed first and the right hand leaf of the shutter overlaps on the left hand leaf
by minimum 20mm.
2.8 AUTOMATIC ALUMINIUM PORFORATED ROLLING SHUTTER
Automatic aluminium perforated rolling shutters of 1. 77 mm. 1 layer slate of Aluminum
material, Perforated with honeycomb holes with approved colour white / beige, Rubber insert
between slates,80 mm. guide rail with brushed inserts, Internal tubular motor, Remote controlled
operation as well as manual opening in case of power failure, Bottom slate with rubber, Nylon
guide roller, Metal cover at the top, Manual electrical switch, Thickness => at least 1 mm.,
Surface treating with Powder coating and Tubular Motor, of required specification .
155
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
SECTION -VIII
SPECIFICATION FOR WATER PROOFING.
1.0
DAMP PROOF COURSE (D.P.C.) :
D.P.C. shall be of thickness as shown in drawing or in the bill of quantities. Unless
otherwise mentioned, prop, shall be 1 part of cement, 2 parts of sand, 4 parts of aggregate
mixed with approved water proofing compound @ 3% by weight of cement or as per
manufacturer specification. Before laying the concrete, the top surface of the wall shall be
thoroughly cleaned of all dirt and loose particles, mortar dropping and laitance of any,
scrubbing with coir or steel wire brush or by hacking, if necessary, The surface is then
thoroughly wetted and the concrete is placed. The concrete shall be laid in every case the
full width of the plinth or as shown in drawing. The top surface shall be kept rubbed or
rough or double chequered for adhesion of mortar for brick work over D.P.C. On top of
D.P.C. bitumen painting is to be done as per I.S. specification.
1.1
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT :
D.P.C. shall be measured net in square meter.
2.0
CEMENT BASED WATER PROOFING :
MATERIAL :
Water proofing compound confirming to I.S. 2645 shall be used only as per enlisted/
approved manufactured.
2.2
PROPORTION, MIXING AND WORKMANSHIP :
The surface shall be well cleaned by water before the treatment. Then a slurry coat of neat
cement using 2.75 Kg./Sqm of cement admixed as per manufacturer’s instructions will be
grouted water proofing compound conforming to IS: 2645 over the RCC slab.
The cement concrete shall be laid using broken bricks/brick bats 25mm to 100mm size
with 50% of cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement : 5 coarse sand) admixed with approved water
proofing compound conforming to IS :2645 to required slope and treated similarly the
adjoining walls up to 300mm height including rounding of junctions of wall and slabs, in
the form of ghoondies at rain water pipe.
After two days of proper curing apply a second coat of cement slurry admixed with
approved water proofing compound conforming to IS : 2445.
The surface will be finished with 20mm thick joint less cement mortar of mix 1:4 (1cement
: 4coarse sand) admixed with approved water proofing compound conforming to IS : 2645
and finally finished the surface with trowel with neat cement slurry and false thread
marking of 300x300mm square.
The whole area so finished shall be flooded with water for a minimum period of two weeks
for curing and for final test.
The average thickness of the treatment shall be 120 mm and the minimum thickness near
khurra /rain water outlets shall be not less than 65mm.
156
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
SECTION -IX
METAL DOORS, ALUMINIUM AND UPVC WINDOWS AND VARIOUS STEEL
WORKS.
1.
GRILLS AND RAILINGS :
The grills and railings for windows, verandah & balcony etc., shall be of mild steel. The
design of grills/railings and shape and sizes of various a component shall be according to
the Tendered drawings.
The edge angles and corners shall be cleaned and true to shape. The joints, if possible shall
be mechanically inter locked and neatly spot welded in such a way that the grills is rigid.
Grinding of the joins to achieve at neat regular finish shall be done. The grills shall be
fixed to true plumb line and level as per Tendered drawings. Grills etc. shall be painted
with one coat of approved primer before they are fixed. The final painting shall be done
only after obtaining approval the PMC/Consultant.
2.
Aluminum sections for fabricating fame work door, windows, jallies, etc, shall be of
extruded sections conforming to I.S 1948, 1949 or latest edition or as per drawing or as
manufactured by Indian Aluminum Co. Ltd. or approved equivalent. The alloy used
shall conform to I.S. designation H.E. WP I.S. 733.
3.
I. uPVC Sliding Window 2-Track 2 Sash
Providing and fixing of factory made Duroplast uPVC 2-track Sliding window (White Colour)
complete, comprising uPVC multi-chambered frame of size 67mm x 54mm having uPVC roller
track on top and uPVC sash of size 60mm x 47mm. All corners of frame and sash will be
fusion welded and duly reinforced with G.I. section 1.2 mm.
After placing 4mm float or prescribed glass in the sash, uPVC glazing bead, interlock, EPDM
gasket, brush will be provided including hardware, i.e., touch lock and rollers & proper drainage
system shall be provided. Window will be fixed to the wall with 100mm long and 8mm dia.
Fasteners and complete in all respect as per direction of Engineer-In-Charge.
II. uPVC Adjustable Louver Window with Exhaust Provision
Providing and fixing of factory made Duroplast, uPVC Louver window comprising of uPVC
multi-chambered frame of size 67 mm x 54 mm, duly reinforced with 1.2 mm thick G. I.
Section. Both vertical sides of the frame, adjustable louver with 4 mm frosted glass and having
one lever to adjust the glass. Window will be fixed to the wall with 100mm long and 8mm dia.
Fasteners and complete in all respect as per direction of Engineer-In-Charge.
157
Project: National Law University Auditorium
________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
4. i. Light duty Ductile iron grating of size450 mm wide x 600, 450mm x 450 mm with
Frame(hinged) of approved design including setting floor with cement mortar length for
trench drain etc.
ii. Light duty Square Cover of size 600 mm x 600 mm with frame(hinged) of approved design
including setting floor with cement mortar etc.
SECTION -X
STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS
1.00
GENERAL SCOPE
1.01
This specification deals with the technical requirements needed for the fabrication and
erection of Structural Steel Works for various structures (Roofing, display board, lightning,
barricading etc) coming under the scope of this contract. All shop connections shall be
welded unless otherwise specified in Consultant’s design drawing. Field connections shall
be either welded or bolted and as shown in design drawings.
1.02
The specification cover the technical requirements for supply of all steel items were
specified fabrication, loading / unloading and transportation of fabricated members,
inspection, testing, painting, lifting and erection to desired position, alignment, etc.
complete including preparation of fabrication drawings for structural steel work involving
rolled section, pipes and built up sections fabricated out of plates, rolled section and or
combination of plates and rolled sections in columns, beams, gantry girders, roof trusses,
portals, purlins, shear connector, VIP galleries, well beams, brackets, stub columns,
bracings, trestles, base plates, chequred plate flooring, grating with binders, walk way
platform, ladders, stairs complete with stringers, treads, landing, hand rails posts, erection
bolts and nuts, permanent bolts and nuts, dismantling, modification and re-erection of
fabricated/erected steel, etc. including all sampling and testing as given in annexure-A for
the areas of work as specified above.
1.03
The scope of work also includes design of all connections welded/bolted connections to
overcome any practical difficulty of construction, preparation of shop fabrication/erection
drawings from pre-approved vendor/engineer by structural consultant and deployed by
contractor, along with erection material wise material list and bolt list for each erection
work, third party inspection and testing of fabricated materials, shop and field painting after
necessary surface preparation of all fabricated items to be from pre-approved
vendor/engineer by structural consultant and deployed by contractor. The scope of work
also includes but is not limited to proper stacking and storage of fabricated materials,
transport from place of storage to place of erection including touch up of primer shop coat
damaged in transit. No additional claim on this account will be entertained.
1.04
The scope also includes fastening and fittings of every type which are described in or
implied by this specification, whether shown on the Drawings or not. The scope also
158
Project: National Law University Auditorium
________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
includes every detail required for satisfactory completion of the structural works placed in its final position
and in
perfect state including shop drawings etc. The works shall be generally as shown on the Drawings as to
overall dimensions and sizes.
2.00
REQUIREMENTS
2.01
The Principal Contractor shall furnish all structural steel material, labour, plant, equipment,
scaffolding, tools, tackles, all materials and consumables such as welding electrodes, bolt
sand nuts, oxygen and acetylene gases, oils for cleaning etc. of approved quality as per
relevant Indian Standards and every-thing that is required for complete execution of the
work on schedule in accordance with the drawings and as described herein and/or as
directed by the EIC.
2.02
Fabrication, Erection and approval of Steel Structures shall be in compliance with;
–
–
2.03
These General Specifications, IS: 800 and other relevant Indian Standards as listed in
clause 3.02.
Drawings and supplementary drawings to be supplied to the Principle contractor by
EIC during execution of the work.
Reference points and bench marks
The Principle Contractor shall make his own arrangements for locating the coordinates and
positions of all work and reduced level (RL) at these locations based on two reference grid
lines and one bench mark which shall be furnished by the Employer. The Principle
Contractor has to provide at site all the required survey instruments to the satisfaction of the
work that can be carried out accurately according to the specifications and drawings.
2.04
Drawings
a) Fabrication drawings and connection designs as preferred by contractor to ease
connection works practically at shop and at site, shall be prepared by the Principal
Contractor approved by structural consultant based on the Design drawings released for
construction. All the drawings for the entire work shall be prepared in metric units. The
drawings shall preferably be of one standard size and the details shown there in shall be
clear and legible. The details shown shall be drawn to the minimum scale as under. A)
Marking plan 1:75, b) Joint details 1:5, 1:10, 1:15 c) Elevations 1:20. These drawings
shall indicated structural layout and elevation complete details of fabrication and
erection including all splicing details, lacing details, weld sizes and lengths, detailing
of all joints, bill of materials in the Performa approved by the & and all other
customary details in accordance with standard structural engineering practice whether
or not given by the Employer. He shall furnish along with the fabrication drawings,
necessary calculation regarding design of joints viz. Size and length of welds, dia and
number of bolts, and calculations justifying other fabrication details as a well as design
of erection and fabrication splices in accordance with IS:800 and other relevant
standards. He shall also furnish scheme of erection which to be approved by structural
consultant before taking erection works at site. Quality of structural steel, welding
159
Project: National Law University Auditorium
________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
electrodes, bolts, nuts and washers to be used shall be indicated in the drawing in accordance with the
technical specification.
b) The fabrication drawing shall indicate identification (erection) marks for purposes of
dispatch and erection etc. Fabrication drawing shall include the following
Non-destructive testing (NDT):
Girders - 20 % dye penetrate examination (DPE) of root runs. 20% on selected
joints MPT to be carried out and 20% selected joints UT to be carried out after
completion of works.
Others
-
10 % Radiography of butt welds if required for verifications as
instructed by consultants.
-
10 % DPT
c) In addition, the total quantity as well as abstract of quantities is to be indicated in the
fabrication drawings. The Principal contractor shall prepare a consolidated schedule of
permanent bolts and nuts, showing the quality, length, size, weight and numbers
required for each fabricated member.
d) Three copies of the detailed fabrication drawings including bolts and nuts schedule
shall be submitted by the Principal Contractor for approval in the first instance along
with Bill of materials showing the description of members, their erection marks,
quantity, etc. (Performa to be approved by the in case the approval accorded to the
fabrication drawings is subject to any modifications, additions, and alternations, the
Principal Contractor shall submit two sets of the revised drawings for final approval
after incorporating these changes.
e) In case the drawings are approved as submitted, he shall submit six additional prints of
such approved fabrication drawings. In addition, the Principal Contractor shall also be
required to furnish one reproducible copy of final fabrication drawings (as built).
f)
The design drawings may require revision either before or after the preparation and
approval of fabrication drawings. Such revision shall be duly incorporated in the
fabrication drawings and nothing extra shall be payable on this account for
preparation/revision of fabrication drawings and execution of works.
g) The fabrication work shall start only after approval to the fabrication drawings is
accorded by the
h) Such approval shall however, not relieve the Principal Contractor of his responsibility
for the safety of the structure, good connections, erectability, etc.
2.05
Material supply and Samples
Steel materials shall comply with the specifications laid down under clause 3.0 and/or as
called for in the design drawings. All materials used shall be new, unused and free from
defects.
160
Project: National Law University Auditorium
________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
All steel and other material shall be procured and supplied by the Principal contractor, from the
reputed sources as approved by and shall conform to the following:
Principal contractor shall use materials for fabrication as specified in the approved
drawings. All materials supplied by the Principal Contractor shall be in sound condition, of
recent manufacture, free from defects such as mill scales, slag intrusions, laminations,
pitting, flaky, rust etc. and be of full weight and thickness as specified.
The Principal contractor shall furnish the mill / manufacturer’s test reports, along with the
materials and satisfactorily demonstrates the specific grade and quality. Material test
certificate shall be original.
All materials required for the work shall be correlated with manufactures test certificates. In
the absence of test certificates, Principal Contractor shall test materials through reputed
laboratory approved by for establishing quality at his cost and as directed.
Material supplied against these Test Certificates (TC) should have identification stamped or
stenciled on them. All such identification markings shall be authenticated by the inspection
agency, which has inspected and approved the material.
They shall have the right to test random samples to prove authenticity of the test certificates
produced by the Contractor at the Contractor’s cost. Any material found not meeting the
required specification would be rejected.
Whenever the Contractor desires to substitute structural members / shapes, plates for the
sizes shown on the drawings, for want of availability of requisite materials, such
substitutions shall be made only after authorization in writing by the may also direct that
substitution be made, when he considers such substitution to be necessary.
Samples for checking the quality of materials procured by the Principal Contractor and
workmanship in the execution of the works may be called for at any time by the. In case
such samples are found to be of sub standard/unacceptable quality, the Principal Contractor
shall immediately discontinue use of such materials and workmanship and get fresh
samples approved by the nothing shall affect the liberty of the to reject whole or portions of
structures where such defective materials and workmanship has already been used before
detection.
2.06
Test at works
a)
The Principal Contractor shall submit Mill / Manufacturers test certificates for all the
materials procured by him. If test certificates are not available or identification marks are
not clear, the Principal Contractor shall arrange for such materials to be tested at an
approved laboratory as and when required by the.
b)
If material is supplied by the Clients, the Clients shall furnish a mill certified report of the
tests for each grade of steel from which the material is to be fabricated. In both the cases
(material supplied by the contractor or the client) the certification shall contain the results
of chemical and physical tests required by the specification for the material. In the event
the results of any test are not in conformance with the requirements of these specifications,
the clients shall conduct additional mill and laboratory tests. The additional costs of
161
Project: National Law University Auditorium
________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
furnishing, cutting and machining additional test specimens shall be borne by the client.
c)
Structural steel not conforming to the requirements of any of the above standards may be
used only if permitted in writing by the Consultant. This permission may be granted after
the steel is tested for yield point stress, ultimate tensile stress, elongation, ductility, weld
ability or any other property as required by the Consultant.
d)
For structural steel test samples shall be cut out of the materials from the locations
indicated by the and samples shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements of
Indian Standards
Specifications for conducting such tests. One set of tests will include test of three individual
specimens of samples.
5.0
CODES AND STANDARDS
3.01
All items of work shall conform to the requirements of relevant latest Indian standards. Any
item of work, for which there is no India Standard available, shall conform to the latest
British standard (B.S.) the item of work shall be best of its kind and subject to approval of
the EIC. In case of conflict between this specification and those referred to in the standard,
the former shall prevail.
3.02
The pertinent clauses and sections of the following codes, standards and specifications
(latest editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions) shall apply to
the material, design, detailing, fabrication, inspection of the work and painting covered by
this specification and as specified in the other sections of this specification. In the event of
the conflict of certain requirements of this specification with the details shown in drawings,
the decision of the EIC shall be final.
All structural steel shall conform to the requirements of any one of the following Indian
Standards as specified. The list of some important IS codes and standards applicable to the
structural steel work for the aforesaid project. However the applicable standards and codes
shall be as per but not limited to the list given below.
IS : 228
Methods of chemical analysis of steels
IS:432
Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wire for
(parts I & II) concrete reinforcement.
IS : 800
Code of practice for general construction in steel.
IS : 801
Code of practice for use of cold formed light gauge steel structural members
in general building construction.
IS : 808
Dimensions for hot rolled steel beam, column, channel and angle sections
IS : 811
Cold form light gauge structural steel sections.
IS : 812
Glossary of terms relating to welding and cutting of metals.
162
Project: National Law University Auditorium
________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
IS : 813
Scheme of symbols for welding.
IS: 814
Covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding of carbon and carbon
manganese steel
IS: 816
Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general construction in
mild steel.
IS : 817
Code of practice for training and testing of metal arc welders.
IS : 822
Code of procedure for inspection of welds.
IS : 875
Code of practice for design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and
structures.
IS : 962
Code of practice for architectural and building drawings
IS : 1079
Hot rolled carbon steel sheets and strips
IS : 1161
Steel tubes for structural purposes.
IS : 1182
Recommended practice for radiographic examination of fusion-welded butt
joints in steel plates/sections.
IS : 1200
Methods of measurements of building and civil engineering works
IS : 1239
Mild steel tubes, tubular and other wrought steel fittings.
IS : 1363
Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grade C.
IS : 1364
Hexagon head bolts, screws, and nuts of product grades A & B.
IS : 1367
Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners.
IS : 1477
Code of practice for painting of ferrous metal in buildings.
IS : 1599
Method of bend tests
IS : 1608
Method of testing of metals – Tensile testing
IS : 1852
Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products.
IS : 2016
Plain washers.
IS : 2062
Steel for general structural purposes
IS : 2074
Ready mixed paint, air drying, red oxide-zinc chrome priming.
IS : 2595
Code of practice for radio graphic testing.
163
Project: National Law University Auditorium
________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
IS : 3138
Hexagonal bolts and nuts.
IS : 3502
Steel chequered plate.
IS : 3613
Acceptance tests for wire flux combination for submerged arch welding.
IS : 3658
Code of practice for liquid penetrate flaw detection.
IS : 3664
Code of practice for ultrasonic pulse eco testing by contact and immersion
methods.
IS : 3696
Safety code of scaffolds and ladders.
IS : 3757
High strength structural bolts.
IS : 4218
ISO metric screw threads
IS : 4353
Recommendations for submerged arc welding of mild steel and low alloy
steels.
IS : 5334
Code of practice for magnetic particle flaw detection of welds.
IS : 5369
General requirements for plain washers and lock washers
IS : 5372
Taper washers for channels (ISMC)
IS : 5374
Taper washers for I-beams (ISMB)
IS : 5624
Foundation bolts
IS : 6610
Heavy washers for steel structures
IS : 6639
Hexagonal bolts for steel structures
IS : 7205
Safety code for erection of structural steel work.
IS : 7215
Tolerances for fabrication of steel structures.
IS : 7293
Safety code for working with construction machinery.
IS : 7318
Approval test for welders when welding procedure is not required
IS : 7973
Code of practice for architectural building and working drawings
IS : 8500
Structural steel – micro alloyed (medium and high strength qualities)
IS : 9595
(Metal arc welding
Recommendations)
IS : 10720
Technical drawings for structural metal works
of
carbon
and
carbon
manganese
steel
164
Project: National Law University Auditorium
________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
IS : 10748
Hot – cold steel scalp / strips for welded tubes and pipes
IS : 10842
Evaluation procedure for Y groove weld carckability test in structural steel.
IS : 12843
Tolerances for erection of structural steel.
SP: 6
(Part 1 to 7)
ISI Hand book for structural engineers
4.00
MATERIALS
4.01
Structural steel All the consignment received at site shall be with the test certificate
pertaining to that particular lot.
IS800 - 1984
Code of Practice for General Construction Steel
IS 2062 – 2006 (MTD) 4 Structural Steel (Standard quality/Fusion welding
quality)/Weld able Structural Steel.
All structural steel shall conform to E 350 grade with yield strength of 350 Mpa & Tensile
strength of 490 Mpa.
4.02
Structural steel rolled sections and plates shall conform to specified grade of IS:2062. Pipes
used in handrails, embedment etc, shall conform to IS:1161 or IS:1239. Chequered plate
shall conform to IS:3502. High strength steel shall conform to IS:8500 of specified grade.
All other materials shall be as per the list of standards codes given above or mentioned
elsewhere in the relevant sections.
The Principal Contractor may use alternate materials as compared to design specification
only with written approval, of the consultant.
4.03
All steel sections and plates shall be straight, sound, free from twists, cracks, flaws,
laminations, rough, jagged and imperfect edges loose mill scales and other defects.
(Contractor shall use materials for fabrication as specified in the approved drawings. All
materials supplied by the Contractor shall be in sound condition, of recent manufacture,
free from defects such as mill scales, slag intrusions, laminations, pitting, flaky, rust etc.
and be of full weight and thickness as specified.)
4.04
In case any defect like laminations is noticed in the steel sections and plates during
fabrication and erection, the same shall be brought to the notice of the EIC. These sections
and plates shall be rejected unless specifically approved for acceptance by the EIC.
4.05
Rolled Steel Sections
The following grades of steel shall be used for steel structures.
Structural steel shall conform to IS 2062 Gr “B”.
4.06
Rolled Steel Sections – Brands.
The approved brands for the structural steel shall be one of the following…
SAIL
165
Project: National Law University Auditorium
________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
TISCO
VIZAG
JINDAL
TATA
same to be pre-approved by EIC.
4.07
Cold Formed Sections
Steel and strip used for making these sections shall conform to IS 1079 - 1994
Specifications for light gauge structural quality hot rolled carbon steel sheet and strip.
4.08
Steel Plate and Protection Angles
Steel plate and protection angles required for the protection of concrete work shall be
erected true to line and grade within the tolerances specified below. The edges of exposed
faces may have a vertical or horizontal distortion from a straight line not greater than 3 mm
per meter of length, provided, that distortion for any single piece shall not exceed 1 mm
and provided, that
4.09
when the warp is greater than 1.6 mm an extra anchor hole shall be drilled near the proper
corner and the piece drawn into position thereby. All bolt heads on the exposed face shall
be countersunk and fitted or ground so that the heads are flush with the finished surface.
Joints between abutting sections shall be square and flush and the butting ends shall be
sawed or otherwise made smooth and regular.
Receipt and Storing of Materials:
a) Each rolled section must be marked for identification and each lot should be
accompanied by Manufacturer’s quality certificate, confirming chemical analysis and
mechanical characteristics.
b) All steel parts furnished by Supplier shall be checked, sorted out, straightened and
arranged by grades and qualities in stores.
c) Structural steel with surface defects such as pitting, cracks, laminations etc. shall be
rejected if the defects exceed the allowable tolerances specified in relevant Standards.
d) Welding electrodes shall be stored separately by qualities and lots inside a dry and
enclosed room, in compliance with IS: 816and as per instructions given by EIC.
Electrodes shall be perfectly dry and draw from an Electrode oven, if required.
e) Checking of quality of bolts of any kinds as well as storage of same shall be made
conforming to relevant standards.
f)
Each lot of electrodes, bolts, nuts etc. shall be accompanied by Manufacturer’s test
certificates.
g) Structural steel shall be stored consignment wise and size off the ground by at least 150
mm above protected by suitable cover as desired by EIC. The steel shall be protected
from rusting, oil, grease, distortion and deterioration.
h) The Passage and space between the stacks shall be sufficient for inspection,
identification and rigging operations and the stacks shall be easily measurable.
166
Project: National Law University Auditorium
________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
4.10
Section – 13
Material Tests:
a) Principal Contractor shall be required to produce Manufacturer’s quality certificate for
the material or wherever quality certificates are missing or incomplete or when material
quality differs from standard Specifications the Principal Contractor shall conduct all
appropriate tests as directed by the EIC, at no extra cost, in test houses approved by
EIC.
b) Materials for which Test Certificates are not available or for which test results do not
tally with relevant standard Specification, shall not be used.
4.11
Welding Materials (Electrodes, filler wires and flux)
Electrodes, filler wires and flux used for welding shall be from approved
manufacturers/Suppliers. When requested by the EIC, the contractor shall furnish
certification that electrode or electrode flux combination will meet the requirements of
classification. The classification and size of electrode, arc length voltage & amperage shall
be suited to type and
thickness of material, type of groove, welding positions and other circumstances attending
work.
Electrodes, filler wire and consumables shall conform to the requirements of ASME Sec. II
Part C or relevant acceptable standards.
Eelectrodes E6018 and E7018 can be used for welding. All electrodes shall conform to
AWS A5. 1 / AWS A5.5 or relevant acceptable standards. These electrodes shall be
purchased in hermetically sealed containers or baked by the user as recommended by
electrode manufacturer. Electrode flux coating shall be sound and unbroken. Broken or
damaged coating shall cause the electrodes to be discarded. SMAW electrodes shall be
properly stored. Before welding, the electrodes shall de dried in a holding oven at 1200 C at
least for 1 hour or as per manufacturer’s recommendations. Only limited quantity shall be
issued to the welders. The electrodes shall be kept in “carry ovens” and shall not be
exposed to the atmosphere.
The filler wire and flux combination for submerged arc welding shall conform to the
requirements of ASME Section II, Part C or relevant acceptable standards. The weld metal
deposited by the submerged arc process shall have mechanical properties not less than that
of base material specification. The flux used for SAW process shall be dry and free of
contamination from dirt, mill scale or foreign material. The flux purchased in packages
shall be stored in dry place. Flux shall be dried in case of damaged package at the
temperature of 260°C for 1 hour prior to welding operation. Flux shall be placed in
dispensing system immediately upon opening a package.
Welding plants and accessories shall have capacity adequate for welding procedure laid
down and shall satisfy appropriate standards and be of approved make and quality.
Contractor shall furnish and obtain approval from EIC the details of equipment he
proposes to deploy for the works. All the electrical plant in connection with the welding
operation shall be properly and adequately earthed and adequate means of measuring the
167
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
________________________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
current shall be provided. Proper safety rules shall be strictly followed.
4.11.1
Electrodes
They shall conform to the requirements of the following Indian Standards as specified.
IS: 814 - 1991
IS: 816 - 1996
IS: 822 - 1970
Specifications for covered electrodes for metal arc welding of
structural steel. Part 1 and 2.
Classification and coding of covered electrodes for metal arc
welding of mild steel and low alloy high-tensile steel.
Code of procedure for inspection of welds.
Some of the approved brands for the electrodes shall as follows. The electrodes shall
conform to E 7018-1 norms.
i) Advani Orlikon ii) ESAB iii) D & H – Sechiron and iv) Anand Arc
v) Honavar
vi) Royal Arc. Or equivalent
The electrodes shall be dried in an electric oven as per the recommendations of
manufacturers. Only DC current shall be used for welding and the Contractor shall make
his own arrangements of all welding power and for equipment.
a) The electrodes used for welding shall be suitable type and size depending upon
specifications of the parent materials, the method of welding, the position of welding
and quality of welds desired e.g. normal penetration welds or deep penetration welds.
However, only low Hydrogen electrodes shall be used for plates conforming to IS:
2062 steel and for all thickness of high strength steel conforming to IS: 8500.
b) All low hydrogen electrodes shall be baked and stored before use as per manufacturer’s
recommendation. The electrodes shall be re-baked at 250° - 300°C for one hour and
later on cooled in the same oven to 100°C. It shall be transferred to a holding oven
maintained at 60°C – 70°C. The electrodes shall be drawn from this oven for use.
c) Where coated electrodes are used they shall meet the requirements of IS : 814 and
relevant ASME-SEC IX and IIC. Coating shall be heavy to withstand normal
conditions of handling and storage. They shall be free from all defects which would
interfere with performance of electrodes.
d) Only those electrodes which give radiographic quality welds shall be used for welds
which are subjected to radiographic testing.
e) Where bare electrodes are used these shall correspond to specification of the parent
material. The type of flux-wire combination for submerged arc welding shall conform
to the requirements of IS:3613. The electrodes shall be stored properly and the flux
168
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
_________________________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
shall be baked before use in an oven in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements as
stipulated.
f) Specific approval shall be taken by the Principal Contractor for the various electrodes
proposed to be used on the work before any welding is started.
h) Electrodes for all welding shall be procured as envisaged in the welding procedure
sheet predetermined before actual welding operation starts/
4.11.2
i)
Electrodes shall bear the IS/BS/AWS or equivalent Certification mark.
j)
The approval for all the consumables for welding shall be specifically obtained before
hand.
Filler Wire & Flux
The filler wire & flux combination for submerged arc welding shall conform to the
requirements for the desired application as laid down in IS 3613 - 1974, acceptance tests
for wire flux combination for submerged arc welding.
5.0
SHOP DRAWING & ITS APPROVAL:
The Contractor shall submit three (3) complete sets of detailed working and shop drawings,
schedules of all structural steelwork and sequencing of work activity. Fabrication shall not
commence until (1) set of the shop drawings has been returned to the Contractor and duly
stamped by the structural Engineer as an approved for fabrication.
Shop drawings shall be in metric units and shall clearly show all sizes, dimensions,
markings, connections, splices etc. and shall set out the positions, sizes and lengths of all
welds as are necessary for the complete fabrication, assembly and erection of the steelwork.
Marking plans and sufficient elevations shall be included in the shop drawings to define the
positions of all members detailed. Splices may be made only where shown on the approved
shop drawings.
The Contractors in advance of the actual fabrication shall prepare shop drawings. These
drawings should clearly distinguish between the shop and field bolts and welds. A marking
diagram allotting distinct identification marks to each separate piece of steel work shall be
prepared on the shop drawing. The shop drawings shall be sufficient to ensure convenient
assembly and erection at site. They shall be submitted in triplicate to the Consultant for
their scrutiny. One copy will be returned within 14 days to the Contractor with the
Consultant’s comments for amendment of the drawings and re-submission till final
approval. The Contractor should provide for this period of submission and re-submission
as often as required, in determining the total contractual time for completion of works. The
169
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
________________________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Consultant will not scrutinize the shop drawings for numbering off the components or for
dimensional accuracy of fit. The shop drawings shall have to be updated to incorporate
changes and revisions during the progress of the work and finally a triplicate set of As-Built
drawings are to be submitted.
No other substitutions in sizes or shapes of members shall be made without prior approval
and no variation to the details shown on the shop drawings shall be made unless authorized
by the Consultant. Minor details not shown on the drawings shall conform to the relevant
Indian code and to the approval of the Consultant.
The Contractor shall note that the Consultant for general conformity with the contract
Drawings and Specification check shop drawings only. The responsibility of all aspects of
the fabrications remains with the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for checking closing dimensions and detail where new
work connects to existing. The Consultant for lack of fit will consider no payment for
extras.
The complete process from preparation of shop drawing to placement of girder in its final
position shall be looked after/ inspected /checked & certified by an approved agency expert
in the structural steel Girder and framing work. The agency shall be approved by the
structural Engineer & duly appointed by the Clients.
6.00
FABRICATION
6.01
The fabrication and erection of works shall be carried out generally in accordance with
IS:800 as well as the stipulations contained in these specification. All materials shall be
completely fabricated at the Principal Contractor’s shop or at the shop established by him at
project site and finished with proper connection materials for ready assembly in the field.
Check list format, inspection certificated for fabrication, erection, alignment and protocol
for handling over of structural steel shall be submitted by the Principal Contractor in the
form as agreed to by the
EIC. Fabrication work shall be taken up based on the approved fabrication drawings.
6.02
Cutting Plans
Fabrication work shall be taken up based on the fabrication drawings duly approved by
EIC. The Principal Contractor shall prepare necessary cutting plans before commencement
of fabrication.
6.03
Straightening
All steel material shall be straight and free from bends or twists. If the sections are distorted
or twisted during transit, storage, etc. they shall be straightened and/or flattened by
straightening machine at ambient temperature, though minor kinks or bends may be
corrected by limited heating under careful supervision.
170
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
_________________________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
All materials before being laid off or worked shall be straight and free from twist. If
rectification is necessary, it shall be affected by cold working and applying pressure, but
not by hammering or any other method that will affect or injure the metal. Material with
kinks or bends shall be rejected.
Surfaces of members that are to be joined by lap or filet welding or bolting shall be even so
that there is no gap between overlapping surfaces.
6.04
Marking:
a) Marking of Members shall be made on horizontal platforms or on appropriate racks or
supports in order to ensure horizontal and straight placement of such Members.
b) Marking accuracy shall be within + 1 mm.
6.05
Temporary erection before dispatch:
The steel work shall be temporarily shop erected complete and shown to EIC so that
accuracy of fit may be checked before dispatch. The parts shall be shop assembled with a
sufficient number of parallel drifts to bring and keep the parts in place.
6.06
Labeling & Packing
Prior to transportation of the steelwork all projecting plates or bars, and all ends of
members at joints shall be stiffened. All straight bars and plates shall be bundled, all
screwed ends and machined surfaces shall be suitably packed. All rivets, bolts, nuts,
washers and small loose parts shall be packed separately in cases so as to prevent damage
or distortion during transit.
Inspection and Testing
The Project Engineer shall have free access at all reasonable times to those parts of the
Contractors works which are concerned with the fabrication of the steel work. He shall be
afforded all reasonable facilities for satisfying himself that the fabrication is being
undertaken in accordance with the provisions of the Specification.
Unless specified otherwise, inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to
dispatch and shall be conducted so as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of
the work. The Contractor shall guarantee compliance with the provisions of the
Specification, if required to do so by the Engineer.
Should any structure or part of a structure be found not to comply with any of the
provisions of the Specification, it shall be liable to rejection. No structure or part of the
structure, once rejected shall be resubmitted for test, except in cases where the Consultant
considers the defect as rectifiable.
Defects, which may appear during fabrication, shall be made good by the Contractor with
the consent of, and according to the procedure laid down, by the Consultant.
The Contractor shall supply all gauges and templates necessary to satisfy the Consultant.
171
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
________________________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
The Consultant may, at his discretion, check the test results obtained at the Contractor’s
works by independent tests at the Government Test House or elsewhere. Should the
material tested be found to be unsatisfactory, the costs of such tests shall be borne by the
Contractor, and if satisfactory, the costs shall be borne by the Employer.
6.07
Bending
a) The bending of plates and sections to specially required shapes shall be done either on
appropriate machine or by angle smithy and black smithy processes.
b) Bending of plates, flats and pipe sections shall be carried out on bending rolls or in
presses.
c) Cold bending may be accepted when bending radius is equal to or more than :
–
–
–
25 times member thickness for plates and flats or pipes.
25h or 25b for rolled steel beams and channels according to bending plane
45b for angle
Where h = section height and b = flange width.
d) When bending radius is less than that indicated in 5.05(c), bending shall be done by
heating the member up to 850 – 900°C (light red radiance). Cooling shall be done
slowly as directed by EIC, same need to be stress relieved, testing of same need to
prove the stress relieving with results of residual stresses if required by consultant.
Bending shall be discontinued when temperature drops below 500°C.
e) Accuracy of bending operations shall be checked by means of Templates and the
clearance between member and template shall not be more than 1 mm.
f)
6.08
Bent members shall not have cracks or deep indentations from bending equipment.
Cutting
Cutting may be effected by shearing, cropping, sawing or by gas cutting by mechanically
controlled torch and shall be reasonably square and free from distortion with all burrs
removed. Gas cutting by hand may only be used when specifically authorized in writing by
the No electric metal arc cutting shall be allowed. If directed by the Consultant the edges
shall be ground afterwards. The edges of all plates shall be perfectly straight and uniform
throughout. Shearing, cropping and gas cutting shall be clean, square and free from
distortion and burrs, and should the EIC find it necessary the edges shall be ground
afterwards by the Principal Contractor. Cutting tolerances shall be as follows.
For members connected at both ends + 1 mm
Elsewhere + 3 mm
For gas cutting high tensile steel, sufficient metal shall be left beyond the required profile
so that all metal that has been flame hardened cube removed later by machining. Except
172
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
________________________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
6.09
where the material is subsequently joined by welding, no load-transmitting surface shall be
gas cut.
Plates in built-up members shall be end and edge planed, except where flats with square
edges are used. Plates specified to be planed, milled or chipped, shall be cut in the first
instance to such size as to allow 3 mm to be planed, milled or chipped, from the sides and
ends.
Edges of gussets up to and including 8 mm in thickness may be sheared in a machine,
which can take the full side in one cut. Plaining, milling or grinding shall prepare edges of
gussets of greater thickness. Edge preparation for surfaces to be welded shall be carried out
by grinding plaining but not shearing or cropping.
Grinding
a) All the edges cut by flame shall be ground before they are welded. Ends of all bearing
stiffeners shall be ground to fit tightly at both top and bottom. The maximum
permissible gap between the bearing stiffeners and the flanges shall not be more than
0.2 mm locally.
b) In case of gantry girders, the bottom of the knife-edge support shall be accurately
ground to provide effective bearing on the column bracket with a clearance not
exceeding 0.2 mm locally at any place. The top surface of the column bracket shall also
be ground similarly. The column splices and butt joints of struts and compression
members shall be accurately ground and closely butted over the whole section with
tolerance not exceeding 0.2 mm locally at any place. Notwithstanding the above, full
load shall be transferred through welds.
c) The ends of shafts together with attached gussets, angles, channels, etc. after welding
together shall be accurately ground so that the parts connected, butt over the entire
surface of contact. Care shall be taken to see that these connecting angles or channels
are fixed with such accuracy that they are not reduced in thickness by grinding by more
than 1 mm.
d) The slab bases shall be similarly ground over the bearing surface and shall have
effective contact with the end of the shaft. The bearing face which is to be grouted
direct to a foundation need not be ground if such face is true and parallel to the upper
face. To facilitate grouting and escape of air, holes shall be provided wherever
necessary in column bases.
d) Column ends bearing on each other, resting on base plates, compression joints designed
for bearing, base plates coming in contact with column end and cap plat shall be
ground smooth to ensure 90% contact with local gap not exceeding 0.10 mm (filler
gauge shall be used to
check this gap). All ground surfaces shall be protected from dirt and mechanical
damages till the assembly is completed. However the underside of base plate bearing
on grout need not be machined.
6.10
Drilling / Punching
a) Holes through more than one thickness of material for members, such as compound
stanchion and girders, flanges, shall where possible, be drilled after the members are
assembled and tightly clamped or bolted together. Sub-punching may be permitted
173
Project: National Law University Auditorium
________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
before assembly, provided the holes are punched 3 mm less in diameter than the required
size and reamed after assembly to the full size. Punching shall not be adopted where
the thickness of metal exceed 16 mm.
b)Drilled or reamed holes shall be cylindrical and perpendicular to the surface. They shall
not be more than 1.5 mm larger than the specified diameter of bolts up to and including
25 mm in diameter.
c) When holes are being drilled in one operation through two or more separable parts,
those parts, when so specified by the EIC, shall be separated after drilling and burrs
removed.
d) Holes in connecting angles and plates, other than splices, also in roof members and
light framing, may be punched full size through material not over 13 mm thick, except
where required for close tolerance or barrel bolts.
e) Matching holes for and black bots shall register with each other so that a gauge of 1.5
mm or 2.0 mm (as the case may be, depending on whether the diameter of the bolt is
less than or more than 25 mm) less in diameter than the diameter of the hole will pass
freely through the assembled members in a direction at right angles to such members.
Finished holes shall not be more than 1.5 or 2.0 mm (as the case may be) larger in
diameter than the diameter of the black bolt passing through them unless otherwise
specified by the EIC.
f)
Holes for bolts shall not be formed by a gas cutting process, except in special cases
with specific permission of the EIC. Wherever a horizontal member is likely to collect
water, suitable holes for drainage shall be provided.
g) Bolt holes shall be drilled. Materials of thickness up to 16 mm, may be punched.
Drilling shall be made to the diameter specified in drawings.
No enlarging of holes by filing, man drilling, or oxyacetylene flame shall be allowed.
Allowable variations for holes (out of roundness, eccentricity, plumb-line deviation)
shall be as per IS : 800.
– Maximum deviation for spacing of two holes on the same axis shall be +1 mm.
– Two perpendicular diameters of any oval hole shall not differ by more than 1 mm.
h) Drilling faults in holes may be rectified by reaming holes to the next upper diameter,
provided that spacing of new hole centers and distance of hole centers to the edges of
members are not less than allowed and that the increase of hole diameter does not
impair the structural strength. Hole reaming shall be allowed if the number of faulty
holes does not
exceed 15% of the total number of holes for one joint.
Unless otherwise noted in the – Pitch of holes – 3D drawing
Edge distance – shear edge – 1.5 D
Rolled edge – 1.25 D
174
Project: National Law University Auditorium
________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
I)
Holes for turned and fitted bolts shall be drilled to a diameter equal to the nominal
diameter of the shank or barrel subject to H8 tolerance specified in IS: 919-1959
Recommendations for Limits and Fits for Engineering. Preferably, parts to be
connected with close tolerance or barrel bolts shall be firmly held together by tacking
bolts on clamps and the holes drilled through all the thickness at one operation and
subsequently reamed to size. All holes not drilled through all thickness at one
operation shall be drilled to a smaller size and reamed out after assembly. Where this
is not practicable, the parts shall drill and reamed separately through hard bushed steel
jigs.
j)
A gas cutting process shall not form holes for bolts. All holes shall be free of burrs, fins
and other defects. No holes shall be drilled in structural members at locations other
than those indicated on the drawings unless approved in writing by the Consultant.
6.11
Following procedure shall be adopted for fabrication of the structural steel work
6.11.1
Fabrication shop at project site
In case the Principal Contractor prefers to fabricate the structural steel work put to tender at
site, Fabrication shop of the Principal Contractor at the project site shall have all facilities
required for carrying out the work. The Principal Contractor shall get the details of the shop
approved by the EIC.
Any approval, instructions, permission, checking, review, etc. whatsoever by the EIC shall
not relieve the Principal Contractor of his responsibility and obligation regarding adequacy,
correctness, completeness, safety, strength, workmanship etc.
6.11.2
Fabrication at contractor’s yard, away from the site: Fabrication of the structural members shall be partially fabricated at the contractor’s
workshop and then, the balance work shall be completed at the site. Till this approval is
sought no work of steel cutting shall proceed. In the event the contractor wishes to deviate
from the sequencing, in the interest and pace of work shall submit his remarks, suggestions
for Clients, structural Engineers review.
6.11.3
Work Methodology / Sequence of Fabrication and Erection: The total sequence & methodology of complete activity staring from fabrication and
erection to erection at its final location shall be submitted by the contractor to the Clients
representative and specialized agency appointed by the Clients for their approval.
6.12
Bolt Tightening
Bolts shall be "snug tightened" as defined as the tightness attained by a few impacts of an
impact wrench or by the full effort of a man using a standard podgier spanner
Snug tightening shall be achieved by using a standard wrench to ensure intimate positive
contact
between mating surfaces. Bolts, nuts and washers that are snug tightened shall be hot
dipped galvanized.
175
Project: National Law University Auditorium
________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
7.0
Section – 13
STEEL STRUCTURES ASSEMBLY, INSPECTION AT SHOP:
7.01
Shop Test Pre-assembly
i)
For Steel Structures that have the same type of welding the shop test preassembly shall
be performed on one out of every 10 members minimum.
ii) In case one member does not meet the limiting deviations specified in the general
specification in pre-assembly shop test, all members shall be shop tested.
iii) For bolted Steel Structures, shop test pre-assembly is mandatory for all elements as
well as for the entire structure in conformity with clause 10.00 (c).
7.02
Shop Inspection and Approval
i)
General :
The EIC or his representative shall have free access at all reasonable times to the
Principal Contractor’s Fabrication Shop and shall be afforded all reasonable facilities
for satisfying him that the Fabrication is being undertaken in accordance with
Drawings and Specifications.
ii) Technical approval of the Steel Structure in the shop by the EIC is mandatory.
iii)
The Principal Contractor shall not limit the number and kinds of Tests, final as well as
intermediate ones, or extra tests requested by the EIC.
iv) The Principal Contractor shall furnish necessary tools, gauges, instrument etc. and
technical and non-technical personnel for shop tests required by EIC, free of cost.
7.03
Shop Acceptance
The EIC shall inspect and approve at the following stages.
i)
The following approvals may be given in shop:
–
–
–
Intermediate approvals of work that cannot be inspected later.
Partial approvals.
Final approvals.
ii) Intermediate approvals of work shall be given when –
–
–
A part of the work is performed later
Inspection would be difficult to perform and results may not be satisfactory.
Cannot be inspected later
iii) Partial approval in the shop is given on members and assemblies of Steel Structures
before the primer coat is applied and includes :
176
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
– Approval of field joints
– Approval of part with planed surface
– Test Erection
– Approval of members
– Approval of markings
– Inspection and approvals of special features, like rollers, loading platform mechanism etc.
iv) During the partial approval, intermediate approvals as well as former approvals shall be
taken into consideration.
7.04
Final Approval in the Shop
i.
The final approval refer to all elements and assemblies of the Steel Structures with
shop primer coat, ready for delivery from shop, to be loaded for transportation or
stored.
ii. The final approval comprises:
–
–
–
–
Partial approvals.
Approvals for shop primer coat
Approval of mode of loading and transport
Approval of storage (for materials stored)
iii. Inspection by EIC shall be only at random and on critical factors and shall not absolve
the Principal Contractor of the responsibility to fabricate the structures as per the
specified standards & specifications.
8.00
NOTCHES
The ends of all joints, beams and girders shall be cut truly square unless required
otherwise and joist flanges shall be neatly cut away or notched where necessary, the
notches being kept as small as possible.
9.00
ASSEMBLY
9.01
The component parts shall be assembled in such a manner that they are neither twisted
nor otherwise damaged and shall be so prepared that the specified camber, if any, is
provided. In order to minimize distortion in a member the component parts shall be
positioned by using clamps, clips, dogs, fixtures and other suitable means and fasteners
(bolts and welds) shall be placed in a balanced pattern. If the individual components
are to be bolted, parallel and tapered drifts shall be used to align the parts so that the
bolts can be accurately positioned.
9.02
Items like roof trusses, galleries, plate girders etc. shall be trial assembled keeping in
view the actual site conditions, prior to dispatch to site for erection so that they can be
conveniently preassembled before erection. Necessary match marks shall be made on
these components before disassembly in the shop and dispatching.
9.03
For columns which are fabricated in two or more parts, controlled assembly shall be
carried out in the fabrication yard before dispatch to the erection site.
10.00
BOLTS AND NUTS:
177
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
All bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of
IS 1363 & IS 1367- Technical supply conditions of threaded fasteners. (First Revision)
IS: 1680-1960 Method for Tensile Testing of Steel Products viz for all mild steel for
bolts and nuts in accordance with Other than Sheet, Strip, Wire and Tube and
IS: 1367-1960 Technical Supply Conditions for Threaded Fasteners shall have a tensile
strength of not less than 44 kg/mm2, and a minimum elongation of 23 percent on a
gauge length of 3.65√A.
The dimensions and tolerances of all bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to the
requirements of the following Indian Standards.
IS 6639-1970
IS 5624-1993
IS 6761-1994
Specifications for hexagon bolts for steel structures.
Specifications for foundations bolts
Specification for countersunk head screws with hexagon socket.
All materials shall conform to their respective specifications. The use of Equivalent or
higher grade or alternate materials shall be considered only in very special cases
subject to the approval of the EIC.
Any defective material used, pointed out at any stage of work, shall be replaced by
Principal Contractor at his own expenses. Care shall be taken to prevent any damage to
the other portion of work during removal.
11.00
WASHERS
Plain washers shall be made of steel conforming to IS: 226-1962 Specification for
Structural Steel (Standard Quality) (Third Revision), or
St 44-O of IS: 1977-1962 Specification for Structural Steel (Ordinary), or
IS: 2062-1992 Specification for Structural Steel Fusion Welding Quality).
Washers shall be as per IS: 2016, IS: 5372 & IS: 5374
12.00
WELDING
12.01
General
Welding shall be in according with the following Indian Standards as applicable.
IS 816-1969 Code of Practice for use of metal arc welding for general
construction in Mild steel.
IS 822-1970 Code of practice for inspection of welds
IS 1024-1979
Code for practice for use of welding in bridges and structures
subject to dynamic loading.
IS 1323-1982
Code of practice for oxy-acetylene welding for structural
178
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
work in mild steel.
IS 9595-1980
Recommendations for metal-arc welding of carbon and
carbon manganese steels.
For welding for any particular type of joint, welders shall submit evidence acceptable
to the Consultant of having satisfactorily completed appropriate tests as described in
the following relevant Indian Standards.
IS: 7307-1974
Approval tests for welding procedure.
IS 7310-1974
Approval tests for welders working to approved welding
procedure.
All welding procedures shall be arranged, to suit the details of joints indicated on the
drawings. Welding shall be carried out shall be such as to ensure that the weld metal is
full and satisfactorily deposited throughout the length and thickness of all joints.
Members to be welded shall be securely held in their relative position during welding,
either by jigs or tack welding. Profile of fusion faces may be prepared by shearing,
chipping, or gas cutting. In all cases the faces should be dressed by chipping, filling or
grinding and made regular.
Vertical down welding shall not be permitted. All welds shall be back-gouged and
welded from the backside unless specifically approved otherwise. All welds shall be
carried out in such a sequence and manner as to cause minimum distortion of the
welded parts.
Multiple run welds shall be carried out with each run closely following the previous
run, but so that sufficient time is allowed for slag removal. Welds shall on completion
present an even, smooth and regular finish free from defects. The weld metal shall be
solid throughout with complete fusion between weld metal and parent metal and
between successive runs throughout the joints. Caulking shall not be used to correct
defects.
The electrodes shall be dried in an electric oven as per the recommendations of
manufacturers. Only DC current shall be used for welding and the Contractor shall
make his own arrangements of all welding power and for equipment.
12.02
Surface Cleaning Prior to Welding
Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust, grease, paint and other
foreign materials. Surfaces need not be cleaned of Zinc Silicate primer if present prior
to welding.
12.03
Surface Cleaning after Welding
Upon completion of each welding pass, the weld shall be cleaned of spatter, slag and
flux deposits. The weld must show a good clean contour and on a cut specimen good
fusion with the parent metal. After welding is complete, adjacent surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned of all spatter and deposits.
179
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
12.04
Section – 13
Size of Welds
All structural welds shall be continuous around all mating faces and edges of the
members being connected. If not detailed on the drawings welds shall be sized to
develop the full strength of the smaller of the two members being joined and not less
than 6mm.
In joints connected only by fillet welds, the minimum size of fillet weld to be used
shall be as shown in the following table unless otherwise specified in the drawing.
Material thickness of Thicker part joined
(mm)
Minimum size of fillet weld (leg
dimension of fillet weld) (mm)
Up to 6
Over 6 to 12
Over 12 to 18
Over 18
3
5
6
8
Fillet welds 5 mm or larger in size for SMAW and 10mm for SAW shall be made with
two or more passes. Welding rods shall be 3.15 in diameter maximum for root passes,
and 4 mm and above in diameter for subsequent passes. Complete penetration butt well
shall be terminated at the ends of the joint in manner that will ensure their soundness.
Where abutting parts are 20mm or more in thickness, suitable run-on and run-off plates
with similar edge preparation and having a width not less than the thickness of the
thicker part shall be used. These extension pieces shall be removed after completion of
weld and the end of the weld made smooth and flush with the abutting parts.
12.05
Compatibility of Welds
All welds shall develop the strength and ductility specified for the steel being welded.
Welds forming connections between steel of different grades shall develop at least the
same unit strength as that specified for the higher strength steel.
12.06
Automatic Welding
Automatic and semi-automatic welding processes may be employed provided they are
approved by the Engineer and conform to the requirements of these specifications. All
equipment for automatic and semi-automatic welding shall be subject to approval by
the Consultant. Pre-heating will be required where any section thickness exceeds
30mm. Requirements for, and method of, pre-heating shall be submitted to the
Consultant for approval.
12.07
Welding procedure
Before the start of the work, welding procedure shall be submitted to EIC for approval.
Welding shall be entrusted to only qualified and experienced welders who shall be
periodically tested and graded as per relevant standards.
Welding procedure specification (WPS) shall be established and Qualification of weld
procedure (QWP) shall be done in accordance with the requirements of ASME Sec IX,
or
180
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
AWS D 1.1 or as per approved standards as and where specified. Welders employed
shall also be qualified as per above standards prior to taking up fabrication. Contractor
shall obtain approval from EIC before the start of the work.
12.08
Following pre-qualified welding process shall be employed for fabrication, erection and
repair by :
a)
b)
c)
d)
Submerged Arc Welding (SAW).
Shield Metal Arc Welding (SMAW).
Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW).
Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW).
All welds shall be free from defects like blowholes, lack of penetration, undercutting,
cracks etc. All welds shall be cleaned of slag or flux and show sections, smoothness of
weld metal, featheredges without overlap and freedom from porosity.
50mm on either side of the surfaces on which weld metal is to be deposited shall be
smooth, uniform, free from fins, tears burrs cracks and absolutely free from grease,
paint, loose scale, moisture or any other substance which would adversely affect
quality and strength of weld.
Machining, thermal cutting or grinding may be employed for joint preparation of
removal of unacceptable work or metal. The weld edges shall be smooth & regular
surface free from cracks & notches. Flame cut material above 50mm thick shall be preheated to 100°C prior to flame cutting.
All weld fit-up shall comply with tolerances specified in the design drawing and/or
relevant standards. The parts to be joined by fillet welds shall be brought into close
contact as practicable. The root gap in no event shall be greater than 3 mm for SMAW
process and 1.5mm for SAW process. If the separation is greater than 1.5mm the leg of
the fillet weld shall be increased by the amount of root opening. This shall apply only
in the case of continuous welds. Abutting parts to be butt-welded shall be care fully
aligned and correct root gap shall be maintained through out the weld operation. The fit
up of joints at contact surfaces that are not completely sealed by welds shall be close
enough to exclude water after painting. The separation between laying surfaces of lap
joint and butt joints with backing plate shall not exceed 1.5mm. Abutting parts to be
butt-welded shall be carefully aligned and the correct root gap maintained throughout
the welding operation. Misalignments greater than 25% of the thickness of the thinner
plates or 3mm, whichever is smaller, shall be corrected and in making the correction,
the parts shall not be drawn into a slope sharper than 2 degrees.
All tack welds shall be made using qualified procedure and qualified welders. Any
preheat requirement specified in the welding procedure shall also apply to tack welds.
All tack welds shall be examined visually for defects and if found defective, shall be
removed.
Welding of temporary attachment/fixtures to retain fit up is allowed in case the parts
have nominal thickness of at least 5mm. Temporary attachments are welded at the
minimum distance of at least 50 mm for the weld seam. Welding of temporary
attachments/fixtures in to the joint slot is not allowed. All temporary fixtures to be
removed after welding by grinding them to weaken the welded portion and hammering
thereafter followed by grinding the portion of any weld remaining on the base metal. A
dye check at the discretion of the
181
Project: National Law University Auditorium
________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
quality surveyor shall be done to detect any crack/defect at the point of fixture
temporary weld.
It is not allowed to turn over and carry over heavy assemblies in tacking condition in
order control the geometric dimensions to the requirements of the drawings.
During the installation of the structural steel members care shall be taken to prevent
damage of the sheets and of the welding seams. The work shall be positioned for flat
welding wherever practicable and overhead weld shall be avoided as far as possible.
In the joints of the parts with dissimilar thickness smooth transition of one part to the
other must be provided by way of the gradual decreasing of the thickness of the thicker
part with the slope of the surface not exceeding 15 degree.
Welding shall not be done when the surface of the members are wet or exposed to rain,
or high wind velocities unless the welding operator and the work are properly
protected.
In case of full penetration butt welds without backing, root weld shall be back gouged
to sound metal before second side welding for complete fusion throughout the entire
cross section. However, in case of square around butt welds done in flat position from
both sides and with thickness of parts joined less than 8mm and root opening not less
than half the thickness of the thinner part, gouging can be dispensed with.
Preheating for welding of steel shall conform to relevant acceptable standards. No
stress relief using oxyacetylene flame is permitted.
In assembling & joining parts of a structure or built-up members and in reinforcing
parts to members, the procedure and sequence shall be such as to minimize distortion
and shrinkage. The fabricator shall prepare a welding sequence for a member of
structure, which in conjunction with WPS and overall fabrication method will produce
members or structure meeting the quality requirement specified. The welding sequence
and distortion control programme shall be submitted to for approval before start of
welding such programme shall include, besides other appropriate details, full
particulars in regard to the following:
a) Proposed pre-bending tubes and components, pre-setting of joints to offset expected
distortion.
b) Make up of sub-assemblies proposed to be welded before incorporation in final
assembly.
c) Proposed joint forms, classification of wire and flux or covered electrodes, welding
process including fit up and welding sequence with directions in which freedom of
movement is to be allowed.
d) Proposed number, spacing and type of storage backs and details of jigs and fixtures for
maintaining proper fit up and alignment during welding.
e) Any other special features like assembling similar members back to back or stress
relieving procedure.
f)
For sections made of rolled sections with cover plates, the ends of the plate shall be
seal welded or alternatively flange cover plate terminated 25mm short of the full length
and welded across to the beam for proper and sealing and/or as directed by the EIC .
182
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
g) If so desired by the EIC , mock up welding shall be carried out at Contractor’s cost to
establish the efficiency of the proposed programme, with any modification suggested
by the EIC I limiting distortion or / and residual stress to acceptable levels.
Welds shall be defect free and surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all visible
weld defects and extra material. All welds shall be stamped/identified with System/Joint
No/Welder punch etc. as per approved procedure at a distance of 30-35 mm from the weld
seam.
For all built up sections such as Columns, Girders etc welding between web and flange
plates shall be carried out by submerged arc welding process. Especially for girders full
penetration of weld between top web plate and top flange shall be ensured. Welding shall
be continuous and shall be both sides of the connecting member. One side fillet weld is not
acceptable.
13.00
PRE-HEATING AND POST WELD HEAT TREATMENT
Base metal shall be pre-heated to a temperature not less than minimum value as listed
below. For a combination of base metals the minimum pre-heat shall be based on the
highest minimum pre-heat. This pre-heat and all subsequent minimum inter-pass
temperature shall be maintained during the welding operation for a distance at least equal to
thickness of the thickest part but not less than 75mm in all direction from the point of
welding. Minimum inter pass temperature requirements shall be considered equal to preheat requirements. The pre-heat and inter pass temperature shall be checked just prior to
initiating the arc for each pass.
Carbon Steel
SMAW welding with low
hydrogen electrodes, SAW,
GMAW
3mm to 19mm
10°C
19.1 to 38mm
10°C
38.1mm to 50mm
66°C
Over 50mm
107°C
When the thickness of one or both the members is over 50mm the butt welds shall be stress
relived. For restrained joints of complicated design and configuration post weld heat
treatment may be required for smaller thickness. The weld joint detail and procedure for
Post weld heat treatment shall be submitted by the Contractor for approval from or his
authorized representative. Stress relieving is to be done at 600-650°C with a soaking of
1hour per 25mm thickness of the thicker plate. No stress relief using oxyacetylene flame is
permitted in local stress relief the width of the heated band on each side of the greater width
of the finished weld shall not be less than two times the maximum material thickness.
The works shall be done as per approved fabrication drawing which would clearly indicate
various details of joints to be welded, type of weld, length and size of weld, whether shop
or site weld. Symbols for welding on fabrication drawings shall be according to IS:813.
Efforts shall be made to reduce site welding so as to avoid improper welding due to
constructional difficulties.
14.00
PREPARATION OF MEMBERS FOR WELDING
183
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
a)
Assembly of structural members shall be made with proper jigs and fixtures to ensure
correct positioning of members (angles, axes, nodes, etc.)
b)
Sharp edges, rust of cut edges, notches, irregularities and fissures due to faulty cutting shall
be chipped or ground or filed over the length of the affected area, deep enough to remove
faults completely.
c)
Edge preparation for welding :
i)
Proper edge preparation shall be made for jointing of materials before welding. The
edge preparation for welding shall be carefully and accurately made so as to facilitate a
good joint.
ii) Type of edge preparation shall depend on the thickness of parent materials that are to
be joined. Generally no special edge preparation shall be required for members under 8
mm thick.
iii) The edge forms shall be chosen to suit the design, technology and production
conditions and shall be subject to the approval of the EIC.
iv) The edge form of weldments shall be prepared either by machines or by automatic gas
cutting with surface roughness of the welding area not exceeding 50%.
v) All edges cut by flame shall be ground before they are welded.
vi) Edge preparation (beveling) denotes cutting so as to result in V, X, K, or U seam
shapes as per IS: 816.
Unless otherwise noted in the drawing :
< 6 mm
8 – 11 mm > 12 mm -
Square butt
Single V
Double V
vii) The members to be assembled shall be clean and dry on the welding edges. Under no
circumstances shall wet, greasy, rust or dirt covered parts be assembled. Joints shall be
kept free from any foreign matter, likely to get into the gaps between members to be
welded.
viii) Before assembly the edges to be welded as well as adjacent areas extending for at least
20 mm shall be cleaned (until metallic polish in achieved.)
d)
When assembling members, proper care shall be taken of welding shrinkage and
distortions, as the drawing dimensions cover finished dimensions of the Structure.
e)
The elements shall be got checked and approved by the EIC or his authorized
representative before assembly.
f)
The permissible Tolerances for assembly of members preparatory to welding shall be as per
IS: 816.
184
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
g)
After the assembly has been checked temporary tack welding in position shall be done by
electric welding, keeping in view finished dimensions of the Structure.
h)
Preheating of members to be joined to be carried out as per standards wherever necessary.
15.00
Welding Procedures
Welding shall be carried out only by fully trained and experienced welders as tested and
approved by the EIC or his representative or the Inspectors. The cost involved for such tests
shall be borne by the Principal Contractor himself.
Qualification tests for Welders as well as tests for approval of electrodes will be carried out
as per IS: 816. The nature of test for performance qualification of welders shall
commensurate with quality of welding required on this work as judged by the EIC.
The Steel structures shall be automatically, semi-automatically or manually welded.
Welding shall begin only after the checks shown under 8.02 have been carried out.
Welding procedures and tests for welders skill shall be conducted as per IS : 816 and
approved by the EIC.
The welder shall mark his identification mark on each element welded by him.
When welding is carried out in open air, steps shall be taken to protect the place of welding
against wind or rain. The electrodes, wires and parts being welded shall be dry.
Before beginning the welding operation, each joint shall be checked to ensure that the part
to be welded are clean and root gaps provided as per IS : 816.
For continuing the welding of seam discontinued due to some reason, the end of the
discontinued seam shall be malted in order to obtain a good continuity. Before resuming the
welding operation, the groove as well as the adjacent parts shall be well cleaned for a
length of approximately 50mm.
For single butt welds (in V,1/2V or U) and double butt welds (in K, double U, etc) the rewelding of the root butt is mandatory but only after the metal deposition on the root has
been cleaned by back gouging or chipping.
The welding seams shall be left to cool slowly. The Principal Contractor shall not be
allowed to force cool the welds.
For multi-layer welding, before welding the following layer, the preceding layer shall be
cleaned by light chipping and wire brushing. Backing strips shall not be allowed.
The order and method of welding shall be so that:
-
No unacceptable deformation appears in the welded parts
185
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
-
Section – 13
Due margin is provided to compensate for contraction due to welding in order to avoid
any high permanent stresses.
The defects in welds must be rectified according to IS: 816 and as per instructions of EIC.
16.00
Weld Inspection
The weld seams shall satisfy the following:
-
shall correspond to design shapes and dimensions
-
shall not have any defects such as cracks, incomplete penetration and fusion, under
cuts, rough surfaces, burns, blow holes inclusion, porosity etc. beyond permissible
limits.
During the welding operation and approval of finished elements, inspections and tests shall
be made as per specification.
The mechanical characteristics of the welded joints shall be as in IS : 816.
16.1
Welding of Structural Steel Work
a) Welding of Structural Steel shall be done by an electric arc process. The procedure to
be followed, materials, plant and equipment to be used, testing and inspection
procedure to be applied shall be subject to the approval of the EIC and shall conform
generally to relevant acceptable standards viz. IS:9595, and Indian Standard Hand
Book for metal arc welding, and other standard codes of practice Internationally
accepted.
b) Submerged-Arc-Welding/MIG/MAC (using Carbon dioxide) welding process
employing semi-automatic welding machine and fully automatic welding machine (of
approved make) used for welding longitudinal fillet welds, girders, unless manual arc
welding is specifically approved by the Necessary jigs & fixtures and rotation of
structures shall be so arranged that down-hand position of welding becomes possible.
c) ‘Open-Arc-Welding’ process employing coated electrodes shall be employed for
fabrication of other welded connections not covered under 8.05 (b) and field welding.
d) Wherever welding is done for assembling the components of structures, the job shall be
so positioned that down hand welding is possible. In cases where positioning of job is
not possible other manual welding positions could be resorted to.
e) Any structural joint shall be welded only by those welders who are qualified for all
welding procedures and positions required in such joint that is welded. The entire weld
of joint shall be made by one welder.
f)
Each welder shall be assigned an identification mark and such mark shall be marked on
the structure adjacent to the weld on completion of any structural welded joint.
g) The Principal Contractor shall maintain records of all the welders identification marks,
the joints welded by each welder, the welding procedure adopted, welding machine
186
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
employed, pre and post heating done and any non destructive test done and stress
relieving heat treatment performance on such joints. All such records for entire welding
operation shall be accessible to the for scrutiny and such record shall be countersigned
by for welding work accomplished in the preceding months in token of acceptance. But
such acceptance shall not relieve the Principal Contractor of his responsibility
regarding adequacy & safety of welding operation.
16.2
Preheating inter-pass temperature and post weld heat treatment
a) Mild steel plates conforming to IS:2062 and thicker than 20 mm, may require
preheating of
the parent plate prior to welding as mentioned in Table-1. For high strength steel
conforming to IS:8500 the minimum preheat temperature shall be as specified in Table1. However, higher preheat temperature may be required as per approved welding
procedure and same shall be followed. In welding materials of unequal thickness, the
thicker part shall be considered for this purpose.
b) Base metal shall be preheated not withstanding provisions of IS:9595 to the
temperature given in Table-1 prior to welding or tack welding. When base metal not
otherwise required to be preheated is at a temperature below 0 deg.C it shall be
preheated to at least 20 deg.C, prior to tack welding or welding. Preheating shall bring
the surface of the base metal to the specified preheat temperature and this temperature
shall be maintained as minimum interpass temperature while welding is in progress.
TABLE – 1
MINIMUM PREHEAT / INTERPASS TEMPERATURE FOR WELDING
Welding used
Thickness of
thicker par at
point of welding
IS:2062 steel
1
Other than
low hydrogen
electrode
IS:8500 steel
Low hydrogen
electrodes/or
submerged arc welding
IS:2062 steel
IS:8500 steel
2
3
4
5
Upto 20 mm
including
None
Welding by this
None
None
Over 20 mm to
40 mm including
66°C
Electrode not
allowed
20°C
66°C
not allowed
–
66°C
110°C
Over 40 m to
187
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
63 mm including
Over 63 mm
not allowed
–
110°C
150°C
c) Preheating may be applied by external flame which is non-carbonising like LPG, by
electric resistance or electric induction process such that uniform heating of the surface
extending upto a distance of four times the thickness of the plate on either side of the
welded joint is obtained.
d) Thermo-chalk, thermo-couple or other approved methods shall be used for measuring
the plate temperature.
e) All butt welders with section or plate thicker than 40 mm require post weld heat
treatment as per procedure given in AWS D-1.1 Post heating shall be done upto 600
deg c and rate of heating shall be 200 deg C per hour. The post heat temperature shall
be maintained for 60 minutes per 2.5 cm thickness. For maintaining slow and uniform
cooling, asbestos pads shall be used for covering the heated areas. The Principal
Contractor shall submit and finalize post weld heat treatment procedure at the time of
finalization of quality plans.
16.3
Sequence of Welding
a) The sequence of welding shall be carefully chosen to ensure that the components
assembled by welding are free from distortion and large residual stresses are not
developed. The distortion should be effectively controlled either by a counter effect or
by a counter distortion. The direction of welding should be away from the point of
restraint and towards the point of maximum freedom.
b) Each case shall be carefully studied before finally following a particular sequence of
welding.
c) Butt weld in flange plates and/or web plates shall be completed before the flanges and
webs are welded together.
d) The beam and column stiffeners shall preferably be welded to the webs before the web
and flanges are assembled unless the web and flanges are assembled by automatic
welding process.
e) Approval of welding sequence and procedure shall not relieve the Principal Contractor
of the responsibility for the correct welding and for minimizing the distortion in the
finished structure which in no case shall exceed that laid down in Indian Standards.
f)
All welds shall be finished full and made with correct number of runs, the welds being
kept free from slag and other inclusions, all adhering slag being removed from exposed
faces immediately after each run.
g) Current shall be appropriate for the type of electrode used. To ensure complete fusion,
the welding procedure should go proper and rate of arc advancement should not be so
rapid as to leave the edges unmelted.
188
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
h) Pudding shall be sufficient to enable the gases to escape from the molten metal before
it solidifies.
i)
Non-uniform heating and cooling should be avoided to ensure that excessive stresses
are not locked up resulting ultimately in cracks.
j)
The welding shrinkage shall be minimized by adopting the correct welding procedure
and method. In long and slender members extra length should be provided, at the time
of fabrication, for shrinkage.
k) The ends of butt welds shall have full throat thickness. This shall be obtained on all
main butt welds by the use of runoff and run on pieces adequately secured on either
side of main plates. Additional metal remaining after the removal of extension pieces
shall be removed by grinding or by other approved means and the ends and surface of
the welds shall be smoothly finished.
l)
The fusion faces shall be carefully aligned. Angle shrinkage shall be controlled by
presenting. Correct gap and alignment shall be maintained during the welding
operation.
m) All main butt welds shall have complete penetration and except where it is
impracticable they shall be welded from both sides, back surface of the weld being
gauged out clean before first run of the weld is given from the second side. However,
partial penetration butt weld shall be permitted, when specifically shown in the
fabrication drawings.
n) Intermittent welds shall not be permitted without the approval of the IE. These shall be
permitted only when specifically approved in the fabrication drawings.
16.4
Testing of Welders
All the welders to be employed for the job shall have to quality the appropriate tests laid
down in IS:817 and IS:7318. If the welder fails in these tests, two further set of tests shall
be undertaken and the welder to qualify must pass both these sets of tests.
The EIC also reserves the right to have any welder retested at any time. All the necessary
arrangements required for the testing of welder are to be provided by the Principal
Contractor.
Tests on Welds:
All welds shall be tested for flaws by any of the methods described under. The choice of
the method adopted shall be determined by the Employer / Purchaser. Following methods
are generally used for the quality control of welded joints:
Magnetic Particle Test (MPT) :
189
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
All fillet welds in general structural steel work shall have their final passes fully tested by
MPT. However, for fillet welds of size 10mm and above and/or critical areas, the root and
final passes shall be tested using MPT. The EIC shall however decide the requirements of
this additional testing. For Complete penetration butt welds, the root and final passes shall
be tested using MPT. All MPT shall be as per ASTM:E 109 or relevant acceptable
standards defects if found, shall be repaired and retested. MPT shall be carried out using
alternating current only. Direct current may be used with the permission of the EIC. The
cost of demagnetizing after testing is deemed to be included in the quoted rates of the
Contractor.
Liquid Penetrant Test (LPT) :
MPT may be substituted by Liquid Penetrant Inspection where the former is not feasible
due to configuration. The testing should be in accordance with ASTM-E165 or relevant
acceptable standards.
Radio-graphic Inspection (RT) :
All completed full penetration butt welds shall be fully or selectively (say 10%) shall be
radio-graphed as per Engineer’s directive in accordance with ASTM: E-94 or relevant
acceptable standards.
Ultrasonic Testing UT) :
Wherever built up section for girders are fabricated, the T-joints of the sections shall be
subjected to ultrasonic testing.
Destructive Testing (DT) :
This method may be resorted to as and when required to check the resistance to IGC and
delta ferrite phase determination in the built-up metal.
Acceptance Standard:
The acceptable standards for various weld tests shall be as per ASME Sec VIII-Div I or
relevant acceptable standards.
16.5
Inspection of welds
17.00
Inspection of the structural works
The inspection / checking of the structural steel fabrication work shall be done in carious
stages as mentioned herein…
¾ Regular testing & checking of material received at site.
¾ Qualification of the welders & conducting their tests.
¾ Keeping of proper, appropriate & regular record of the day-to-day proceedings.
The Client shall appoint an agency to conduct radiographic, ultra sonic and if required for
190
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
other non-destructive tests on material, welds and workmanship to ensure that the
requirements as described in the codes, specifications and drawings are achieved. Any
rectification and/or replacement of faulty material or workmanship shall be at the
Contractors expense. Remedial work shall not be carried out without prior approval of the
Engineer.
Costs of satisfactory testing shall be to the contractor's expense. Costs of re-testing areas,
which are unsatisfactory, or of extensive testing to isolate unsatisfactory areas will also be
charged to the Contractor.
a) Visual Inspection
100 percent of the welds shall be inspected visually by naked eye or lens for external
defects. Dimensions of welds shall be checked. The lengths and size of weld shall be as
per approved fabrication drawings. It may be slightly oversized but should not be
undersized. The profile of weld is affected by the position of the joint but it should be
uniform. The welds should have regular height and width of beads. The height and
spacing of ripples shall be uniform. The joints in the weld run shall as far as possible be
smooth and should not
show any humps or craters in the weld surface. Welds shall be free from unfilled
craters on the surface, under-cuts, slags on the surface and visible cracks. Such
inspection shall be done after cleaning the weld surface with steel wire brushes and
chisel to remove the spatter metal, scales, slag etc. If external defects mentioned above
are noticed, there is every possibility of internal defects and further
radiographic/ultrasonic examination shall be undertaken as per Indian Standards. Weld
gauges shall be used to measure the size of the welds.
b) Mechanical testing
Test plates shall be incorporated on either side of 10% of main butt welds and the weld
shall be continuous over the test plate. The test plate shall be cut from extensions of the
main plates and shall be fixed so that metal lies in the same direction as that of the
main plate. Test plates shall be prepared and tested in accordance with the accepted
Standards, in the presence of the on his authorized representative. All testing
equipment and facilities for carrying out these tests shall be provided by the Principal
Contractor. Should any of these tests fail further radiographic examination of the welds
in question on the main members, shall be undertaken. These tests for the test plates
and radiographic examination are additional to those contemplated under routine
inspection and testing. The Principal Contractor shall carry out these additional
radiographic tests as per normal testing procedure.
c) Non-destructive and special testing
In addition to the normal supervision and testing procedure, radiographic/ultrasonic or
other non-destructive examination shall be carried out, as stipulated in the
Fabrication/Erection checklist on butt or fillet welded joints and/or on test specimens,
as per Annexure-A. all test of welds shall be carried out by the Principal Contractor at
his own cost as per Annexure-A. However, for checking the quality of weld in doubt,
the Employer/ shall carry out the Principal Contractor shall provide necessary
supporting facilities free of cost, as may be required by the including cordoning of
radiation zone while Radiography testing is in progress. Prepared etched section of the
191
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
welds may be required for examination. The Principal Contractor shall, at his own cost
provide these prepared sections and expenses.
In case of failure of any of the tests, the cost of re-test of the potion shall be from the
Principal Contractor, Rectification of such components shall also be carried out by the
Principal Contractor at his own cost.
d) Rectification of defective welding work wherever defects like improper penetration,
presence of blow holes, undercuts, cracking, slag inclusion, etc. are noticed by visual
inspection/other tests, the welds, in such location shall be removed by gouging process.
The joints shall be prepare again by cleaning the burrs and residual matters with wire
bushes and grinding, if necessary, and rewelded. The gouging shall as far as possible
be done using gouging electrodes. Flame gouging shall be resorted to only in special
cases with specific permission of the
18.00
18.1
ACCEPTANCE OF WELDED STRUCTURES
The acceptance of the welded work shall depend upon correct dimensions and
alignment, absence of distortion in the structure, satisfactory results from the inspection
and testing of the joints and the test specimens as per quality check list and upon
general workmanship
being good meeting the tolerance requirements given in the quality check list as per
Annexure-A.
19.00
BOLTING
a) Preparation of Members for Bolting:
The Members shall be assembled for bolting with proper jigs and fixtures to sustain the
assemblies without deformation and bending.
Before assembly, all sharp edges, shaving, rust, direct etc. shall be removed.
Before assembly, the contacting surfaces of the members shall be cleaned and given a
coat of primer as specified.
The members which are bolt assembled shall be set according to drawings and
temporarily fastened with erection bolts (minimum 4 pieces) to check the coaxially of
the holes.
The members shall be finally bolted after the deviations have been corrected.
Before assembly, the member shall be checked and got approved by the
The difference in thickness of the sections that are butt assembled shall not be more
than 3% or maximum 0.8 mm whichever is less. If the difference is large, it shall be
corrected by grinding or filling.
192
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Reaming of holes to final diameter or cleaning of theses, shall be done only after the
part have been check assembled.
As each hole is finished to final dimension (reamed if necessary) it shall be set and
bolted up. Erection bolts shall not be removed before permanent bolts are set.
b) Bolting Up
Final bolting of the members shall be done after the defects have been rectified and
approval of joints obtained.
The bolts shall be tightened starting from the centre of the joint towards the edge.
c) Holes for Field Joints
Holes for field joints shall be drilled in the shop to final diameters and tested in the
shop, with trial assemblies. Gas cutting of holes shall not be permitted.
When three-dimensional assembly is not possible in the shop, the holes for field joints
may be drilled in shop and reamed on site after Erection, on approval by the EIC.
For bolted steel structures, trial assembly in shop is mandatory.
The tolerance for spacing of holes shall be + 1 mm.
d) Tolerances
All tolerances regarding dimensions, geometrical shapes and sections of Steel Sections,
shall be as per IS 808 & IS 1852, if not specified in the drawing.
e) Every bolt shall be provided with a washer under the nut part of the threaded portion of
the bolt is to be within the thickness of the parts bolted together.
f)
Flat washer shall be circular of a diameter 2.5 times that of the bolt and of suitable
thickness. Where bolt heads/nuts bear upon the beveled surface they shall be provided
with square tapered washers of suitable thickness to afford a seating square with the
axis of the bolt.
g) All bolts and nuts shall be of steel, with well form hexagonal head unless specified
otherwise, forged form the solid and shall be dipped din not boiled linseed oil as soon
as they are made. The nuts shall be good fit on the bolts and two clear threads shall
show through the nut when finally tightened up.
h) Notwithstanding anything contrary contained in IS 1363, 1364 and IS: 1367 the
threaded length shall be equal to at least the diameter of bolts.
193
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Marking for identification :i)
All elements and members prior to dispatch for erection should be shop marked.
ii) The size and thickness of the numbers shall be so chosen as to facilitate the
identification of members.
iii) For the small members that are delivered in bundles or crates, the required marking
shall be done on small metal tags securely tied to the bundle, while the crates shall
be marked directly.
vi) Each bundle or crate shall be packed with members for one and the same
assembly. In the same bundle or crate, general, utility members such as bolts,
gussets, etc. may be packed.
v) All built of material showing weight, quality and dimension of contents shall be
placed in the crates.
vi) The members shall be marked with a durable paint, in a visible location, preferably
at one end of the member so that these may be easily checked during storage and
erection.
vii) The members shall be marked in the shop before inspection and acceptance.
viii) When the member is being painted the marking area shall not be painted but
bordered with white paint.
ix) The marking and job symbol shall be registered in all shop delivery documents
(transportation, for erection etc.)
x) All members over 200 kgs. in weight should have slinging marks.
20.00
Dimensions and Tolerances
The dimensions, form, weight, and tolerances of all hot rolled shapes (and other members) shall
conform to the following Indian Standards and other relevant standards:
IS 1852-1985
Specifications for rolling and cutting tolerance for hot rolled steel
products.
IS 808 - 1989 Dimensions for hot rolled steel Sections
IS: 1730-1989
Dimensions for steel plate, sheet and strip for structural and general
engineering purposes.
IS 1732-1989
Dimensions for round and square steel bars for structural & general
engineering purpose.
IS 7215-1974
Tolerances for fabrication of steel structures.
194
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
Cold Formed Sections
The dimensions and tolerances of all cold formed light gauge structural steel sections shall
conform to Clauses 5 & 6 of IS: 811-1987, specifications for cold formed light gauge
structural steel sections.
21.00
Dimensional Tolerances for Structural Work
Dimensions shall be measured by means of an approved calibrated steel tape of the same
temperature as the structure at the time of measurement.
An allowable variation of 1 mm is permissible in the overall length of members with both
ends milled. Members without milled ends, which are to be assembled to other steel parts
of the structures, shall not deviate from the dimensions shown on the drawings by more
than 1.8 mm for members 10 meters or less in length, and by not more than 3 mm for
members over 10 meters in length.
The erection clearance for cleared ends of members connecting steel to steel should preferably
be not greater than 2.0 mm at each end. The erection clearance at ends of beams without
web cleats should be not more than 3 mm at each end, but where, for practicable reasons,
greater clearance is necessary, suitably designed seating should be provided.
22.00
Resources planning: The contractor shall submit a detailed report in respect to
22.01
Qualified supervisor
Workmanship shall be of the highest quality for all phases of the work. Contractors
supervising engineers or welding supervisors dedicated for the structural work shall be
qualified in accordance with the Standards and Codes designated. The Contractor or his
supervisor shall not adopt any practice, which will damage materials.
22.02
Qualified welders & grinder operator
All welders and grinder operators, to be employed on the works shall be qualified to an
appropriate standard as per the procedures outlined in the relevant Indian Standard. Testing
of all welders shall be carried out before any work is commenced. Only Welders who pass
the test shall be permitted to work only for those positions for which they were tested and
passed.
22.03
Plant, Machines & equipments deployed during handling of fabrication & erection
operations
The suitability and capacity of all plant and equipment used for erection shall be to the
satisfaction of the Consultant. Details of the proposed equipment shall be submitted for
approval 6 weeks prior to erection commencing.
Storing and Handling
All structural steel should be so stored and handled at the site that the members are not
subject to excessive stresses and damage.
Setting out
195
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
The positioning and leveling of all steel work with accuracy shall be in accordance with the
approved Drawings, Specifications and to the satisfaction of the Consultant.
24.00
SAFE WORKING
The Principle contractor shall strictly follow, at all stages of fabrication, transportation and
erection of steel structures, the stipulations contained in the Indian Standard Safety Code
for erection of Structural steel work IS:7205 and provision of the safety rules as specified in
the General conditions of the contract for ensuring safety of men and materials.
24.01
Safety during handling and erection
During erection, the steel work shall be securely bolted or otherwise fastened and, where
necessary, temporarily bracing provided for all load to be carried by the structure during
erection including those due to erection equipment and its operation. No permanent bolting
or welding should be done until proper alignment has been obtained.
24.02
Storing and Handling
All structural steel should be so stored and handled at the site that the members are not
subject to excessive stresses and damage.
24.03
Setting out
The positioning and leveling of all steel work with accuracy shall be in accordance with the
specified safety norms, approved Drawings, Specifications and to the satisfaction of the
Consultant.
24.04
Field Connections
All field assembly and welding shall be executed in accordance with the requirements for
shop fabrication, excepting such as manifestly apply to shop conditions only. Where the
steel has been delivered painted, the paint shall be removed before field welding, for a
distance of at least 50 mm on either side of the joints.
24.05
Platform for working and inspection: The contractor shall make all necessary arrangements in form of a suitable platform in
wooden plank of steel plate as the case may be, supported by steel scaffolding and side
railing up to adequate height. The platform shall strong & sturdy and shall be used by the
workers and the engineers for movement & day-to-day inspection till satisfactory encasing
work is complete. This shall include proper approach and working platform during erection
of the structures.
25.00
PAINTING
Two Coats of Zinc rich primer one at shop and one at site and two coat of PU paint
approved colour.
as per
After inspection and issue of test and acceptance certificate, all steel surfaces shall be
painted or otherwise treated. Except where encased in concrete, all steel work shall be
196
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
given one coat of approved metal protection with 99% of zinc rich content, applied evenly and thoroughly
and well worked into the joint and other open spaces.
25.01
Surface preparation :
In order to achieve the maximum durability, one or more of the following methods of
surface preparation shall be followed, depending on condition of steel surface and as
instructed by EIC.
a) Manual or hand tool cleaning
b) Mechanical or power tool cleaning
c) Blast cleaning.
Mill scale, rust, rust scale and foreign matter shall be removed fully to ensure that a clean
and dry surface is obtained. The minimum acceptable standards in case of manual or hand
tool cleaning shall be St2 or equivalent, in case of mechanical or power tool cleaning it
shall be St3 or equivalent, in case of blast cleaning it shall be Sa 2½ or equivalent as per
Swedish Standard SIS-055900 / ISO-8501-1. Where highly corrosive condition exists, then
the blast cleaning shall be Sa3 as per Swedish Standard.
Prior to surface preparation all other contaminants, oil, grease etc. Blast cleaning shall not
be performed where dust can contaminate surface undergoing such cleaning or during
humid weather conditions having humidity exceeding 85%. EIC reserve the right to instruct
the type of surface preparation depending upon the condition of material.
Irrespective of the method of surface preparation, the first coat of primer must be applied
on dry surface immediately and in any case within 4 hours of cleaning of surface. However
at times of unfavorable weather conditions, EIC shall have the liberty to control time
period, at his sole discretion and /or to insist on re-cleaning, as may be required, before
primer application is taken up. In general during un-favorable weather conditions, blasting
and painting shall be avoided as far as possible.
Surfaces shall not be coated in rain, wind or environment where injurious airborne elements
exist, when the steel surface temperature is below 5°C and the humidity is greater than
85%.
To the maximum extent each coat of material shall be applied as a continuous film uniform
thickness free of probes. Any spot or areas missed in the application shall be recoated and
permitted to dry before the next coat is applied. Applied paint should have the desired wet
film thickness.
Paint manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed strictly at all times. Particular attention
shall be paid to the following.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Instructions for storage to avoid exposure as well as extremes of temperature
Surface preparation prior to painting
Maxing and thinning
Application of paints and the recommended limit on time intervals between coats.
Painting shall be carried out preferably by spraying. Brushes may be used sparingly at
certain locations only and the brushes used for painting shall be of a style and quality that
will enable proper application of paint. Type of brush shall be chosen according to its
197
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
application and there shall be a minimum of brush marks left in the applied paint. EIC
reserves to instruct type of application of paint. Steel surfaces shall not be painted in areas
where connection is by use of friction grip bolts. On completion of joint the surfaces shall
receive the painting as specified.
Primer and finish paints shall be compatible with each other to avoid cracking and
wrinkling. As such it is recommended that the primer and finish paint shall be from the
same manufacturer. Contractor shall obtain approval from the EIC the type of primer he
proposes to use.
Contractor shall furnish all the characteristics of paint material along with the test
certificates. All paint material shall be of first quality.
All Structural steel surfaces except EPs shall be given the first coat of primer at shop and
the second coat after it is erected in position. Further, any abraded surface of the first coat
during transport from shop to site and during erection shall be provided with a touch-up
coat of the primer. The field primer shall be compatible with the shop primer.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR PAINTING SYSTEM.
a) All painted surfaces shall be uniform & pleasing appearance.
b) All epoxy and enamel painted surfaces wherever finish paint is specified shall be of
uniform texture and high glossy finish.
c) All storms, splashes & spatters of paints shall be removed.
Surfaces shall meet the minimum specified DFT for their respective systems.
25.02
Shop Painting
Painting shall consist of providing sand blasting (sand blasting done at shop shall be
inspected by EIC before doing the first primer) to standard SSPC – SP10 (Sa 2-1/2) and
one coat of epoxy polymer based red oxide zinc phosphate primer of Dry Film Thickness
(DFT) 25 microns for each coat as specified under specialized painting work given
elsewhere to Steel members before dispatch from shop.
Internal surfaces of boxed / back to back members should be painted before assembly.
25.03
Site Painting
After providing one coat of primer at site, second coat of Zinc rich primer shall be applied
after the base coat of red oxide zinc phosphate primer at the welded joints / welded
surfaces, and two coats (each one coat of 35 microns DFT) of Epoxy based polyurethane
paint – Aliphatic grade for 35 microns DFT of approved colour and make shall be
provided.
25.04
Primer Coat Shall Not Be Applied Unless.
–
–
–
Surfaces have been sandblasted to clean dust, rust, etc.
Erection gaps between members spots that cannot be painted or where moisture or
other aggressive agents may penetrate have been filled with an approved type of oil and
putty.
The surfaces to painted are completely dry.
198
–
Members and parts have been inspected and accepted.
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
–
Section – 13
Welds have been accepted.
The following are not to painted or protected by any coating.
– Surfaces which are in the vicinity of joints to be welded at SITE.
– Surfaces bearing markings.
– Other surfaces indicated in the Design.
The following shall be given a coat of hot oil or any approved resistant lubricant only:
– Planed surfaces.
– Holes for links.
The surfaces that are to be embedded or in contact with the concrete, shall not be painted.
Special attention shall be given to locations not accessible, where water can collect and
which after assembly and erection cannot be inspected, painted and maintained. Holes shall
be provided for water drainage and inaccessible box type sections shall be hermetically
sealed by welds.
26.00
PACKING, TRANSPORTATION, DELIVERY
After final shop acceptance and marking, the item shall be packed and loaded for
transportation. Packing must be adequate to protect items against warping during loading
and unloading and should have slinging marks.
Proper lifting devices shall be used for loading, in order to protect items against warping.
Slender projecting parts shall be braced with additional steel bars before loading for
protection against warping during transportation.
Loading and transportation shall be done in compliance with transportation rules. If certain
parts cannot be transported in the lengths stipulated in the Design, the position and type of
additional splice joints shall be approved by EIC.
Items must be carefully loaded on platforms for transportation with adequate means to
prevent warping, bending or falling during transportation.Small parts such as fish plates,
gussets etc. shall be securely tied with wire to their respective parts.
Bolts, nuts and washers shall be packed and transported in crates or bags.
The parts shall be delivered in the order stipulated by the EIC and shall be accompanied by
documents showing :
–
–
–
–
26.01
Quality and quantity of structure of members
Position of member in the structure
Particulars of structure
Identification number/job symbol
Marking of identification:i)
All elements and members prior to dispatch for erection shall be shop
199
marked.
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
27.00
Section – 13
The size and thickness of the numbers shall be so chosen as to facilitate
the identification of members.
For the small members that are delivered in bundles or crates, the required
marking shall be done on small metal tags securely tied to the handle, while the
crates shall be marked directly.
Each bundle or crate shall be packed with members for one and the same
assembly. In the same bundle or crate, general utility members such as bolts,
gussets etc may be packed.
All bills of materials showing weight, quality and dimension of contents shall be
placed in the crates.
The members shall be marked with a durable paint, in a visible location, preferably
at one end of the member so that these may be easily checked during storage and
erection.
The members shall be marked in the shop before inspection and acceptance.
When the member is being painted, the marked area shall not be painted but
bordered with white paint.
TRANSPORT, HANDLING AND STORAGE
Steel shall be handled and transported with care, and in such a manner that parts will not
suffer strain, distortion or abrasion. The Engineer shall reject distorted or damaged
steelwork. All steel shall be stored above the ground and supported in timber packers.
Lifting and handling of all steel, whether painted or not shall be done with synthetic
webbing flat slings or bagged chains. All slings shall comply with the local work place,
health and safety acts.
Under no circumstances shall unprotected chains be used for lifting steel.
Paintwork damaged during transport and erection shall be rectified as specified in the
Surface Treatment Section of the Specification.
Where large portal frames are being used, the flexibility of the frames requires that care be
taken when accepting delivery, stacking, lifting and erecting. It is expected that a foreman
competent and familiar with all aspects if lifting a large portal frame be appointed to the
site. Beams and
trusses shall be lifted such that bending occurs about the axis for which the member was
designed.
Unless otherwise stated on the Drawings a space of not less than 25mm shall be provided
between undersides of column base plates and between all beam and roof truss bearings,
and concrete pads, footings etc.
After steel work has been wedged up to line and level fixed in position, the space between
steelwork and concrete shall be grouted with a mixture of Portland cement and approved
commercial grit or washed sand. The mix shall be of equal proportion by volume of cement
200
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
and sand (or grit) mixed with just sufficient water to form a mixture of "damp earth"
consistency, and shall be used within 20 minutes. The grouting mix shall be rammed to
approval into the space between steelwork and concrete and protected from damage until it
sets.
28.00
ERECTION PROCEDURE
28.01
Erection Marks
a) The erectability of the structures shall be checked by the Principal Contractor before
commencement of the fabrication work to avoid future modification.
Before any steel work leaves the Principal Contractor’s fabrication site, it shall be
suitably marked in accordance with the approved fabrication drawings and according to
an approved marking plan.
b) The erection marks assigned to various components of the structural steel work,
excepting secondary beams, shall also contain an erection sequence number indicating
the sequence in which the various components are to be erected.
c) Erection marks shall be clearly painted on the work item, each piece being marked in at
least two places. Each piece shall also have its weight marked thereon. In order to help
identification, each erection piece, i.e. erection mark item, shall bear its erection mark
and erection sequence number. Erection marks shall be painted on the structures,
during the process of fabrication to facilitate their identification during inspection.
Where a number of components are identical and bear the same erection mark, these
components shall be further identified by assigning numerals in addition to the
common erection mark.
D Erection marked on the sections with the utmost care to ensure proper alignment and
assembly of the pieces at site.
28.02
Erection
Considering the complexity of the structure it may be necessary to assemble one or two
frames at site before actual erection in situ is undertaken. Hence the contractor shall make
necessary provisions at site for such mock-up assembly.
a) The Principal Contractor shall submit for approval of the EIC his Erection Scheme for
the erection of all types of structures. Erection shall commence only after approval of
the Principal Contractor’s proposed erection scheme.
b) The erection scheme shall give full details of the method of handling, transport,
hoisting and erection including false work/staging, temporary bracing, guying,
temporary strengthening, etc. It will also give the complete details of the quantity and
capacity of the various items of erection equipment that will be used. Any
modifications to the erection scheme as directed by the EIC for various reasons or due
201
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
to the interference with the work of other agencies shall be incorporated by the Principal
Contractor.
c) The Principal Contractor shall examine the site conditions and transportation
clearances before deciding whether columns are to be fabricated and erected in one
piece or more than one piece. Erection of structures is to be carried out preferably with
a crane and in case this is not possible, only the upper portion of the columns can be
erected with a derrick. Further, the erection of columns and portals etc. shall be carried
out in one single piece as far as practicable. No column shall be fabricated and erected
in more than 3 pieces. Proper splicing shall be provided at the erection joints indicated
in fabrication drawings. When erection joints are provided in columns, their location
shall generally be just above a floor level.
d) The structural steel shall as far as practicable be erected frame wise. Thereafter, the
frames shall be progressively aligned and all erection welding completed. The
secondary beams shall thereafter be erected, aligned and welded completely as per the
approved schedule of work. Touch up painting in these areas shall be completed and as
soon as particular portion of the structure/floor is completed in all respects, it shall be
handed over to other Principal Contractors for carrying out other civil works as well as
mechanical/electrical erection works. Conveyor galleries shall generally be erected as a
completely fabricated box, i.e. the bottom chord and bracings, top chord and bracings,
side vertical posts and bracings, and portals and roof-trusses shall be completely
welded prior to erection. The inside sheeting runners and roof sheeting purlins may be
erected individually.
28.03
Protection against Damage in Transit
a) All steel work shall be efficiently and sufficiently protected against damage in transit to
site from any cause whatsoever. All projecting plates or bars and ends of members at
joints shall be stiffened, all straight bars and plates shall be bundled, all screwed ends
and machined surfaces shall be suitably packed and all bolts, nuts, washer and small
loose parts shall be packed separately in cases so as to prevent damage or distortion
during transit. Should there be any distortion of fabricated members the Principal
Contractor shall immediately report the matter to the EIC. Distorted steel received from
stores or distorted during transport from stores to the fabrication yard shall not be used
in fabrication unless the distortions are minor which in the opinion of the EIC can be
removed by acceptable methods.
These distortions shall be rectified by the Principle Contractor by cold-bending. If
heating is necessary to rectify the defects, the details of the procedure shall be
intimated to the EIC whose approval shall be taken before such rectification.
The temperature of heat treatment shall not exceed the limits beyond which the original
properties of the steel are likely to be impaired.
b) If in the opinion of the EIC the steel has been unduly bent in transit from the project
stores to the fabrication yard or during handling by the Principal Contractor which
cannot be rectified, such steel shall be counted as wastage and the cost of such steel
shall be recovered from the Principal Contractor as per the provisions of the contract.
202
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
28.04
Section – 13
Storage and Preparation of Parts prior to erection:
a) The storage place for Steel Parts shall be prepared in advance and got approved by the
EIC before the Steel structures start arriving from the shop.
b) A platform shall be provided by the Principal Contractor near the Erection Site for
preliminary Erection work.
c) The Principal Contractor shall make the following verifications upon receipt of
material at site.
•
For Quality Certificate regarding Materials and Workmanship according to these
general Specifications and Drawings.
•
Whether parts received are complete without defects due to transportation, loading and
unloading and defects, if any, are well within the admissible limit.
a) For the above work sufficient space must be allotted in the storage area.
b) Steps shall be taken to prevent warping of item during unloading.
c) The parts shall be unloaded, sorted and stored so as to be easily identifiable.
d) The parts shall be stored according to construction symbol and markings so that these
may be taken out in order of Erection.
e) The parts shall be set at least 150 m clear from ground on wooden or steel blocks for
protection against direct contact with ground and to permit drainage of water.
f)
If rectification of members like straightening etc. are required, these shall be done in a
special place allotted which shall be adequately equipped.
g) The parts shall be clean when delivered for Erection.
28.05
Erection and Tolerances
a) Erection in general shall be carried out as required and approved by the EIC.
b) Positioning and leveling of the structure, alignment and plumbing of the Stanchion and
fixing every member of the structure shall be in accordance with the relevant drawings
and to the complete satisfaction of the EIC.
c) The following checks and inspection shall be carried out before, during and after
Erection.
–
–
–
–
Damages during transportation.
Accuracy of alignment of Structures
Erection according to Drawings and Specifications.
Progress and workmanship
203
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
d) In case there be any deviations regarding positions of foundations, or anchor bolts,
which would lead to erection deviations, the EIC shall be informed immediately. Minor
rectifications in foundations, orientation of bolt holes etc. shall be carried out as a part
of the work, at no extra cost.
e) The various parts of the Steel Structure shall be so erected as to ensure stability against
inherent weight, wind and Erection stresses.
f)
The structure shall be anchored and final erection joints completed after plan and
elevation positions of the Structural members have been verified with corresponding
drawings and approved by the EIC.
g) The bolted joints shall be tightened so that the entire surface of the bolt heads and nuts
shall rest on the member. For parts with sloping surfaces, taper washers shall be used.
h) Site painting after erection shall be as per clause 16.02.
28.06
Stability of Structures
a) The Principal Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of the structure at all
stages of its erection at site and shall take all necessary measures by the additions of
temporary bracings and guying to ensure adequate resistance to wind and also to loads
due to erection equipment and their operations. Guying and bracing shall be done in
such a way that they do not interfere with the movement or working of other agencies
working in the area. For the purpose of guying, the Principal Contractor shall not use
other structures in the vicinity which are likely to be damaged by the guy.
b) Setting Column Bases
Column bases shall be set so that the column load is uniformly transmitted to the
foundation. The Principal Contractor shall carefully check the location and layout of
anchor bolts embedded in foundations constructed to ensure that the structures can be
properly erected as shown on the drawings.
c) The Principal Contractor shall be responsible for the correct alignment and leveling of
all steel work on site to ensure that the columns are in plumb. The permissible erection
tolerances for the structural members are given in Table ‘A’ given at the end of this
specification.
d) Before erection of columns on their foundations, the top surface of base concrete shall
be thoroughly cleaned with wire brushes and by chipping to remove all laitance and
loose material. The Principal Contractor shall also be responsible to provide all packing
and shim, plates. No steel structure shall be erected on their foundation unless such
foundations have been certified fit for erection of steel by the EIC. Adequate number of
air release holes and inspection holes shall be provided in the base plate. The
grouting/under pinning of base plate and chipping of foundation to desired level are
also in scope of Principal Contractor.
28.07 Final Acceptance and Handling Over of Structure
a) At acceptance, the Principal Contractor shall submit the following Documents :
204
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
b) Shop and Erection Drawings – either in tracings or reproducible.
c) Copies each of the following.
•
Shop acceptance documents
•
Quality Certificates for Structural, Plates, electrodes, welding wire, bolts, nuts,
washers etc.
•
List of Certified Welders, who worked on Erection of Structure. (With documents
or qualification tests)
•
Acceptance and Intermediate Control Procedure of Erection Operations.
a) Approval by the EIC at any stage of work does not relieve the Principal Contractor of
any of his required guarantees of the contract.
29.00
STEEL GRATING
29.01
All grating units shall be rectangular in pattern and welded grating assembly. The size and
the spacing of the bearing bars and cross bars shall be as approved in detailed drawings.
The detail fabrication drawings for gratings shall be prepared by Principal Contractor on
the basis of approved design for grating.
29.02
The Gratings shall be made up in panel units designed to coincide with the span of the
structural steel framing as indicated in the drawings or as directed by the EIC. The size of
each panel shall be as approved by EIC.
29.03
The grating unit shall be accurately fabricated and finished, free from warps twists or any
defects that would impair their strength, serviceability and appearance.
29.04
Grating work shall include cut outs and clearance opening for all columns, pipes, ducts,
conduits or any other installation penetrating through the grating work. Such cut outs and
clearances shall be treated as follows.
29.05
The gratings shall be notched, trimmed and neatly finished around flanges and webs of the
columns, moment connections, cap plates and such other components of the steel structures
encountered during the placement of the gratings. In all such cases, the trimming shall be
done to follow the profile of the components encountered. After trimming, binding strip
shall be provided on the grating to suit the profile so obtained.
29.06
Opening in gratings for pipes or ducts that are 150 mm in size or diameter or larger shall be
provided with steel bar toe plates of not less than 5 mm thickness and appropriate width, set
flush with the bottom of the bearing bars.
29.07
Penetrations in gratings that are more than 50 mm but less than 150 mm in size or diameter
shall be welded with plates of size shown in the detailed drawings set flush with the bottom
of the grating panel.
205
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
29.08
Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, grating units to all penetrations shall be made
up in split section, accurately fitted and neatly finished to provide for proper assembly and
erection at the job site.
29.09
Grating units shall be provided with all necessary clips, bolts, nuts and lock washers
required for proper assembly and rigid installation and fastening to abutting units and
supporting structural steel framing members.
29.10
All fabricated grating section and accessories shall be shop prior to erection at site. Painting
shall consist of two coats of red lead primer and two coat of black enamel finish.
29.11
Prior to painting, all surfaces shall be cleaned free from rust, mill scale, grease, oil, or any
other foreign matter that might affect the adherence of the paint by sand blasting. While the
primer shall be applied by spray guns or by brushes, the final coat of finished paint shall
necessarily be applied by means of spray guns only.
29.12
The applied coatings shall be uniform, free from voids and streaks, Drilled or punched
holes shall be touched up prior to erection or assembly.
29.13
Maximum deviation in linear dimension from the approved dimension shall not exceed 12
mm.
30.00
STAIRS, RAILINGS AND LADDERS
30.01
All stairs and intermediate landings shall be constructed to size dimensions and design, as
indicated on the detailed drawings. Such stairway shall be fabricated as a complete unit
which shall include struts, hangers, posts, cross bracings, stringers, treats, cleats and
accessories, as required for connection to structural steel framing and concrete.
a.
Stair treads shall be furnished complete with punched and slotted carrier plates attached
ready to bolt to stair stringers. Treads shall be provided with anti slip nosing using
chequered plate and set flush with the stair treads.
b. Pipe handrails, as specified in detailed drawings. Shall be assembled with flush type
fittings and welded joints, ground and polished smooth. Railings shall be provided with
all necessary fittings posts brackets, bolts, plates and similar accessories as shown on
the approved drawings and as required for proper installation.
c.
Hand rails shall be of medium weight black steel pipes of flush welded construction,
ground smooth using 32 mm nominal bore medium class pipes with double rail about 1
metre above platform level and pipe posts spread not more than 1.5 metres apart.
d. Smooth uniform curves and bends are to be provided at stair returns and also wherever
specified/required. The open ends of all pipe posts shall be plugged and welded. A
minimum radius of 3 times the pipe diameter shall be provided at all points of direction
changes in the hand rails.
206
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
e.
Section – 13
Vertical ladders shall be as called for on the approved drawings. The ladders shall be
provided with support arms and cage formed of bent steel plate or clip angles. Where
shown on the drawings the ladders shall have loose neck supports, designed to form
hand grabs and end brackets for fastening to abutting construction. Maximum deviation
in the linear dimensions of railings, stars and ladders, from the approved dimensions,
shall not exceed 12 mm.
31.00
CHEQUERED PLATE
31.01
Chequered plates shall be fixed to supporting members by stitch welding gas specified in
relevant drawings or as directed by the EIC. The edges shall be made smooth and no burrs
or jagged ends shall be left. While splicing care should be taken so that there is continuity
in pattern between the two potions. Care should also be taken to avoid distortion of the
plate while welding of stiffening angles/vertical stiffening ribs. Surfaces shall be provided
with primer paint as per relevant clause.
32.00
SAMPLING, TESTING AND QUALITY CONTROL
32.01
General
a.
The Principal Contractor shall carry out all sampling and testing gin accordance with
the relevant Indian Standards and/or International Standards and shall conduct such
tests as called for by the EIC. Where no specific testing procedure is mentioned, the
tests shall be carried out as per the prevalent accepted engineering practice to the
directions of the EIC. Tests shall be done at a laboratory approved by the EIC and the
Principal Contractor shall submit to the EIC, the test results in triplicate within three
days after completion of a test. The EIC may at his discretion, waive off some of the
stipulations given for small and unimportant operations.
b. Material/work found unsuitable for acceptance, shall be removed and replaced by the
Principal Contractor. The work shall be redone as per specification requirements and to
the satisfaction of the EIC.
c.
Radiography and ultrasonic testing of welds shall be carried out by specialist agency
only.
32.02
An indicative programme of Inspection and testing for raw materials, welds and
dimensional tolerances for fabrication & erection of steel structures are given in AnnexureA. The Principal Contractor shall draw-up a comprehensive quality control programme for
executing the works based on this indicative programme.
33.00
EMBEDDED PARTS
33.01
Scope
This section of specification deals with the supply, fabrication (where called for and / or
erection of embedded steel parts.
33.02
General Requirements
a) Embedded steel parts shall be either furnished by the Employer/ EIC for transportation
and erection by the Principal Contractor or supplied, fabricated and directed by the
207
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Principal Contractor is stipulated. If supplied by the Employer/EIC, these parts shall be
furnished anywhere within the project area and the Principal Contractor shall transport
the same to the work site.
i.
embedded steel parts supplied, fabricated and erected by the Principal Contractor shall
include items such as, but not limited to, foundation grillages, anchor bolts, pipe
sleeves, equipment mounting plates, steel pieces properly welded with necessary lugs
as shown on the drawings, auxiliary framing for equipment supports, pesty plugs for
door and window frames, dowel bars for concrete work, miscellaneous frames, etc.
ii. Embedded steel parts supplied, fabricated / erected by the Principal Contractor shall
also include item such as but not limited to plate inserts, edge protection angles, rolled
sections with or without properly welded lugs.
iii. Cold work deformed steel bars shall not be used for lugs.
33.03
Materials
The materials shall be in accordance with the relevant clauses of Technical Specification
for the respective works which shall be deemed to form a part of his specification. Mild
steel pipes shall conform to IS:1161. Unless otherwise specified, medium class pipes shall
be provided.
33.04
Fabrication, Erection Etc.
The Principal Contractor shall fabricate, transport to site and erect accurately in position all
embedded steel parts either by welding, bolting or any other means as approved by the EIC.
Exposed surfaces of embedded parts other than holding down bolts, unless otherwise
stated, are to be painted with two coats of approved anticorrosive paint (as per IS:2074)
and/or or bituminous paint as directed. The threads of holding down bolts shall be greased
and protected with water proof tape.
During erection, the Principal Contractor shall provide necessary strong temporary bracings
and supports to ensure proper installation of the embedded parts which shall be erected at
the true locations as shown on the drawings and these shall be in plumb and level (unless
otherwise shown on drawings). The Principal Contractor shall furnish the EIC with
fabrication and assembly drawings prepared for embedded steel parts showing the erection
procedure, for major items, wherever necessary.
Fabrication and erection shall be carried out as per IS:800. Welding rods and site / field
welding shall conform to IS : 816 and IS : 9595.
34.00
FOUNDATION BOLT ASSEMBLY
34.01
Scope
This section of the specification deals with the requirements of supply, fabrication and
erection of foundation bolt assembly etc.
34.02
General Requirements
Supply, fabrication, erection and installation of foundation bolt assembly shall comprise of
foundations bolts, stiffener plates, washers, nuts, lock nuts, pipe sleeves etc.
208
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
34.03
Section – 13
Materials
Foundation bolts shall generally conform to IS:5624. Mild steel bars used for the
fabrication of bolt assembly shall conform to grade – 1 of IS : 432, IS : 2062 or any other
material including high carbon / high tensile steel as specified. Foundation bolts will be of
grade 8.8/10.8
Hexagonal nuts and lock nuts shall conform to IS : 1363 and IS : 1364 up to M-63 dia. And
IS : 3138 and M-42 to M-150 dia.
Flat plain washers shall be of mild steel and punched / machined type conforming to IS :
5369.
Steel pipe sleeves shall conform to medium class of IS : 1161.
34.04
Fabrication, Erection, Etc.
The fabrication and erection of bolt assemblies shall include threading, cutting, grinding,
drilling, welding, etc. complete. All bolts, bolts assemblies, etc. shall be fabricated by the
Principal Contractor to the correct dimensions and shapes as shown on drawings, supplied
by the EIC. The bolts shall have coarse pitch screw thread in the diameter rang, 8 to 64 and
6 mm pitch screw for diameter >64 mm as per IS : 4218.
For fabrication of any particular size of bolt indicated on the drawing, the diameter of the
threaded portion of the bolt shall be considered as the diameter of the bolt.
Every bolt shall be provided with steel washer, under the nut. The washer shall be flat and
min. outside circle have a diameter 2.50 times that of the bolt and of suitable thickness. All
nuts shall be of steel with well formed hexagonal heads unless specified otherwise, forged
from solid metal and shall be dipped in hot boiled linseed oil as soon as these are made.
The nuts shall fit good on the bolts.
During erection, the Principal Contractor shall provide necessary template, temporary
bracings, supports, etc. to ensure proper positioning of the assemblies and holding them
firmly until they are cast / grouted and the grouted has set. All materials shall be erected in
plump and in level (unless otherwise specified) and at true locations as shown on the
drawings. Threads shall be protected by using PVC taps.
Fabrication and erection shall be carried out as per IS : 800. Welding shall conform to IS :
816 and IS : 9595
35.00
WORKMANSHIP: Workmanship shall be of the highest quality for all phases of the work. Supervising
engineers, welding supervisors and welders shall be qualified in accordance with the
Standards and Codes designated. The Contractor shall not adopt any practice, which will
damage materials.
The whole of the structural steel fabrications shall be done in the Contractors workshop
unless specific approval has been obtained from the Engineer for the sub-contracting of any
209
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
part of the work prior to the placing of the sub-contract.
All steel shall be new and each member shall be free from any butt-welded or other form of
splice for the full length between joints shown in or indicated by the drawings unless such
splice shall have been shown in the approved shop drawings and/or approved in writing.
Steel sizes shall be as indicated on the drawings. Under no circumstances can any other
member size or type be made without the written approval of the Consultant who will
consider only written application showing specified size and dimensions and required
substitute size and dimensions.
Clamps, magnets, holding devices or other setting up fixtures shall be used in assembling
structural members in order to avoid tack welding whenever practicable.
Finished members shall be free from kinks or bends. Shearing shall be accurately done, and
all portions of the work neatly finished. Corners shall be square and true, unless otherwise
shown on the drawings. Where shearing cannot make re-entrant cuts, a rectangular punch
may be used. Re-entrant cuts shall be filleted, unless otherwise approved by the
Consultant. Approved dies shall make bends, except for minor details, or bending rolls.
Where heating is required, precautions shall be taken to avoid overheating the metal and it
shall be allowed to cool in such a manner as not to destroy the original properties of the
metal. Hammer marks shall not be evident. Steel with welds will not be accepted, except
where welding is definitely specified, called for on the Drawings, or otherwise approved.
All bolts, nuts, and screws shall be tight. The ends of pipes, except for hand railing, shall
be reamed.
Fabrication in general shall conform to the requirements of IS 800-1984, Code of practice
for use of structural steel in general building construction.
36.00
INSPECTION, TESTING AND QUALITY CHECK LIST
36.01
Inspections & Testing
The Principal Contractor shall carry out a comprehensive inspection and testing programme
of inspection / testing on the basis of details given below. The testing of all the materials
supplied by the Principal Contractor shall be carried out by him. This is however, not
intended to form a comprehensive programme as it is the Principal Contractor’s
responsibility to draw-up and carry out such a programme duly approved by the EIC. Such
approval shall not relieve the Principal Contractor of the responsibility about the
correctness and adequacy of workmanship, materials etc.
36.02
Raw Material Inspection
36.02.2
Steel
i)
Conformity with Specifications
a) The conformity of the materials with the specification and the availability of the
relevant Test Certificates shall be checked. Carbon equivalent value shall also be
made available. Material test report with chemical analysis is to be made available.
210
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
b) Tubular Section cord plates above 20 mm wall thickness shall be subjected to
ultrasonic test as per ASTM A435 or equivalent to check for lamination.
ii) Physical Conditions :
a) Steel shall out not be pitted and should be free from scales and rust.
b) If the rolled sections and plates are bent or distorted, bend or distortion shall
normally be removed by cold treatment.
c) Straightening under hot stage shall be resorted only under specific permission from
the EIC.
d) If any rolling defects, viz. lamination, cracks etc. are discovered in the steel during
the processing, it is to be rejected.
iii) Storage
a) Steel tabular section and plates of different specifications shall be stacked
separately.
b) Steel of IS : 2062 (different grades) and IS:8500 quality shall be given distinctive
identification mark by colour coding of materials.
c) Rolled sections shall be stacked profile-wise separately.
d) Tublar steel sections shall be stacked over spacer supported on posts of about 50
cm. height above ground. Passages and space between the stacks shall be sufficient
for rigging operations.
e) Electrodes for all welding shall be procured as envisaged in the welding
procedure sheet predetermined before actual welding operation starts/
f)
Electrodes shall be properly stored dry as required by the IS Code or by the
manufacturer.
g) Electrodes shall bear the IS/BS/AWS or equivalent Certification mark.
h) The approval for all the consumables for welding shall be specifically obtained
before hand.
36.02.3
Nuts, Bolts etc.
i)
The quality of these shall be as per relevant IS Codes.
ii) They shall be stored properly according to grade, diameter and length. However,
special bolts like HSFG shall be stored separately as per the relevant clause.
iii) Bolts of well known manufacturers and acceptable with manufacturer’s test
certificates. However, in case the Principal Contractor is not able to produce the test
certificate, the bolts can be accepted only after satisfactory cold bend and flattening
211
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
tests. For the purpose of these tests, the inspecting officer should select at random 3
specimens each for cold bend and flattening tests. For the purpose of these tests, the
inspecting officer should select at random 3 specimens each for cold bend and
flattening tests out of each consignment of 1000 Nos. or less and instruct the Principal
Contractor to carry out the tests in his presence. Cost of testing shall be borne by the
Principal Contractor.
36.02.4
Paints/Primers
i)
The relevant IS or equivalent mark on sealed tins shall be checked.
ii) A few tins shall be opened at random to check the condition of the paint fro old stock
and showing signs of solidification shall not be accepted.
iii) Paint manufacturer’s instruction for storage, mixing & thinning recommended time
intervals between coats shall be followed strictly. Before the application of primer,
compatibility of primer with the finishing coats shall be sured.
36.02.5
Weld Procedure Qualification
Welding procedure shall be established as per ASME Section IX or equivalent Indian
Standards. Welding procedure, specifications shall be submitted by the Principal Contractor
for review and approval of the employer / EIC. Typical welding procedure data sheet is
given in Proforma A.P-1.
36.02.6
Welders Qualification Test
Welders qualification test shall be as per ASTM Section IX or equivalent Indian Standards.
36.02.7
Inspection for Tack Assembly Set up :
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
36.02.8
Bevel
Gap
Off-setting
Shrinkage allowance
Fitment Sequence
Principal overall size
Preheating :
Temperature control by Thermo chalk or suitable equivalent method.
36.02.9
Inspection of main Welds of Principal Contractors for Columns, Crane Girders, Framing
beams, Trusses, etc.
I)
Fillet Welds for :
i)
Check size
212
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
ii) Machrotech examination of Production Test coupons for Main Fillet weld.
iii) 100% Visual examination
iv) 10% Dye penetration test/magnetic particle test – Major welds (including welds
subjected to tension) like web to flange connection, 10% All other areas.
II) Butt Welds :
a) Columns, Beams etc.
i) 100% Visual examination
ii) 10% Dye penetration test after back gouging shall be carried out. Final weld
shall also be tested.
iii) Mechanical testing of production test coupons – Minimum one joint per
column/built up beam and crane grinder etc. The EIC may reduce the
frequency of this test, after getting consistently satisfactory results for initial
10 tests.
iv) 10% Radiography test on welds shall be carried out mavandone basis. Where
Radiography test is not possible, ultrasonic test shall be carried out after
grinding the surface wherever required with prior approval of the EIC.
b)
In case of failure of any weld in spot radiography the percentage for retesting
shall be doubled at that particular location.
36.02.10
Final Inspection
i)
Dimensional check as per fabrication check list detailed elsewhere.
ii) Marking for holes for fitments or connection and hole size.
iii) Erection mark
iv) Painting
a) Dressing and surface preparation.
b) Final painting including dry film thickness (DFT) by using Elcometer or any other
approved method. In addition, the rate of application (coverage) as per
manufacturer’s recommendation shall be checked.
36.02.11
Inspection during Fabrication and Erection
a) All structural components/members shall be checked for dimensional tolerance during
fabrication and erection.
b) Tolerance on dimensions for fabrication of structures shall be according to IS:7215 and
check list given under table A-1 to A-5. In case of any conflict between the provisions
of IS:7215 and those mentioned under the table, the stipulation of the latter shall
govern or as specified in fabrication drawing.
c) Tolerance on dimensions for erection of steel structures shall be according to IS:12843.
213
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Relevant portion of the same is given under Table A-6 for ready reference.
36.02.12
Welding Tests on welds and weld Defects
36.02.13
Mechanical testing of welds (Destructive tests): Butt welds having one or more of the
following defects are not acceptable.
i)
Bend Test
ii) Tensile Test
36.02.14
:
Crack on root/face on being bent through 180 degree with
mandrel of 4 t where t is the thickness of plate.
:
Weld strength less than parent metal’s strength.
Radiographic Examination (optional)
Section of welds that are shown by Radiography to have any of the following type
imperfections shall be judged unacceptable:
1) Any type of crack or zone of incomplete fusion or penetration.
2) Any elongated slag inclusion which has length greater than :
6mm for upto 20 mm
8 mm for t from 20 mm to 32 mm
‘t’ = thickness of weld
3) any group of slag inclusion in that have an aggregate length greater than ‘t’ in a length
of 12t, except when distance between the successive imperfections exceed 6L where
‘L’ is length of longest imperfection in group.
4) Rounded indications in excess of that specified by the acceptance standard given in
Appendix 4 of ASME section VIII Div. 1.
36.02.15
Ultrasonic Examination
The welded joints will be tested by suitable combination of Angle and Normal beam probe
techniques to ensure scanning of the entire cross-section of weldments.
Acceptance Standard
All indications which produce a response greater than 20% of the reference level shall be
investigated to the extent that operator can determine the shape, identify and location of all
such reflectors and evaluate them in terms of the acceptance standards given in (a) and (b)
below :
a) Discontinuities are unacceptable if the amplitude exceeds the reference level and
214
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
discontinuities have lengths which exceeds.
i)
6 mm for ‘t’ up to 20 mm inclusive
ii) 8 mm for ‘t’ from 20 mm to 50 m inclusive
iii) 20 mm for ‘t’ over 50 mm
b) Where discontinuities are interpreted to be cracks, lack of fusion, or incomplete
penetration, they are unacceptable regardless of discontinuities or signal amplitude.
36.02.16
Visual Examination:
Following defects are not allowed:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
36.02.17
Unsatisfactory appearance
Incomplete weld
Molten metal flow
Pits
Surface crack, lack of penetration
Insufficient length
Surface defects exceeding 5% of weld seam area
Spatters
Dye Penetration Test:
All surfaces to be examined shall be free of :
a) Relevant linear indications
b) Four or more rounded defects in a line separated by 1.5mm or less (edge to edge)
except where the specification for the material establishes different requirements for
acceptance so far as defects are concerned.
Evaluation of Indicators
i)
Linear indication are those indications in which the length is more than 3 times the
width. Only indicators with major dimensions greater than 1.5 mm shall be considered
relevant.
ii) Rounded indications or indications which are circular or elliptical with length less than
3 times the width.
iii) Any questionable or doubtful indication shall be tested to verify whether or not actual
defects are present.
All steelworks shall comply with General Specification. All structural steel shall comply with;
•
IS 2062. Fusion welding quality steel (Fe 410W Grade A) with minimum yield stress of
215
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
•
250 MPa shall be used for the structural steel works. The structural steel shall be cleanly
rolled to proper dimensions and weight subject to Permissible tolerances as per IS: 1852.
•
Carbon steel pipes shall conform to IS 1161 or IS 1239 of Grade YST-210 or Higher.
Acceptable codes are:
NBC Bureau of Indian Standards, the National Building Code of India IS:2062 Hot Rolled
Low, Medium and High Tensile Structural Steel IS:800 Code of practice for general
construction in steel. (Reaffirmed 2003) IS:814 Covered Electrodes for Manual Metal Arc
Welding of Carbon and Carbon Manganese
Steel - Specification IS:816 Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general
construction in mild steel IS:817 Training and Testing of metal-arc Welders (Part 1 & 2)
IS:808 Dimensions for Hot Rolled Steel Beam, Column, Channel and Angle Sections IS:961
Structural Steel (High Tensile) IS:1363 Black Hexagonal Bolts, Nuts and Lock Nuts and Black
Hexagonal Screws IS:1364 Precision and Semi-precision Hexagonal Bolts, Screws, Nuts and
Lock Nuts IS:1367 Technical Supply Conditions for Threaded Fasteners. IS:3757 Specification
for High Strength Structural Bolts IS:3139 Dimensions for screw threads for bolts and nuts (dia
range M42 to M150) [covered in IS 4218 : Part 5]
IS:2016 Specification for Plain Washers
IS:3613 Acceptance tests for wire flux combination for submerged arc welding IS:1852
Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products IS:2074 Ready Mixed Paint, Air
Drying, Red Oxide Zinc Chrome, Priming – Specification IS:875 Code of Practice for
Structural Safety of Building - Loading Standards. IS:1893 Recommendations for Earthquake
Resistant Design of Structures IS:4000 Code of practice for high strength bolts in steel
structures IS:4353 Submerged Arc Welding of Mild Steel and Low Alloy Steels –
Recommendations IS:823 Code of procedure for manual metal arc welding of mild steel
IS:1181 Qualifying Tests for Metal Arc Welders (engaged in welding structures other than
pipes). IS:1182 Recommended Practice for Radiographic examination of Fusion - Welded Butt
Joints in Steel Plates. IS:2595 Code of Practice for Radiographic Testing. IS:3658 Code of
Practice for Liquid Penetrations Flaw Detection. IS:5334 Code of Practice for Magnetic
Particle Flaw Detection of Welds. IS:1477 Code of Practice for Painting of Ferrous Metals in
Buildings and Allied Finishes IS:801 Code of Practice for Use of Cold Formed light Gauge
Steel Structural Members in General Building Construction. IS:806 Code of Practice for Use of
Steel Tubes in General Building Construction. IS:7205 Safety code of Erection of Structural
Steel work. IS:7215 Tolerances for Fabrication of Steel Structures. IS:1161 Steel Tubes for
Structural Purposes – Specification .IS 811 Cold formed light gauge structural steel sections IS
6610 Specification for Heavy Washers for Steel Structures IS 12843 Tolerances for erection of
steel structures IS 3600 Method of Testing Fusion Welded Joints and Weld Metal in Steel: Part
2 Beam impact (charpy V-notch) test IS 1024 Code of practice for use of welding in bridges
and structures subject to dynamic loading IS 1261 Code of practice for seam welding in mild
steel IS 1323 Code of practice for oxy-acetylene welding for structural work in mild steels IS
1395 Low and medium alloy steel covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding IS 2879
Mild steel for metal arc welding electrodes
37.00
FINISHES
All steel work shall be thoroughly cleaned, by effective means, of all loose mill scale, rust,
216
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
grease and foreign matter and shall be treated in the workshop prior to transportation. If
painted it shall be applied to dry surfaces and shall be thoroughly and evenly spread and
well-worked into joints and open spaces. Abrasions in field erection shall be touched up
(including primer) immediately after erection.
Steel plate and protection angles required for the protection of concrete work shall be
erected true to line and grade within the tolerances specified below. The edges of exposed
faces may have a vertical or horizontal distortion from a straight line not greater than 3 mm
per meter of length, provided, that distortion for any single piece shall not exceed 1 mm
and provided, that when the warp is greater than 1.6 mm an extra anchor hole shall be
drilled near the proper corner and the piece drawn into position thereby. All bolt heads on
the exposed face shall be countersunk and fitted or ground so that the heads are flush with
the finished surface. Joints between abutting sections shall be square and flush and the
butting ends shall be sawed or otherwise made smooth and regular.
38.00
SEALING
All tubular, square and rectangular hollow sections shall be welded so as to completely seal
the internal sections against air and moisture. All ends will be fully welded into adjacent
members or capped with 6 mm end plates as applicable. To ensure this condition is met, the
Consultant may require the Contractor to carry out pressure tests on internal sections of any
part of the structures, at the Consultant’s discretion and Employers cost. The Contractor at
his cost will rectify any defective areas found by such test.
39.00
GROUTING
Unless otherwise stated on the Drawings a space of not less than 25mm shall be provided
between undersides of column base plates and between all beam and roof truss bearings,
and concrete pads, footings etc.
After steel work has been wedged up to line and level fixed in position, the space between
steelwork and concrete shall be grouted with a mixture of Portland cement and approved
commercial grit or washed sand. The mix shall be of equal proportion by volume of cement
and sand (or grit) mixed with just sufficient water to form a mixture of "damp earth"
consistency, and shall be used within 20 minutes. The grouting mix shall be rammed to
approval into the space between steelwork and concrete and protected from damage until it
sets.
TABLE – A.1
TOLERABLE DEVIATION FROM DESIGNED LINEAR
DIMENSIONS IN MM IN THE PARTS PROGESSED FOR FABRICATION
S. No.
1
1
Characteristic
2
a
Deviation / Tolerances in mm
1.5m
&
Below
1.5m
to
2.5m
2.5m
to
4.5m
4.5m
to
9.0m
9m
to
15m
15m
&
abov
3
4
5
6
7
8
Deviation in length and width of part cut out by :
217
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
b
c
2
Section – 13
i) Manual gas cutting
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.0
4.0
ii) Gas cutting by automatic and
semi automatic machines
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
iii) Shear or saw cutting
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
iv) Parts machined by edge-planning
or milling machines
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
i) For butt welding
4.0
4.0
4.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
ii) For lap welding
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
Difference in diagonal lengths of sheet parts :
Deviation in distances between hole centres, form as per :
i) Marking of extreme holes
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
ii) Marking of adjacent holes
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
Deviation in the dimension of structural dispatch members after finishing :
a
When assembled upon assembly
benches as per marking.
3.0
4.0
5.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
b
When assembled in the jig and other
devices fastening with fixtures.
2.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
C
Dimensions (length and breadth)
between milled surface (after finishing)
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
3
Distance between groups of erection holes (in finished members) :
a
Formed during machining of
Separate parts installed when
assembling as per marking.
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
b
Formed during machining of
parts, installed when assembling
with the help of fixtures.
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
c
Drilled with the help of
templates in finished members.
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
FABRICATION CHECK LIST
TABLE – A.2
Tolerable deviations of fabricated members from designed geometrical shape
Sr. No.
1.
Characteristic
Deviation/Tolerance
Remarks
Curvature of assembly Parts
218
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
a)
b)
2.
3.
4.
1.5 mm
Gap between a taut string and
vertex face of an angle flange or
web of channel and joist.
0.001 L,
but not greater
than 10 mm.
L-length of
member
Deviation of edge line steel sheet parts from theoretical profile:
a)
During butt and toe welding
1.5 mm
b)
During lap welding
3 mm
Deviation of radius of the bend :
a)
Clearance between template
and the surface of rolled sheet
flange or face of cold bend profile.
1.5 mm
Template
length (1.5m
long the curve)
b)
-do- for hot bend profile
2 mm
-do-
i) at junction
0.005b
b-width of flange
ii) at other places
0.01 b
-do-
i) at junction with members
0.005 b
b-width of flange
ii) at other places
0.01 b
-do-
c)
Warping of the web
0.003
d)
Sag of member
L/750 but not more
than 10 mm
h-depth of
the member
L-length of
the member
Deformation of dispatch members :
a)
b)
5.
Gap between a sheet
and a steel rule
face over 1 m length
Section – 13
Inclination of flanges with the web :
transverse bending of flanges :
Other deviations :
a)
b)
Shifting of axes of riveting/bolting
lines for lattice structures from
theoretical eccentricity.
3.0 mm
Inclination of the milled surface
from designed position.
1/1500
FABRICATION CHECK LIST
TABLE – A.3
Tolerances given are for general structures such as columns, crane girder, trusses etc. Furnish acceptable tolerances
for the tubular structures under consideration.
219
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Acceptance deviations in as fabricated steel structures.
Sr. No.
Characteristic
1.
COLUMNS
a)
b)
c)
d)
2.
Deviation/Tolerance
Deviation in length ‘L measured distance from bottom
surface of the column footings, to the group of holes
for ‘trusses’, fasteners, collar beams, purtins and other
elements to be connected to column.
When L is under 10 m
+ 10 mm
When L is over 10 m
+ 15 mm
Deviation is distance ‘L’ from
bottom surface of the column
footing to the top of crane bracket.
When L is under 10 m
+ 5 mm
When L is over 10 m
+ 10 mm
Deviation in distance from bearing surface
of the bracket to the first fastener of the
element to be connected to column.
+ 1 mm
Deviation in distance between any group of
holes for connection of bracings to columns.
e)
Sag of column element
(curvature)
f)
i)
ii)
Difference in web depth of column
At splice joint
At any other location
g)
Deviation in distance from supporting surface
of milled end of the dispatched element of column
to the cleat or seating plate for fastening of collar
beams, purlins, girders etc. (Fish plates, brackets)
+ 1.5 mm
1/1000 of length
element but not more
than 10 mm
+ 2 mm
+ 10 mm
+ 3 mm
TRUSSES
a)
Deviation is span ‘L’ of the truss between end erection
holes in gussets of supporting units or between external
planes of supporting gussets or angles when trusses are
resting on brackets or supports :
When L is under 25 m
+ 7 mm
When L is over 25 m
L/2500 but not more than
15 mm
220
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Sr. No.
Characteristic
b)
c)
d)
e)
3.
b)
c)
d)
Distance between holes for fasteners to top
and bottom chords of trusses on supports.
Sag of separate elements between
node points.
+ 3 mm
more than 1.5 mm
+ 3 mm
1/1500 of length of element
But not more than 10 mm
Deviation in span L of beams between
bend erection holes, outer surfaces of
end plates:
When L is under 25 m
+ 10 mm
When L is over 25 m
+ 1/2500 length but not more
than 15 mm
Deviation in the height of beam as
measured from the bearing surface to
the top of upper flange.
+ 3 mm
Deviation in distance between the group
of holes for fastening of purlins, monitors,
bracings, bracing grids etc.
+ 3 mm
Sag (curvature) of the girder
dispatch member
1/1000 length but not
more than 15 mm
ELEMENTS OF FRAMEWORK BRACING, PURLINS ETC.
a)
Deviation in distance between end
erection holes, determining span of element.
+ 3 mm
b)
Sag of dispatch members
c)
Deviation in distance between the groups of
erection holes of the element
+ 3 mm
Gratings, Stair, Railings, ladders, etc.
+ 12 mm
d)
5.
Deviation in distance between the first
row of erection holes and the
Deviation/Tolerance
BEAMS
a)
4.
Deviation in distance between the centres
of holes or webs of angles for fastening bracing,
purlins, monitors, etc.
Section – 13
1/1000 length but not
more than 15 mm
SHOP ASSEMBLY (BEFORE DESPATCH FOR ERECTION)
a)
Columns weighing more than 20 T
b)
Roof trusses of 30 m or more span
c)
Crane girders with span more than 18 m
i) Every first and further every
tenth set of identical structure to
put for control assembly.
221
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
FABRICATION CHECK LIST
TABLE – A.4
Acceptable Deviation in Holes or Bolts
Sr. No.
Characteristic
1.
a)
Deviation
Deviation of dia of holes for rivet and bolts :
+ 1 mm
+ 1.5 mm
Upto 16 mm
Over 16 mm
b)
No limit
Deviation of dia of turned and fitted bolts :
Nominal dia of bolts
and choles
2.
Tolerance No. of
deviation in each group
Upper limit :
+ 0.125 mm
Lower limit : 0.00
No limit
Quality (difference between the greatest and lesser dia) :
Upto 16 mm hole dia
Upto 16 mm hole dia
+ 1 mm
+ 1.5 mm
3.
Deformity in size greater that 1.5mm
mm and cracks in the edge of holes.
Not permitted
4.
Misalignment of holes in Separate plates in the joints :
i) Upto 1 mm
ii) From 1 to 1.5 mm
No limit
Upto 50%
Upto 10%
Note : Burrs inholes shall be removed, the depth and width of countersunk shall not deviate from the standard by more than 1.5
mm.
FABRICATION CHECK LIST
TABLE – A.5
Permissible Fabrication Deviation of Structural Steel
Sr. No.
Type of Structures
Name of Deviations
and constructions
1.
Column
Value of Deviation
(Tolerance)
Assembly fits
a) Base plate and column
0.1
b) Frame Joints
2.0 mm
c) Web and flange
1.5 mm
d) Web & stiffeners
1.5 mm
222
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
e) Flange & stiffeners Intermediate
Section – 13
1.5 mm
stiffeners & Bearing stiffeners
2.
Beams
f) Cap plate & column
0.1 mm
g) XXXXX girder seat
0.1 mm
h) Beam brackets
2.0 mm
(c), (d) (e) of S. No. 1
1.5 mm
above
3.
Girders
(c), (d) (e) of S. No. 1
0.1 mm
Above and knife edge supports
4.
Purlin
Deviation in distance between purlins.
5 mm
ERECTION CHECK LIST
TABLE – A.6
Maximum permissible Tolerances in Steel Structures
Sr. No.
Description
1.
i)
ii)
Tolerance
Deviation of column axist at Foundation
top level with respect to true axis :
a) in longitudinal direction
b) in lateral direction
+ 5 mm
+ 5 mm
Deviation in the level of bearing
surface of columns at foundation
top with respect to true level
+ 5 mm
a) For columns without any special
requirements :
1)
Upto and including 30 mm height
+ H or + 25 mm
1000 whichever is less
2)
over 30 m height
+ H or + 40 mm
1200 whichever is less
a) For column with special requirements
like cranes or such similar requirements :
1)
upto and including 30 m height
+ H or + 25 mm
1000 whichever is less
2)
over 30 m height
+H
or + 30 mm
223
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
1200 whichever is less
iv) Deviation in straightness in longitudinal
and transverse column at any point along
the height.
v)
Difference in the erected positions of
adjacent pairs of columns along length
or across width of building prior to
|connecting trusses/ beams with respect
to true distance.
+ H or + 10 mm
1500 whichever is less
+ 5 mm
vi) Deviation in any bearing or seating level
with respect to true level.
+ 5 mm
vii) Deviation in difference in bearing levels
of a member on adjacent pair of columns
both across and along the building.
+ 5 mm
NOTES :
1.
Tolerance specifies under iii (a) and iii (b) should be
read in conjunction with iv and v.
2.
‘H’ is the column height in mm.
Sr. No.
Description
2.
Erected Steel Trusses/Gantry Sections
3.
Tolerance
i)
Shift at the centre of span of
top chord member with respect to
vertical plane passing through
the centre of bottom chord.
+ 1 of height of
250 truss in mm at
centre of span or + 15 mm
whichever is less
ii)
Lateral shift of top chord truss
at the centre of span fro mthe vertical
plane passing through the centre of
supports of the truss.
+ 1 of span of
1500 truss in mm
or + 10 mm
whichever is less
iii) Lateral shift in location of purlin
from true position.
+ 5 mm
iv) Deviation of difference of bearing
levels of trusses from the true
difference.
+ 1/1200 of span of truss
in mm or + 20 mm
Whichever is less.
Erected Portals / Structures.
i)
Shift in the centre line of crane
rail with respect to centre line
of web crane girder.
ii)
Shift in plan of alignment of crane
+ (Web thk in mm) + 2 mm
2
224
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
rail with respect to true axis of crane
rail at any point.
iii) Deviation in the level at any point
from true level
Section – 13
+ 5 mm
+ 10 mm
iv) Difference in levels between
crane track rails at :
v)
a) Supports of girders
b) Mid span of girders
15 mm
20 mm
Relative shift of surface at
a joint plan and elevation.
2 mm subject to grinding of
surfaces for smooth transition.
A - TYPCAL WELDING PROCEDURE DATA SHEET
Principal contractor ………………………………………………Address………………………………………….
Quality of weld ………………………………………………Specification …………………………………………
Material Specification ………………………………..Thickness ………………………………………….Batch/
Cast No ………………………………………. Joint preparation (Fig) …………………………………………….
Gap …………………………………………. Location of Speciments …………………………………………….
Whether condition ………………………… ……………… Type of Day
…………………………………………………………………………………………………….
Wind break used ………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Electrode Group No…………………………… Make ……………………….. Specimen ……………………….
Pre and Post Heating …………………………………………………………………………………………………
Welding position ……………………………………………………………………………………………………
Size of reinforcement ………………………………………….. Whether remove
…………………………………………………………………………………………………….
Welding Sequence ……………………………………………………………………………………………………
Backing strip used …………………………..………………… Type ………………………………………………
Welding process ……………………………………………………………………………………………………
Current conditions Polarity …………………………………………………………………………………………...
Size of electrode ……………………………………………………………………………………………………
Amperage and voltage ………………………………………………………………………………………………..
Number
of
Electrodes
used
……………………………………………………………………………….……………………
per
run
225
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Cleaning method ……………………………………………………………………………………………………
Remarks ……………………………………………………………………………….
WELDING ENGINEER
Employer/ EIC
(Inspecting Authority)
Signature
For and be half of
Principal Contractor
Date : _______________
STRUCTURAL WORKS
PREAMBLE TO THE BILL OF QUANTITIES – STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS
1.
The rates for structural steel work shall include for:
a) Design, supply, fabrication, transportation, handling, site working, welding, bolting,
jointing to adjacent members or structures.
b) Erecting structural steel members in position at all levels and at all heights as specified
in the drawings made out of standard/ non-standard MS section conforming to IS : 226
/ 2026 / 800.
c) Fabricating necessary Gusset Plates, Stiffener plates, Brackets, Bolts, Cleats, seating
angles etc., to the required size, shape, alignment etc., as per the drawings.
d) Welding of members using structural steel welding electrodes as per IS:814/816/817.
e) Sand blasting as per specification
f)
A coat of anti corrosive primer (non flammable) to the exposed surfaces before
delivery to the site.
g) All testing as per IS : 7307 (PART 1) to the instructions & requirements of
Consultants.
h) All necessary equipments, tools and tackles, staging, scaffolding, etc.
i)
Machining, splay cuts, holes, notches, slots, and the like.
j)
Design, Supply, fabricating, erecting and fixing in position High Tensile friction Grip
Fasteners, insert plates, bolts, nuts and the like.
k) Painting and coating with epoxy paint to Employer/ EIC’s requirements.
226
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
l)
Section – 13
All necessary touching up primer coat as per instructions of Employer/EIC
m) All necessary grouting as per instructions of Employer/ EIC
n) All temporary works necessary during supply, fabrication, erection, installation up to
handling over
2.
Measurements
a) Payment of structural steel members including nuts, gusset plates, etc. will be done on
weight basis.
b) The weight of members will be assessed from the final fabricated and approved
drawings and the respective Bill of Materials prepared by the Principal Contractor and
approved the Employer/EIC. The weight of members shall be as per IS handbook.
d) Sections different than mentioned in IS handbook shall be taken as per manufacturer’s
information.
e) No rolling tolerance will be allowed.
f)
Built up members will be paid as per the actual weight of the members.
g) Gusset plates shall be paid to the nearest rectangle enclosing the shape and no
deduction shall be made for any skew cuts.
h) Welds, bolts, anchors, washers, etc will not be measured and paid for separately.
i)
Payments do not include any other related temporary work connected with this work
including welds, shims, wedge plates, etc.
j)
Rates to include any trimming, straightening, edge preparation, preparation and
approval of shop drawings, and one coat of red oxide / zinc chromate primer and also
including any handling, re-handling, loading and unloading, transportation to the site of
work and returning surplus material to the Employer / EIC at the place requested by
him.
When three-dimensional assembly is not possible in the shop, the holes for field joints may
be drilled in shop and reamed on site after Erection, on approval by the EIC. For bolted
steel structures, trial assembly in shop is mandatory. The tolerance for spacing of holes
shall be ± 1 mm.
a)
b)
c)
Tolerances
All tolerances regarding dimensions, geometrical shapes and sections of steel Sections, shall be as
per IS 808 & IS 1852, if not specified in the drawing.
Every bolt shall be provided with a washer under the nut part of the threaded portion of the bolt is to
be within the thickness of the parts bolted together.
Flat washers shall be circular of a diameter 2.5 times that of bolt and of suitable thickness. Where
bolt heads/nuts bear upon the beveled surfaces they shall be provided with square tapered washers
227
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
d)
e)
Section – 13
of suitable thickness to afford a seating square with the axis of the bolt.
All bolts and nuts shall be of steel, with well-from hexagonal and heed unless specified otherwise,
forged from the solid and shall be dipped in hot boiled linseed oil as soon as they are made. The
nuts shall be good fit on the bolts and two clear threads shall show through the nut when finally
tightened up.
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained IS1363, IS1364 and IS 1367. The threaded length
shall be equal to at least the diameter of the bolt.
FABRIC ROOFING WORKS
1.0
TENSIONED FABRIC ROOFING
GENERAL
a)
Scope of Works
(ii)
(iii)
(i)
The Fabric Roofing Contractor (hereafter referred to as the `subcontractor to the general
contractor`) shall be responsible for the design, engineering, patterning, fabrication, supply
and installation of the tensioned membrane structures as shown on the drawings including
the follow:
-
Design, engineering, and patterning of PMCural Membrane, cables and related perimeter
attachment hardware.
-
Supply of PMCural Membrane, cables, complete perimeter attachment system, and all
normally associated components.
-
Fabrication of PMCural Membrane.
-
Delivery of all supplied components to the project site.
-
Installation of all supplied items.
For steelwork the subcontractor shall be responsible for the:
-
steel roof design and documentation
-
engineering drawings
-
Steel shop drawings
-
Steel fabrication
-
Painting of the steel structure
-
Steel installation
The work shall consist of the supply of all labor, tools, plant and materials necessary to complete the
228
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
design, supply and installation of the tensioned membrane. The work shall be executed in the best
trade practice by a Specialized Tradesman, all strictly in accordance with a reputable manufacturer’s
written instructions.
b)
Fabric Canopy
As depicted in the tender drawings. The canopy shall be an engineered tensioned membrane
structure. The PMCural Membrane shall be Teflon coated fiberglass (PVC TYPE IV TYPE IV
TYPE IV TYPE IV) / PVDF / PVC TYPE IV TYPE IV TYPE IV TYPE IV (as approved by
structural engineer) PMCural Membrane.
c)
Design
The following items shall be the design responsibility of the Nominated sub-contractor. All
calculations and drawings shall be endorsed by a Registered Structural Engineer employed by the
Sub-Contractor certifying that the structural design complies with the design criteria, codes and
standards as listed hereinafter.
i)
Calculation of wind and other loads from information supplied on the Contract drawings and
considering local conditions;
ii) Computer analysis of structure and supporting steelwork;
iii) Provision of computations;
iv) Detailed design of structural steel to support tensioned membrane;
v) Design of steel tensioning cables;
vi) Provision of reactions and geometry to enable others to check the design and capacity
of the foundations and supporting superstructure;
vii) Check of as-installed survey data.
d)
Design Criteria, Codes and Standards
i)
The membrane structure shall be designed to comply with all statutory requirements
under the Building Ordinance and inter-related Regulations and Codes of Practice
1.
Live Load: 0.25kPa
2.
Wind Load: IS 875 Indian Wind Code (85m/s for worst cyclone)
3.
Wind pressure coefficient: BS6399: Part 2: 1995 or equivalent.
ii)
Life Safety
1.
All fabric structures shall be designed so no life safety issue is created in the event of
a loss of a part of the fabric.
2.
The fabric structure shall not rely completely on the fabric for structural stability.
iii)
The tensioned membrane shall conform to the current relevant standards and to the
requirements of the statutory authorities. Relevant publications of particular importance
are as follows:
1) IS 875
: Indian Wind Code
229
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
2) BS 8118: Structural Use of Aluminum
3) AS 1441: Method of Test for Coated Fabrics
4) AS 1530: Methods for Fire Tests on Building Materials, Components and Structures
5) AS 2001: Methods of Test for Textiles
e)
Approved Tensioned Membrane Structure Company
Design, fabrication and erection of the canopy structure shall be limited to firms with proven
experience in design, fabrication and construction of complex fabric structures. Such firm shall
meet the following minimum requirements.
They shall have a solid background with a minimum of 10 years in design, manufacture and
installation of tensioned membrane structures. Previous construction experience of at least 2 tensile
membrane works each of a minimum surface area of 2000sqm. The firm shall have had previous
Indian experience of at least 2 tensile membrane structure of at least 2000sqm. To ensure the quality
of the product, such firm shall have its own design and production facilities, in-house PMCs,
designers, engineers, draftspersons, project manager, QA manager, manufacturing and production
manager, dispatch staffs and installer. Such firm shall employ the latest in CAD/CAM
manufacturing technologies and under its possession state of the art CAD/CAM plotter and various
types of membrane welders for high quality works. Such firm shall be capable of providing a single
source responsibility on the design, engineering, drawing preparation, patterning & fabrication, and
installation of the fabric membrane. Manufacture of membrane to be undertaken in a purpose built
membrane production facility with Quality Assured Accreditation)
f)
Submissions
i.
Computer generated model indicating the shape and overall appearance of the Tensioned
Membrane.
ii.
Schedule indicating key milestone dates during the project.
iii.
Specification sheets for the Membrane proposed to be used by the Subcontractor,
demonstrating compliance with the requirements herein.
iv.
Test Certificate issued by a recognized Testing Laboratory indicating that the
fabric material proposed for use in the Membrane is non-combustible when
tested under the criteria of BS 476, Part 4.
v.
A complete outline of the subcontractor's Quality Control Program, which shall
be in accordance with ISO 9000.
vi.
Number of years showing the company has been in the business of fabric structures for
not less than 10 years.
vii.
All names under which the company has operated and time periods during
which each name was used.
Viii
Country and region in which the company is incorporated and date of
incorporation.
ix.
A complete list of all projects completed in the preceding 10 years, including the
230
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Project Name, Client, and PMC for projects over 1000sqm and for projects
in India.
x.
xi.
Fabric canopy system drawings defining the complete structure, connection details,
interfaces, and general fabric seam arrangement shall be submitted by the subcontractor for
review and approval by the project engineer/PMC. Drawings shall confirm the general
arrangement submitted with the tender.
xii.
A compilation of all calculations and the basis therefore shall be submitted as
substantiation for the sizes, loads, and dimensions shown on the drawings.
xiii.
xiv.
g)
Any projects on which the contractor has defaulted, and complete details
regarding the default.
Maintenance manual: Submit two (2) copies of a maintenance manual for the
fabric roof structure to the Client. The manual shall include a schedule for
routine inspection, an inspection checklist, instructions for emergency repair
and use of emergency repair materials, and warranty.
Test reports, indicating that the Teflon-coated fiberglass fabric membrane meets the
criteria listed: Physical test data of the actual roll goods to be used in the project
confirming conformance with specifications for the fabric.
Engineering
Structural calculation for the project shall be prepared by, or under the direct supervision of a
Registered Structural Engineer. Drawings shall define the completed structure, precise interface
geometry determination, definition and co-ordination with the superstructure, reaction loads,
connections, details, interfaces and seam layout together with foundation layout. All structural
drawings and calculations shall be prepared under the supervision of, and endorsed by a fully
qualified engineer - the Designer. The Designer must also possess competence and experience in
the design and construction of tensioned fabric structures, acceptable to the PMC. Structural
calculation for the tensile structure shall include the following:
i.
Large deflection numerical shape generation that will insure a stable, uniformly stressed,
three dimensionally curved shape that is in static equilibrium with the internal prestress
forces, and is suitable to resist all applied loads.
ii.
Large deflection finite element method structural analysis of the membrane system under
all applicable applied wind, snow and live load conditions.
iii.
Large deflection finite element method structural analysis of the support frame system.
iv.
Biaxial fabric test specification, interpretation, and fabric compensation
determination.
v.
Accurate generation of the two-dimensional compensated fabric templates
required to generate the three-dimensional equilibrium shape.
vi.
Member size calculations of all primary structural members.
vii.
Connection design including bolts, weld, and secondary member sizing.
231
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
h)
Section – 13
Warranty
i.
All materials supplied and installed or erected shall be in accordance with this
specification and shall be guaranteed against water leakage, faulty materials and
workmanship for 10 years.
ii.
The warranty shall be underwritten by the tensioned fabric structure manufacturer.
i)
PVC TYPE IV TYPE IV TYPE IV TYPE IV / PVDF / PVC TYPE IV TYPE IV TYPE IV TYPE
IV Maintenance Kit
The materials shall be packaged into a maintenance kit for storage by the Client. Supply the
Client with the following materials for emergency repair or maintenance:
3 no. 300 mm diameter patch w/F.E.P. sheets 3 no. 100 mm x 200 mm rectangular patch w / F.E.P.
sheets 1 no. Utility Knife 75 x 125mm Hand tacker complete with carry box. 1 booklet repair
manual
j)
Quality Assurance
Fabrication and erection of the tensioned membrane canopy structure is limited to firms with proven
experience in design, patterning & fabrication and construction of complex fabric structures and
such firms shall meet the following minimum requirements. Evidence of compliance shall be
submitted with the Tender:
Provide written evidence to the PMC of experience and skills of all personnel proposed for this
project.
Evidence of compliance shall be submitted with the Tender:
i.
The tensioned fabric manufacturer shall have at least 10 continuous years of experience in
the engineering, patterning & fabrication and erection of permanent fabric structures and
have successfully designed, fabricated and installed not less than 10 similar size or larger
tensioned membrane structures. The tensioned fabric manufacturer shall have completed
at least 10 Teflon coated fiberglass fabric structures.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
k)
The tensioned fabric manufacturer shall have their own solidly and well-established
fabricating facilities (exceeding 10 years continuous fabrication experience) for the
patterning and fabrication of the fabric structures.
The tensioned fabric manufacturer shall demonstrate that it has professional staffs in the
capacities of PMCs, designers, engineers draftspersons, project manager, QA manager,
manufacturing and production manager, dispatch staffs and installer and will provide
engineering drawings that have been prepared by Professional Engineers.
The subcontractor shall demonstrate that it has an employ staff of experienced
fabric structure installation personnel who will undertake the installation of the
project.
The subcontractor shall submit a Corporate Quality Control Manual (inclusive of the
manufacturer’s) describing their complete quality assurance program. The
Quality Control Manual shall be in accordance with ISO 9000.
The scope of work shall also include
i.
Arranging for an Inspection of works by Clients, PMC, Consultant & PMC (a team
of 6 members) to his factory to witness the extent of projects currently being handled by the
contractor and to understand the work methodology
232
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
ii.
Intermediate visits to contractor’s factory to ensure work progress & for witnessing
the work quality etc.
iii.
Analyzing the structure, preparation of shop drawings based on the analysis, taking
an approval on the conceptual drawing from the concern.
iv.
All the design parameters, load calculations, shop drawings shall be prepared by the
fabric contractor and to be prepared by the fabric contractor & shall be reviewed and
approved by the structural consultant or third party appointed by the client for proof
checking, scrutinizing the design, checking the shop drawing etc. Expenses towards such
proof checking shall be borne by the contractor.
l)
Fabric Materials
In case PVC TYPE IV TYPE IV TYPE IV TYPE IV
i.
The fabric membrane shall comprise high quality PVC TYPE IV TYPE IV TYPE IV
TYPE IV (i.e., Teflon) coated fiberglass fabric.
ii.
The primary materials shall be obtained from one manufacturer for the PVC TYPE IV
TYPE IV TYPE IV TYPE IV.
iii.
The entire membrane shall be fabricated from one type of fabric. The grade of fabric shall
be that required by detailed finite element analysis calculation. The subcontractor shall
detail in his tender the selected membrane, and provide a specification data sheet and A4
sample.
iv.
Base fabric and fluorocarbon coating:
1.
The yarns used shall be of the highest commercial quality, essentially free of broken fibers
and fully suitable for coating. The yarns shall be constructed from continuous AGY
“Beta” glass filaments measuring 3.3 to 4.1 microns in diameter. The fabric shall be
woven with uniform tension and crimp in the warp and fill yarns and free of defects
deleterious to the coating process. The base fabric shall be of sufficient width to allow for
finished coated goods of at least 3.8 meters.
2.
The coating materials shall be fluorocarbon resins formulated specifically for PMCural
applications. These materials shall be applied to form a weatherized barrier between the
glass yarns and the environment. The bulk of the coating shall be comprised of formulated
dispersions of PVC TYPE IV TYPE IV TYPE IV TYPE IV fluorocarbon resin and
additives to enhance abrasion and tear resistance, impart pigmentation or modify solar
transmission. The additives shall not contribute more than 20% by weight of the total
coating or 25% by weight of any individual layer. The surface shall be comprised totally of
FEP fluorocarbon resin to facilitate heat welding.
v.
After weaving, the base fabric shall be cleaned and primed to achieve optimum
mechanical properties of the coated fabric. The coating, described above, shall be
virtually free of mud cracks and pinholes. The coating shall be applied evenly to both sides
of the fabric and the FEP fluorocarbon resin topcoat shall be of sufficient
thickness
to permit proper heat fusion of joints with the recommended die pressure and temperature.
vi
The final color of the membrane following natural bleaching shall be bright white, uniform in
color, and without visible defect or blemish, upon inspection from a distance of three
233
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
meters. A blemish is defined as an area of material where there is no discontinuity but there is a risk
of non-acceptance on visual grounds. The size of the blemish shall be limited to a diameter
of 5mm at a spacing of greater than 5 meter when inspecting roll.
m)
n)
vii.
Coating defects such as pinholes, cracks, lumps and broken yarns which reduce the
weathering protection to the yarns shall be limited to less than 1% of the surface area of
the fabric and shall not affect the complete protection of the glass fibers.
viii.
Strict QA procedures shall be applied during the coating of the fabric to ensure uniformity
in properties required of the coated materials.
Patterning
i.
Design
Membrane-form finding design analysis and patterning shall be by computer finite
element analysis conducted by the manufacturer’s engineer experienced in the
field of tensile membrane engineering.
ii.
Seam Layout
Submit to the PMC for approvals a seam layout indicating the proposed location of all
seams to be included in the complete membrane.
Fabrication of Fabric Panel
i.
3.
General
1.
Fabrication shall only be by an approved specialist fabricator experienced in the
work.
2.
Fabric shop drawings shall include all information necessary for the fabrication
of the fabric membrane. They shall include size and shape of envelope, type and
location of shop and field connections, size, type, and extent of all heat welded
seams.
The fabricator shall exercise necessary care to plan and assemble the sections such that the assembly
has no shop patches. Splices, if any, shall be patterned into a symmetrical and repetitive geometric
arrangement within the assembly, shown on the shop drawings and where feasible hidden by
structural members.
He shall exercise great care in marking, cutting, aligning, checking, welding seams and additions as
well as general handling and soiling prevention procedures to produce a smooth uniform surface
with even curved edges free from irregularities and interfaces lacking wrinkling, cuts, abrasions,
stains of marks, surface imperfections or welding aberrations. The fabric shall be cut along marked
lines to an accuracy of +1mm and -1mm.
4.
The fabric membrane shall be fabricated in a sizable, clean, properly equipped and systematically
established factory shop condition specialized in the fabrication of tension membrane.
5.
All membrane shall be patterned using finite analysis computer modeling. The membrane shall be
cut using the latest CAD/CAM manufacturing technology with a tolerance of -1mm, +1mm.
Manufacture of membrane to be undertaken in a purpose built membrane production facility with
Quality Assured Accreditation.
ii.
Fabric Joints
234
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
1.
PVC TYPE IV TYPE IV TYPE IV TYPE IV joints shall be formed under pressure at the
appropriate temperature and to a tolerance of +1mm, -1mm. Adjacent panels shall be
overlapped, FEP ribbon inserted between the two panels then heat and pressure applied.
All excess FEP ribbon, markings etc. shall be removed from the membrane before packing.
The joints shall be formed using high frequency equipment.
2.
The fabricator shall carefully plan his assembly to ensure that seams are always single laid
and that a cut edge does not face uphill.
3.
Joints shall be symmetrical as specified by the cutting pattern. No short pieces or selvage
will be permitted.
4.
All fabricated joints shall have a minimum of 90% of the total strength of the coated fabric
in strip tensile testing. All structural joints shall be fused in accordance with industry
standards and shall maintain the integrity of the coating. Teflon-coated fiberglass shall be
heat sealed only.
iii.
Hole Punching
At positions where bolt or other penetrations of the fabric is shown or required, holes shall be
punched using a sharp 1 mm oversized punch. Holes shall be neat and have uniform edges.
iv.
Rope Edges
Rope edges shall be formed using VPDM 90 hardness polypropylene or polyester rope of
minimum diameter 12 mm. All add-on details to the fabric shall use the same fabric jointing
procedures as for structural joints.
iv.
Field Splices The structure fabricated using field splices shall be limited to places where
factory seaming is not possible and applied only where shown and approved by the PMC.
Where splices are not specified and the fabricator proposes the use of same, full description
including details of location and design shall be provided to the PMC for approval.
o)
Packing
The sub-contractor shall be wholly responsible for employing particular measures to prevent any
damage occurring to the fabric coating and/or the base cloth. The fabric shall be folded in such a
manner as to minimize sharp creases and folds. All materials shall be packed in substantial crates
and shall be designed to protect the materials contained against hazard both during transit and
whilst stored at the site.
p)
Erection
i.
No trade shall have access to, or work from the fabric, unless authorized by the
subcontractor in writing.
ii.
Method of Erection
1.
Erection shall only be executed by the fabricator’s experienced installation supervisor.
Such person shall have at least 10 years experience in tensile membrane structures
installation. They shall attend all membrane erection actions at the site. Provide guidance
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
235
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
where necessary and appropriate.
q)
2.
The erection procedure shall be examined with respect of practicality and compatibility
with other work on the project. Where the sub-contractor proposes to use a different basis
for the erection procedure, full details shall be submitted for approval.
iii.
Preparation for Installation of Fabric
1.
A clear and level site shall be provided for undertaking erection and assembly procedures
of the fabric element. The Contractor shall arrange for activities on the site to cooperatively fit in with the erection procedure of the fabric membrane.
2.
Prior to commencement of erection, the sub-contractor shall check all contact surfaces to be
in contact with the fabric for smoothness, and remove causes for rips and/or scratching
during the installation of the fabric panels.
3.
The sub-contractor shall provide ground sheets where the membrane is to be dragged across
a surface. Prevention of chaffing of the surface is required at all times.
4.
The Main Contractor together with the sub-contractor shall limit access to the area where
the fabric is to be installed to only the subcontractor’s personnel during the preparation and
installation of the fabric structure for proper protection. The fabric shall be protected from
damages upon installation.
iv.
Installation of Fabric
1.
The sub-contractor shall install the fabric structure in a sequence and with sufficient
bracing to ensure stability of the structure.
2.
No creasing or folding of the fabric around sharp corners will be permitted. The fabric
shall not be abraded in any manner.
v.
Pretension
1.
The structure is to be tensioned after erection to maintain a taut smooth surface to minimum
of +10%, -10% specified prestress levels. Ensure instrumentation for measurement of
prestressing levels is approved by the PMC and confirm to appropriate International
Standard specifications.
2.
The fabric shall be stressed uniformly to avoid local over stresses. The PMC shall be
informed of any condition, which is unexpected or causes concern.
vi.
Damage occurring during the installation sequence may be temporarily repaired with field
patches; however, permanent repairs shall be made with full panel replacement from seam
to seam or seam to approved splice.
Cleaning
Clean the fabric membrane after erection. Remove all signs of dirt and panel markings where
visible by the naked eye from 3 meters from the fabric.
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
236
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
r)
Final Inspection
The specialist sub-contractor shall give one full working day’s notice to the PMC on
completion of installation of tensioned membrane and shall execute immediately any adjustments,
making good damage or defects.
s)
Wrinkles
t)
i.
There shall be no wrinkles in the completed membrane that in the PMC’s opinion are
visually objectionable whether viewed internally or externally. Some tolerance on
uniformity of the tensioned fabric against wrinkling is accepted.
ii
As a guide isolated wrinkles up to 200 mm long should be limited to a maximum of one
only per 200 sq. meter area of fabric.
v.
Minor wrinkles are accepted as being expected around convergence points.
iv.
For the purpose of this clause, a wrinkle shall be a fold in the tensioned membrane in the
prestressed condition in still air, and which is visible from the ground below the structure.
Patches
i.
Minor patching resulting from events on-site during erection shall be permitted at a
maximum number of one only per 200 sq. meters area of fabric.
ii.
iii.
u)
Patching is only to be carried out where the damage shall be rectified is relatively minor
and the effect of the patching is not visually dominant.
Patching shall be carried out in an approved manner using appropriate seaming equipment
and techniques.
STRUCTURES OF CANOPY AT CAFETERIA
Fabricating, assembling and erection of PVC/ PVDF composition of Precontraint 902 S2 of Serge
Ferrari or equivalent - coated composite membrane with a top surface lacquered with a
multilayered PVDF coating and back PVDF as per the specifications provided & as per
conceptual drawing. The coated composite material should have minimum tensile strength of 4200
/ 4000 N/5 cm and tear strength of 550 / 500 N with Polyvinyline Duroflouride coating and
having weight of 950 g/sq.m This work should include raw material, patterning, forming, cutting,
welding, fixing and installation with GI cables, flashing ,hardware with stainless steel 304 grade ,
mild steel stud patti, EPDM etc. including lifts up to all heights, tools and plants, and necessary
scaffolding etc. required for operations all complete.
v) SHADE STRUCTURE OF STAGE AND GALLERY
PVC/ PVDF composition of Precontraint 502 of Serge Ferrari or equivalent - coated composite membrane.
The coated composite material should have minimum tensile strength of 2200 / 2000 N/5 cm and tear
strength of 250 / 200 N with Polyvinyline Duroflouride coating and having weight of 590 g/sq.m. The
composite membrane should have necessary arrangement to be fabricated temporay on the steel truss as and
when required.
237
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
SECTION –XI
TECHINAL SPECIFIANTIONS
FOR
ANTI-TERMITE SOIL TREATMENT WORK
Anti termite soil treatment to the following :1.0
Codes
Anti-termite treatment shall be carried out in accordance with the following standards
unless specified otherwise.
IS 6313
Code of practice for Anti-Termite Treatment
(Part-1)
Constructional measures
(Part II)
Code of practice for anti-termite measures in Building (pre constructional
chemical treatment)
1.1
CHEMICALS :
The treatment of theses shall be carried out by applying one of the following chemicals at
not less than the designated concentration :
CHEMICALS CONCENTRATION
Chloropyriphos 20% E.C.
1%
Endosulfan
0.5%
The tender shall clearly indicate along with the quotation the chemical he proposed to use.
A daunt record shall be maintained by the Contractor indicating the amount of work done
and the quantity of chemical consumed for the work. This record shall be the property of
the NLUO.
1.2
METHOD OF APPLICATION
(1)
TREATMENT FOR MASONARY FOUNDATION AND BASEMENT
The bottom surface and sides (Up to a height of 30cm from the bottom) of the excavations
made for masonry foundations and basements shall be treated with the chemical emulsion
mentioned above at 5 Liters. Per sqm of surface area.
(2)
TREATMENT TO BACKFILL EARTH :
After the masonry foundation and retaining walls of the basement come up the backfill in
immediate contact with the foundation structure shall be treated with the chemical
emulsion at the rate of 7.5 Liters. per sqm of the vertical surface of the sub-structure r for
238
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
each side. The earth is usually returned in layers & the treatment shall be carried out in similar
stages.
(3)
TREATMENT FOR R.C.C. FOUNDATION & BASEMENT :
In the case of R.C.C. foundation (1:2:4) mix or richer, the treatment shall start at a depth of
50cm below the ground level except when ground level is raised or lowered by filling
or cutting after the foundations have been cast. In such case the depth of 50cms shall
be determined from the new soil level resulting from filling or cutting mentioned
above and soil in immediate contract with the vertical surface of R.C.C. foundations.
From this depth the backfill around the columns, beams and R.C.C. basement walls
shall be treated at the rate of 7.5 liters per sqm.
(4)
TREATMENT OF TOP SURFACE OF PLINTH FILLING
The top surface of the consolidated earth within the walls shall be treated with the
chemical emulsion at the rate of 5 ltrs., per sqm , of the surface before the sand bed
or sub grade is laid. If the filled earth bas been well rammed and the surface does
not allow the emulsion to seep through, holes up to 50 to 75 mm deep at 150mm
center as both ways may be made with 12mm dia M.S. rod on the surface facilitate
absorption of the emulsion.
(5)
TREATMENT AT JUNCTION OF WALLS & FLOOR :
A small channel 3x3 cm., shall be made at all the junctions of walls and columns with
the floor ( Before laying the sub grade) & rod holes made in the channel up to
ground level 15 cm apart the rod moved backward and forward to break up the
earth & chemical emulsion poured along the channel at the rate of 7.5 liters., per
sqm., of the vertical wall or column surface of the sub-structure so as to soak the
soil right to the bottom.
(6)
TREATMENT OF SOIL ALONG EXTERNAL PERIMETER OF BUILDING :
After the building is complete the earth along the external perimeter of the building
should be redden at intervals of 15 cm & to a depth of 300 cm. The rods should be
moved backward and forward parallel to the wall to break up the earth and chemical
emulsion poured along the wall at the rate of 7.5 Liters. per sqm. of vertical
surfaces. After the treatment the earth should be tamped back into place .
(7)
TREATMENT OF SOIL SURROUNDING PIPES WASTES AND CONDUITS :
When pipes, wastes and conduits enter the soil inside the area of the foundation,
the soil surrounding the point of entry must be loosened around each such pipe waste
or conduits for a distance of 15cm and up to a depth of 7.5 mm before the
239
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
treatment is commenced. When they enter the soil external to the foundations, they
shall be similarly treated unless they stand clear of t he walls of the building by
about 7.5cm for a distance of over 30cm.
(8)
SPRAYING EQUIPMENT :
A pressure pump shall be used to carry out spraying operations to facilitate proper
penetration of chemicals into the earth.
1.3
GUARANTEE :10 YEARS
In the unlikely even of any treatment becoming unnecessary subsequently during the
guarantee period, required inspection and treatment shall be carried out free of cost.
1.4
INSTRUCTIONS OF CONTRACTOR FOR QUOTING RATES. :
The tenderer should include in his rates given in schedule of Quantities in sq. meter
area all the stages of treatment to bottom foundation, sides of trenches, underside of
the floor, underside/ damp proof course, in the outer face of external wall up to
window sill level, door and window frames to ground floor area, which comes in
contact wit the brick wall and finally the trenches treatment all found the buildings
as per detailed specifications mentioned above. Where the rates of application of the
insecticide has not been specified clearly the rates shall be the guarantee period no
trouble may arise. Payment will be made on the plinth area measurement and the
rates for the same should include all the stages of work as mentioned above and
no extra on this account will be entertained.
II - PLUM CONCRETE
1.1
Plum concrete shall be done below the footings with rubble and specified grade of
concrete. The rubble shall be hard, durable rock, free from veins, black trap, flaws and other
defects. The size of the rubble shall be 150 mm – 200 mm unless otherwise specified. The
Engineer shall approve the quality.
1.2
Area for plum concrete shall be cleaned and concrete of specified grade shall be
poured in the area. Concrete layers shall be 200 mm thick and then rubble shall put in to the
concrete closely in position. On completion of one such layer to the satisfaction of Engineer
next layer above it shall be started and the procedure shall be continued.
1.3
All interstices between the larger size stones shall be wedged in using either the
smaller stones of suitable size well driven to ensure tight packing or the concrete to ensure
complete filling of interstices. The concrete shall be compacted manually using wooden rods,
pipes, timber sticks.
1.4
Scope of work includes all labour, use of tool and plant, material, other items
incidental to satisfactory completion of the work, providing scaffolding if required, necessary
dewatering, cleaning of site on completion of work.
240
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
III - RUBBLE SOLING
1.1
Rubble soling is being used in specific areas as shown in the drawings shall be used as a
packing under floors, foundations etc. The rubble shall be hard, durable rock, free from
veins, foliage, black trap, flaws and other defects. The rubble soling shall be laid in one
or two layers as specified in the drawing. The size of the rubble shall vary from 150 mm
to 200 mm unless otherwise specified. The Engineer shall approve the quality.
1.2
Rubble shall be laid closely in position on the sub-grade. All interstices between
the stones shall be wedged in the smaller stones of suitable size well driven to ensure
tight packing and complete filling of interstices. Such filling shall be carried out
simultaneously with the placing in position of rubble stone and shall not lag behind.
1.3
Small interstices shall be filled with murrum, well watered and rammed.
1.4
Scope of work includes all labour, use of tool and plant, material, other items incidental
to satisfactory completion of the work, providing scaffolding if required, necessary
dewatering, cleaning of site on completion of work.
SECTION - XII
PILE WORK
1
MATERIALS :
1.1
Cement :
The cement used shall conform to the requirements of IS : 269-1976, IS : 455-1976, IS :
8041-19788, IS : 6909-1973 or IS : 1489-1976.
1.2
Steel :
Reinforcement steel shall conform to IS : 1139-1966 or IS : 1786-1979 or IS : 226-1975.
The stresses allowed in steel should conform to IS : 456-2000.
1.2.1 For under-reamed board compaction piles, the reinforcement cage shall be prepared by
welding the hoop bars to withstand the stresses during compaction process.
2
Concrete :
2.1
Materials and methods of manufacture for cement concrete shall in general be in
accordance with the method of concreting under the conditions of pile installation.
241
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
2.2
Consistency of concrete fore cast in situ piles shall be suitable to the method of installation
of piles. Concrete shall be so designed or chosen as to have homogeneous mix having a
flowable character consistent with the method of concreting under the given conditions of
pile installation. In achieving these results minor deviations in the mix proportions used in
structural concrete may be necessary.
2.3
Slump of concrete shall range between 100 mm to 150 mm for concreting in water-free
unlined boreholes. For concreting by tremie, a slump of 150 mm to 200 mm shall be used.
2.4
In case of tremie concreting for piles of smaller diameter and depth of up to 10m, the
minimum cement content should be 350 Kg/m3 of concrete. For piles of large diameter and
/ or deeper piles, the minimum cement content should be 400 kg/m3 of concrete. For design
purpose, the strength of concrete mix may be taken equivalent
M20, for concrete with cement content of 350 kg/m3 and 400 kg/m3. Where concrete of
higher strength is needed, richer concrete mix with higher cement content may be
designed. In case of piles subsequently exposed to free water or in case of piles where
concreting is done under water or drilling mud using methods other than the tremie, 10
percent extra cement over that required for the design grade of concrete at the specified
slump shall be used subject to the minimum quantities of cement specified above.
2.5
For the concrete, water and aggregates specifications laid down in IS : 456-2000 shall be
followed in general. Natural rounded shingle of appropriate size may also be used as coarse
aggregate. It helps to give high slump with less water cement ratio. For tremie concreting
aggregates having nominal size more that 20 mm should not be used.
2.6
The concrete for piles in aggressive surroundings due to presence of sulphates, etc., should
have a concrete mix of appropriate type of cement in suitable proportion.
2.6.1 If the concentration of sulphates (measured as SO3) exceeds one percent in soil or 2 500
parts per million (ppm) in water a mix using 400 kg/m3 of sulphate resisting Portland
cement should be used. For soils with 0.5 to 1 percent of sulphates or ground water with 1
200 to 2 500 ppm, the mix should have 330 kg/m3 of sulphate resisting Portland cement.
For concentrations lesser than above concrete mix with 330 kg/m3 ordinary Portland
cement or 310 kg/m3 sulphate resisting should be used. In place of ordinary Portland
cement, pozzolana cement / blast furnace slag cement may be used.
2.6.2 Concentration of sulphates up to 0-2 percent in soil and 300 ppm in water may be
inconsequential.
2.7 For bored compaction piles rapid hardening cement (see 13.1.1) shall not be used. To
facilitate construction, admixtures for retarding the setting of concrete may be used.
3.0
EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES :
242
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
3.1
The selection of equipment and accessories will depend upon the type of under-reamed
piles, site conditions and nature of strata. Also it will depend on economic considerations
and availability of manually or power operated equipment.
3.2
A typical list of equipment for manual construction is given in Appendix D.
3.3
Bore holes may be made by earth augers. In case of manual boring, an auger boring guide
shall be sued to keep the bores vertical or to the desired inclination and in position.
After the bore is made to the required depth, enlarging of the base shall be carried out by
means of an under-reaming tool.
3.4
In ground with high water table having unstable pile bores, boring and under-reaming may
be carried out using a suitable drilling mud. General guidelines for bentonite drilling mud
are given in Appendix E. In normally met soil strata, drilling mud can be poured from top
while boring and under-reaming can be done by normal spiral earth auger and underreamer. The level of drilling mud should always be about one meter above water table or
the level at which caving in occurs. In case of very unstable strata with excessive caving
in, continuous circulation of drilling mud using suitable pumping equipment and ripod, etc.
along with modified auger and under-reamer may be used.
3.5
Sometimes permeable strata overlying a rim clayey stratum may be cased and normal
boring and under-reaming operation may be carried out in clayey stratum.
3.6
To avoid irregular shape and widening of bore hole in very loose strata at top, a casing pipe
of suitable length may be used temporarily during boring and concreting.
3.7
For improved control over the inclination of batter piles, a tripod hoist with fixed pully
should be used for lowering in of under-reaming tools.
3.8
For placing the concrete in bore holes full of drilling mud or subsoil water, tremie pipe of
not less than 150 mm diameter with flap valve at the bottom should be used.
3.9
For batter under-reamed piles, the reinforcement cage should be placed guiding it by a
chute or any other suitable method. If concreting is not done by tremie, it should be done
by chute.
3.10 In under-reamed compaction piles, suitable devices should be used for guiding the
movement of drop weight and specified core assembly for its vertical driving. For
operating the drop weights of adequate capacity, suitable winch with hoisting attachment
should be used.
4.0
CONSTRUCTION :
243
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
4.1
Under-reamed piles may be constructed by selecting suitable installation techniques at a
given site depending on subsoil strata conditions and type of under-reamed pile and
number of bulbs.
4.2
In construction with the equipment given in 6, initially boring guide is fixed with its lower
frame levelled for making desired angular adjustment for piles at batter. Boring is done up
to required depth and under-reaming is completed.
4.2.1 In order to achieve proper under-reamed bulb, the depth of bore hole should be checked
before starting under-reaming. It should also be checked during under-reaming and any
extra soil at the bottom of bore hole reamed by auger before reinserting the under-reaming
tool.
4.2.2 The completion of desired under-reamed bulb is ascertained by (a) the vertical movement
of the handle, and (b) when no further soil is cut.
4.2.3 In double or multi-under-reamed piles, boring is first completed to the depth required for
the first (top) under-ream only and after completing the under-reaming, boring is extended
further for the second under-ream and the process is repeated.
4.3
Control of Alignment :
The piles shall be installed as correctly as possible at the correct location and truly vertical
(or at the specified batter).Grate care shall be exercised in respect of single pile or piles in
two-pile groups under a column. As a guide, for vertical piles a deviation of 1.5 percent
and for raker piles a deviation of 4 percent shall not normally be exceeded. In special
cases, a closer tolerance may be necessary. Piles shall not deiate more than 75 mm or one
quarter the stem diameter, whichever is less (75 mm or D/10 whichever is more in case of
piles having diameter more than 600 mm) from the designed position at the working level.
In the case of single pile under a column, the positional deviation should not be more that
50 mm or one quarter of the stem diameter whichever is less (100 mm in case of piles
having diameter more than 600 mm). For piles where cut-off is at substantial depths, the
design should provide for the worst combination of the above tolerances in position and
inclination.
In case of piles deviating beyond these limits, corrective measures where necessary may be
taken in the form of increasing pile size, provision of extra reinforcement in the pile,
redesign of pile cap and pile ties. If the resulting eccentricity cannot be taken care of by the
above measures, the piles should be replaced or supplemented by one or more additional
piles.
NOTE :
In case of raker piles up to a rake of 1 in 6, there may be no reduction in
the capacity of the pile unless otherwise stated.
244
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
4.4
Section – 13
Concreting shall be done as soon as possible after completing the pile bore. The bore hole
full of drilling mud should not be left unconcreted for more than 12 to 24 hours depending
upon the stability of bore hole.
15.5 For placing concrete in pile bores, a funnel should be used and method of concreting
should be such that the entire volume of the pile bore is filled up without the formations of
voids and / or mixing of soil and drilling fluid in the concrete.
15.5.1 In empty bore holes for under-reamed piles a small quantity of concrete is pourd to give
about a 100 mm layer of concrete at the bottom. Reinforcement is lowered next and
positioned correctly. Then concrete is poured to fill up the bore hole. Care should be taken
that soil is not scrapped from sides if rodding is done for compaction. Vibrators shall not
be used.
15.5.2 If the water is confined up to the bucket length portion at the toe and seepage is low, the
water should be bailed out and concreting should be done as in 15.5.1.
15.5.3 In case the pile bore is stabilized with drilling mud or by maintaining water head within
the bore hole, the bottom of bore hole shall be carefully cleaned by flushing it with fresh
drilling mud, and pile bore will be checked for its depth immediately before concreting.
Concreting shall be done by tremie method. The tremie should have a valve at its bottom
and lowered with its valve closed at the start and filled up with concrete. The valve is then
opened to permit the flow of concrete which permits the upwards displacement of drilling
mud. The pouring should be continuous and tremie is gradually lifted up such that the
tremie pipe opening remains always in the concrete. If the final stage the quantity of
concrete in tremie should be enough so that on final withdrawal some concrete spills over
the ground.
NOTES :
1.
The concrete should be coherent, rich in cement (not less than 350 kgf/m3) and of slump
not less than 150 mm.
2.
The tremie pipe should always penetrate well into the concrete with an adequate margin
of safety against accidental withdrawal of the pipe is surged to discharge the concrete.
3.
The pile should be concreted wholly by tremie and the method of deposition should not
be changed part way up the pile, to prevent the laitance from being entrapped within the
pile.
4.
All tremie tubes should be scrupulously cleaned before and after use.
245
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
5.
Normally concreting of the piles should be uninterrupted. In the exceptional case of
interruption of concreting, but which can be resumed within 1 or 2 hours, the tremie shall
not be taken out of the concrete. Instead it shall be raised and lowered slowly, from time
to time to prevent the concrete around the tremie from setting. Concreting should be
resumed by introducing a little richer concrete with a slump of about 200 mm for easy
displacement of the partly set concrete. If the concreting cannot be resumed before final
set-up of concrete already placed, the pile so cast may be rejected, or used with
modifications.
6.
In case of withdrawal of tremie o0ut of the concrete, either accidentally or to remove a
choke in the tremie, the tremie may be re-introduced in a manner to prevent impregnation
of laitance or scum lying on the top of the concrete already deposited in the bore.
15.5.4 In inclined piles, the concreting should be done through achute or by tremie method.
15.5.5 For under-reamed bore compaction piles, the pile bore is first filled up without placing
any reinforcement. Concreting is done as in 15.5.1 depending upon situation. Soon after
the specified core assembly shall be driven and extra concrete shall be poured in
simultaneously to keep the level of concrete up to ground level. If hollow driving pipe is
used in core assembly, the pipe shall be withdrawn after filling it with fresh concrete
which will be left behind.
NOTE :In under-reamed bored compaction pile, concreting should be
notes (5) and (6) under clause 15.5.3.
uninterrupted
and
15.5.6 The top of concrete in a pile shall be brought above the cut-off level to permit removal of
all laitance and weak concrete before capping and to ensure good concrete at the cut-off
level for proper embedment into the pile cap.
15.5.7 Where cut-off level is less than 1.5 metre below working level, concrete shall be cast to a
minimum of 300 mm above cut-off level. For each additional 0.3 m increase in cut-off
level below working level, additional coverage of 50 mm minimum shall be allowed.
Higher allowance may be necessary depending on the length of the pile. When concrete
is placed by tremie method, it shall be cast to the piling platform level to permit overflow
of concrete for visual inspection or to a minimum of one metre above cut-off level. In the
circumstance where cut-off level is below ground water, the need to maintain a pressure
on the unset concrete equal to or greater than water pressure should be observed and
accordingly length of extra concrete above cut-off level shall be determined.
15.5.8 Defective Pile :
In case, defective piles are formed, they shall be removed or left in
place whichever is convenient without affecting performance of the adjacent piles or the
cap as a whole. Additional piles shall be provided to replace them as directed.
246
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
15.5.9 Any deviation from the designed location alignment or load capacity of any pile shall be
noted and adequate measures taken well before the concreting of the pile cap and plinth
beam if the deviations are beyond the permissible limit.
247
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
APPENDIX - D
REQIPMENT FOR UNDER-REAMED PILES
(MANUAL CONSTRUCTION)
D-1
EQUIPMENT
D-1.1 Normally the following equipment will be required in manual operation :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
D-1.1.1
An auger
An under-reamed
A boring guide ; and
Accessories like spare extensions, cutting tool, concreting funnel, etc.
For the piles of size larger than 30 cm and for larger depths additional
equipment required will be a portable tripod hoist with a manually operated
which.
D-1.1.2
For piles in high ground water table and unstable soil conditions, boring
under-reaming, shall be carried out with bentonite slurry using suitable
equipment. Tremie pipe shall be used for concreting.
D-1.1.3
The additional equipment normally required for under-reamed compaction
pile are the following :
(a)
(b)
and
Drop weight for driving the core assembly, and
Pipe or solid core.
248
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
APPENDIX - E
BASIC PROPERTIES OF DRILLING MUD (BENTONITE)
E-1
PROPERTIES :
E-1.1 The bentonite suspension used in bore holes is basically a clay of montmorillonite group
having exchangeable sodium cations. Because of the presence of medium cations,
bentonite on dispersion will break down into small plate like particles having a negative
charge on the surfaces and positive charge on the edges. When the dispersion is left to
stand un-disturbed, the particles become oriented building up a mechanical structure of
its own, the mechanical structure held by electrical bonds is observable as a jelly like
mass or jell material. When the jell is agitated, the weak electrical bonds are broken and
the dispersion becomes fluid.
E-2
FUNCTIONS :
E.2.1 The action of bentonite in stabilizing the sides of bore holes primarily due to the
thixotropic property of bentonite suspensions. The thixotropic property of bentonite
suspension permits the material to have the consistency of a fluid when introduced into
the excavation and when undisturbed forms a jelly which when agitated becomes a fluid
again.
E-2.2 In the case of a granular soil, the bentonite suspension penetrates into the sides under
positive pressure and after a while forms a jelly. The bentonite suspension gets deposited
on the sides of the hole and makes the surface impervious and imparts a plastering effect.
In impervious clay, the bentonite does not penetrate into the soil, but deposits only a this
film on the surface of the hole. Under such conditions, stability is derived from the
hydro-static head of the suspension.
E-3
SPECIFICATION :
E-3.1 The bentonite suspension used for piling work shall satisfy the following requirements :
(a)
The liquid limit of bentonite when tested in accordance with IS : 2720)
(Part V) - 1965 shall be more than 300 percent and less the 450 percent.
(b)
The sand content of the bentonite powder shall not be greater than 7
percent.
NOTE :
(c)
The purpose of limiting the sand content is mainly to control and reduce
wear and tear of the pumping equipment.
the
Bentonite solution should be made by mixing it with fresh water using
249
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
pump for circulation. The relative density of the bentonite solution should be
between 1.034 and 1.10.
(d)
F-1
The differential free swell shall be more than 540 percent.
: LOAD TEST ON PILES
F-1 These would be conducted on piles on completion of 28 days after casting.
Two types of namely initial and routine tests, for each type of loading viz. Vertical,
horizontal (lateral) pull out, are performed on piles.
F-1.1 :Initial Tests
This test shall be performed to confirm the design load calculations and to provide
guidelines for setting up the limits of acceptance for routine tests. It also gives an idea of
the suitability of the piling system.
Initial test on pile are to be carried out at one or more location depending on the No. of
piles required.
Load applied for the initial (cyclic) load test shall be 2.5 times the safe carrying capacity of
the pile.
Loading for initial tests shall be conducted as per IS-2911 part IV.
F-1.2 : Routine Tests
Selection of piles for the Routine test shall be done by the Engineer subject to a maximum
of ½% of total No. piles required. The No. of tests may be increased to 2% depending on
the nature / type of structure.
The test load applied shall be 1.5 times the safe carrying capacity of the pile.
The maintained load method as per IS-2911(part IV) 1985 shall be followed for loading for
the Routine Tests.
This test will be performed for the following purposes:
a) To ensure the safe load capacity of piles.
b) Diction of any unusual performance contrary to the findings of the initial test.
F-1.3: The tests shall be performed at the cut- off level only
F-1.4: The contractor shall submit a detailed report for the test result in duplicate to
consultant.
client/
250
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
F-1.5: Vertical; Load Tests
This test will be carried out as stipulated in IS-2911 (PART iv) 1995.
Pile Head:
The pile shall be chipped off till sound concrete is met wherever
applicable. The reinforcement shall be cut and head leveled with plaster of Paris. A
bearing plate with a hole shall be placed on the head for the jack to rest.
Reaction:
Kent ledge shall be suitably designed to get the desire reaction
on the
piles. Anchor piles (if required) shall be placed at a centre distance of 3 time the pile
diameter subject to a minimum distance of 2 M.
Settlement: 2 dial gauged for a single pile and 4 dial gauges for a group of
piles
with 0.01 mm sensitivity shall be used. They shall be positioned at equal distance
around the piles on datum bars resting on immovable supports at a distance of 3 D (min.
of 1.5 m ) where D is the diameter of pile or circumscribing circle for non- circular piles.
Application of load: It shall be applied as specified depending on the type of test
(routine/ initial). Each load shall be maintained till the rate of displacement of the pile
top is either 0.1 mm in the first 30minutes or 0.2 mm in the first one hour or 2
hours
whichever occurs first. The next increment in the load shall be applied on achieving the
aforesaid criterion.
The test load shall be maintained for 24 hours.
Initial Test: The safe load on a single pile shall be the least of the following:
(i)
2/3rd of the final load at which the total displacement attains a value of 12 mm
unless otherwise required in a given case on the basis of nature and type of
structure in which case, the safe load should be corresponding to the stated total
displacement permissible.
(ii)
50% of the final load at which the total displacement equals 10% of the pile
diameter in case of uniform diameter piles or 7.5 % of the bulb diameter in case
of under reamed piles.
Routine Tests - Acceptance
The maximum settlement at test load should not exceed 12 mm.
F-1.6 Lateral Load Test:
The jack should be placed horizontally, between two piles. The load on the jack shall
be the same on both the piles. The load will be applied in increments of 20%
of the
estimated safe load and at the cut off level. The load will be increased after
the
rate of displacement is nearer to 0.1 mm per 30minutes. If the cut-off level is
approachable, one dial gauge exactly at the cut – off level shall measure the
displacement. In case the cut-off level is not approachable, 2 dial gauges 30cms. Apart
251
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
vertically, shall be set up and the lateral displacement of the cut –off level calculated by
similar triangles.
The safe load on the pile shall be the least of the following:
a) 50% of the final load at which the total displacement increases to 12 mm.
b) Final load at which the total displacement corresponds to 5 mm.
F-1.7 Pull out Tests
A suitable set up shall be designed to provide an uplift force to the piles. The load
increments and the consequent displacements shall be as per the case of a vertical load
test.
The safe load shall be the least of the following:
a) 2/3rd of the load at which the total displacement is 12 mm or the load corresponding to a
specified permissible lift.
b) Half of the load at which the load displacement curve shows a clear break.
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
Scope:
Scope of work for internal electrification work in this contract for swimming pool with room for
pump & filtration plant shall be from the main distribution board to onward including MDB and
as per layout Following items shall be deemed to be included:
Internal wiring as per layout diagram for all the points.
Distribution Board for pump filtration room
2+10 way SPN DB with one no. 40 Amp DP MCB
and 8 nos 20 amp SP MCBs as incomer,
4 nos. 6 Amp SP MCBs
as outgoing -1 no.
Cable entry arrangement for pump filtration room
There shall be one brick masonry chamber of 450 mm x 450 mm x 450 mm deep just below the
DB for incoming cable.
Layout:- The layout shall be as approved by PMC/NLUO.
Specifications:- All relevant specifications shall apply.
Materials : All materials for fittings, accessories, etc. to be incorporated in this work shall be
ISI marked and if Indian Standard have not been issued then it shall be as per approval of
PMC/NLUO
Approval of layout at site : Contractor shall mark the location of all switch boards, points and
layout of conduits on walls at site and take approval of PMC/NLUO before commencement of
cutting of chase and laying conduits / MS galvanised boxes. This shall be recorded, signed and
dated by Contractor, PMC & NLUO.
INTERNAL WATER SUPPLY, PLUMBING
252
Project: National Law University Auditorium
TTechnical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
GENERAL
1 The scope of internal water supply, plumbing shall consist of provisioning and
fixing of the following for each dwelling unit of each block.
a)
2
CPVC Pipe (10Kg/sqcm) with fitting and valves for water supply
The entire work shall be carried out by licensed plumber.
WATER SUPPLY
3
Scope of Internal water supply will include as under :a)
All CPVC pipes (10Kg/sqcm) and fittings including valves etc. of sizes and
as per layout and details shown on Tendered drawings.
MATERIALS
4
5
6
All CPVC Pipes shall be ISI Marked of approved make of 10Kg/sqcm.pressure.
All CPVC fittings shall be of approved make.
Valves shall be of approved brand.
LAYING , FIXING AND FITTING OF CPVC PIPES
7
8
9
All pipes below ground shall be laid in trenches and shall have minimum cover of
600 mm.
In the concealed portion of plumbing no joints shall be provided in the pipe lines
except in the fittings i.e. bends, elbows, tees and nipples where required.
Unions : Contractor shall provide adequate number of unions on all pipes to enable
dismantling later. Unions shall be provided near each valve, stop cock or check
valve, and on straight runs as necessary at appropriate locations as approved by
PMC/NLUO.
1
0 Puddle Flanges : Puddle flanges shall be provided to all connections i.e. inlet,
outlet, overflow and scour of the overhead tank wherever required.
253
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
TTechnical specification of materials, Approved material list,
1
1 Approval Of Layout Of Pipes And Position Of Fixtures At Site : The contractor
shall mark the location of all fixtures and fittings and layout of pipes on the walls/
floor/ ground at site and take approval of PMC/NLUO before commencement of
cutting chases for Pipes.
MISCELLANEOUS
CPVC GRATING OVER OVERFLOW CHANNEL:
a) CPVC grating to be provided on overflow channel shall be removal type and made out of
solid CPVC bars of size 10mm x 18mm. The width of the grating shall be 300mm.
One sample piece of grating shall be got approved from the PMC/NLUO before bulk
supply order is placed.
SECTION – XIII
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL WIRING
1.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS :
The installation shall generally be carried out in conforming with the requirements of the
Indian Electricity Act, 1910 as amended up to date and the Indian Electricity Rules, 1965
framed there under, the relevant regulation of the Electric Supply Authority concerned,
and also with the specifications laid down in the Indian Standard I.S. 732-1963 Code of
practice (revised for Electrical Wiring Installations (system voltage not exceeding 650
volts) and I.S. 2309-1962 Code of Practice for the protection of buildings and Allied
Structure against Lighting and IS 3043 - Indian Code of practice for Earthling. The
wiring shall also be according to the specifications of P.W.D. of the Local Government.
2.
MATERIALS
:
All materials, fittings, appliances, used in electrical installations, shall conform to Indian
Standard Specifications wherever these exist. A list of approved materials is attached
afterwards. Materials not included in the list shall be got approved by the PMCs /
Engineer-in-charge / Owner prior to actual use.
3.
MAIN SWITCH GEAR
:
Iron clad switch fuse and isolator units should conform to B.S. 861 (I.S. 2510-1954). The
quick made and break mechanism shall be self interlocked with the cover. In “Off”
position there must be two breaks per pole.
254
Project: National Law University Auditorium
__________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
Main switch gear shall be properly earthed with two numbers conductors if M.V. and one
number of L.V.
4.
BUSBAR CHAMBER (BBC) :
This shall be totally enclosed, metal clad type fabricated from rust proofed 14 SWG
sheet steel on angle iron frame and provided with sheet or cast iron cover and undrilled
detachable and plates, suitable for mounting angle iron floor stand and painted with high
quality enamel paint. G.I. bolts and nuts shall be used for assembly with suitable packing
materials to ensure dust proof finish. Meters shall be provided on suitable sheet steel
boxes. Switch shall be provided with cable and boxes as required.
The depth of B.B.C. shall be 150 mm (minimum). Minimum clearance of phase bars to
earth shall be 25 mm and between bus bars shall be minimum 32 mm.
H.C. (High Conductivity) copper busbars properly tinned are to be rated at 1000 amps.
per sq. in and aluminum bus bars (wrought aluminum alloy strip) conforming to relevant
I.S. specification at 800 amps per sq. in.
Neutral Busbars are to be rated to carry 60% of phase current. These shall be carried on
glazed porcelain supports of proper diselectric and mechanical strength and shall be
appropriately colour coded for identification of phase.
Lettering shall be done for identification of switches as directed. The contractor shall
submit fully dimensioned drawing of the board with the physical position of the switches
and other components to the PMCs for their approval before the same is fabricated.
There shall be two numbers of Earth Terminals Suitable Danger Board shall be provided.
5.
INTERCONNECTION B.B.C. & SWITCH FUSE, METERS
:
For ratings above 150 Amps these shall consist of insulated copper strips to adequate
section. For ratings below 150 Amps PVC copper cable tails of appropriate size,
terminating in tinned copper sockets may be used. The above are to be enclosed either in
sheet metal trunking or conduits so that no part is exposed.
6.
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS :
These totally enclosed metal clad type Distribution Boards with hinged lids shall be in
accordance with I.S. 2147-1952 and 2675-1966 and B.S. 214 and shall be welded
construction and fabricated from rust proofed sheet steel and finished with anticorrosive
stove enamel paint and have provision for fixing on wall and having earthing terminals.
Main Power DB shall be free standing floor mounting type and branch DB shall be wall
mounting type.
255
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Power Distribution Boards (400 volts TPN) shall be constructed from 14 SWG sheet steel
and Branch Distribution Board (230 volts SPN from 16 SWG sheet steel).
The minimum ratings of phase and neutral busbars shall be 67% of the total ratings of
fuse ways. Above 32 Amps Neutral Busbars may be half the size of the phase Bus Bars.
The fuses shall be mounted on glazed porcelain supports of proper dielectric and
mechanical strength. TPN suits should have phase separation barriers between fuse.
Cables shall be connected to a terminal by crimped lugs.
Where two or more B.D.B.’s feeding low voltage circuits are fed from different phases
of a medium voltage supply there B.D.B.’s shall be installed atleast two metres apart.
All three phase power distribution boards shall be properly earthed with two number 10
S.W.G. galvanized iron wires and provided with suitable Danger Boards. All SPN
B.D.B.’s shall be properly earthed with one number 10 SWG galvanized iron wire each.
Branch DB (LDB) :
• The incomer to the LDB shall be terminated in a suitable rated TB (not directly on
ELCB/MCB).
• The size of the DB shall have space for comfortable accommodate all MSBs, ELCB,
TB and have space for minimum 2 nos of spare MCBs.
• All MCB shall be min 9KA rating and ‘C’ curve type.
7.
SWITCHES
:
All switches for lights, fans and plug points shall be Modular type switches, unless
specified otherwise.
8.
CABLES AND CONDUCTORS
:
All cables shall conform to relevant Indian Standard. Conductors of all cables except for
flexible cables, shall be of aluminium, unless specified otherwise. All LT cable shall be
FRLS type PVC insulated and 1000 V grade.
9.
FLEXIBLE CABLES
:
Conductors of flexible cables shall be of PVC insulated FRLS copper the minimum size
of core acceptable is 1.5 sqm. (other than telephone cable). The maximum weight to
which the following twin flexible cords may be subjected are as follows :
Twin 16 / 0.20 mm
Twin 23 / 0.0076 inch
:
:
3.3 Ibs (1.5 Kgs.)
5.0 Ibs (2.3 Kgs.)
256
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
10.
Section – 13
INSTALLATION OF MAIN SWITCH BOARDS, BDB’S MAINS, SUBMAINS,
DISTRIBUTION WIRING TO INDIVIDUAL POINTS :
The exact positions of all main switch boards, BDB’s and all funds of mains and submains, and distribution wirings to individual points including the exact position of all
light fittings and switch boards shall be first marked on the buildings and shall be
approved by the Engineer in charge before actual commencement of the work.
The D.B.’s shall be generally be installed at a height of 2.13 m (7 ft) from floor level.
11.
INSTALLATION OF SWITCH BOARDS
:
These shall be installed at a height of 1.3 mtrs. (4’ - 3”) and above the floor level.
12.
INSTALLATION OF CEILING FANS
:
Unless otherwise specified all ceiling fans shall be hung not less than 2.75 M (9 ft.) above
floor. The suspension and clamp shall be painted with approved paint without involving
extra cost.
13.
INSTALLATION OF FLUORESCENT LIGHT FITTINGS :
Where these are suspended from ceiling by two down rods, or fixed to ceiling / beam
directly, atleast one fixing to the ceiling / beam shall be made with Mechanical / Metal
fasteners. Electrical drill only shall be used while making holes for the fasteners which
shall be capable of sustaining at least 11 kg. of dead weight.
The down rods and accessories shall be painted with approved paint without involving
extra cost.
Unless otherwise specified these should be suspended 2.60 m (8’-6”) above the floor.
The Fluorescent light point/ Ceiling fan point and exhaust fan point shall be terminated in
a ceiling rose and at the time of equipment/ fitting installation it is to be connected with
the ceiling rose. The connection (supply and erection) is in the scope of contractor
installing the light/fan fittings.
14.
INSTALLATION OF EXHAUST FANS :
Exhaust fans shall be fitted by means of rag bolts embedded in the wall. The required
holes in the wall shall be made and finished neatly with cement plaster and brought to
the original finish of the wall. All exhaust fan shall be fitted with with GI Louvers at the
outer side.
15.
INSTALLATION OF SOCKET OUTLETS :
257
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
No socket outlet shall be provided in the bath room at the height less than 130 cms. (4’3”) from the floor.
No switches shall be provided inside the bath rooms, unless approved by the Engineer in
charge.
Socket outlet at locations other than bath rooms shall be either 25 cm (10”) or 130 cms
(4’-3”) from the floor.
16.
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRIC MOTORS
:
Electric Motors shall be earthed with 2 numbers of earthing in opposite side. Earth flat is
to be brought near the equipment and then connected by wire rope socketed at the ends.
17.
TESTING OF INSTALLATION :
Before a completed installation or an addition to an existing installation is put into
service, the following tests shall be carried out by the contractor in presence of the
Engineer-in-charge.
(a)
Polarity of switches :
It must be ensured by test that all single pole switches have been fitted on the live side of
the circuits they control.
(b)
Insulation test :
(i)
By applying a 500 volt megger between earth and the whole system of conductors or any
section thereof, with all fuses in place and all switches closed, all lamps in position or
both poles of installation otherwise electrically connected together. The result in meghom
shall not be less than 50 devided by the number of points on the circuit, and should not be
less than 1 meghom.
(ii)
Between all conductors connected to one phase and all conductors connected to the
neutral or to the other phase conductors of the supply after removing all metallic
connections between the two poles of the installation and switches on all switches. The
insulation resistance shall be as in (I) above.
(c)
Earth Continuity Test :
The earth continuity conductor including metal conduits, and metal sheaths of cables in all
cases shall be tested for electrical continuity. Electrical resistance of the above along with
the earthing leas cut excluding any resistance of earth leakage circuit breaker, measured
from the connection with the earth electrode to any point in the earth continuity
conductor in the completed installation shall not exceed one ohm.
(d)
Earth Resistance Test :
258
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
To ensure effectiveness of installation earth, the value of earth resistance shall within 5
0hm for installation capacity upto 5 KW and one ohm for installation of higher capacity.
18.
The completed work will be taken over only if the result obtained in above tests are within
the limits mentioned above and in accordance with I.E. Rules.
On completion of the installation work, a certificate shall be furnished by the contractor,
countersigned by the certified supervisor under whose direct supervision the installation
was carried out. This certificate shall be in a prescribed form as required by the local
Electric Supply Authority.
19.
SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS :
(a)
Before fixing all switches, fittings etc. should be produced before Engineer in Charge
and get approved.
(b) All metal switch boards and switch / regulator boxes to be used in work shall be
painted with two coats of anti rust primer (red oxide paint) prior to erection. After
erection they shall be again painted with two coats of enamel paint of approved
quality.
(c)
Before execution of any portion of conduit work for wiring neat proper layout should
be made out by the contractor and got approved from the Engineer-in-charge. For this
purpose contractor is advised to get acquainted with the layout Tendered drawings of the
Consultant / PMC.
(d) While laying the conduits for concealed wiring in the ceiling or in the beams and
columns and before casting the contractor must ensure that all the inlets and both ends
of the conduits are plugged by means of dead end socket so that no foreign matter can
enter the conduits and choke them.
(e) Damage to any fitting during erection and before handing over the installation by
contractor shall be set right or replaced by the contractor at his own cost.
(f) Caution Board or proper size wherever required, shall be provided, as per I.E.E.
regulations for which no extra payment will be admissible.
(g) Any repairs done to wall etc. should match with the surrounding surface otherwise
same will be got done through Building Contractor at the cost of the Electrical
Contractor.
259
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
(h) Earthing installation shall be done in the presence of Engineer-in-charge or his
representative.
(i) The installation should not be energized without adequate earthing.
(j) The I.C. switches and Distribution Fuse Boards shall be provided with neat lettering
in block letters with paint for identification of the I.C. switches and for the points
connected to each fuse way of the D.B.’s for which no extra payment will be
admissible.
(k)
Completion Tendered drawings.
The contractor shall be required to submit along with Final bill, the under noted
Tendered drawings on tracing papers, along with three copies of Ammonia print each.
(l) Plan (as per structural drawing) of each floor (not less than 1 : 100 metric scale)
showing :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Locations of Main Switch Board, Distribution boards (with the circuit numbers
controlled by them).
The runs of mains and sub-mains.
Location of lights, fans wall sockets, other power consuming devices together
with type of fittings and fixtures including circuit numbers.
Position of lighting conductors and route of running conductor.
Position of Earthing Stations for light and power and Lighting conductor
installation.
and giving the following informations on the plans :
(a)
Name of work with job no. Accepted Tender No.
2.
(b)
Date of completion.
(c)
Name of the place.
(d)
Name and signature of the Contractor.
(e)
Scale of Tendered drawings.
Schematic line layout diagram of each floor showing (i) layout and connections of Main
and Sub-board, B.D.B. having descriptions of the size, capacity, type and their numbers
the system and the source of supply, (ii) Location, size, type, length of main and sub main
cables (iii) Loading of each B.D.B indications of phases, Departmental mark in each
B.D.B. and switchgear.
260
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
The Tendered drawings shall be very neatly drawn and submitted properly without folding
them.
3.
Cable route should be marked on site plan with measurements from permanent structures.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CONDUIT WIRING SYSTEM
1.
Type and size of conduit :
All conduit pipe shall be screwed type, solid drawn or welded and with black stove
enameled surface or galvanized and of thickness conforming to IS : 9537 part II of 1981
(or latest revision) in all respects. The conduits are to be free from burrs and internal
roughness. No conduits less than 20 mm in dia shall be used, unless specified.
2.
Accessories :
Only screwed type of accessories are to be used.
3.
Conduit Joints :
The conduit shall be properly earthed. In long distance straight runs of conduit either
inspection type screwed couplers are to be provided at reasonable intervals on running
threads with couplers and jamnuts. Threads on conduit pipes in all cases shall be
between 13 mm to 27 mm long sufficient to accommodate pipes to full threaded portion
of couplers or accessories. Cut end of conduit pipes shall have no sharp edges or any
burrs left to avoid damage to insulation of conductor while pulling them through such
pipes.
4.
Protection against dampness and rust
:
In order to minimize condensation and sweating inside the tube, all outlets of pipes
system shall be properly drained and ventilated, but in such a manner as to prevent entry
to insects inside the conduit.
To protect against rust the outer surface of the conduit and accessories shall be painted
and the bare thread portion is to be portions with anti corrosive preservative.
5.
Fixing of Conduits :
conduits pipes shall be fixed by heavy gauge saddles and h.w. or metal bars, secured to
wall / ceiling by screws driven into wood plugs or rawl plug or phil plugs at an interval or
not more than 76 cm apart for vertical run and 60 cm apart for horizontal run, but on
other side of couplers or bend or similar fitting saddles shall be fixed at distance of 30 cm
261
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
from the center of such fittings. The minimum thickness for saddles shall be 24 SWG, for
conduits upto 25 mm dia and 20 SWG for larger sizes.
6.
Bends in conduits :
All necessary bends in the system including diversion shall be done bending the pipes, or
by inserting suitable inspection type bends, elbows or similar fittings, or by fixing cast
iron inspection boxes whichever is most suitable.
7.
Outlets :
All outlets for fittings, switches etc. shall be fixed on boxes of suitable metal for either
surface mounting system or flush mounting system. In case of cast iron boxes the wall
thickness shall be at least 3 mm and in case of welded mild steel sheet box of wall
thickness shall not be less than 16 gauge. Except where otherwise stated 3 mm thick
insulated laminated sheets shall be fixed on the front with screws. Where conduits are
terminated. Special care shall be taken in employing double jamnuts, special care shall be
taken in employed double jamnuts, for securely fixing conduits to outlets so as to prevent
any possibility of damages to cables when drawn.
8.
Cables to be used :
Unless stated otherwise only single core PVC insulated cables of approved manufacturers
shall be used for wiring in conduit shall not be greater than maximum set out in Table II
of Indian Standard (I.S. 732-1963) code or practice (revised) for electrical wiring
installation (system voltage not exceeding 650 volts).
9.
Looping in system :
Distribution wiring in conduit to light, fan plug points etc. shall be done in looping
system. In this system no joints or connections shall be made anywhere of the system
except at terminating points such as at terminals of switches, ceiling roses, etc. and in
case of socket outlets at the socket terminals.
10.
Earthing continuity wires :
All three pin 5 Amps plug points and metallic fan regulator cover should be provided
with earthing attachment by No. 14 S.W.G. wires, unless specified otherwise.
Three pin 15 Amp power plug point should be provided with earthing attachment by No.
14 SWG G.I. wire, unless specified otherwise.
For conduits and accessories for distribution wiring should be provided with earthing
attachment by number 14 SWG G.I. wire, unless specified otherwise.
262
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
For looping earthing G.I. wire shall be run conduits being fixed with saddles, this wire
shall not be normally visible after installation when run with the conduit. Where the wire
has to be ;taken without ;the conduits this will be fixed with “U” nails at 2’-0” intervals.
11.
Painting :
Conduit and all conduit fittings and accessories shall be painted with two coats matt
paint. Painting of conduits shall be done to harmonize with colour bearing surface, i.e.
wall, joints, trusses etc. after installation and as approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR
CONCEALED CONDUIT WIRING SYSTEM
1.
Concealed conduit wiring system shall comply with all requirements for surface conduit
wiring system as specified above and in addition conform to the requirements specified
below :
2.
Making of Chase :
The chase in the wall shall be neatly made and be of ample dimensions to permit the
conduit to be fixed in the manner desired.
3.
Fixing of Conduit in Chase
:
The conduit pipes shall be fixed by means of staples, J-Hooks or by means of saddles not
more than 60 cm apart. Fixing of standard bends or elbows shall be avoided as far as
pipes with a long radius which will permit easy drawing in of conductor. All threaded
joints of metallic conduits shall be treated with some approved preservative to secure
protection against rust.
4.
Inspection Boxes :
Suitable inspection boxes shall be provided when necessary to permit periodical
inspection and to facilitate removal of wires. These shall be mounted flush with wall.
5.
Types of accessories to be used :
All outlets such as switches, socket outlets, shall be flush mounting type with cast iron or
M.S. boxes with a cover of approved insulating materials. The switches and other outlets
shall be mounted inside such boxes as would be approved. The metal box shall be
efficiently earthed with conduit by means of earthing attachment with No. 14 SWG G.I.
wire, running inside the conduit.
263
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
6.
Section – 13
Conduits :
(i)
Steel-Black enameled screw type M.S. conduits with thickness conforming to IS :
9537 part II or 1981 (or latest revision)
(ii)
PVC / Polythene-Medium gauge pipes of reputed make having 3 mm wall thickness
shall be used.
For roof slabs - These shall be pre-laid during casting of floor / roof slab. No. of wires
drawn through the same shall not exceed the number of specified I.S. code.
For vertical drops in wall to switch boards-Minimum size shall be 13 mm bore through
which not more 2 Nos. 1/1-40 and G.I. earth wire shall be drawn.
(iii)
Maximum capacity of conduits for drawing in of PVC insulated cables shall be as follows
:
650 / 1100 V PVC
In 20 mm dia.
In 25 mm dia.
Copper wire.
1.5 Sqm.
2.5 Sqm.
4.0 Sqm.
6.0 Sqm.
10 Sqm.
16 Sqm.
Conduits.
4 Nos.
4 Nos.
3 Nos.
2 Nos.
-
Conduits.
10 Nos.
10 Nos.
8 Nos.
6 Nos.
4 Nos.
2 Nos.
7.
Fish wire - 18 SWG G.I. wire shall be used and it shall protrude the conduit ends by 9
inches.
8.
Conduit laying in floor / roof slabs before casting :
PVC / Ploythene / G.I. conduit shall be laid straight as far as practicable and properly
placed including binding with the steel reinforcement rods with 22 SWG G.I. wire so that
proper positions of conduits are maintained.
While laying the conduits for concealed wiring in the ceiling or in the beams and
columns and before casting, the contractor shall ensure that both ends of the conduit are
plugged by means of deadend socket or otherwise so that any foreign matter cannot enter
the conduit and choke them.
All precaution must be taken while laying the conduits on the slabs, R.C. walls, columns
etc. and the contractor shall rectify at his own cost if any defects are found during process
of drawing cables through the concealed prelaid conduits.
264
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
Each PVC / Polythene conduit shall be provided with protruding length of not less than 9
inches on free end of the conduits.
There shall be no intermediate joints in one straight run of conduit.
All ceiling outlets shall be terminated in a round C.I. / G.I. circular box / deep box to suit
standard size ceiling rose or / and rectangular C.I. / M.S. junction box or fan hook box
as the case may be.
9.
It will be mandatory for the contractor to get the layouts approved by the Engineer-incharge / PMC when the conduits are laid and bound to steel reinforcement rods, before he
can release the work for casting of floor / roof.
Connector Boxes, Draw-in-Boxes, junction Boxes :
These shall be constructed from 16 SWG M.S. sheet and have M.S. cover. Minimum size
for connector boxes in 6” x 4” and for Draw in Boxes 4” x 4”.
10.
Fan Hook Boxes :
These shall be 100 mm (4”) dia x 75 mm (3”) deep, constructed from 16 SWG M.S.
sheet, and provided with one 12 mm dia M.S. rod 300 mm (12” long).
11.
Painting :
outside of wall switch boards, connector boxes and draw-in-boxes and other C.I. / M.S.
accessories shall be painted with two coats of anti-rust paint in addition to other painting
instruction given elsewhere.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CABLE INSTALLATIONS
1.
General
:
All HV cables (upto 33 KV earthed system) shall be XLPE insulated aluminium
conductor cable conforming to I.S. 692 and I.S. 7098 respectively.
All medium voltage and Low Voltage PVC insulated FRLS type and armoured /
unarmoured cables shall conform to I.S. 1554 Part-I-1964 and of 1100 volt grade.
Old and used cables must not be used for installation. Only one make of cable shall be
used. All cables brought to site must be tested and got approved by the Engineer-incharge before these can be laid. The cables shall be dispatched to site on wooden drums
with ends sealed. Exact lengths shall be determined by the Contractor after measurement
at site.
265
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
The underground installation of cables shall be generally conforming to I.S. 1255-1967,
Code of practice for installation and maintenance of underground cables (upto including
33 KV).
2.
Laying of cables :
(a)
Direct in Ground :
Trenches shall be 750 mm deep (minimum) for LT cables and 1.2 M (4’-0”) deep
minimum for HT Cables from ground level and trenching work shall including all
pumping and bailing out water. These trenches shall be wide enough to accommodate all
the cables with brick separations as per the requirements specified in the relevant I.S.
When more than one multicore cable is to be laid in the same trench, a minimum
horizontal interaxial spacing between cables will be as per relevant I.S.
After excavation of the trench of proper size, the bottom of the trench shall be dressed
and leveled and filled with 75 mm layer of fine sand. The cable shall then be laid with
bricks on both sides of the cable continuously. After having the space within the bricks,
filled and packed upto a level of 75 mm (3”) above top of cable with fine sand, the top
layer of bricks shall be placed side by side in continuous series as protective cover. Total
No. of bricks required being 16 per metre run. The remainder of the trench shall be filled
with riddles soil, well rammed and watered to a level of 75 mm (3’-0”) above
surrounding ground level. The ground
level surface of the whole trench route shall be restored properly after completion of
cable laying.
(b)
Inside Building :
Cables shall be laid on walls / ceilings / structure, unless specified otherwise with M.S.
brackets and suitable clamps or over claw type aluminium cleats fixed on M.S. brackets,
spaced not more than 450 mm apart. G.I. Bolts of suitable sizes are to be grouted on the
wall properly for fixing the brackets.
(c)
Minimum bending radius permissible in 120 for MV cables and 20d for HV cables. At
joints and terminations the individuals core of multicore cables should never be bent so
that the radius is less than 15 times the diameters over the insulation.
No cable jointing is allowed between two terminals points.
3.
Cable Jointing
:
266
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
All cable joints shall be carried out by experiences and Licensed jointers under strict
supervision. Electro plated brass cable glands, aluminium / tinned copper cable sockets
and approved jointing materials must be used. The price for cable jointing and finishing
the ends of the cable shall include all materials and shall also provide for tools and plants
for the work. The cable accessories and other associated materials shall conform to Indian
Standard Specification where applicable. Proper earthing of cable glands and armoured
shall be included in the job.
4.
Testing of Cables :
All cables shall be tested for insulation resistance with megger - 5000 V constant
pressure meter insulation tester for HT cables and 1000 V constant pressure megger for
LV cables, before installation.
After installation and end termination, cables shall be again subjected to the above test.
Insulation value for HT Cables shall not be less than 100 mega ohms and for MV Cables
1.0 mega ohm.
After laying and jointing, the HV cables shall be subjected to high voltage pressure test
before commissioning the test voltage being as specified in I.S. 1225-1967 or latest.
5.
Testing of Installation :
Before the completed installation is put into service or handed over to owner, the
installation is to be subjected to the above tests to the satisfaction of the Engineer-incharge. The completed work will be taken over only if the results are acceptable to the
PMCs / Owner.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR EARTHING INSTALLATION
The installation shall generally conform to I.S. 3043-Indian Standard Code of practice for
Earthing, as amended upto date.
1.
Earthing Electrode :
The earthing electrode shall be galvanized steel pipe of class B medium quality 50 mm
(2”) dia bore and 3.04 M (10”) long. A hole shall be provided at 100 mm (4”) from the
top end to receive a 13 mm (1/2”) dia galvanised bolt and the bottom end shall be chisel
cut for easy penetration into soil.
A suitable trench shall be excavated about 0.45 M (1”-6”) deep and the pipe electrode
driven to an average depth of 3.35 M (1”-0”) below ground level. The top end of the
electrode shall be at an average depth of 3.30 M (1”) below the ground surface.
267
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Alternate layers of Charcoal or Salt and coke to be provided for Electrode as per I.S. code
of Practice unless specified otherwise.
One No. SWG G.I. wire (unless otherwise specified) shall be connected securely on the
properly cleaned surface at the top end of pipe electrode by means of a 100 mm (4”) long
x 13 mm (1/2”) dia G.I. bolt nut and double washers. The earth lead conductor shall be
protected mechanically be means of a continuous length of G.I. pipe (Class A) having 13
mm (1/2”) inside diameter upto a height of 0.60 M (2’) above ground and the same shall
be completely filled with bitumen compound and topped upto overflowing.
2.
Masonry Inspection Pit :
The inspection pit for the earth station shall be approx 0.56 M x 0.56 M (1’-10” x 1’-10”)
outside dimensions and approx. 0.45 M (1’-6”) deep when completed, having 5” thick
cement brick work with 1st class bricks in cement mortar (6 : 1) both inside and outside
plastering 19 mm (3 / 4”) thick and neatly cemented 1.60 mm (1 / 16”) thick, both inside,
outside and top. The opening on top shall be provided with a C.I. ring with lockable
cover fixed flush with ground surface.
All the excavations shall be duly back filled, dressed and rammed.
3.
Locations for Earth Electrodes
:
Electrodes shall be buried at least 2 M (6’-6”) away from the building pole or object to be
earthed. However, earthing electrodes for L.C. installations should be as clode to the
down conductors as possible.
Electrodes when installed in parallel, shall not be placed less than 2 M (6”-6”) apart and
preferably placed at distances greater then twice their lengths.
4.
Earth Busbar :
(a)
Galvanised M.S. Flat :
The Busbar shall be of suitable size and length, as specified in the Schedule of items,
heavily galvanized and having adequate number of drilled and tapped holes 30 mm apart,
completed with G.I. bolts, nuts, washers for securely connecting the earth leads and earth
continuity conductors. The busbar shall be fixed on wall, having clearance of 6 mm from
wall with spacing insulators with at least the numbers 13 mm (1/2’) G.I. rag bolts spaced
about 0.46 M (1’6”) apart.
(b)
Copper Flats :
268
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
To be used, as specified, in the Schedule of Items, where earthing requirement are more
stringent. Brass bolts, nuts washers shall be used for connections.
5.
Value of Earth Resistance
:
In case of installations where the load does not exceed 5 K.W. the resistance to earth shall
on no account exceed 5 Ohm for other cases the resistance shall not exceed 1 ohm.
For sub-station, the value is 1 ohm.
For L.C. installations the value is 1 ohm.
TECHNICAL SPECIFATION FOR L.C. INSTALLATION
Specifications :
The installation shall conform to I.S. : 2309-1969 as amended upto date.
1.
Conductor for L.C. System :
It shall be well galvanized No. 7 / 8 SWG G.I. stranded wire galvanizing conforming to
B.S. 728 / 1961) unless specified otherwise. The conductor shall be well annealed and
flexible. There shall be no joints in any conductor between terminal ends.
2.
Air Terminals
:
Air Terminal shall be single prong type constructed of 15 mm N.B. (Class-B) medium
quality G.I. pipe 30 cm long with a screwed G.I. solid conical cap 100 mm long (overall)
on top and shall have a screwed galvanized M.S. flange 75 mm dia x 6 mm thick at
bottom end and shall be grouted on the parapet roof, etc. with rag bolts in cement mortar
unless specified otherwise.
3.
Conductor on Parapet :
The conductor shall be coursed along ridges, parapets, edges of the flat roof, over flat
roof where necessary in such a way as to joint each air terminals to the rest. The
conductors shall be fixed securely with proper saddles spaced not more than 2 ft. (0.6 M)
apart.
4.
Vertical Down Conductors :
269
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
The Conductors, direct from test point shall be connected to parapet conductors or air
terminals and shall be coursed through shortest possible routes without abrupt turns or
kinks. While passing through cornices, these shall pass through G.I. pipe (Class-B)
having adequate bore. There conductor shall be fixed securely with proper saddles spaced
not more than 2’ ft. (0.6 M) apart.
5.
Protection Against Damage and Corrosion
:
No upturns are permitted and any bend necessary shall have a permissible radius. The
end of G.I. pipe protections on wall shall be properly sealed with bitumen compound to
prevent corrosion.
6.
Metallic objects near conductors :
The conductors shall be so laid as to maintain a separation distance exceeding 2 metre
(6’-6”) between (a) any electric conductor running in parallel, (b) metallic objects, viz.
iron girders, water tanks, iron stair case, water / gas pipes inside or by the side of the
building.
All the external metallic objects viz. water tanks, gutters, rain water down pipes, water
mains, etc. shall be bonded to the nearest conductor by means of a short tail.
7.
Joints and Bonds
:
All joints between conductors shall be made after cleaning and timing the ends of
conductors to be joined, binding them together for about 100 mm (4’-0”) with No. 14
SWG G.I. wire and then welding. Joint between Air Terminals and conductors shall be
made with proper lugs duly fixed to conductors and bolts, nuts washers etc.
Bonding shall be as short as possible. All joints and Bends are to be mechanically and
electrically sound.
8.
Earth Station
:
Similar to installation earths as specified elsewhere. Minimum number of earth station is
two.
9.
Installation Tests :
After completion of works the ohmic resistance of L.C. installation complete with air
terminals (without earth connection) shall be measured from the highest point and this
shall be a fraction of one ohm.
270
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
The resistance to each of individual earth stations shall be tested by earth testing megger
and must not exceed 1.0 ohms.
The above tests shall be made in the presence of the representative of the Engineer-incharge / PMCs and the results recorded.
10.
Completion Tendered drawings :
This shall be submitted along with the final bill.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR COMPOUND LIGHTING
1.
Tabular Steel Pole
:
The pole shall be as specified in the Schedule of Items. It shall be complete with sole
plate and cap, if required and shall have drilled holes of proper size at requisite places for
earthing.
The pole shall be treated internally, as well as externally upto a height of 2.5 metres from
butt end with special bituminous preservative solutions, the remainder of the outside
being painted with one coat of Red Oxide primer.
2.
Erection of Steel pole :
The hole made in the ground for single pole is to be approximately 1.85 mtr. deep. A
precast base block (600 x 600 x 150 mm thick) is to be properly placed at the bottom of
the duly rammed hole and the pole, painted with a fresh coat of black anticorrosive paint
at the butt end upto a height of 2.5 mtrs and complete with slow plate and cap is to be
erected, plumbed and lined up properly. The cable looping box of dimension as specified
elsewhere, and polythene pipe / pipes also of specified dimension for cables entry into the
cable looping box from underground are to be fixed in specified position at this stage.
The C.C. foundation (1:3:6) of dimension 600 x 600 x 1500 deep shall then be cast using
timber shuttering. The concrete mixture, after pouring into position shall be well spread
and compacted by ramming. The shuttering shall not be removed within 48 hours after
casting. Concrete work shall be properly cured after removal of shuttering and the
excavated area around the foundation shall be back filled with earth duly rammed using
water and consolidated in layer not exceeding 150 mm at a time upto the required level of
ground surface.
Cement concrete muffing (1:3:6) of specified dimension shall be cast at the base of the
pole upto the specified height above ground level and it shall accommodate the cable
271
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
looping box. The muffing shall be finished with neat cement plastering of 3 mm
thickness after the concrete work has properly set.
The pole shall be plumbed before and after the concrete work.
3.
Painting :
The pole shall be painted, after installation with one coat of primer and two coats of
ready mixed anti-corrosive aluminium paint after preparation of surface by sand
papering, cleaning, etc. for receiving fresh coat of paint, including numbering poles.
4.
Materials for C.C. work foundation etc.
(a)
Jhama chips shall be obtained by breaking good quality jhama bats and shall not be
spongy or with any coating of foreign materials. These shall be of sizes ¾” for base block
and 1 ¼” ½” (3/4cm) for foundation works. These shall be screened for removal of dust.
(b)
Sand shall be coarse, sharp and free from clay, loan any other foreign materials and shall
be obtained from approved source.
(c)
Cement No. cement expect from approved source shall be used. Cement damaged by
water or otherwise shall not be used.
(d)
Paint-shall be of approved brand and quality and should be brought to site in original
sealed container-under no circumstances shall the paint be diluted with linseed oil or
otherwise.
SECTION -XIV
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
All work under this contract shall be carried out in accordance either the technical
specification given in the documents if any part of the specification is not given in
this document and the latest issue of the Indian Standard Specification applicable to
the particular class of work. If Indian standard specification are not formulated for
any particular materials of work, the relevant British Standard Specification shall
apply. Relevant issue I.S. Specification shall be applicable to the particular work have
been described along with the specification for the respective works. In case of any
confusion or dispute regarding the meaning and interpretation of any specification
for the respective works. the decision of the Employer/ PMC shall be final and
binding on the contractor.
272
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR SANITARY AND PLUMBING WORKS
The following specifications are to be read in conjunction with the details given in
the schedule of quantities.
1.0
Standard Specifications : All works under this contract shall be carried out in
accordance with the technical specifications & the latest issue of the Indian
standard Specifications applicable to the particular class of work. If Indian
Standards are to not formulated for any particular material of work, the relevant
British Standards shall apply, Relevant issues of I.S. Specifications applicable to the
particular work have been described along with the specification for the respective
works . In case of any confusion or dispute regarding the meaning and interpretation
of any specification for the respective works. In case of any confusion or dispute
regarding the meaning and interpretation of any specification for the respective
works, the decision of the Owner/PMCs shall be final and binding on the
Contractors.
1.0
General Specification fro water supply. Sanitary Installations, sewerage & Drawing
works.
a. Execution through licensed Sanitary contractors Firm.
All water supply, sanitary installations, sewerage & drainage works shall be
executed through licensed sanitary contractors. Particulars of the firm viz. Name
& address of the firm. registration & license no etc. (Issued by the authorities)
shall be furnished along with the tender.)
b. Complying with by-laws etc. of local Authorities.
All water supply, Sanitary installations, sewerage & drainage works shall be
carried out by skilled and licensed plumbers/ technicians in a workman like
manner complying in all respects with the relevant by-laws of the Municipal or
of the local Authorities under whose jurisdiction the work has be executed.
c. Contractor's responsibility for sanction from local authorities.
For the works undertake by him & works dependent on his work, the
contractor shall prepare plans / Tendered drawings and get it sanctioned from
the Municipal or other Govt. Authorities as may be required by law, the
contractor shall include the cost for the same in his tender rates unless
otherwise specified in the tender Items.
d. Contractor's responsibility to ensure continuance of existing services.
During execution of the new works , the Contractor should ensure that the
existing services
(viz. water supply, sewer, drain Lines etc.) are not
273
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
disrupted in any way & in case it happens accidentally the services shall be
restored immediately at contractor's cost.
However, when in the opinion of the PMCs/NLUO, it is imperative to locally
divert/ Disconnect for a short time/reconnect the existing lines, it shall be done
by the Contractor as directed by the PMC/NLUO. Payment for the necessary
pipe lines would be made as per tender items, however all other costs including
temerity measures shall be borne by the contractor.
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
Documents to be enclosed along with the final bill :
Completion Dressings : On completion of all works under his contract, the contractor
shall prepare & submit (At his own cost) 3 sets (1. Blue print or Drawing on treating
cloth & 2. Ammonia prints of each drawing ) of completion Tendered drawings,
showing the entire system of water supply, sanitary installations, drainage & sewerage
disposal incorporating up to date changes (If any) at site in all the works mentioned
above & permanent structures, roads, pathways, boundary lines etc.
The following drawing ( In scales as instructed by the PMCs) shall be prepared and
submitted to the PMCs along with the contractor's final bill :
The following Tendered drawings ( In scales as instructed by the PMCs ) shall be
prepared and submitted to the PMCs along with the Contractor's final bill.
a.
Site layout (Sewerage & Drainage Lines)
b.
Any other Tendered drawings as required any instructed to be done by the
PMCs.
List of materials / installations handed over : on completion of works in all respects
and satisfactory testing , the contractor shall prepare & submit a list , along with the
final bill of all materials / installations handed over to the authorized representative of
owner.
Transfer of Manufacture's guarantee : When manufacturers guarantee period for any
material/ installation expired at a letter date then that of the expiry date of the
defect liability period of the contractor, the contractor shall transfer the guarantee in
the name of the owner this transfer should be made at the item of submitting the
contractor's bill for release of retention money.
Cement : The cement must be kept in dry place under cover, Samples of cement
may be taken by the PMCs/Owner from time to time for testing at any approved
laboratory whose reports shall be accepted by both parties.
Sand : Sand is to be clean, coarse and sharp and is to be washed, if so directed.
Aggregate : The aggregate for the reinforced cement concrete work shall be stone
chips or broken gravel of approved quality which will pass through 12mm. mesh but
be retained on 6mm mesh.
The aggregate for the support or drain pipes, manhole chambers etc. shall be of
stone chips of 20mm & down size.
Concrete : For reinforced cement concrete work the cement, sand and aggregate shall
be in the proportion of (1:2:4) for foundation work, the mix will be in the proportion
of ( 1:3:6) whenever reinforced cement concrete (RC.C.) is mentioned in schedule of
274
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
quantities, it shall mean inclusive of cost of steel reinforcement bars, providing &
removing shuttering etc. all complete.
8.0 Bricks : Bricks shall be of the best quality will burnt sound, hard & giving clear
ringing tone of sound when struck against each other and well shaped bricks having
crushing strength so kg/sq. cm. unless stated otherwise in the respective schedule of
items of standard dimensions and to be soaked for at least six hours in water
before use.
9.0 Brick work : The brick work shall be in English bond, and shall be laid in cement
sand mortar in the proportion of (1:6), if not mentioned otherwise. Where
corbelling is necessary, projection in each course shall not exceed (2 1/4") 57mm.
All brick work must be kept wet till the mortar will fully set.
10.0 Soling : For soling, the bricks shall be having crushing strength 75 kg/sq. cm., bricks
laid flat, the joints being well packed with loose sand.
11.0 a)
Excavation general : Excavation shall generally form part of the item under
the schedule and shall not be paid for separately unless otherwise specified in
the schedule of quantities. It includes excavation in all kinds of soil including
shoring and bailing out water where necessary and refilling the excavated
trenches, in 15 cm layers properly rammed and watered and neatly dressed at
top. If the excavation is done to dimensions greater than those shown on the
Tendered drawings or as directed by the PMC /NLUO, the excess depth shall
be made good at the cost of the contractor. The excavation work should be
done in a manner that does not in any way endanger the stability of the
adjacent buildings or other structure or services. Where any road. Pavement of
crossing are cut these shall be restored to their original conditions at no extra
cost. Moreover after completion of the work the contractor shall have to dress
the site including disposal of the surplus earth at their own cost as directed
by the PMC/NLUO.
b. Trenches, General : The width of the bed of trenches shall be the exact width
as show on the Tendered drawings or as specified.
In the firm soil , the sides of trenches shall be kept vertical up to a depth of
1.82 meter and for a greater depth, the trench shall be widened be allowing
steps of 45cm (1'-6") on either side after every 1.82 M depth from bottom so as
to give side slopes of (1/4" to 1") 6 mm to 25mm. Where the soil is soft, loose
or slushy the width of steps shall be suitably increased as directed by the
PMC/NLUO. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to take complete
instructions in writing from PMC/ Employee regarding the stepping, sloping or
shoring to be done for excavation in trenches deeper than 1.83 M for firm sill
or any depth for soft, loose of slushy soil.
The bed of the trenches shall be made level and firm by watering and
ramming. Any soft or defective spots that are found shall be filled with
concrete of the same proportion as specified or as may be directed by the
PMC/Owner.
12.0
Sanitary Installation:
275
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
a. Indian Type W.C. Pan : The W.C. pan shall be of white vitreous China of
specified size and pattern wash down type unless otherwise specified. It shall be
of back flush inlet type. The pan shall be of approved best quality and shall
bear the mark of the Manufacturer. The pan shall be provided with a 100 mm
C.I. ''P' or 'S' trap as specified in the item with minimum 50 mm seal.
b. Fixing : The W.C. pan shall be sunk or raise from the general floor as
specified, but its surrounding floor shall be sloped towards the pan. Care shall
be taken so that the pan is not damaged in the process of fixing ; if damaged in
any way, it shall be replaced immediately. It shall be fixed in a proper cement
concrete base of [1:3:6] proportion taking care that the cushion is uniform and
even without having any hollows between the concrete base and pan.
The joint between the pan and the trap shall be made with cement mortar
[1:2] with jute hessian gasket soaked in coal tar and shall be leak proof.
13.0
European type W.C.
a. European type W.C. pan shall be readily flushed . of wash down type,
shall bear the mark of an approved firm and shall be of best quality. The
closet shall be of vitreous china ware having integrated trap 'p' or 's' type with or
without vent hole right or left as directed.
b. Seat :The seat with lid shall be of solid white plastic or approved colour or
as specified with rubber buffers and shall be fixed in position by using
chromium plated (C.P.) brass hinges and screws.
14.0
Urinal :
a) Lipped Front Urinal : The urinal shall be of flat back lipped front basin of
required dimensions of white vitreous chinaware of an approved make as
specified . It shall be fixed in position by using rawl plugs embedded in the
wall with screws of proper size or fixed as per approved Manufacturer's
specification. Each urinal shall be connected to a 32 mm N.B. PVC waste pipe
with clamps which shall discharge into a channel or floor trap, or as specified.
b. Painting : The inside of the invisible portions of the fittings and brackets
connected with urinal basin shall be painted with approved bituminous paint
and outside of the brackets, etc. shall be painted with a priming coat of red
oxide to give an even shade to match the colour of surrounding walls. The cost
of such painting shall be included in the rate quoted for the concerned tender
items.
15.0
Squatting pan:
The squatting pan shall be of white vitreous china conforming to IS:2556(PARTI),IS:2556(PART-IV) with internal flushing rim with front or side inlet.Each
squatting plate shall have integral longitudinal flush pipe their shall be of 100mm
dia.white glazed vitreous china channel with slope and outlet piece infront.The plate
shall be fixed in position the top of squatting plate shall be flush with the finished
276
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
floor level adjacent to it .It shall be embedded on a layer of 25mm thick cement
mortar(1:6) laid over a bed of cement concrete(1:3:6)gap between wall,floor,etc.
shall be finished with white /matching cement.
16.0
17.0
a)
b)
c)
d)
18.0
a)
b)
c)
19.0
a)
Flushing System
a) Only where specifically instructed for E.P.W.C.s and ODISHA type
I.P.W.C.s, low level type flushing cistern to be provided and shall be of white
vitreous chinaware of approved make,
10 liters capacity with internal
fittings, brackets and C.P. 40mm flush pipe & bend with rubber packing , brass
C.P. handle etc. The low level type flushing cistern shall be
connected
with the W.C. pan by means of 40mm dia C.P. flush bend with rubber packing.
The inlet pipes shall be connected with brass C.P. heavy connector of required
length with both ends C.P. nuts & washers.
Wash Hand Basin
Wash Hand Basin : The basins shall be of white vitreous china of approved
pattern. The size of the basin shall be as specified. The basins shall be of
approved quality and make.
Fittings : Each wash hand basin shall be provided with pillar tap as specified,
having a centered tap hole with C.P. protruded nose pillar cock heavy type. This
must be included with 32 mm dia C.P. basin waste, C.P. Bottle trap & concealed
G.I. waste pipes (Or heavy PVC waster pipe of required length with C.P. brass
couplings) as stated in the respective Schedule of items.
Fixing : The circular basins shall be supported on counter top and the
rectangular basins shall be supported on a pair of C.I. concealed type brackets
embedded in wall or fixed in position by means of wooden cleats and screws
as required.
The waste pipes shall discharge into the floor trap inlet or as specified.
Sinks :
Sinks : The sink with drain board shall be of best quality stainless steel, make of
approved quality & brand . The size of the sink shall be as specified. The sink
shall be of approved quality.
Fixing : The sink shall be supported on M.S. fabricated on C.I. cantilever bracket
to match with sink profile. Embedded or fixed into position by means of
wooden cleats and screws or embedded in wall with concrete as per site
condition. The brackets shall be painted with approved shade and colour to
match with the surrounding finish.
The G.I. waste pipe shall discharge into floor trap inlet or as specified.
Toilet Requisites :
Mirrors : The piece glass mirrors shall of approved make glass as specified.
The size and shape of the mirror shall be as specified. It shall be mounted
on the asbestos sheet and shall be fixed in position by means of C.P. brass
dome shaped screws over rubber washers and rawl plug firmly embedded in
wall .
277
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
The plate glass mirrors of suitable shapes & size as per detailed Tendered
drawings shall be provided with accessories for round counter type basins.
b)
Water connection : water connection to flushing cistern, wash hand basins shall
be by means of white PVC connector or C.P. connector with stop cock as
specified in the respective items.
c)
Shelf : Unless otherwise specified the shelf shall be of porcelain of approved
quality & design. The size of the shelf shall be as specified. The brackets
shall be fixed to the wall with C.P. brass screw to wooden plug firmly
embedded in the wall.
d)
Urinal Partition : Unless otherwise specified partition for urinal shall be shape
out of 20mm thick x 900 mm white marble. Fixing shall be done by inserting
the portion approx 75mm inside wall & grouting the same in cement concrete
(1:3:6). All the exposed surfaces & edges shall be properly ground to shape and
polished. Joint with wall to be finished with white cement.
e)
Towel Rail : The towel rails with bracket of brass C.P. or anodized aluminum as
stated in Schedule of Items shall be of approved shape and design. The size of the
rail shall be of approved shape and design. The size of rail shall be of approved shape
and design. The size of the rail shall be as specified. The brackets shall be fixed by
means of C.P. brass screws or Rawl plug firmly embedded in wall.
f)
Paper Holder :- The paper holder shall be for white vitreous chinaware of recessed
type & the rate shall include chase cutting of walls, setting in cement sand mortar &
making good the all round joint with white cement.
20.0
P.V.C(SWR). soil , waste and vent Pipes and fittings:
a)
P.V.C Pipes and fittings: The P.V.C pipe and fittings should be of I.S.I marked
pipes & fittings conforming to I.S 13592 -1992 Type A of latest editions, of
approved quality. The pipes shall be free from cracks and other flaws. The interior
of pipes and fittings shall be clean and smooth and painted inside with approved anticorrosive paint.
Nominal mass : The nominal mass and thickness of pipes are given below along with
Tolerance acceptable as per I.S. norms :
Normal outside
diameter
b)
Tolerance on outside
diameter
Wall thickness type a
MIN
MAX
75
+0.3
1.8
2.2
110
+0.4
2.2
2.7
160
+0.5
3.2
3.8
Fixing : The pipes and fittings shall be fixed to walls by using proper clamps. The
pipes shall be fixed perfectly vertical or in a line as directed. All soil pipes shall be
278
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
carried up above the roof and shall have P.V.C vent cowl. Where pipes are laid along
walls, the P.V.C pipes are to be fixed 25mm away from the wall surface. Fabricated
M.S. flat with G.I. clamps and necessary nuts and bolts are to be used for this
purpose may be used only on specific instructions of of PMCs / NLUO, where
diversions are to be provided. Payment for such fabricated M.S. clamps /hangers
shall be made separately as per Schedule of items.
The access door fittings shall be of proper design so as not to from any cavities in
which fill may accumulate. Doors shall be provided with brass bolts & rubber
insertions connections between main pipe and the branch pipes shall be mad by using
trenches and bends invariable with access doors for cleaning.
In this method, instead of forming a socket on one pipe and spigot on other, an
injection moulded socket fitting or coupler is used, with a provision to take in the
pipes at both ends. After properly cleaning ends of both the pipes the solvent
cements are applied on the surfaces to be jointed and the joint ismade at ambient
temperature. Injection moulded fittings only shall be used in preference to
fabricated fittings. Only solvent recommended by the manufacturers of the pipes
shall be used and full load on the joints applied only after 24 hours. The pipe shall
be cut perpendicular to the axis of the pipe length with a metal cutting saw. Pipe
ends have to be beveled slightly with abeveling tool (Remer) at an angle of about
30 degree. The total length of insertion socket (injection moulded socket or
couplet) shall be marked on the pipe and checked how far the pipe end could be
inserted into the fitting socket. Attempt shall be made to push the pipe to marked
distance, if not possible it shall at least be pushed for 2/3 of this distance.Dust, oil,
water grease etc. shall be wiped out with a dry cloth from thesurface. Further the
grease should be thoroughly removed with a suitable solvent, such as methylene
chloride or as an alternative the outside surface of the pipe and the inside of the
fitting may be roughened with emery paper. Generous coatings of solvent cement
shall be evenly applied on the inside of the fittings around the circumference of
the full length of insertion and on the outside of the pipe end up to the marked line
with a brush of suitable dimension. The pipe shall be pushed into the fitting
socket and held for 2minutes as otherwise the pipe may come out of the fitting
due to the slippery quality of cement and the tapering inside bore of the fitting.
The surplus cement on the pipe surfaces shall be wiped out. If the solvent cement
has proper and pipe will come out of the fitting. In summer months joints shall be
made preferably early in the morning or in the evening when surrounding
environment is cooler. This will prevent joint from pulling apart when the pipe
cools off at night. Heat application method for jointing shall not be allowed.
c)
Flanged Joints :
For jointing PVC pipes particularly of larger size to valves and vessels and larger
size metal pipes where the tensile strength is required the joint is made by the
compression of a gasket or ring seal in the face of CI flange. Flanges solvent
welded to the PVC pipes shall be supplied by the manufacturers.
279
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
d)
Section – 13
Rubber Ring Joints :
Rubber ring joints can provide a watertight seal but do resist pull. As such these
may be used only as repairs collar and for jointing pipes larger than 110mm. Such
joints may be provided on pipes, which are buried in the ground and supported
throughout on bedding so that they are not subject to movement and longitudinal
pull. The material of rubber ring shall conform to IS : 5382-1985, where
aggressive soil are met with, synthetic rubbers perform better for jointing. The
ring shall be housed in a groove formed in plastic or metallic housing. The ring
shape and the method of compressing the ring vary considerably in different type
of joints. Most joints often require the application of lubricating paste, which shall
be procured from the manufacturer of PVC pipes.
e)
Mode of Measurements :
The length shall be measured in running metre correct to a cm for the finished
work which shall I
nclude PVC fittings such as bends, tees, elbows, reducer,
crosses, plugs, sockets, nipples and nuts, but exclude, taps, valves, etc. All pipes
and fittings shall be classified according to their outside diameter. Reducer shall
be measured along with the larger diameter pipe. As far as jointing is concerned
even though explained in foregoing paras the jointing of pipes shall be carried out
as per the code of practice.
f)
g)
Testing : Prior to testing ,safety precautions should be instituted to protect personal
and property in case
of test failure. Conduct pressure test with water ,do not use
air or other gases for pressure testing . The piping system should be adequately
anchored to limit movement. Water under pressure experts thrust forces in piping
systems. Thrust blocking should be provided at changes of direction, change in size
and
at dead ends. Tables for initial set and cure times before pressure testing
should be proffered. The piping systems should be slowly filled with water, taking
care to prevent surge and air entrapment. The flow velocity should not exceed 1feet
per second. All trapped air must be slowly released. Vents must be provided at all
high points of the piping system .All valves and air relief mechanisms should be
opened so that the air can be vented while the system is extremely dangerous and it
must be slowly and completely vented prior to testing. The piping system can be
pressurized to 125% of its designed working pressure. However care must be taken
to ensure the pressure does not exceed the working pressure of the
lowest rated
component in the System(valves,unions, flanges, treaded parts etc).The pressure test
should not exceed one hour.Any leaking joint or pipe must be cut out and replaced
and the line recharged and retested using the same procedure
P.V.C pipe:P.V.C pipes shall conform to I.S 13592 Type A with solvent cement
joints . The main P.V.C pipes shall be of 110mmdia O.D.as specified
280
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
21.0.
21.1
21.2
Section – 13
PIPING MATERIALS
ALL THE INTERNAL PIPE SHOULD BE uPVC pipes.
Cutting Chases in Masonry Walls
The chases up to 7.5 x 7.5 cm shall be made in the walls for housing GI pipes etc. These
shall be provided in correct positions as shown in the Tendered drawings or directed by
the PMCs. Chases shall be made by chiselling out the masonry to proper line and depth.
After GI pipes etc are fixed in chases, the chases shall be filled with cement mortar 1:2:4
or as specified may be made flush with the masonry surface. The concrete surface shall
be roughened with wire brush to provide a key for plastering.
21.3
Water Fittings
Unless otherwise specified, all gunmetal fittings such as gate, globe, check & safety
valves shall be fitted in pipe line in a proper workman like manner. Necessary unions
shall be provided on both ends of the valves for easy replacement. The joints between
fittings and pipes shall be leak-proof when tested to a pressure of 2.5 times of working
pressure. The defective fittings and joints shall be replaced or redone.
21.3
Making water connection
A pit of suitable dimension shall be dug at the point where the connection is to be made
with main line and earth removed up to 150 mm below the main. The flow of water in
main shall be disconnected by operating the nearest sluice valve on the main. The main
shall be drilled and slopped at 45° to the vertical and the ferrule of required size shall be
screwed in. The ferrule shall be fitted in a manner so that no portion of projection of the
shank shall be left projecting within the main into which it is fitted. Ferrule shall be nonferrous material with a C.I bell mouth cover and shall be of nominal bore as required.
21.4
Installation of Water Meter and Stop Cock
The G.I lines shall be cut to the required lengths at the position where the meter and stop
cock are required to be fixed. Then end of the pipe shall be threaded. The meter and stop
cock shall be fixed in a position by means of connecting pipes, GI jam nut and socket etc.
The stopcock shall be fixed near the inlet of the water meter. The paper disc inserter in
the ripples of the meter shall be removed. And the meter is installed exactly horizontal or
vertical in the flow line in the direction shown by the arrow on the body of the meter.
Care shall be taken that the factory seal of the meter is not disturbed. Wherever the meter
shall be fixed to a newly fitted pipe line, the pipe line shall have to be completely washed
before fitting the meter.
281
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
21.5
Section – 13
Connections to RCC Water Tanks
The contractor shall provide all inlets, outlets, washouts, vents, ball cocks, overflows
control valves and all such other piping connections including level indicator / controller
to water storage tanks as called for. All pipes crossing through RCC work shall have
puddle flanges fabricated with MS/GI pipes of required size and length and welded to
6mm thick MS plate. All puddle flanges must be fixed in true alignment and level to
ensure further connection in proper order.
Suitable float controls of an approved make, securely fixed to the tank, independent of
the inlet pipe and set in a position such that water inlet into the tank is cut off when filled
up to the water line. The water level in the tanks shall be of adjusted to 25mm below the
lip of the overflow pipe. Full way gate valves of an approved make shall be provided as
near the tank as practicable on every outlet pipe from the storage tank except the
overflow pipe. Overflow and vent pipes shall terminate with mosquito proof coupling.
The overflow pipe shall be so placed to allow the discharge of water being readily seen.
The overflow pipe shall be of size as indicated. A stop valve shall also be provided in the
inlet water connection to the tank. The outlet pipes shall be fixed approximately 75mm
above the bottom of the tank towards which the floor of the tank is sloping to enable the
tank to be emptied for cleaning.
21.6.
Disinfection of piping system and Storage Tanks
Before commissioning the water supply system, the contractor shall arrange to disinfect
the entire system as described in the succeeding paragraph.
The water storage tanks and pipes shall first be filled with water and thoroughly flushed
out. The storage tanks shall be filled with water again and disinfecting chemical
containing chlorine shall be added gradually while tanks are being filled to ensure
thorough mixing. Sufficient chemical shall be used to give water a dose of 50 parts of
chlorine to one million parts of water. If ordinary bleaching powder is used, the
proportions will be 150 gms of powder to 1000 liters of water. The powder shall be
mixed with water in the storage tank. If a proprietary brand of chemical is used, the
proportions shall be specified by the makers. When the storage tank is full, the supply
shall be stopped and all the taps on the distributing pipes are opened successively. Each
tap shall be closed when the water discharged begins to smell of chlorine. The storage
tank shall then be filled up with water from supply pipe and added with more disinfecting
chemical in the recommended proportions. The storage tank and pipe shall then remain
charged at least for three hours. Finally the tank and pipes shall be thoroughly flushed out
before any water is used for domestic purpose.
282
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
21.7
Section – 13
Shifting of Excavated Surplus Material
Contractor shall make his own arrangement to shift the surplus excavated material within
the site limits as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
21.8
Testing
a)
All water supply system shall be tested to hydrostatic pressure test of at least two
and half time the maximum pressure but not less than 7.5 Kg/Sq Cm. for a period
of not less than 24 hours. All leaks and defects in joints revealed during the
testing shall be rectified and got approved at site.
b)
Piping required subsequent to the above pressure test shall be retested in the same
manner.
c)
System may be tested in sections and such sections shall be entirely retested on
completion.
d)
The Contractor shall make sure that proper noiseless circulation of fluid is achieved
through the entire piping network of the system concerned. In case of improper
circulation, the contractor shall rectify the defective connections. He shall bear all
expenses for carrying out the above rectifications including the tearing up and
refinishing of floors and walls as required.
22.0 INTERNAL WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM:
Supplying, laying, jointing, testing &commissioning approved make 3 Layer UPVC
pipes and fittings confirming to IS 1239 PI & II, malleable fittings viz., tees, elbows,
flanges, unions etc., including cutting threading, fixing in/on walls, below ceilings, under
floor etc., as per Tendered drawings. The quoted rate shall include necessary earthwork,
chasing in walls, making bores in walls, foundations and slabs and making good the
chased surfaces and bores in CM 1:4.
20 mm dia
25 mm dia
40 mm dia
50 mm dia
63 mm dia
Supplying, installing and testing approved make GM/Brass ball valves conforming to IS
1703 with unions etc., complete .
50 mm dia (Screwed ends)
Providing and fixings GM/Brass gate valve of approved quality (screwed end)
283
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
25 mm nominal bore
40 mm nominal bore
50 mm nominal bore
63 mm nominal bore
Providing and fixings Union of approved quality (screwed end)
25 mm nominal bore
40 mm nominal bore
50 mm nominal bore
63 mm nominal bore
23.0
RAIN WATER SPOUT AND PIPES
Providing and fixing on wall face unplasticised PVC (working pressure 4 Kg. per sqcm)
rain water pipes confirming to IS : 4985 including jointing with seal ring conforming to
IS : 5382 leaving 10 mm gap for thermal expansion.
Single socketed pipes
110 mm diameter
Providing and fixing on wall face unplasticised - PVC moulded fittings / accessories
forunplasticised - Rigid PVC rain water pipes conforming to IS : 13592 Type A including
jointing with seal ring conforming to IS : 5382 leaving 10 mm gap for thermal expansion
110 mm bend with door
110 mm plain bend
110 mm shoe
Providing and fixing unplasticised-PVC brackets of approved design to unplasticisedPVC rain water
By means of nuts and bolts hard wood plugs, screwed with M.S. screws of required
length including cutting
brickwork and fixing in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand) and making good the
wall etc. complete.
110 mm diameter
24.0
a)
Galvanized Iron pipes
Fittings : The pipes shall be of galvanized (As per I.S. 4736 of latest edition)
steel, screwed and socketed and shall conform to I.S. 1239 ( Part-I) of latest
edition. The fittings shall be of malleable cast iron (Galvanized ) with ISI mark
up to 100mm nominal bore. For pipes above 100 mm N.B., welded steel fittings
(Galvanized) may be used. Unless otherwise specified thread shall be screws
284
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
taper thread and sockets parallel thread and each tube shall be laid beveled sufficiently to
prevent damage to the leading thread.
________________________________________________________________________
Nominal Bore.
weight of Pipe in Kg/mtr
Light
Medium
Heavy
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------15mm
0.96
1.23
1.46
20mm
1.42
1.59
1.91
25mm
2.03
2.46
2.99
32mm
2.61
3.17
3.87
40mm
3.29
3.65
4.47
50mm
4.18
5.17
6.24
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------b)
Laying & Fixing : Where pipes have to be cut or rethreaded. ends shall be
carefully filled out so that no obstruction to bore is offered.
In jointing the pipes, the inside of the socket and the screws end of the pipes
shall be rubbed over with white lead and few turns of hemp yarn wrapped
round the screwed end of the pipe which shall then be screwed home to the
socket with a pipe wench. Care must be taken that all pipes and fittings are
kept at all times free from dust and dirt during fixing . Any threads exposed
after jointing shall be pined.
c)
All cutting holes, chases , trenches etc, at any place necessary in connection
with the work as per items of this tender any subsequent mending damages
are to be included in the rates and not paid extra unless other -wise specified.
Internal work : Internal G.I. pipes and fittings inside the duct walls shall be
generally fixed on walls by means of standard pattern holder bat clamps
keeping the pipe 20mm clear of the wall every where or concealed where
required a s directed. If G.I. pipes and fittings of inside wall are to be
concealed , if shall be by chasing floors and walls as directed. where it is
imperative to fix the pipe inside toilers , kitchen, pantries, in front of a house
or any conspicuous position, where it looks unsightly, chasing to be adopted.
The holder bat clamps shall be fixed at a distance not exceeding 3.00 meter
apart for vertical pipes & 1.50 meters for horizontal pipe s which are to be
secured to walls by hooks. The valves shall be fitted with a union. In long
length run of a pipe at least in every 3.00 meters apart there shall be a long
screw/union.
All pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical and horizontal or as directed
by the PMCs,/Owner.
d)
External work : For external work G.I. pipes and fittings shall be laid in
trenches. The width of the trench shall be of minimum width required for the
work. The pipe s laid underground shall not be less than 60cm from the
ground level. They shall be surrounded on all sides by sand of approved
285
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
quality. The work of excavation and refilling shall be done in accordance with the general
specification for earth work.
e)
Painting : All internal G.I. pipes and fittings shall be painted with 2 coats of
oil paint of approved quality manufacture, colour and shade. The cost of such
paintings shall be included in the contractor's rate. All pipes and fittings in
external work shall be painted with 3 coats of anti-corrosive Bitumastic paint.
Unless otherwise specified all concealed pipes and fittings shall be painted
with 3 coats of Bitumastic anticorrosive paint.
f)
Testing : After installation (But before covering up where needed) all G.I.
pipes, and fittings shall be tested by Hydraulic pressure machine to a pressure
of 7 kg. per sq. cm. All lead joints must be mad e leak proof by tightening or
re-doing at contractor's expense and the pipe line must be retested to the
above pressure.
25.0 Brass or C.P. on Brass water Fittings ( As specified in respective schedule of
items):
All fittings shall be of standard Manufacture and shall in all respect comply with
the Indian standard specifications. The brass fittings shall be fixed in pipe line in
workman like manner . Care must be taken to see that joints between fittings are
made leak proof . The fittings and joints shall be tested to a pressure of 7 kg. per
80cm unless otherwise specified. The defective fittings and the joints shall be
repaired, redone or replaced at the contractor's expenses.
25.1 Bib cock : The bib cock shall be of horizontal inlet & free outlet of specified quality
of screw down a pattern of the size as specified. The closing device shall work by
means of disc carrying a renewable non-metallic washer which shuts against water
pressure on a seating at right angles to the axis of threaded spindle which operates
it. The handle (Head ) shall be of approved design & shape. The cock shall open in
anti-clockwise direction. The cock shall be polished bright (For brass ) and chrome
plated on brass (For C.P.) . Minimum weight shall be 0.40 kg. for 15mm size bib
cock.
25.2 Stop Cock : The stop cock shall be plain or angular type as per it's place of
installation & of specified quality opening anti clockwise & of screw down pattern
of the size as specified. Other specifications shall be as per the specification of Bib
cock above .
.
26.0 Manholes, Gully Chambers etc. :
a)
Size of Manhole : The size specified shall be the internal size of the manhole.
The work shall be done strictly as per drawing and specification. The
following specifications shall be adopted.
b)
Excavation : The manhole shall be excavated true to dimensions and levels
shown on he plan or as directed by the PMC/Owner.
c)
Brick work : The brick work shall be with bricks having crushing strength
75/sq. cm brick in cement mortar 1:4 . It shall be 250 mm thick or as
instructed by the PMC/ NLUO.
286
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
d)
e.)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
Section – 13
All angles shall be rounded 7.5 cm radius and all rendered internal surfaces
should be hard impervious finish obtained by using a steel trowel. The external
troe joints of the masonry shall be finished smooth.
In wt ground 20mm thick cement plaster of the above specifications shall be
done on he outside surface of the walls also. this plaster shall be water
proofed with addition of 1 kg. of acco proof to 50 kg (1 bag) of cement or
with addition to any other equal and approved waterproofing compound. The
plastering shall be done up to 30cm above the set soil lines.
Channel and Benching : Channels shall be semi-circular in the bottom half
and of diameter equal to the sewer. Above the horizontal diameter, the sides
shall be extended vertically to the same level as the crown of the outgoing
pipe and the top edge shall be suitable rounded off. The branch channels
shall also be similarly constructed with respect to the benching but at their
junction with the main channel on appropriate single suitably rounded off in
the direction of flow in the main channel.
The channel and benching shall be done in cement concrete (1:2:4) rising at a
slope of 1 in 6 from the edges of channel. The channels at the bottom of the
chamber shall be plastered with cement mortar 1:4 ( 1 cement :4 coarse sand) and
steel trowelled smooth.
R.C.C. Work : R.C.C. work for slabs etc. shall be in cement concrete 1:2:4 with
steel reinforcement as per detail Tendered drawings.
Plain Concrete : If used for fixing manhole covers, shall be of the above
specifications.
Foot Rests : These shall be of M.S. square rods 22 mm or as specified and
shall be galvanized or painted with coal tap these shall be embedded in
cement concrete (1:2:4) at least (9) 23 cm. while the brick work is in progress.
These shall be fixed 30 cm, apart vertically and staggered laterally and shall not
reject more than 11 cm from the wall.
Manhole covers and frames : All covers shall be of heavy type. these shall be
non -locking or locking type as specified and capable of easy opening and
closing . These shall ordinarily be gas and water tight, These shall be soluble
water seal type manhole cover and frame. the covers as specified in schedule
of Quantities, C.I Surface box for air valves, sluice valves, peet valves etc. shall
be of sufficient dimensions to suit the sizes of these fittings and shall be of
heavy pattern when fitted in level to heavy traffic and shall be of standard
design or as directed by the PMC/NLUO.
The frame of manhole cover shall be embedded firmly in the R.C.C. slab or
plain concrete as the case may be on the top of the masonry.
When the manhole is built on the foot path , this shall be provided with 45cm
internal diameter or as specified heavy type C.I. cover, of 56cm internal dia or as
specified. When it is built the metalled width of the road under traffic, it shall
be provided with approx 22" (560mm) internal diameter heavy type C.I. cover.
287
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
m)
Section – 13
Painting : All C. I. / M.S. fittings like Manhole covers & frames, gratings, footrests
etc, shall be painted with two or more coats of Bitumastic paint & it's rate shall be
included in the rate of the Manholes, Gully chambers etc.
27.0 Types of Manholes
27.1 Manhole up to 0.75 Meter Depth : This shall be 0.9M x 1.2 M size ( Internal dimension)
unless otherwise shown in Tendered drawings instructed per site conditions.
a)
Thickens s of brick wall-250mm
b)
Cement brick work
- (1:4)
c)
Plaster : Plaster on inside surface of walls, bottom & part of outside surface of
walls and on RCC cover slabs shall be done as per Tendered drawings and
directions.
d)
Bed concrete (1:4:8)-150 mm thick with stone chips.
e)
Brick flat soling - 75mm thick.
27.2 Thickness of brick wall
i)
250 mm up to 1.5 M from finished G.L.
ii) 375 mm below 1.5 M from finished G.L.
Cement brick work plastering and Brick Flat Soling same as in Item 27.1 above.
28.0
C.I Manhole Cover and Frame
S.F.R.C. (Steel Fibre Reinforced Concrete) frames and covers of the specified size and duty
shall be embedded in reinforced cement concrete slab 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4
graded stone aggregate 20mm nominal size) 15cm thick. Reinforcement shall consist of
12mm dia. M.S. bars of 15cm centre to centre.
Duty of Manholes covers & frame :
a)
b)
c)
29.0
All manhole cover & frame shall be S.F.R. concrete conforming to IS specification.
Manholes covers shall be as follows unless otherwise specified:
In the shaft or green area
Light duty
In pavement where only pedestrian traffic is allowed
- Light duty/Medium duty
In road
Heavy duty
The C.I Manhole Cover and Frame shall conform to IS:1726 and the grade and types have
been specified . The cover and frames shall be cleanly cast and they shall be free from
air and sand holes and from cold shuts. They shall be neatly dressed and carefully
trimmed. All castings shall be free from voids whether due to shrinkage, gas inclusion or
other causes. Covers shall have a raised checkered design on the top surface to provide
an adequate non-slip grip.
The sizes of covers specified shall be taken as the clear internal dimensions of the frame.
288
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
The covers and frames shall be coated with a black bituminous composition. The coating
shall be smooth and tenacious. It shall not flow when exposed to a temperature of 63° C
and shall not brittle as to chip off at a temperature of 0° C.
Thickness of bed concrete (1:4:8)- 225 mm with stone chips.
30.0 Prior approval of Sample Materials /Works : Samples and all materials & works shall
be approved by the PMCs/NLUO before the contractor undertakes any major
procurement of materials or proceeds with the works concerned. The quantum of
materials/works for approval of samples shall be decided by the PMC/NLUO & no
extra payment shall be made to the contractor for sample materials procurement/or
works & replacement of materials altering or redoing of works as required and instructed
by the PMCs/NLUO.
The typical approved sample material for each work shall be kept in the office of the
NLUO/PMCs at site until the satisfactory completion of the works. The materials
supplied and installed at site shall be of the same quality & size as of the approved
samples, otherwise they shall be rejected.
The decision of the Owner/PMCs or their authorized representatives of whether a
materials compares well with he approved sample shall be final and binding on
contractor. The same principal shall be applicable to sample work approved & further
works done at site.
31.0 Cleaning & disinfections of the supply system, water storage tanks and down take
distribution pipes : All water mains , communication pipes, service and distribution pipes
used for water for domestic purpose should be thoroughly and efficiently disinfected
before being taken into use and allows after every major repair. The method and
disinfections shall be subject to the approval or the Owner/PMCs.
The water storage tanks (underground and Overhead) & pipes shall first be filled
with water & thoroughly flushed out. The storage tanks shall ten be filled with water
again and disinfecting chemical containing chlorine added gradually while the tanks
are being filled, to ensure thorough mixing, sufficient chemical shall be used to five
water a dose of 50 parts of chlorine to one million parts of water. If power to 1000
Liter of water . The power shall be mixed with water to a creamy consistency before
being added to the water in the storage tank. If proprietary brand of chemical is
used, the proportions shall be as specified by the markers, When the storage tank is
full, the supply shall be topped and all the taps on the distribution pipes opened
successively , working progressively away from the storage tank. Each tap shall be
closed when the water discharge begins to smell of chlorine. The storage tank shall
then be topped up with water from the supply pipe and with more disinfecting
chemical in the recommended proportions. The storage tank & pipes shall then remain
charged at least for three hours. Finally , the tank and pipes shall be thoroughly
flushed out before any water is used for domestic purpose.
32.0 Cleaning & disinfections of the supply system, water storage tanks and down take
distribution pipes : All water mains , communication pipes, service and distribution pipes
used for water for domestic purpose should be thoroughly and efficiently disinfected
289
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
before being taken into use and allows after every major repair. The method and
disinfections shall be subject to the approval or the Owner/Consultants.
33.0 The water storage tanks (underground and Overhead) & pipes shall first be filled
with water & thoroughly flushed out. The storage tanks shall ten be filled with water
again and disinfecting chemical containing chlorine added gradually while the tanks
are being filled, to ensure thorough mixing, sufficient chemical shall be used to five
water a dose of 50 parts of chlorine to one million parts of water. If power to 1000
Liter of water . The power shall be mixed with water to a creamy consistency before
being added to the water in the storage tank. If proprietary brand of chemical is
used, the proportions shall be as specified by the markers, When the storage tank is
full, the supply shall be topped and all the taps on the distribution pipes opened
successively , working progressively away from the storage tank. Each tap shall be
closed when the water discharge begins to smell of chlorine. The storage tank shall then
be topped up with water from the supply pipe and with more disinfecting chemical
in the recommended proportions. The storage tank & pipes shall then remain charged
at least for three hours. Finally, the tank and pipes shall be thoroughly flushed out
before any water is used for domestic purpose.
290
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
DISPOSAL
1.
FOR
EXTERNAL
DRAINAGE
Section – 13
&
SEWAGE
GENERAL SCHEME
The contractor shall install a drainage system to effectively collect, drain and dispose all
soil and waste water from various parts of the buildings, appurtenances and equipment.
The piping system shall finally terminate and discharge into the Sewerage Treatment
Plant and then into the City sewer manhole. The piping work mainly consists of laying of
UPVC pipes, as called for on the Tendered drawings. All piping shall be installed at
depth greater than 60 cm below finished ground level. The disposal system shall
include construction of gully traps, manholes, intercepting chambers as indicated. The
piping system shall be vented suitably at the starting point of all branch drains, main
drains, the highest/lowest point of drain and at intervals as shown. All ventilating
arrangements shall be un obstructive and concealed. The work shall be executed strictly
in accordance with IS:1742. The sewage system shall be subject to smoke test for its
soundness as directed by the Project Director. Wherever the sewerage pipes run above
water supply lines, same shall be completely encased in cement concrete 1:2:4 all round
with the prior approval of the Project Director.
2.
LAYING AND JOINTING OF PIPES
2.1
General
All the material shall be new of best quality conforming to specifications and subject to
the approval of the PMCs. Drainage lines shall be laid to the required gradients and
profiles. All drainage work shall be done in accordance with the local municipal by-laws.
Contractor shall obtain necessary approval and permission for the drainage system from
the municipal or any other competent authority. Location of all manholes, catch basins
etc. shall be confirmed by the Project Director before the actual execution of work at
site. All work shall be executed as directed by the Project Director.
2.2
Alignment and Grade
The sewer and storm water drainage pipe/drains shall be carefully laid to levels and
gradients shown in the plans and sections but subject to modifications as shall be ordered
by the Project Director from time to time to meet the requirements of the works. Great
care shall be taken to prevent sand etc. from entering the pipes. The pipes between two
manholes shall be laid truly in straight lines without vertical or horizontal undulations.
The body of the pipes shall rest on an even bed in the trench for its length and places
shall be excavated to receive collar for the purpose of jointing. No deviations from the
lines, depths of cuttings or gradients as called for on the Tendered drawings shall be
291
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
permitted without the written approval of the Project Director. All pipes shall be laid at least
60cms below the finished ground level or as called for on the Tendered drawings.
2.3
Setting out Trenches
2.4
The contractor shall set out all trenches, manholes, chambers and such other works to true
grades and alignments as called for. He shall provide the necessary instruments for
setting out and verification for the same. All trenches shall be laid to true grade and in
straight lines and as shown on the Tendered drawings. The trenches shall be laid to
proper levels by the assistance of boning rods and sight rails which shall be fixed at
intervals not exceeding 10 meters or as directed by the PMC.
Trench Excavation
The trenches for the pipes shall be excavated with bottoms formed to level and gradients
as shown on the Tendered drawings or as directed by the Project Director. In soft and
filled in ground, the Project Director may require the trenches to be excavated to a greater
depth then the shown on the Tendered drawings and to fill up such additional excavation
with concrete (1:4:8) consolidated to bring the excavation to the required levels as shown
on the Tendered drawings.
All excavations shall be properly protected where necessary by suitable timbering, piling
and sheeting as approved by the Project Director. All timbering and sheeting when
withdrawn shall be done gradually to avoid falls. All cavities shall be adequately filled
and consolidated. No blasting shall be allowed without prior approval in writing from the
Project Director. It shall be carried out under thorough and competent supervision, with
the written permission of the appropriate authorities taking full precautions connected
with the blasting operations. All excavated earth shall be kept clear of the trenches to a
distance equal to 75 cms.
2.5
Obstruction of Roads
The contractor shall not occupy or obstruct by his operation more than one half of the
width of any road or street and sufficient space shall then be left for public and private
transit. He shall remove the materials excavated and bring them back again when the
trench is required to be refilled. The contractor shall obtain the consent of the Project
Director in writing before closing any road to vehicular traffic and the foot walks must
be clear at all times.
2.6
Protection of Pipes etc.
All pipes, water mains, cables etc. met in the course of excavation shall be carefully
protected and supported. Care shall be taken not to disturb the cables, the removal of
which shall be arranged by the contractor with the written consent from the Owner.
292
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
2.7
Trench Back Filling
Section – 13
Refilling of the trenches shall not be commenced until the length of pipes therein has
been tested and approved. All timbering which may be withdrawn safely shall be
removed as filling proceeds. Where the pipes are unprotected by concreted haunching,
selected fine material shall be carefully hand-packed around the lower half of the pipes so
as to buttress them to the sides of the trench.
The refilling shall then be continued to 150mm over the top of the pipe using selected fine
hand packed material, watered and rammed on both sides of the pipes with a wooden
hammer. The process of filling and tamping shall proceed evenly in layers not exceeding
150mm thickness, each layer being watered and consolidated so as to maintain an equal
pressure on both sides of the pipe line. In gardens and fields the top solid and turf if any,
shall be carefully replaced.
2.8
Contractor to ensure Settlement and Damages
The contractor shall at his own costs and expenses, make good promptly during the
whole period for the works in hand if any settlement occurs in the surfaces of roads,
beams, footpaths, gardens, open spaces etc. in the public or private areas caused by his
trenches or by his other excavations and he shall be liable for any accident caused
thereby. He shall also, at his own expense and charges, repair (and make good) any
damage done to building and other property. If in the opinion of the Project Director he
fails to make good such works with all practicable despatch, the Project Director shall be
at his liberty to get the work done by other means and the expenses thereof shall be paid
by the contractor or deducted from any money that may be or become due to him or
recovered from him by any other manner according to the laws of land.
The contractor shall at his own costs and charges provide places for disposal of all
surplus materials not required to be used on the works. As each trench is refilled, surplus
soil shall be immediately removed, the surface shall be properly restored and roadways
and sides shall be left clear.
2.9
Removal of water from Sewer, trench etc
The contractor shall at all times during the progress of work keep the excavations free
from water which shall be disposed by him in a manner as will neither cause injury to the
public health nor to the public or private property nor to the work completed or in
progress nor to the surface of any road or streets, nor cause any interference with the use
of the same by the public.
If any excavation is carried out at any point or points to a greater width of the specified
cross section of the sewer with its cover, the full width of the trench shall be filled with
293
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
concrete by the contractor at his own expense and charges to the requirements of the
Project Director.
2.10
Route Markers
Markers indicating the particular service shall be provided along with the routes of pipe
trenches. Markers shall be of mild steel indicating the type of service installed and the
direction of flow painted on it. The markers shall be set firmly in a concrete base and
installed at all corner and turning points. Over straight runs, markers shall be spaced
centre to centre at 50 meter centre (generally).
2.11
Laying and jointing of UPVC PIPES
Soil, waste & vent pipes in shafts under the floors shall consist of UPVC pipes as
described earlier. Waste pipes from bottle trap to floor/urinal traps for wash basin, urinal
and sink shall also be of UPVC pipes and fittings.
All Horizontal pipes running below the slab and along the ceiling, shall be fixed on
structural adjustable clamps, strudy hangers of the design as called for in the Tendered
drawings. The pipes shall be laid in uniform slope and proper levels. All vertical pipes
shall be truly vertical fixed by means of stout clamps in two sections, bolted together,
built into the walls, wedged and neatly jointed. The branch pipes shall be connected to
the stack at the same angle as that of fittings. All connections between soil, waste and
ventilating pipes and branch pipes shall be made by using pipe fittings with inspection
doors for cleaning. Pipes shall be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for
repair and maintenance and shall not cause obstruction in shafts. Where the horizontal
run off the pipe is long or where the pipes cross over building expansion joints etc.
suitable allowance shall be provided for any movements in the pipes by means of
expansion joint etc. such that any such movement does not damage the installation in any
way.
Before jointing, the interior of the socket and exterior of the spigots shall be thoroughly
cleaned and dried. The spigot end shall be inserted into the socket right up to the back of
the socket and carefully. The jointed pipe line shall be at required levels and alignment.
No pipe/ joint shall be covered till the pipe line has been tested & approved (written) by
the owner’s site Engineer.
Before the appliances are connected all opening of pipes shall be inspected and tested.
All opening of pipes shall be sealed with plugs and water test in small sections of pipes
shall be carried out.
After installation of all the appliances, discharge test shall be conducted individually and
collectively. Obstruction in any of the pipe lines shall be traced and whole system is
examined for hydraulic performance, including the retention of any adequate water seal
294
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
in each trap. Any defect revealed by the tests shall be made good and the tests are
repeated until a satisfactory result is obtained.
2.0
2.1
GULLY PIT :
To be the standard size 0.4 m x 0.43 m and to be built in cement mortar 1:3 or 3:1 as
specified in strict accordance with Tendered drawings. The internal sides and floor are
to be finished with 12mm cement plaster to be fitted with a 100 mm P.V.C. overflow
pipe with hinged cover and handle 0.90x 45 C.I. Gully grid of the standard weight 15
cm syphone. The gully grid and frame are to be of 106 kg.
S.W. Gully Trap
Gully trap shall be stoneware conforming to IS:651. These shall be sound and free from
visible defects such as fire cracks, or hair cracks. The glaze of the traps shall be free
from cracks. They shall give a sharp clear note when struck with light hammer. There
shall be no broken blisters. Each gully trap shall have one CI grating of square size
corresponding to the dimensions of inlet of gully trap. It will also have a water tight C.I
cover with frame inside dimensions 150 x 180 mm the cover weighing not less than 4.5
kg and the frame not less than 2.7kg. The grating cover and frame shall be of good
casting and shall have truly square machined seating faces.
Fixing of S.W. Gully Trap
The excavation for gully traps shall be done true to dimensions and levels as indicated on
plans or as directed by the Project Director /Consultant / PMC. The gully traps shall be fixed
on cement concrete foundation 65cm square and not less than 10cm thick. The mix for the
concrete will be 1:4:8. The jointing of gully outlet to the branch drain shall be done similar
to the jointing of S.W. Pipes described earlier. After fixing and testing gully and branch
drain, a brick work of specified class in cement mortar 1:5 shall be built with a half brick
masonry work round the gully trap from the top of the bed concrete upto ground level. The
space between the chamber and trap shall be filled in with cement concrete 1:3:6. The upper
portion of the chamber i.e. above the top level of the trap shall be plastered inside the
cement mortar 1:3 finish with a floating coat of neat cement. The corners and bottom of the
chamber shall be rounded off so as to slope towards the grating.
C.I cover with frame 300 x 300 mm (inside) shall then be fixed on the top of the brick
masonry with cement concrete 1:2:4 and rendered smooth. The finished top cover shall be
so as to prevent the surface water from entering the gully trap.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE
Excavating trenches in all kind of soil of required width for pipes including excavation for
295
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
sockets and dressing of sides, ramming of bottoms, including getting out the excavated soil &
then returning the soil as required, in layers not exceeding 20 cm in depth including consolidating
each deposited layer by ramming, watering, etc & disposing of surplus excavated soil as directed
within a lead of 50m.
up to 1.50 m depth
Pipes 80 mm to 300 mm diameter
Supplying, fixing and testing PVC soil, waste and vent pipes (SWR) confirming to IS13592 :
1990, type B with rubber ring (confirming to IS 5382)with solvent joint inclusive of all necessary
specials like bends, tees, offsets, door bends, junctions, screw type caps with rubber rings for
cleanout pipe ends, etc., suspended under floor slabs/fixed on walls or on pipe racks in shafts.
All suspenders, saddles, pipe packs are to be quoted separately under relevant items.
a)
b)
110mm dia
160mm dia
Encasing of PVC pipe with sand bed of 150mm thick all round wherever required. The scope of
work excludes the cost of pipes.
a) 110mm dia
b) 160mm dia
Square-mouth S.W. gully trap class SP-1 complete with C.I. grating brick masonry chamber with
water tight C.I. cover with frame of 300x300 mm size (inside) the weight of cover to be notless
than 4.50 kg and frame to be not less than 2.70 kg as per standard design. Size- 180mm x 150mm.
Brick masonry chamber for underground C.I. inspection chamber and bends with bricks in
cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand) C.I. cover with frame (light duty) 455x610 mm
internal dimensions, total weight of cover with frame to be not less than 38 kg (weight of cover
23 kg and weight of frame 15 kg), R.C.C. top slab with 1:2:4 mix (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4
graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) foundation concrete 1:5:10 (1 cement : 5 fine sand :
10 graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size), inside plastering 12 mm thick with cement
mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) finished smooth with a floating coat of neat cement on
walls and bed concrete etc. complete as per standard design: Size. Inside dimensions 600 x 850,
455x610 mm and 45 cm deep for line with three or more inletes. The quoted rate shall also
include necessary excavation and back filling.
296
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Brick masonry manhole in cement mortar 1:4 ( 1 cement : 4 coarse sand) with R.C.C. top slab
with 1:2:4 mix (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size),
foundation concrete 1:4:8 mix (1 cement : 4 coarse sand : 8 graded stone aggregate 40 mm
nominal size), inside plastering 12 mm thick with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand)
finished with floating coat of neat cement and making channels in cement concrete 1:2:4 (1
cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) finished with a floating
coat of neat cement complete as per standard design. Size. Inside size 90x80 cm and 75 cm deep
including C.I. cover with frame (light duty) 455x610 mm internal
dimensions, total weight of cover and frame to be not less than 38 kg (weight of cover 23 kg and
weightof frame 15 kg). The quoted rate shall also include necessary excavation, refilling
disposing of surplus earth within a lead of 300 mtr. etc. complete.
Providing Precast Cement Concrete / C.I Manhole cover and frame conforming to IS : 125922002., The concrete mix should be not less than M 30.
Gully Trap cover / frame - 180 x 150 mm internal size.
297
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
MODE OF MEASUREMENT
The method of measurement for various item in the tender shall be generally in
accordance with the latest ISI : 1200 code , if not stated otherwise in this tender
documents.
1.0
EXCAVATION :
a
Footings. : Area of excavation for footing shall be measured equally to the area of
the lowest concrete course as shown on the drawing -Depth shall be measured
vertically from ground level to bottom of concrete course or dry rubble packing or
brick flat soling as the case may be.
Plinth Beams : Depth of excavation for plinth beam shall be measured from ground
level up to bottom of beam and width equal to width of beam. If a leveling course
is ordered. It shall be measured up to the bottom of the leveling course.
Where the excavations is made in trenches, measurements for cutting shall be taken
by means of taps and staff and after completion of work and total quantity of
excavation computed from these levels in manner approved by the PMC/NLUO.
Where excavation is made for leveling the site ,levels shall be taken before start and after
completion of work and work and total quantity of excavation computed from these levels
in manner approved by the PMC.
Where soil including soft rock are mixed hard rock after excavation shall be stacked
separately. Measurement of the entire excavation shall be taken as indicated above.
Excavation of hard rock shall be measured from stacks of excavated hard rock and reduced
by 40% for bulkage and voids. The quantity so arrived at shall be paid for under hard rock.
The quantity so arrived at shall be paid as soil including and quantity payable under hard
rock shall be paid as soil including soft rock.
Any additional excavation required for working space from work showing, planning,
dewatering etc, shall not be measured for separately. Rates quoted for excavation shall
include all these factors and filling back the trenches with available soil.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.0
EARTH FILLING
To open spaces : Filling shall be measured from cross sections of embankment, levels of
which are recorded by means of levels before start of work and after completion of work.
When it is not possible to measure filling from cross sections, it may be measured from
loose stack of lorry measurements with previous written permission from the N.L.U.O's
Engineer and 20% deduction shall be made from the measured quantity to arrived at the net
quantity payable.
3.0
CEMENT CONCRETE (PLAIN AND REINFORCED)
Cement concrete in P.C.C. items shall be measured excluding reinforcement and plaster
thickness but including hire charges of centering and shuttering all equipments, curing,
stacking and fair finishing. Reinforcement and plate shall be measured and paid separately .
298
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Items like R.C.C precast jalli ,R.C.C. pipes and other such items which are normally
manufactured in factories as well as those items which have been specifically mentioned in
schedule of quantities shall be measured inclusive of reinforcement.
No deduction will be made for opening up to 0.1sq. and no extra labour for forming such
opening or voids shall be paid,
Columns shall be measured from the top of the footing & shall be measured through.
Including flare of the column in case of flat slab construction.
Beams shall be measured from face to face of columns/beams and shall include haunches if
any. The depth of the beam (other than draft foundation beams) shall be measured from top
of the slab to bottom of the beam.
In case of combined footings and raft foundation. The exposed portion of beam rib shall be
measured as beam and the remaining portion measured in footings/raft slab.
Slab (Other than an raft foundation) shall be measured in bays (Clear of beam ) either
deduction for column portion.
Staircase : Measurements shall be in cum staircase comprising of step soffit slab .Landing
slab shall be measured and paid under this item, side parapet walls., Railings finishing of
risers & trades M.S. reinforcement and plastering etc. shall be paid separately under
respective terms.
4.0
REINFORCEMENT :
Shall be measured in lengths of bars as actually placed subject to more of required as per
structural Tendered drawings in position weight calculated actual or as per standard tables
which ever is less with 3 places of decimals. No allowance being made in the weight for
rolling margin. Wastage and binding wire shall not be measured. Authorized overlaps and
spacers shall only be measured.
5.0
BRICK WORK
Except walls of half brick thickness or less. All brick work and be measured in cubic
meters stating thickness.
THICKNESS OF WALL :
Brick walls up to & including three (3) bricks in thickness shall be measured in multiples
of half brick which shall deemed to be inclusive of the mortar joints.Where fractions of
half brick occur to PMCural or other reasons. The measurement shall be taken as full given
brick.
For walling which is more than three bricks in thickness the actual thickness of wall shall
be measured to the nearest centimeter.
299
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
DEDUCTION
i.
ii.
iii.
6.0
No deduction or additions shall be made on any account for :Ends of dissimilar materials ( i.e., joists, beams, lintels, lofts, girders, rafter, purlin,
trusses, corbels, steps etc) up to 500 square centimeters in section.
Opening up to 0.1 sqm in section.
Walls plates lead plates and bearing of slabs, chajja & the like when the thickness
does not exceed 10.00 cm. and the bearing does not extend over the full width of
the wall.
WOOD WORK :
All wood work shall be measured net as fixed. No extra measurement will be given
for shape , joints, splayed, meeting styles of doors and windows and shall be
measured unit of square meter.
Area over one face inclusive of exposed frame thickness excluding width of cover
mould shall be measure in case of doors, windows and ventilators when frames
are included in the item. Portions embedded, in masonry or in flooring shall not be
measured. Where frames are measured separately. It shall be measured for finished
dimension. No allowance shall be made for wastage and for dimension supplied
beyond those specified. Length of piece shall be measured overall nearest to cm.
so as to include protections for tennons. Scarves or mitres, width and thickness
shall be measured to the nearest mm. cubical contents shall be worked out in units
of 10 cubic decimeter in whole numbers.
In case of moldings, rounding, rebates, circular and varying sections. The sectional
area of the pieces shall be taken as the area of the least square or rectangle from
which such a section can out.
7.0
STEEL/ ALUMIUM DOORS WINDOWS VENTILATORS LOUVERS :
Clear area over one face inclusive of exposed frame shall be measured. Anchor
fastner or portions embedded in masonry or flooring shall not be measured. All
composite units shall be measured as fixed. Extra for side hung, top hung & center
hung portions shall be measured from outside or the casement frames.
8.0
ALUMINIUM PORFORATED AUTOMATIC ROLLING SHUTTERS :
Clear width between side jams and clear height between floor and bottom of
lintel / beam shall be measured . Hood shall not be measured separately. The rate
should be inclusive of the cost hood.
9.0
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR :
300
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
The height of the gate shall be measured as the length of the single /double
channels and breadth from outside to out side of the end fixed single / double
channels in open portion of the gate.
10.0 FLOORING , SKIRTING , DADO :
Flooring shall be measured from skirting to skirting and where the wall surfaces
are plastered or provided with dado it shall be measured from plaster to plaster or
from dado to dado respectively.
11.0 PLASTERING AND POINTING. :
All plastering and pointing work shall be measured in square meters unless
otherwise described, deductions will be made in accordance of IS- 1200.
12.0 PAINTING, WHITE WASHING COLOUR WASHING AND DISTEMPERING :
All painting work shall be measured in square meters.
Net area of the surface painted shall be measured. Deductions shall be made in
accordance of IS-1200.
SECTION -XV
MODEL RULES FOR THE PROTECTION OF HEALTH AND
SANITARY ARRANGEMENTS OR WORKERS
1.0
APPLICATION:
These rules shall apply to all Construction of National Law University Campus Works in charge
of the Proposed University Campus at Naraj, Cuttack for National Law University ODISHA .
2.0
DEFINITION:
a. Work place means a place at which, at an average 50 workers are employed in connection
with construction work.
b. Large work place means a place at which an average 500 or more workers are employed in
connection with the construction work.
3.0
FIRST AID.
a.
At every work place, there shall be maintained in readily accessible place first aid
appliance including an adequate supply of sterilized dressings and sterilized cotton
wool. The appliance shall be kept in good order and in large work place they shall be
301
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
b.
c.
d.
4.0
Section – 13
placed under the charge of a responsible a person who shall be readily available
during working hours.
At large work place, where hospital facilities are not available within easy distance of
the works, first aid posts shall be established and run by trained compound.
Where large work place are remote from regular hospitals an indoor ward shall be
provided with one bed for every 250 employees.
Where large work place are situated in cities, towns in their suburbs and no beds are
considered necessary owing to the proximity of city or town hospitals, suitable
transport shall be provided to facility removal of urgent cases to the hospitals. At
other works places, some conveyance facilities such as a car, shall be kept readily
available to take inquired person or persons suddenly taken to the nearest hospital.
DRINKING WATER :
a.
In every place there shall be provided & maintained at suitable places easily
accessible to labour, sufficient supply of cold water fit for drinking.
b.
where drinking water is obtained from an intermittent public water supply, which
work place shall be provided with storage where such drinking water shall be stored.
c.
Every water supply of storage shall be at a distance of not less than 15m from any
latrine, drain or other source of pollution. Where water has to be drawn from an
existing well which is within the proximity of latrine, drain or any other source of
pollution, the well shall be properly chlorinated before water is drawn from it for
drinking . All such wells shall be entirely closed in and be provided with trap door
which shall be dust and water proof.
d.
5.0
A reliable pump shall be fitted to each covered well, the trap door shall be kept
locked and opened only for cleaning or inspection which shall be done at least once a
month
WASHING AND BATH PLACES.
a.
b.
6.0
Adequate washing and bathing places shall be provided separately for men and
women.
Such places shall be kept in clean & drained condition.
SCALE OF ACCOMODATIONIN LATRINES AND URINALS.
There shall be provided within the precincts of every work place latrines and urinals and an
accessible place, and the accommodation, separately for each of them shall not be less than
the following scale :
No of Seats.
a.
Where the number of persons does not exceed 50
2
302
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
b.
Where the number of persons does exceed
3
50 but dose not exceed 100
c.
For every additional 10
3 per 100
In particular case the Engineer who have the power to vary the scale where necessary.
7.0
LARTINES AND URINALS FOR WOMEN:
If women are employed separate latrines and urinals screened from those men and marked
in the vernacular in conspicuous letters "For Women Only" shall be provided on the scale
laid in Rule 6. Those for men shall be similarly marked "For men Only" a poster showing
the figure of a man or a woman shall also be exhibited at the entrance of latrines for the "
respective sex”. There shall be adequate supply of water close to the urinals and latrines.
8.0
LATRINES AND URINALS:
All latrines shall be provided with septic tanks or leach pits in case of small units. All the
latrines shall be kept in good sanitary conditions.
9.0
CONSTRUCTION OF LATRINES :
The inside walls shall be constructed of masonry of some suitable heat resisting nonabsorbent materials and shall be cement washed inside & outside at lest once a year. The
dates of cement washing shall be noted in a register maintained for this purpose and kept
available for inspection. Latrines will not be of a standard low than bore hole system and
should have thatched roofs.
10.0 DISPOSAL FOR EXCRETA :
Unless otherwise arrange for by the local sanitary authority arrangements for proper
disposal of excreta shall be made by septic tank or leach pit duly approved by the engineer
and in conformity with the requirements of local public health authorities.
11.0 PROVISIONS OF SHELTER DURING REST :
At every work place there shall be provided free of cost two suitable sheds one for meals
and the other for rest separately for men and less than 3.5m from the floor level, to the
lowest part of the roof. The sheds should be roofed with at least thatch and mud flooring
will be provided with a dwarf wall around not less than 750mm. Sheds should be kept clean
and the space should be on the basis of at least 0.05 square meter per head.
12.0 CRECHE :
303
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
a.
i)
ii)
iii)
Section – 13
At every work place at which 50 or more women workers are ordinarily employed
there shall be provided two huts for the use of children under the age of 6 years
belonging to such women one hut shall be used for infants game and play and the
other as their bed room. The hut shall not be constructed on a lower standard than the
following :
Thatched roofs.
Mud floors and walls.
Planks spread over the mud floor & covered with matting.
The huts shall be provided with suitable and sufficient openings for light and ventilation.
There shall be adequate provision of sweepers to keep the place clean. There shall be two
daily in attendance. Sanitary utensils shall be provided to the satisfaction of the Health
Officer of the area concerned. The use of the hut shall be restricted to children, there
attendants and mothers of the children.
b.
Where the number of women workers is more than 25 but less than 50 the Contractor
shall provide at least one hut and one dia to look after the children of women
workers.
c. The size of creche or cheches shall very according to the number of women workers.
d. The creche or creches shall be properly maintained and necessary equipments like toys
etc, shall be provided.
13.0 CANTEEN :
A cooked food canteen on a moderate scale shall be provided for the benefit of workers
wherever it is considered expedient.
SECTION -XVI
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR GLAZING SYSTEM & STONE CLADDING
1.
SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of works under this contract includes design, supply, installation, protection, guarantees,
testing and maintenance up to the defects liability period Spider Glazing Entrance Doors and stone
claddings.
The work under this section includes all lab our, materials, equipment and services as required for the
complete design, engineering, testing, fabrication, assembly, delivery, anchorage, installation,
protection and waterproofing of the glazing system, cladding etc. All in on the drawings or described
in the specification provided that the same can be reasonably inferred accordance with the true intent
and meaning of the specification and drawings taken together, regardless of the whether the same may
or may not be particularly shown there from. Anchorage includes all primary and secondary anchor
304
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
assemblies and supportive structural framing as required to secure GLAZING SYSTEM system,
cladding and canopy to the building structure.
The detailed scope of work is outlined hereunder:
1.
The GLAZING SYSTEM, Trellis, canopy, Aluminium cladding, Entrance doors, Aluminium fins
hereafter shall include but will not necessarily be limited to the following:
a.
S.S Frames, vision panels, spandrels, doors etc
b.
Openable panels where indicated, inclusive of all accessories, fittings etc.
c.
Copings, soffit trimmers, and external STONE Cladding panels for both STONE Cladding
and GLAZING SYSTEM / GLAZING SYSTEM system.
d.
All caulking, sealing and flashing including sealing at junctions with roof waterproofing and
exterior wall, flashing at doorway, raised kerbs and in window surrounds.
e.
Sealant within and around the perimeter of all work under this section.
f.
Separators /EPDM and silicon gaskets and trims etc.
g.
All steel structural framing and beam supports, anchors and attachments as required for the
complete installation of the whole system wherever specified.
h.
Inserts in concrete, anchor fasteners etc. for the anchorage of all work under this section to the
approval of structural consultants.
i.
Isolation of all dissimilar metal surfaces as well as moving surfaces similar or dissimilar.
j.
Fire-stops, Flashings, Sealing of all interfaces with buildings etc.
k.
Protection of work during storage and construction until handing over.
l.
Engineering proposals, drawings and data.
m.
Shop drawings, engineering data and structural calculations of all systems including framing,
fasteners and cladding.
n.
Scheduling and monitoring of the work.
o.
All samples, mock-ups and test units.
p.
Coordination with work of Main civil Contractor and other agencies/contractors employed on
site.
q.
All final exterior and interior cleaning of the GLAZING SYSTEM , STONE Cladding,
Entrance doors, Aluminium fins etc.
r.
Hoisting, staging, scaffolding and temporary services.
s.
Specified tests, inclusive of necessary reports.
t.
Maintenance manuals.
u.
Design and Performance guarantees.
305
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
v.
Section – 13
Periodic inspection, supervision, and advice by tenderer’s Principal as well as a back-up
guarantee in an acceptable format by the Principal for the quality and performance of the
system/installation.
w.
Construction monitoring for regular quality control and technical inspection to ensure the
work conforms to the shop drawing details (including any modification made during testing)
and acceptable standards of quality.
2.
REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
2.1
Materials and workmanship shall comply with but shall not be limited to the latest editions of the
following standards as a minimum.
ANSI
Z97.1.84
Safety Glazing materials used in Buildings
ASTM
C 1036-90
Specification for float glass
ASTM
C 1048-90
Specification for Heat treated Float Glass
ASTM
E 774-88
Specification for sealed Insulating Glass Units
ASTM
C 1172-91
Specification for Laminated Architectural Glass
ASTM
C 864-90
Specification for compression Seal Gaskets
ASTM
C 1115-89
Specification for Silicon Rubber Gaskets
ASTM
C 920-87
Specification for Sealants
ASTM
C 509-90
Specification for sealing material
CPSC
16 CFR 1201
Specification for Safety Glass
GTA Specification
Specification for environment durability for heat
strengthened Spandrel Glass with Applied opacifiers
BSCP
118
Structural use of Aluminium
In general the Contractor may follow any International Standards subject to his satisfying to the
ARCHITECTS that these specifications are equivalent to latest specifications issued by ASTM,
AAMA, BSS, ISO & SSIR
Copies of all codes proposed to be followed for design, materials, installation and testing shall be
submitted to the ARCHITECTS within 2 weeks of issue of Works Order.
306
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
2.2
Section – 13
Building Regulations
Design of the GLAZING SYSTEM shall comply with all Government codes and regulations. For
wind design, all calculations shall comply with the requirements of the relevant National Building
Code and Indian Standards Code, unless specified otherwise.
3.
GUARANTEE
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for and shall guarantee in an approved format proper design
and performance of his installed systems for a period of 10 years from handing over of works.
The design and installation shall be to the best international standards and shall specially take account
of wind and seismic loads, Storms, air pollution, thermal stresses, building movements and alikes.
In addition to above specific 10 years guarantee in approved formats shall be given for performance of glass,
double glazed units, anodizing, PVDF coating and sealants. All the Guarantees shall be submitted
before final payment and 50% of total security deposit are released after virtual completion, and
shall not in any way limit any other rights to correction which the Employer may have under the
Contract.
4.
CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES
4.1
The Contractor’s responsibilities include but are not necessarily limited to the following items:
a)
The Contractor shall provide and install all supplementary parts necessary to complete all
items generally implied in the drawings and in the specifications though not specifically
shown or mentioned.
This shall include the design and sizing of all sections and anchor assemblies to meet the
performance and design requirements, furnishing and installation of all inserts, fasteners,
clips, bracing and framework as required for the proper anchorage of the GLAZING
SYSTEM system elements to the structure, unless otherwise noted or specified to be
furnished/installed by another contractor. Alternate anchorage proposals shall be considered,
if, in the opinion of the Architect that the general design and intent of the drawings and
specifications are maintained. The Contractor’s system therefore must perform satisfactorily
as a whole.
b)
Design Responsibility: Drawings and specifications indicate the required basic dimension,
profiles, and performance criteria. The Contractor shall have the option of modification and
addition of details subject to Architect’s approval and provided the visual concept and
performance requirements are fulfilled. Proposed modifications shall be clearly shown on
shop drawings as “Design Modifications” and acceptance of the same will not relieve the
307
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Contractor from sole responsibility for performance of the GLAZING SYSTEM system and
cladding. The contractor shall be solely and fully responsible for proper design, installation
and satisfactory performance. If the design is upgraded and revised due to structural
requirement, Contractor shall be bound to that and nothing extra shall be paid for that.
c)
In-plant and job site inspection : The Contractor shall allow the ARCHITECTS or their
authorized agent full access to plants, shops and assembly points to view and inspect the
processes and methods employed in the fabrication, assembly and finishing of the GLAZING
SYSTEM and STONE Cladding for this project.
ARCHITECTS will have the right to reject any and all aluminium GLAZING SYSTEM /
GLAZING SYSTEM system and STONE Cladding components and assemblies during
assembly and erection if the workmanship and intent are not in strict conformity with the
approved shop drawings, structural calculations, documentation, certifications, samples and
mock-up.
SHOP DRAWINGS
Within one month upon award of contract, the contractor shall prepare shop drawings by necessary
modifications to the preliminary drawing and two copies of all shop drawings shall be submitted to the
ARCHITECTS for review and approval. The ARCHITECTS’s review of all shop drawings will be
limited to their conformity to the design concept and specifications. ARCHITECTS’s approval of the
shop drawings will not relieve the contractor from any of the responsibilities and requirements as
stated in Contract Documents. No work shall be fabricated until the shop drawings and all other
related submissions, documentation, certifications, samples and the mock-up for that work have been
reviewed and approved by the ARCHITECTS. On approval the Contractor shall submit 4 copies of
shop drawings to ARCHITECTS for release on site.
Shop drawings shall incorporate scaled and dimensioned plans, elevations, sections and full size
details for all work in this section.
Shop drawings shall indicate the desired dimensional profiles and modules, function, design and
performance standards and in general, delineate the scope of work. The contractor shall verify and coordinate these items with all applicable and/or related trades, contract drawings and specifications.
Since the dimension and modular references shown on the drawings are for specific and/or typical
detail, the shop drawings shall include a full complete layout of all modular and referenced
308
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
dimensions for all the GLAZING SYSTEM, aluminium cladding, Entrance doors and aluminium fins
and their related elements. All dimensions/modules, etc. shall be field checked as required.
The full size details shall show and specify all metal sections, types of finishes; areas to be sealed and
sealant materials; types of gaskets; direction and magnitude of thermal expansion; direction and
magnitude of all applicable construction including fasteners and welds; all anchorage assemblies and
components; the fabrication and erection tolerances for the work and applicable related works
adjoining, attached to or in some way related to the work covered by these specifications. The location
of all static and dynamic anchor assemblies, the direction of thermal and other applicable building
movements, co-ordination with concrete works and the sequence of installation shall be designated on
the applicable plans, elevations and/or sections. All details shall be subject to ARCHITECTS’s
approval.
Shop drawings shall indicate the desired profiles, dimensions, details of metal finish and in general
delineate the scope of work. Profile adjustments in the interest of fabrications, erection, weatherability or ability to satisfy the performance requirements may be made only with the written approval
of the ARCHITECTS provided that the general design and intent of the drawings and specifications
are maintained.
Four copies plus two reproducible sepia prints each of all final approved shop drawings shall be
submitted to ARCHITECTS.
STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS
The Contractor shall employ a competent design engineer to design his systems and components.
During the design stage, the Contractor shall interact actively with the Structural Consultants
concerning all aspects of design and shall obtain all the information from them concerning the
structure, probable deflections and other building movements etc. The Contractor shall take full
account of all possible building movements as well as the movements of his GLAZING SYSTEM and
cladding systems in his design. The Contractor shall submit his detailed structural calculations for the
systems and each of their typical and non-typical components within 3 weeks of Works Order and
shall guarantee that his design will ensure the structural safety and integrity of the GLAZING
SYSTEM, cladding and glass panels against all natural forces, superimposed loads, environment and
consequent movements. The Contractor shall modify his design as required by the Structural
Consultants to meet structural requirements.
309
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
The Contractor shall obtain the Structural Consultants’ approval to his design calculations and to the
provisions made in his design for all the building movements, and shall directly pay fees to the
Structural Consultants shall be jointly responsible to the ARCHITECTS, for the correctness of the
fixing and interaction of the GLAZING SYSTEM with the structure so as to ensure that all the
movements envisaged between the structure and the GLAZING SYSTEM are fully taken care of.
However, the Contractor alone shall be responsible for the workmanship of fabrication and installation
and shall indemnify ARCHITECTS against all claims due to defects or non-performance during the
specified 10 year Guarantee period. The provisions of this clause shall not in any way limit
ARCHITECTS’s rights stated under other clauses of the Contract.
The Grade of R.C.C. in the building structure is as specified in DESIGN DATA. The Contractor shall
design anchorage / fasteners for this grade of concrete with adequate safety factor.
The Contractor shall submit 3 sets of design calculations to ARCHITECTS after they are endorsed by
the Structural Consultants for compatibility with R.C.C. and steel structure.
DOCUMENTATION AND CERTIFICATION
Glass and Glazing Documentation : The applicable glass manufacturer (s) shall submit written
certification for ARCHITECTS’s review and approval stating that all glass and glazing requirements
as detailed and specified on the shop drawings have been reviewed and approved for use relative to
their specific application and/or design parameters, compatibility to adjacent materials and in
conformity with all requirements as detailed and specified in the Contract Documents. Certification
shall further state that the proposed glass and glazing materials are most appropriately suited for the
use or uses intended and recommended for the specific use or the selection of the glass and glazing
materials including, but not limited dot, gaskets, setting blocks, sealant, the design and dimensional
parameters of the glass pockets and the compatibility of materials. Test Certificate from approved
laboratories for U-Values and shading factor claimed by the Manufacturer shall be submitted.
Sealant Documentation : All sealant applications must be clearly designated on the applicable shop
drawing details and referenced to a master sealant schedule specifying materials, special instructions
and applications procedures. The applicable sealant manufacturers shall submit in writing that all
sealant requirements as detailed and specified on the shop drawings have been reviewed and approved
for use relative to their specific application and/or design intent, compatibility to adjacent materials
and in conformity with all the requirements as detailed and specified in the contract documents.
310
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
The manufacturer’s certification shall specify the optimum life expectancy, in years, for the proposed
sealant materials as detailed and specified on the shop drawings and/or master sealant schedule and
shall further state that the proposed materials are most appropriately suited for the use or uses intended
and recommended for the specific use or uses.
Quality Control Documentation: In-plant and job site quality control procedures shall be documented
in writing for Architects’ review and approval to ensure the design integrity and performance of the
as-built approval to ensure the design integrity and performance of the as-built product.
Documentation shall include schedule, detail, isometric and/or schematic explanatory sketches crossreferenced to the shop drawings, data sheets, etc., all as required to intelligently witness and assess
methods and materials; and to ensure that both the fabrication and installation are in accordance with
the contract documents.
ARCHITECTS shall be given free access to the plant to inspect fabrication procedures.
a) The in-plant quality control procedures shall include but not necessarily be limited to the
following items :
1
Fabrication
:
Tolerances, Joinery, Sleeves, etc
2
Finish Match
:
Approved finish and controls required for matching the exposed
surfaces
3
Assembly
:
Welds, fasteners, sealants, gaskets, separators, glazing etc.
4
Protection
:
Handling, protection, shipping etc.
b) The job site quality control procedures shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the
following items :
1
Anchorage
:
Lines, grades and related building tolerances
2
Installation
:
Tolerances, finish match, joinery, sleeves, flashing, welds,
fasteners, sealants, etc.
3
Sealing
4
Protection
&
:
As recommended by the applicable sealant manufacturers
:
As recommended by the applicable material manufacturers
Cleaning
311
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
SAMPLES & MANUALS
Within 3 weeks of issue of Work Order, the following samples of actual job site materials together with
detailed technical data / catalogues shall be submitted in duplicate, unless otherwise noted, and in the
sizes noted, for ARCHITECTS’s review and approval. Any
omission of an item or items which require the Contractor’s compliance with these documents does
not relieve him from such responsibility.
a)
Aluminium sheet panel: Each type and thickness; 600 x 600 mm size of the specified
thickness.
b)
Aluminium extrusions: One of each section: 300 mm long of specified thickness.
c)
Glass: Each type and kind, 300 x 300 mm size of specified thickness and including frame.
d)
Glazing gaskets, tapes, separators, glass setting blocks, etc : Each section or unit. 300mm
long or unit.
e)
Fasteners and connecting devices : Each type and size.
f)
Finish samples: After approval of the final finish coating the ARCHITECTS is to be provided
with approved samples.
g)
Window and door ironmongery and accessories, as applicable.
h)
Flashings and finish samples.
i)
Samples submitted should also include assembly of various components forming a typical
fixing detail complete with flat sheets, glazing, extrusion, fastener, sealants etc.
Mock-up
Before the fabrication and site installation is taken up and within 3 weeks of issue of Work Order, the
Contractor shall put up a mock-up of his proposed GLAZING SYSTEM / GLAZING SYSTEM
system at least 6.00 m high and 3 modules wide incorporating all types of in-fill panels, fire-stop,
flashing, shadowbox, bracketary, hardware and fixtures. A mock-up of 4 panels of STONE Cladding
shall also be put up. The mock-ups are essential for final approval of all material and installation
details by the Architect.
The Contractor shall submit samples and catalogues of door/window furniture for approval, as
applicable.
312
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Maintenance Manual:
Submit three copies each of detailed procedures for the periodic inspection, maintenance and cleaning
of all the GLAZING SYSTEM, cladding, revolving doors, windows and louver elements, other
finishes etc.
WORK SCHEDULE
Immediately on receiving Work Order the Contractor shall submit the final programmed work
schedule for the completion of the whole of the works including submittals, approvals, fabrication,
supply at site, installation & commissioning. The time schedule shall be acceptable to ARCHITECTS.
The time schedule shall be prepared in consultation with ARCHITECTS to suit the overall project
schedule and shall be updated from time to time to suit prevailing conditions and co-ordination with
other Contractors employed on site.
INSPECTION OF COMPONENTS
The Contractor shall submit a schedule of material specification and procedure for inspection of the
quality of components of the metal wall cladding/GLAZING SYSTEMing during the fabrication in
the plant.
The Contractor shall submit bi-weekly reports on the results of the inspection of the components, in a
format approved by the ARCHITECTS.
The Contractor shall submit a description of the procedure of delivery, hoisting, storage, handling,
fixing, scaffolding, temporary working stage or gondola, protection and cleaning.
STORAGE, PROTECTION AND PROGRAMME
The contractor shall submit a schedule on the procedure for inspection during installation so as to
maintain quality control on the job site.
The Contractor shall submit a detailed method statement for the protection of the surface of the
GLAZING SYSTEM & cladding members during delivery and erection with description as to when
the protection can be removed.
The Contractor shall submit weekly reports on the inspection of erection and installation as directed
by the ARCHITECTS.
313
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Delivery and Storage of Materials: All materials delivered to site shall be stored in allocated spaces
where the stored materials will not be exposed to rainwater, moisture or damage, and shall permit easy
access to and handling of the materials, materials shall be stored neatly and properly stacked.
a)
Aluminium wall cladding/GLAZING SYSTEM units and/or their components shall be
transported, handled and stored in a manner to preclude damage of any nature.
b)
Accessories & materials, required for erection at the site shall be delivered to the site in
labelled containers by the manufacturer.
c)
Remove all units or components which are cracked, bent, chipped, scratched or otherwise
unsuitable for installation and replace them promptly.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
All components, assemblies and completed work included in or pertinent to the work of this section
shall conform to or exceed the following performance standards and comply with all applicable and
governing building codes and regulations.
Thermal Movement: Provide for noiseless contraction and expansion of component materials for an
ambient temperature range of + 10 deg.C to 70 deg.C and a material temperature range of 100 dec.C
without buckling, opening of joints, glass breakage, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental
effects. Make allowance for vertical and horizontal expansion. For fabrication, assembly and erection,
procedures shall take into account the ambient temperature range at the time of the respective
operations.
Building Movement and related Building Tolerance : The design and installation of the GLAZING
SYSTEM system shall accommodate all inherent building movements and /or deflections and the
fabrication and installation tolerances of all related work not involved in this section without the loss
of, or any detrimental effect to, the performance requirements herein specified. The Contractor shall
verify and coordinate all such movements and/or tolerances with the Structural Consultants and the
Architect before designing all the components of GLAZING SYSTEM / GLAZING SYSTEM and
aluminium cladding so that movements and deflections in the structure do not affect the integrity and
safety of GLAZING SYSTEM and aluminium cladding and vice versa.
314
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Thermal property : All insulation materials, fire-stops and smoke seals shall comply with the current
requirements of the Chief Fire Officer, Mumbai Fire Brigade and other local authorities.
Structural Properties
a)
The design parameters of aluminium GLAZING SYSTEM/GLAZING SYSTEM system and
STONE Cladding and all related components shall comply with the requirements of all
relevant codes, National Building code, I.S. 875 and Indian Standard Code I.S. 456.
b)
No aluminium GLAZING SYSTEM / GLAZING SYSTEM system and cladding elements
including sealants and sealed joints shall sustain permanent deformation or failure under
loading equivalent to 1.5 times the design wind pressure herein specified.
c)
Deflections: The specified deflections must be reduced if they are in any way detrimental to
the GLAZING SYSTEM and cladding elements and sealants.
-
The maximum deflection on design wind pressure shall not exceed 1/240
of height or 15mm whichever is lesser for mullions.
-
No vertical deflection shall exceed 1/300 of span of transom/sill/head
members
-
Under 1.5 times design wind pressure there should be no permanent
deflection of framing member exceeding 1/1000 of span length.
-
Maximum deflection of glass under design wind pressure at centre of any
panel shall not exceed 15mm or as recommended by the manufacturer
whichever is less.
General
a)
All braces, supports and connections for the aluminium GLAZING SYSTEM / GLAZING
SYSTEM and cladding shall be deisgned, provided and installed complete as required.
b)
The GLAZING SYSTEM shall be anchored to the R.C.C. floor through serrated S. S.
Brackets. The contractor shall adjust anchor bolt locations to avoid cutting through any
reinforcement bar, with the help of re-bar position detectors.
315
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
c)
Section – 13
Variations from schematic layouts indicated on the drawings may be permitted but only if a
proposed revision does not, in Architects’ opinion, deviate from the design intent, cause
excessive stress in the structure, cause excessive deflection, inhibit thermal and building
movement or conflict with other requirements.
d)
Member shapes and/or profiles if schematically shown on the Architects’ drawings are not
necessarily the exact shapes required or best suited for the particular condition. Final shapes
and locations shall be as designed by the contractor and are subject to the Architect’s review
and approval.
e)
The height from the finished floor level to the top of the window sill shall not be less than as
shown in the drawing.
The horizontal or lateral load on such transom/railing (where not backed by an R.C.C.
parapet) shall be designed in accordance with the following criteria i.e. a horizontal UDL at
90.74 KN/m run, UDL supplied to the infill of 1.0 KN/m2 and a point load applied to part of
the infill at 0.5 KN.
f)
No holes shall be burned, filed or drilled in any structural steel members unless approved by
the Structural Consultant in writing.
g)
The contractor shall provide detailed layouts, alignment jigs etc. for the proper and exact
placement of all welded anchor studs, anchorage components, embedded anchor assemblies
etc.
h)
All metal GLAZING SYSTEM and cladding elements and their applicable anchorage
assemblies shall be designed to accommodate all thermal and buildings movements without
any harmful effect to the GLAZING SYSTEM and STONE Cladding.
i)
No field forming, cutting and/or alterations of primary wall elements will be allowed. All
framing members shall be shop fabricated and finish coated. No unfinished surfaces will be
permitted on exposed surfaces.
Concrete Tolerances.
The contractor shall take into account tolerances in concrete and masonry surfaces to which the
structural and glazing framework is fixed.
316
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Lightning Protection
The whole of the GLAZING SYSTEM when having insufficient clearance from the lightning
protection system shall be bonded as directly as possible to the lightning protection system. At each
end of each continuous length of GLAZING SYSTEM, STONE Cladding or louvers, provision shall
be made at top and bottom for bonding by the electrical contractor by the Employer. The exact
locations and details of the bonding points shall be determined by the ARCHITECTS.
Fire-stop and Interface with building.
Joints in the GLAZING SYSTEM / GLAZING SYSTEM system between successive floors shall have
the required fire resistance of at least 2 hours and shall comply with requirements of C.F.O., Mumbai.
A fire-stop-cum-smoke seal shall be provided at each window-head level. In addition the Contractor
shall provide aluminium flashing to approved design at the window sill level and on 2 sides of vision
panels.
All interfaces with building structure and other elements shall be sealed/flashed/provided with
expandable gaskets to Architect’s approval.
12.9
SPIDER GLASS
spider glazing : The spider glass shall be of minimum 37.52 mm laminated glass consists of 8 mm thk
clear float fully tempered glass + 1.52 pvb layer + 6 mm fully tempered reflective façade glass + 16
MM AG + 6 MM CLEAR FT. The glass shall be free from the defects and the edge of the glass shall
be machine polished, The glass shall have required drill hole and counter as per spider design all this
processing to be completed before the glass is toughened.
Specification defines nickel sulphide stones as a glass material defect. It is recommended than an
inspection procedure be used to eliminate the incidence of Nickel Sulphide (Nis) inclusions in all heat
strengthened /tempered glass. Alternatively heat soaks procedure shall be followed to minimize the
incidence of Nis induced failures if specified in any particular item of work like point fix spider
glazing at Entrance glazing .
The spider glass panel shall be supported by stainless steel tension cable system at
every glass panel grid horizontally and vertically as per design requirements. The glass
panel shall be suspended from top and shall have provision of expansion at the bottom
317
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
most panel to accommodate movement of the upper floor without cracking or creating
any additional stressed on the bottom glass.
STAINLESS STEEL SPIDERS AND TENSION ROD SYSTEM
The stainless steel spider to the façade shall be 300 series non magnetic stainless steel pf AISI 316
grade. The surface finish for their stainless steel panels shall be a brush finish. The bolts in the spiders
shall be articulated type to accommodate tolerances and movement due to wind pressure. Provision
shall be made for expansion of glass panel in all direction due to surface temperatures.
All spider fittings and patch fittings shall be made of stainless steel. Fiber gaskets and shear bolts shall
be used for all patch fittings. There shall be no glass to metal contact in any location especially when
using Heat strengthened / tempered GLASS
MATERIALS
Materials and components used shall be of the best quality and suitable for the purpose to Architects’
approval and shall have been tried and tested in environments similar to that of Mumbai.
Aluminium panels shall be of a minimum thickness of 2 mm and of max. 3 mm for solid stretchlevelled sheets, and 4 mm for insulated composite units.
All materials shall be free from any defect that may impair the strength, functioning or appearance of
the glazing and cladding system or adjacent construction.
Testing by independent testing laboratories or review of data by the Architect shall not relieve the
Contractor’s responsibility to verify for him that the work conforms to the intent of the contract
documents.
METALS
In general, metals shall comply with relevant Indian and International Standards.
Aluminium Wall Cladding
Aluminium Cladding – fabricated either from composite aluminium sheets or solid stretch-levelled
sheets as specified- shall conform to specifications given under section “CLADDING”.
The panels shall be acceptable to the Chief Fire Officer, Mumbai.
318
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Fasteners : The type, size, alloy, quantity and spacing of all fasteners and/or anchorage devices shall
be as required for the specified performance standards.
a)
Bolts, anchors and other fastening devices shall be approved types as required for the strength
of the connections, shall be self-locking, unless otherwise noted, shall be suitable for the
conditions encountered, and shall be torque tightened, where required, to achieve the
maximum torque tension relationship in the fasteners. Washers, nuts and all accessory items
shall be of the same material as fasteners.
b)
Fastening devices between aluminium and aluminium shall be AISC type 302 (18-8) stainless
steel unless otherwise approved.
c)
Fastening devices between aluminium and dissimilar materials shall be 300 series nonmagnetic stainless steel unless otherwise approved.
d)
Exposed fasteners are subject to Architect’s approval and shall be stainless steel.
e)
Self-locking fasteners shall be stainless steel with nylon inserts or patches.
Extrusions :
All aluminium extrusions shall conform to the system principal’s specification for tolerances which
shall, in any case be better than INDIAN standards. Any section not conforming to the tolerances shall
be rejected.
In general aluminium alloy for extrusions shall be 6063 T5 as per ASTM B 221. However, the grade
and tempering specifications shall be as recommended by the supplier for each application and shall
be approved by the system principal.
All aluminium sections shall be either anodized in approved colour to a minimum thickness of 22
microns or coated with PVDF as described in drawings/specifications/schedule of quantities.
All surfaces abutting the parent sections and designed to receive sealants shall have adequate sealant
contact and adhesion. They shall be finished to match parent sections.
319
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Aluminium Flashing
Flashings concealed from view shall be made of approved shade anodised aluminium sheets 1.5 mm
thick. Visible flashings (e.g on periphery of vision panels) shall be 2 mm thick aluminium sheets
anodised in approved shade.
Capping
Top capping shall be made from 2 to 3 mm thk stretch-leveled aluminium sheets coated with PVDF in
approved shade.
Soffits and Suspended Ceiling System
Soffits and suspended ceiling system if required shall be of similar metal of the aluminium wall
cladding with a similar finish. Colour and shape shall be selected by the ARCHITECTS.
Fire-stops-cum-smoke seals
Fire stops-cum-smoke seals shall be provided at successive floor levels and shall be two hour fire
resistant. Insulation shall be 90-100 mm thk Rockwool of 60kg/m3 density or approved equivalent.
Metal sections shall be in galvanized steel sections. All details shall be approved by the
ARCHITECTS.
Protection
Materials used as permanent or temporary protection for metals shall conform with relevant
Indian/International Standards.
Brackets:
Brackets shall be made from stainless steel sections 316 grade or approved extruded aluminium alloy
sections. Slots in brackets shall be pre-drilled / punched and not flame-cut. The surface shall be
serrated for additional grip.
Hardware and Fittings:
All hardware and fittings such as patch fittings, handles, locks, stay-arms, floor springs etc. for doors
windows and open able panels shall be to the best International Standards. Hinges for openable panels
shall be stainless steel friction hinges / stays selected for specified wind load and dead loads or
specifically extruded in-build hinges. All fittings and locks shall be approved by ARCHITECTS.
Each openable panel shall be provided with :
320
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
a)
Section – 13
1 No. GIESSE or approved equivalent 4-point cremone locking set with die-cast handle
turning 90deg. Painted in approved Ral colour and stainless steel fixing plate and screws.
b)
2 nos. COTSWOLD or equivalent heavy-duty top hung stainless steel friction stays openable
upto 15deg, with stainless steel screws.
c)
1 no. 70 mm sided triangular 3M film or equivalent sign on outer glass surface, with 5 years
performance guarantee, and with 40% perforations.
SEALANTS & GASKETS:
All sealant applications must be clearly designated on the applicable shop drawing details and reference to a
master sealant schedule specifying materials, special instructions and application procedures.
The compatibility and sequence of installation for all sealants must be carefully considered in all proposals in
order to ensure the required cure and optimum performance. Sealants must not degrade and/or fail
under all design conditions including, but not limited to thermal movement, water, ultraviolet
exposure and/or other adverse environmental conditions. The following sealant materials are specified
for performance standards only. All proposals must be equal to or better than the materials herein
specified. The designation of sealant types noted on the drawings is intended for general design
guidance. Final selection by the contractor for the sealant types shall be based on their conformity
with the Performance requirements herein specified and meet with the ARCHITECTS’s approval.
Maximum precautions shall be taken to prevent failure of selant.
Structural sealant: Dow Corning Silicone sealant 98.3 or approved equivalent recommended by manufacturer.
All exposed and concealed metal to metal (including tight or butt type metal to metal assembly prior
to assembly), perimeter metal to concrete joints shall be silicone base sealant preferably 2 component,
in approved colour, conforming to the manufacturer’s recommendations for the specific uses and
performance criteria. The manufacturer shall conduct laboratory test for adhesion for each lot of
aluminium sections and glass. Laboratory reports shall be submitted to the Architect. In special and
isolated cases, silicon sealant may be used with prior approval from ARCHITECTS.
Weather Sealant : The grades of sealants for concealed metal to metal and metal to concrete joints such as
embedment and lapping of flashing where elements are to be installed or embedded in a full bed
sealant shall be the best recommended by the manufacturer for the application.(Dow Corning, GE or
approved equivalent)
321
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Joint fillers and back-up materials shall be non-gaseous polyethylene foam, sponge neoprene as per
the written recommendations from the applicable sealant manufacturer for each specific application.
Shape, size, hardness, compatibility and bond breaking requirements are all factors to be considered.
All sealants must be non-staining and compatible with adjoining sealants, back-up materials, substrate
materials and their respective finished and/or applied colour coatings.
Exposed assembly sealant will not be permitted at any wall area.
All sealants shall be given 10 years Guarantee for materials, workmanship and performance from the
date of completion of Contract.
Caulking compound : Dow Corning 790 or approved equivalent, colour to match adjacent material or
approved by ARCHITECTS for use around frame or between frame and floor slab.
GASKETS
Gaskets and seals shall be extruded steam-cured EPDM of approved quality, compatible with
substrates, finishes and other components they are in contact with. All gaskets exposed directly on the
exterior face shall be silicon gaskets.
Extruded EPDM sections shall have the following properties.
Shore Hardness
70 +/- 5A
Tensile Strength
Min. 70 Kg/cm
Elongation
300%
Ozone Resistance
No crack at 50 +/- 5 pphm, test temp. of 40 =
2deg.C, test duration of 96 hours and 20% strain.
EPDM spacer block shall have a Shore hardness of 80 or as recommended by supplier/system Principal.
322
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
EPARATORS
Separators between steel and aluminium members and wherever required shall be of rigid type, high impact,
smooth both side Teflon with a minimum thickness of 0.8 mm or other non-conducting material as approved
by the Architect.
GLASS
All glass and glazing materials shall be verified and coordinated with the applicable performance requirements.
Vision and Spandrel glass shall have characteristics close to those specified in PERFORMANCE
CHARACTERISTS OF GLASS PANELS, subject to aesthetic requirements and specified
relative heat gain, all to ARCHITECTS’s approval. Minor variations in the characteristics of
glass shall be made, if required, without extra cost.
Samples of glass shall be available in ARCHITECTS’s office. The contractor shall offer glass, which is
nearest to the sample, in colour and tint subject to ARCHITECTS’s approval.
Furnish and install glass and glazing work as indicated on the drawings and a specified herein. All
glass shall be cut to required sizes and ready for glazing. All glass shall be of accurate sizes with clear
undamaged edges and surfaces which are not disfigured. Any pane which does not fit any section of
the GLAZING SYSTEM and shop front will be rejected and a replacement made at the Contractor’s
expense.
Glass shall conform to the quality, thickness and dimensional requirements specified in ASTM C &
respective series of each type.
Heat strengthened glass shall not deviate in surface flatness by more than 0.23 mm within 260mm of
leading or trailing edge, or 0.076 mm in centre. Direction of ripples shall be consistent and extent shall
be acceptable to Architect. Distortion of glass shall be controlled as much as possible during heat
strengthening. Sag distortion shall be uni-directional as per ARCHITECTS’s option. Surface
compression shall be in the range of 320-450 Kg/cm2
323
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
identification marking on glass shall be accomplished by a technique selected by the manufacturer.
The location of the marking shall be proposed by the Manufacturer and approved by ARCHITECTS.
All glass shall be delivered to site with the manufacturer’s label of identification attached.
Submit for ARCHITECTS,s approval a complete list of materials to be used, including the sealants
proposed and such samples as the ARCHITECTS may require. All glass and glazing methods and
materials including the design and profile dimensions of glazing pockets shall be as approved and
recommended in writing by the applicable glass and sealant manufacturers. A sealant-substrate test
report shall be submitted for each type of sealant for adhesion and compatibility.
Sealants in factory-glazed panels shall be fully cured prior to shipment to project site and installation.
All glass breakage caused by the Contractor or his sub-contractor because of negligence or caused by
the installation of faulty work by him shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense without
delay to the project completion.
The Contractor shall be responsible to deliver to the Employer without charge replacement for any
unit of glass and glazing that fails within the Guarantee period of ten (10) years from date of
completion of Contract.
The glass glazed panels/structural-glazing frames for the GLAZING SYSTEM system shall be
designed to withstand lateral imposed loads and comply with requirements of local building codes.
Glass thickness should be selected in accordance with AS 1288-1989 “Glass in Buildings Selection
and Installation” to satisfy design performance requirements and local design codes.
Glass shall be free from defects or impurities detrimental to its performance. Defects such as bubbles,
waves, spots, scratches, spills, discoloration, visibly imperfect coating, chipping and bubbles or
delaminating of opacifier film shall be limited in accordance with the Manufacturer’s /trade
guidelines. The glass is to be produced in such a way that the rollers will be parallel to what will be
horizontal position of the glass. Glass shall be consistent in colour.
Manufacturers’ glazing instructions regarding installation, dimensional tolerance, bite and edge
clearance etc. shall be followed.
324
All solar control glass panels shall be stored with particular care and protected against abrasion, sun
and moisture prior to installation.
Precautions specified by glass manufacturers to minimize thermal stress must be followed. A thermal
stress analysis shall be obtained from glass manufacturer prior to fabrication and their
recommendations shall be followed. Allowance shall be made for thermal movements due to an air
temperature range of 60deg.C and a material temperature range of 100 deg.C.
Glass Panels shall be selected / rejected on the basis of product quality standards specified by the
manufacturer concerning scratches, pinholes, clusters, distortion, colour variations, flaws in coating
and other defects.
Each type of glass shall be obtained from only one manufacturer and in one lot. Adequate spare
quantity shall be ordered to cover for breakage and for replacement during maintenance period.
Double glazed units shall be procured only from approved manufacturers. Quality control tests shall
be performed for mixing, curing, adhesion, dewpoint and grammage for molecular seives and DELTA
T. The spacers shall be of black colour. Capillary tubes shall be provided for pressure equilisation
during transit. The units shall be guaranteed against condensation and dirt between the panes and
failure of seal and damage to internal coating.
Setting block for glass shall be extruded neoprene with minimum 80 durometer hardness.
FLOAT GLASS
-
Quality and finishes : q3 unless otherwise indicated ASTM C 1036 Type I
-
Heat strengthening : ASTM C 1048 HS type I; Surface compression 320-450 kg/cm2
-
Heat treatment shall be adequate to provide strength to resist specified loads and induced
stresses within safety glazing standards.
-
No tong marks permitted.
Insulating Units
-
Insulating units to be factory assembled multiple panes separated by and sealed to spacers
forming hermatically sealed dehydrated airspace as per ASTM E 774 Class A
-
Sealing System : Dual seal
ƒ
Primary sealent : Polyisobutylene
ƒ
Secondary sealant : Silicone
325
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
-
Section – 13
If the sealed insulating units are fabricated at an elevation significantly different from that
of the project site provide temporary venting of internal airspace and subsequent sealing
of vents.
Laminating Units
-
Laminate lites with urethane acrylate resin interlayer in autoclave with heat plus pressure.
-
To comply with ASTM C 1172
-
Interlayer material to be clear or as specified of no tendency to bubble discolour or loose
physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites.
-
Laminated panels should be free of foreign substances, air or glass pockets.
Material Procurement : to be only from one manufacturer, for each type of glass panels and where match
between vision and spandrel panels is required. Label each unit on spacer or pane.
Glass analysis :
ƒ
Glass analysis report showing the manufacturer’s wind pressure and thermal analysis for
specified maximum deflections and specified probabilities of breakage to be submitted for
approval.
Glass submittals :
ƒ
Product data : Submit manufacturers product data with characteristics and specific
instructions and recommendations for maintenance procedures, handling and installation.
ƒ
Samples of glass 300 x 300
326
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Glass certifications :
ƒ
Manufacturer shall certify that glass thickness and heat treatment have been selected to
provide required strength and thermal performance.
ƒ
Sealant substrate test report shall be submitted for each sealant.
ƒ
Insulating unit Warranty by the manufacturer to be submitted.
Quality assurance :
ƒ
Certified Safety Glazing from Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or approval
equivalent
ƒ
Insulating units to comply with ASTM E773 & E774 CLASS A with compliance certified by
independent Certification program, Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) level CBA
or approved equivalent.
ƒ
Comply with test requirements of 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z 97.1-1984
ƒ
Certify laminated glass to comply with ASTM C 1172, float glass with ASTM1036, heat
treated glass with ASTM C1048
Guarantee
Submit written guarantee from the manufacturer to correct failure in coating, insulating and lamination, which
occur within the period of Guarantee after virtual completion. This is in addition to the
Performance Guarantee to be given by the Contractor.
Glass shall meet inspection and acceptance criteria as per ASTM C 1376
All structurally glazed panes shall have their edges matt finished and not highly polished, to avoid internal
reflection of light around the edges. Glass edges shall be protected against damage at all stages from
all manufacture to handing over of works. Panes with damaged edges shall be rejected.
Double glazed units shall be stacked vertically after manufacture.
327
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
GLAZING COMPOUNDS :
Provide documentation as per Item 7.1. All EPDM /neoprene materials shall be extruded high quality
ozone resistant, cured, elastomeric, virgin neoprene compounds with durometer hardness, profiles and
design parameters, lengths and locations all as required and recommended in writing by the applicable
glass manufacturers. All EPDM/neoprene glazing materials shall have smooth neat exposed surfaces,
all flashings and burrs removed and in profiles, including integral locking projections to engage into
the parent drawings. Furnish certified test reports to establish conformity with the specified standards.
Setting blocks used to support the dead load of the glass shall be extruded in a neoprene/EPDM
compound or silicone material conforming to the design criteria, all as recommended by the glass
manufacturer.
Jamb shims used to centre and station the glass shall be extruded in a neoprene/EPDM compound or a
silicone material conforming to the design criteria, all as recommended by the glass manufacturer.
Recommendations and detail drawing describing the proposed design and installation procedure shall
be submitted for ARCHITECTS’s review and approval.
Fixed compression and roll-in glazing gaskets shall be extruded in a neoprene/EPDM compound as
recommended by the glass manufacturer. Gaskets for any one light shall be one piece with injection
moulded corners free of all flashing and burrs.
METAL COATINGS
Aluminium shall be satin anodized to minimum 22 microns as per approved colour.
Metallic colour coatings to aluminium sections and cladding where specified shall be
PVDF/fluoropolymer formulated and will consists of a conversion coat and a 3 coat system
comprising an inhibitive primer, colour coat and clear anti abrasion top coat. The coating system shall
meet or exceed all the requirements of AAMA 2605-98. The total dry film thickness shall be
minimum 35 microns.
328
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
For solid colour coating a 2 coat system minimum 25 micron shall be used.
After selection of colour by ARCHITECTS, the Contractor shall prepare two sets of two samples of each,
which shall define the colour and gloss range and submit them for approval.
All samples shall be identified and have a full laboratory report attached.
The coating system, including materials and application shall conform to the requirements and
recommendations of the paint manufacturer.
Wherever the same colour finish is specified for solid and composite aluminium sheets, the Contractor shall
ensure that the colour of both is matched as closely as possible to the ARCHITECTS’s satisfaction.
Testing and Sampling Procedures :
In-process testing shall be performed on test specimens of equal metal thickness pretreated and finished along
with the production metal. Specimen shall exhibit a test of at least 75 x 300 mm to permit
instrument readings. In addition to running in-process tests to assure high quality production,
additional finished extrusions or panels are to be submitted to the coating manufacturer’s
laboratory for extended exposure testing.
All test samples shall be properly identified with date, batch number and shift indicated.
Performance Tests :
The following tests shall be carried out.
1.
Colour uniformity
2.
Specular gloss
3.
Dry Film Hardness
4.
Film adhesion
5.
Impact resistance
6.
Abrasion resistance
7.
Acid resistance
329
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
8.
Mortar resistance
9.
Detergent resistance
10.
Window cleaner resistance
11.
Corrosion resistance
12.
Salt spray resistance
13.
Weathering
14.
Colour retention
15.
Chalking resistance
16.
Gloss retention
17.
Resistance to erosion.
Section – 13
Performance results satisfying AA 2605-98 must be submitted for items 11 to 17 above. Performance results of
item 1 to 10 shall be submitted if required by ARCHITECTS.
Field Touch-up and Repair : The contractor and coating manufacturer shall supply materials for air dry touch
up for spray or brush application per instruction of manufacturer. Touch up shall be held to an
aboslute minimum to ARCHITECTS’s instruction.
The manufacturer and the Contractor shall give a written guarantee warranting all work in connection with
organic coating system to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of Ten
(10) years from date of completion and to correct promptly any defect free of cost. The following
are considered as defects without being limited thereto:
i. Peeling
ii. Cracking
iii. Chalking shall be measured in accordance with ASTM D659-44 (1965)
iv. Blistering
v. Uniform Fading or colour change in excess of 5 NBS unit when calculated from
measurement on a spectrophotometer or colour meter capable of colour
measurement by reflectance reading in accordance with ASTM D244-68
vi. Uniform glass retention in excess of 50%
330
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
20.1
Section – 13
Coping and Soffit Trimmer
a)
All coping and soffit panels shall receive frame reinforcement and be fixed rigidly to the
structure.
b)
All joints between coping/soffit panels and between coping/soffit panels to GLAZING
SYSTEM frame and other sections of the work shall be tightly sealed up. Effective drainage
system shall be provided to drain out the water that may penetrate through the joints.
20.2
CLADDING
Cladding shall be non-toxic composite aluminium panels ( Alucobond or approved equivalent ) of adequate
strength with approved details. The panels shall be 4mm thick composite units finished with
PVDF/Fluoropolymer coating overall 35 micron thick of approved metallic colour or 25 micron
thick of solid colour. The resin content of the PVDF/fluoropolymer coating shall be minimum
70%. The back of the panel shall be chromatised, compatible with adhesives for stiffeners if any
and/or given a polymer coating (total protection 3-7 mm thick).
Alternatively, as shown on drawings, cladding shall be fabricated in panels from 3mm stretch levelled
aluminium alloy sheets (ALACAN or equivalent) coil-coated with 35/25 micron
PVDF/Fluoropolymer in approved colour on front face and 3 micron of protective coating on
reverse.
The contractor shall submit 3 different samples of gloss in % ages directed by ARCHITECTS in the range of
30% to 80% gloss to facilitate final selection.
The fabrication and installation of the cladding systems shall be carried out as per manufacturer’s instructions
with invisible/concealed fastenings, aluminium sub-structure, silicon sealants (if shown in
drawings) properly tooled etc.
All cladding panels of one kind shall be obtained in one lot from the manufacturers.
Each panel shall be guaranteed for a flatness of +/- 0.8 mm from the true face after installation under no-wind
condition.
Deviations from the true alignment of adjoining panels shall not be cumulative.
331
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Full load deflections shall be kept to the minimum possible. Each panel shall be capable of withstanding 300
kg/sq.m wind pressure without any permanent deformation.
The cladding system shall be adequately ventilated. The air-gap between the cladding panels and the concrete
block wall ( if any ) shall be at least 50mm to allow proper ventilation of the system. The cavity
shall be closed by a perforated bird/vermin-proof closer at bottom and by a flashing at a top with
a built-in bird/vermin proof air closet.
The fabrication processes including cutting, grooving, benching, folding, joining, rout-in as well as installation
shall be performed as per manufacturer’s instructions. The panels shall be backed by approved
aluminium support framework, fixed to walls ( if any ) with aluminium / galvanised steel
brackets.
The PVDF/fluoropolymer coating shall be guaranteed for colour retention, chalking resistance and gloss
retention etc. as specified under Clause 19- METAL COATINGS.
The composite Aluminium panels shall satisfy the following fire codes requirements.
•
BS476
•
ASTM E-84
ad Index
•
loped Index
UBC 26-9 & NFPA for 30 Minute Intermidiate Scale Multi-story Apparatus Test to prove no
flame spread beyond the area directly exposed to fire source.
21
FABRICATION
21.1
General : All assemblies shall be fabricated and assembled in accordance with the drawings and the
requirements of these specifications. Deviations of any nature, without approval of ARCHITECTS
shall not be permitted.
332
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
21.2
Section – 13
Tolerances : Furnish a schedule of fabrication tolerances for all major wall cladding components. In
addition to the fabrication tolerances, provide for and schedule thermal movement including assembly
and installation tolerances for all major and/or applicable wall cladding components and/or
assemblies.
21.3
Workmanship
a)
all work shall be performed by skilled workmen, specially trained bad experienced in the
applicable trades and in full conformity with the applicable provisions of the listed
References and Standards and/or otherwise noted on the drawings or as specified herein.
b)
All work shall be carefully fabricated and assembled with proper and approved provisions for
thermal expansion and contraction, fabrication and installation tolerances and design criteria.
c)
All forming and welding operations shall be done prior to finishing, unless otherwise noted.
d)
All work shall be true to detail with sharp, clean profiles, straight and free from defects, dents,
marks, waves or flaws of any nature impairing strength or appearance; fitted with proper
joints and intersections and with specified finishes.
e)
All work shall be erected true to plumb, level, square to line, securely anchored, in proper
alignment and relationship to work of other trades and free from waves, sags or other defects.
21.4
Joints in Metal Work
a)
All exposed work shall be carefully matched to produce continuity of line, design and finish.
Joints in exposed work, unless otherwise shown or required for thermal movement, shall be
accurately fitted, rigidly secured with hairline contacts and sealed watertight.
333
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
b)
Section – 13
Where two or more sections or metals are used in building up members, the surface in contact
shall be brought to a smooth, true and even surface and secured together so that the joints
shall be absolutely tight without the use of any pointing materials. Extrusions shall be
tolerated to eliminate any edge projection or misalignment at joints.
c)
Furnish physical samples of all joinery elements as for comparative appraisal and approval of
the production materials. Physical samples of all typical wall intersection assemblies shall be
colour coded on surfaces and/or areas to receive sealants.
21.5
Shop Assembly
As far as practicable, all fitting and assembly of the work shall be done in the shop. Work that cannot be
permanently shop assembled shall be temporarily assembled in the shop and marked, before
disassembly to ensure proper assembly later in the building.
21.6
Sleeves
Unless otherwise noted, all aluminium sleeves shall be extruded sections designed to accurately interlock with
adjacent sections and incorporate serrated surfaces for the secure bedding of sealant between the
parent metal and the sleeve.
21.7
Fasteners
a)
All fasteners shall be of stainless steel with self locking devices, unless otherwise noted, and
of sufficient size and strength to withstand the applicable design wind load and dead load
forces with safety allowance factors as required for the specific materials. The spacing and
quantities of fasteners shall be as required to develop the maximum strength of the member
they secure or support. Washers and/or other accessory items shall be of the same material as
the fastener. Torque tighten all assembly fasteners to achieve the maximum torque tension
relationship in the fastener.
334
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
b)
Section – 13
All fasteners shall be concealed unless otherwise shown or approved. The head style for all
exposed fasteners shall be countersunk oval head unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
Exposed fasteners shall be finished to match surrounding metal finish.
c)
All fasteners including washers and accessory items shall be scheduled and designated on the
shop drawings so that anyone can witness and assess the assembled units to ensure that all
fasteners conform to the designated and approved type, size, material, spacing, etc. When
certain items are not readily apparent, such as material and alloy or torque tightening
requirements, special instructions for the identification and appraisal of such items shall be
issued
21.8
Protection of Metals
a)
Protection against galvanic action shall be provided wherever dissimilar metals are in contact
b)
Aluminium which is to be in contact with cured concrete, mortar or plaster shall have the
contact surfaces protected, wherever crevices between the contact surfaces may entrap
moisture and corrosive elements. All metals, except stainless steel, which are to be in contact
with fresh concrete, mortar or plaster, shall have the contact surfaces protected with epoxy
paint.
c)
Furnish a schedule of all protective coatings and related items including the designation of
area and/or specific locations, materials used, special instructions, specification data sheets
etc.
21.9
Welding
a)
All welding in aluminium work shall be done by the inert gas shielded arc or fluxless resistant
techniques and with electrodes and/or methods recommended by the suppliers of the metals
being welded. Type, size and spacing of welds, shall be shown on approved shop drawings.
335
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
b)
Welds in galvanised metal shall be touched up with zinc rich paint.
c)
Welds behind finished aluminium surfaces shall be so done as to eliminated distortion and/or
discolouration on the finished side. Weld spatter and welding oxides on finished surfaces
shall be removed by descaling and/or grinding. Provide low heat filled welds using chill bar
on finished side to eliminate dimpling, distortion and/or discolouration on the finished or
exposed surface. Plug, puddle, or spot welding is not permitted. If weld beads are shown on
exposed finished surfaces, the surfaces shall be ground and polished to match and blend with
finish on adjacent parent metal.
d)
Structural welds shall be made by certified welders and shall conform to the general
recommendations and regulations of AWS Specification D1.0-46.
•
Dirt grease, lubricant, or other organic material shall be removed by vapour degreasing or
suitable solvent.
•
Joints rejected because of welding defects may be repaired only by rewinding. Defective
welds shall be removed by chipping or machining. Flame cutting shall not be used.
e)
Wherever welding is done in proximity to glass or finished surfaces such surfaces shall be
protected from damage due to weld sparks, spatter or tramp metal.
f)
All welds shall be scheduled and designated on the shop drawings so that anyone can witness
and assess the assembled units to ensure that all welds conform to the designated and
approved type, size, spacing etc.
21.10
Soldering
All soldering shall be done as recommended by the suppliers of the metals involved.
336
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
21.11
Section – 13
Shop painting of Carbon Steel
Item of carbon steel, unless galvanised or scheduled for other finish, shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose
scale, filings, dirt and other foreign matter and shall be painted with zinc chromate primer.
21.12
Factory Application
As much work as possible shall be carried out in the factory. All glazing shall be done in the factory. Gaskets
shall be pre-positioned and welded in the factory as far as possible. Site work shall be kept to a
minimum.
22
GENERAL EXECUTION
22.1
The drawings supplied by ARCHITECTS shall be considered essentially schematic, except for
profiles of exposed surfaces which shall be as indicated. If, in the opinion of the contractor, a change
of profiles is required in order to meet the specifications, he shall consult ARCHITECTS for a review
of the conditions.
22.2
The method of assembling, reinforcing and anchorage of the GLAZING SYSTEM / GLAZING
SYSTEM, STONE Cladding system, where indicated is schematic. Location and method of providing
same shall be the Contractor’s responsibility, who shall design, assemble, reinforce and anchor to suit
each specified condition in an acceptable manner complying with main building structure. Site work
shall be coordinated with the Main Contractors program.
22.3
Visible joints shall be as shown on the ARCHITECTSs drawings.
22.4
All parts shall be secured by concealed means and screws exposed to view shall not be allowed.
22.5
All components shall be assembled, secured, anchored, reinforced, sealed and made weather tight in
manner not restricting thermal or wind movement of the metal wall cladding/GLAZING SYSTEMing
system. Where possible, sealants shall be concealed.
337
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
22.6
Free and noiseless movement of all components of the GLAZING SYSTEM and cladding system due
to thermal, structural wind pressure, or dead loads, shall be achieved without strain to glass, without
buckling of any components and without excessive stress to any members or assemblies.
22.7
The entire GLAZING SYSTEM and cladding system shall be assembled and installed so that all
leakage and condensation shall be drained and discharges to the exterior face of the wall.
22.8
Movement of water behind and on exposed surfaces shall be controlled to ensure that water is not
retained and that elements will not be damaged or corroded by water and to minimize the potential for
algae and fungus growth.
22.9
Measurements
The measurements given in ARCHITECTSs drawings shall not be used by the Contractor for preparing his
shop drawings and for executing the work. All dimensions shall be actually measured on site and
in case of any discrepancy between measurements on site and in drawing, modules shall be
decided in consultation with the Architect.
23
PERFORMANCE TESTING
23.1
Specifications 24.1 to 24.11 apply for pre-construction performance test in laboratory conditions.
Specifications 24.12 applies for site tests.
The Contractor shall supply copies of shop drawings and calculations to the Test Laboratory approved by
ARCHITECTS prior to installation of the test units.
These drawings shall include :
• Test elevation and sections
•
Full scale typical details of unitized panels including intersections of members.
338
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
•
Typical support details
•
Extent of sealants
•
Size and number of pressure equalization/drainage slots or holes
•
Blanking off details and
•
Method of installation.
Section – 13
Any deviations from the drawings shall be recorded and noted in the final report. After approval of structural
calculations and shop drawings for the GLAZING SYSTEM test units for performance testing of
the GLAZING SYSTEM shall be constructed by the Contractor at the testing laboratory.
23.2
Test Units
1)
The test units shall comprise components representative both in size and shape of the facade
of the building under examination. The width of the test sample shall not be less than of three
typical adjoining wall panels/units. The height of the test sample shall be not less than 2
stories high and must contain full height modules of the GLAZING SYSTEM and cladding
system. Vertical and horizontal movement joints shall be included in the test sample.
2)
Where details of the building facade differ from those in the representative test sample, such
as at corners, overhangs and the like, supplementary tests shall be performed on either
composite or part sample of the facade.
3)
The materials of the test sample (glass, aluminium, reinforced concrete, sealant, gaskets etc.)
shall be of the sample, type and size and have the same details, methods of construction,
flashing and anchorage as the building facade.
4)
If not an actual on site representative sample of the wall of the building, the test sample shall
be mounted and sealed into a simulated building frame in the same manner and by the same
fixings which are intended to attach the facade to the building structure. The support frame
339
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
5)
shall be of equivalent stiffness to that supporting the building to prevent unrealistic deflection
of the prototype sample.
6)
Simulated floor slabs and spandrel shall be to actual depth if, for example in GLAZING
SYSTEMs the air seal is connected to the slab. The internal finishes and linings shall be
installed where they contribute to the air seal of the facade. The air seal of the test sample
shall be continued to the air seal of the test chamber.
7)
All unitized panels and other interconnected joints in the facade shall be sealed at the sample
boundaries. This is to minimize the effects that the surrounding construction will have on the
test performance of the sample. All pressure equalization and drainage slots or holes in the
test sample shall be left open.
8)
Transparent viewing panels (or other means of observation such as an optical fiber probe)
shall be provided so that the performance of the facade in areas that are not readily seen can
be determined.
23.3
Inspection of test units
1)
The Contractor shall allow ARCHITECTS to inspect the test sample regularly during
erection. At this stage the adequacy and stiffness of the support structure shall be assessed.
When the installation of the test sample is complete, ARCHITECTS shall inspect the test
sample before shipment to testing facility.
2)
Full time attendance by approved representatives of the contractor shall be provided for the
erection of the test unit and all testing of the test units.
340
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
23.4
Section – 13
Test program
The proposed testing procedure and related method shall be conducted in accordance with test specifications,
or other approved codes and parameters of equal or greater severity.
The following standards shall apply to the tests:
on test
3-91
ration test
1-86
erformance test
0-90
84:1995
The test programme will be conducted in the following sequence :
a)
Preliminary loadings
23.5
b)
Air infiltration test
c)
Water penetration test (Static pressure)
d)
Water penetration test (Dynamic pressure)
e)
Structural performance test (design pressure)
f)
Seismic test (serviceability limit state)
g)
Structural proof load test
h)
Seismic test (ultimate limit state)
Preliminary loading
The test unit shall be subjected to static pressures of + 100 kg/m2 and –100 kg/m2 for a period of 30 seconds
each.
341
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
23.6
Section – 13
Air infiltration test – ASTM E 283-91
This test shall be performed by attaching the test specimen on one side of the pressure chamber and sealing it.
Air pressure shall then be supplied from the chamber simulating pressure applied to the outer
face of the specimen at a pressure difference of 10kg/m2 in accordance to ASTM E 283-91. At
the maintained specified test pressure difference across the specimen, measurement for the
resultant airflow through the specimen shall be recorded. The results of the infiltration shall not
exceed 1 liter/min per 300 mm run of sash perimeter, and for the fixed glass panels air leakage
shall not exceed 1 litre/min/m2.
A stabilised pressure difference of 10kg/m2 shall be maintained across the test specimen with it opening being
sealed for the first result and then with the seal taken off for the second result. Measurement of
airflow shall be recorded via the air flow meters at the supply source and near the specimen. The
difference of the two measured airflow shall give the resultant airflow which is converted into
units of liters per minute per length or area to be compared with the acceptance criteria.
23.7
Water Penetration test – ASTM E 331-86
a)
STATIC PRESSURE
This test shall be performed by attaching the test specimen on one side of the pressure chamber and sealing
it with the same type of sealant as would be used on site. Uniform pressure difference of
60kg/m2 shall be introduced into the chamber in one step for ten minutes. The test shall then
be repeated with a pressure difference of 120 kg/m2 (60% of positive wind pressure) for 5
minutes.
Water jet sprays shall be introduced onto the specimen at a rate of 3.40 liter per square meter per minute.
b)
DYNAMIC PRESSURE
The procedure for the dynamic pressure test shall be similar to that for the static pressure, the only
difference being that for the dynamic pressure test, pulsating pressure difference instead of
uniform pressure difference will be used. The pulsating pressure shall fluctuate from 0 to 30
kg/cm2 for 15 minutes. The above test shall be repeated for pulsation between 60 kg/m2 and
12 kg/m2 for 15 minutes. The pulsating pressure shall be in cycles of between 3 to 5 seconds.
342
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
For both the static and cyclic water penetration tests, no leaks shall be acceptable. A leak shall be
considered to occur if
23.8
i)
Uncontrolled water appears on any inside surface of the facade.
ii)
Water appears on inside surface of the facade and is visible from the occupied building space.
iii)
Water appears that is likely to wet insulation, fixtures, and finishes.
iv)
Water appears in other locations specified as unacceptable.
Structural performance test – ASTM E 330-90
The test specimen shall be installed on one side of the pressure chamber and sealed. Air pressure shall then be
supplied to (positive pressure) and exhausted from (negative pressure) the chamber. At specified
maintained pressure difference across the specimen, observation, measurement, and record of
deflection shall be carried out. The design wind pressure used for the test shall be +200 kg/m2
and –200 kg/m2. Displacement transducers accurate to +/- 0.25 mm shall be fixed to the test unit
at selected locations to be approved by the architect/structural engineer.
Transducers shall be attached to
i)
2 mullions at 9 locations at brackets, joints with horizontal members and mid spans
ii)
2 transoms at mid-spans and joints with vertical members
iii)
2 sill/gutters at mid-spans and joints with vertical members
iv)
Centers of fixed vision panel, openable vision panel and 2 spandrel panels.
343
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
v)
2 transoms and 2 sill/gutters at mid-spans for vertical displacement
vi)
Any other critical points if required by the architect/structural engineer.
(a)
Static Pressure Test-Design Pressure
Section – 13
The proposed testing method shall be in accordance with procedure B of ASTM E 300-90. There will be
four incremental loadings at 50 kg/m2, 100 kg/m2, 150 kg/m2 and 200 kg/m2 for positive
pressures and at –50kg/m2, -100 kg/m2, - 150 kg/m2, -200 kg/m2 for negative pressures.
Acceptance Criteria for Static Test
At 100% design pressure and load:
i)
Net deflection perpendicular to enclosure surface for framing members shall not exceed
span/240 or 15mm whichever is less and shall not exceed span/300 for glass supporting
members.
ii)
In the plane of the wall, deflection of horizontal rails shall not reduce the glass bite below
75% of the dimension, and shall not reduce the glass edge clearance below 25% of the design
dimensions of 3 mm whichever is greater.
iii)
At connection points of framing members anchors, anchor deflection shall not exceed 1mm
iv)
Glass panel centre deflection shall not exceed span/90, or 15mm whichever is less.
344
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
(b)
Section – 13
Proof Load Test
The maximum pressure for the proof load test shall be 300 kg/m2. The method of testing shall be as
follows:
+150 kg/m2
-
to remove slack
+ 300 kg/m2
-
at proof load
- 150 kg/m2
-
to remove slack
- 300 kg/m2
-
at proof load
Acceptance Criteria for Proof Load Test
Under proof load test there shall not be:
a)
dislodgment of any glass
b)
dislodgment of any frame, panel or any part thereof.
c)
Failure of any fixings that connect the facade to the building structure
d)
Failure of any accessory, locking device, hinge etc. which would allow an opening
light to come open.
Any permanent distortion of a panel shall be documented. The residual deflection of any member shall be
nil. The slippage at support shall not exceed 1 mm.
23.9
Seismic Test – AS/NZS 4284:1995
a) Serviceability Limit State:
The test unit shall be displaced by subjecting it to cyclic movement at the rate of 1 cycle/sec. for a period of 30
seconds (One cycle is movement from original setting to extreme, then to the other extreme and
back to original setting). The max. displacement shall be +/- 12mm from the original setting at the
seismic loading floor.
345
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
b) Ultimate Limit State :
The procedure (a) above will be repeated with max. displacement of +/-18mm.
The test unit shall not collapse during or after the seismic test at serviceability and ultimate limit state
displacements. Any damage to seals, members or panels shall be recorded. Collapse shall mean
any one or more of the conditions (a) to (d) described under Proof Load Test in 24.8 (b) above.
The test unit shall be subjected to and shall pass the criteria set for dynamic water penetration test,
after the seismic test at serviceability and ultimate limit state displacements. Any damage to seals,
members or panels shall be recorded. Collapse shall mean any one or more of the conditions (a) to
(d) described under Proof Load Test in 24.8 (b) above. The test unit shall be subjected to and shall
pass the criteria set for dynamic water penetration test (specification 24.7b) after the seismic test
at serviceability limit state displacements.
23.10
Form of Report
Details of the test sample (including an outline of the stimulated building frame) and the test apparatus,
instrumentation and method shall be clearly given in a report in triplicate.
The report shall include the following:
a)
an identification and general description of the facade and Certificate of Identity from the
contractor
b)
Drawings of the actual test sample showing modifications, if any.
c)
Test sequence and procedure with pressures used in all tests.
d)
Location of all transducers for the structural performance test and moving support beam for
seismic test.
346
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
e)
Displacements, span/deflection ratios, air infiltration rates and water leakage details,
permanent distortion or collapse, and damage to seals members or panels.
f)
Other pertinent observations.
The testing laboratory shall keep a copy of approved test unit, shop drawings and calculations at testing
laboratory accurately and neatly record on the above mentioned shop drawings all changes,
revisions, modifications etc. made to test unit, which shall become the record drawings.
At completion of testing and after approval of test reports, the testing laboratory shall submit the final record
drawings to the Architect.
23.11
Cost of Performance Testing
The Contractor shall allow for the cost of fabrication, shipping, testing, erection, modifications to and the
demolition of the test unit. If the test unit fails to pass the initial testing, the Contractor shall make
the necessary modifications to the test unit and shall have the test unit retested by the Testing
Laboratory until it passes the test. Cost of modifications to the test unit and cost of retesting shall
be borne by the by the Contractor.
23.12
Site Tests
The Contractor shall carry out site tests at his own cost to determine resistance to water leakage as per
recommendations given in AAMA 501.2-94 for “Field Check of Metal Storefronts, GLAZING
SYSTEMs and Sloped Glazing Systems for Water Leakage.
347
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
The test areas shall be selected by ARCHITECTS, at random in typical and non typical locations, one for
every 600 sq.m approx. of installed GLAZING SYSTEM and glazing system. In case of any test
failing, the Architect shall order more tests to be conducted at the Contractor’s cost.
Each test area shall be
a)
10 sq. mm minimum or
b)
25 m. Run of perimeter of vision and spandrel units
c)
4 entire panels of standard types, whichever is the least.
24
INSTALLATION
25.1
Quality Control : See previous item 7.3
25.2
Qualification of workmen :
All work shall be performed by skilled workmen, especially trained and experienced in the applicable trades
employed in full conformity with applicable provisions of the listed References and Standards
and/or as otherwise noted on the ARCHITECTSs drawings or as specified herein. The
qualification of the Contractor’s installation workmen shall first be filed with and approved by
ARCHITECTS.
25.3
Setting out :
Bench marks for elevations and building line offset marks for alignment shall be established on each floor
level by the Main Contractor ; any error be found in their location, the Contractor shall notify the
ARCHITECTS in writing and installation work shall not proceed in the affected area until the
errors have been corrected.
Within 2 weeks upon the award of the contract, the Contractor shall submit the GLAZING SYSTEM
anchorage plan for endorsement by ARCHITECTS. The Contractor shall co-ordinate his system
of anchorage with ARCHITECTS/Civil Contractor according to site conditions.
348
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
25.4
Section – 13
Prior Inspection of the Structure :
After the setting out has been established and before beginning installation in any area, the Contractor shall
examine all parts of the structure on which the GLAZING SYSTEMing system/metal wall
cladding are to be placed in that area. Should any conditions be found which, in his opinion, will
prevent the proper execution of his work or endanger its permanency, he shall report such
conditions in writing to ARCHITECTS and the Civil Contractor. Installation work shall not
proceed in that area until such conditions are corrected or adjusted to the satisfaction of
ARCHITECTS.
25.5
Workmanship
All parts of the GLAZING SYSTEM and STONE Cladding system shall be erected true to plumb and in
proper alignment and relation to established setting out, as shown on approved shop drawings.
25.6
Erection Tolerances
The installed metal wall cladding / GLAZING SYSTEM system components shall conform to the following
erection tolerances under no-wind conditions:
a)
Amount of total deviation and / or misalignment in any direction for vertical members: 3 mm
maximum in a height of 4 m (non-cumulative) and maximum 7 mm in full height of STONE
Cladding / GLAZING SYSTEM.
b)
Amount of total deviation and / or misalignment in any direction for horizontal members : 3
mm max in a length of 7 m / 50
c)
Maximum offset from true alignment between two abutting members shall be 1 mm. No edge
projection or misalignment will be permitted.
349
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
d)
Section – 13
Maximum joints, gaps or openings between removable glazing stop and adjacent member
shall be 1mm and / or maximum 1mm cumulative opening at both ends of removable
members (0.5mm each end)
e)
Deviation in spacing of brackets : +/- 3 mm.
f)
Allowances for the cumulative effect of all tolerances (fabrication, assembly, thermal and
erection) must be made to ensure a workman like installation. The documentation and
distribution of this information to all applicable installation and inspection personnel is
essential in order to ensure the standard of quality and workmanship required.
25.7
Installation within and / or adjacent to concrete:
Where work is to be installed within and / or adjacent to concrete, no GLAZING SYSTEM and cladding
system components other than built in anchor devices shall be put in place until the concrete
work is completed, including the removal of all forms, shoring etc.
25.8
Anchorage
a)
Anchorage of the GLAZING SYSTEM and cladding system to the structure shall be by
approved methods and in strict accordance with approved shop drawings. After the
GLAZING SYSTEM and cladding system are properly positioned, all connections so
designated on approved shop drawings shall be rigidly fixed by welding or other positive
means.
b)
All anchorage assemblies and their related components shall be thoroughly scheduled and
described on the shop drawings so that anyone can evaluate an installation and ensure its
compliance with the contract documents. Designate trades responsible for furnishing and/or
installing materials if other than the Contractor. Descriptive items shall include the access,
removal, movement and tolerances of related building and the GLAZING SYSTEM and
350
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
c)
Section – 13
cladding system, direction and magnitude of thermal expansion, materials, sizes, quantities,
and any special instruction as may be required. All primary GLAZING SYSTEM and
cladding, anchorage assemblies shall receive a 100% inspection.
25.9
Welding
All welding shall be done by skilled mechanics, qualified or licensed in accordance with local building
regulations. Welds and adjoining burnt areas in prime coated surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned
and painted with one coat of primer. Welds in galvanized steel shall be coated with two coats of
zinc rich paint. Special care shall be taken to protect glass and other furnished surfaces from
flame and welding spatter and to prevent fires.
25.10
Use of Sealing materials
a)
Sealing materials shall be used in strict accordance with the Manufacturers printed
instructions and shall be applied only by workmen specially trained or experienced in their
use. Before applying sealant, all mortar, dirt, dust, moisture and other foreign matter shall be
completely removed from surfaces it will contact. Adjoining surfaces shall be masked when
required to maintain a clean and neat appearance. Sealing compounds shall be tooled to fill
the joint and provide a smooth finished surface.
b)
The manufacturers of the applicable materials shall, when required, render technical
assistance prior to the application of any sealant and witness the first applicants as well as
periodic site inspections thereafter. The Contractor shall witness and document all inspections
performed by the sealant manufacturer and provide close supervision of all workmen used to
apply the sealant.
351
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
25.11
Section – 13
Coping and Soffit trimmer
Installation of coping and soffit panels and field sealing between the copings and other trades shall be
performed by the Contractor.
25.12
Tensioning of Bolts
All bolts shall be correctly tensioned. The tension shall be specified on shop drawings. At last 100% of bolts
shall be mechanically checked for correct tension.
25.13
Sequence of Installation
If so directed by the PMC, installation of the GLAZING SYSTEM and cladding shall be postponed in areas as
designated by the ARCHITECTS for a specified period of time so as to facilitate moving
materials / equipment into and out of the building and installation of M & E (Mechanical &
Electrical) fittings during construction. The Contractor’s work is to proceed along guidelines and
schedule as directed by ARCHITECTS.
25.14
Removal of Debris
All debris by or incidental to the installation work shall be promptly removed from the job site as the work
progresses. Weep holes and drainage channels shall be unobstructed and free of dirt, rubbish and
sealant.
25.15
Protection and Cleaning
a)
The Contractor shall adequately protect all aluminium sections, glazing, cladding sheets,
components, and accessories from damage during shipment, storage, erection and after
completion of the work by use of protective film / foil of approved non-staining quality.
352
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
b)
Section – 13
At such time as may be directed by ARCHITECTS, the Contractor shall remove all protective
coverings and / or coatings and clean surfaces free of all soil and discoloration. All cleaning
agents shall be acceptable to the applicable aluminium, glass and coating manufacturers, and
where doubt exists, spot tests shall be made to satisfy ARCHITECTS.
26
FRONT ENTRANCE DOORS
The contractor shall design, supply and install glazed entrance doors at locations as shown in the drawings.
The contractor shall prepare shop drawings in consultation with ARCHITECTS.
The glazed entrance doors shall be designed to be frameless and shall be jointed with patch fittings. Glass fins
shall be provided if required as per structural design. 10 mm thk clear toughened glass shall be
suspended with the help of patch fittings suspended above false ceiling and protected with primer
and 2 epoxy coats. Glass shall be fully toughened with a surface compression of 700 kg/cm2 and
shall be heat soaked. The double door shall be provided with a pair of heavy duty Dorma or
equivalent floor springs with stainless steel cover plate and approved Dorma or equivalent door
patch fittings.
353
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
27
Section – 13
APPROVED LIST OF SUPPLIERS
1. Glass
Monolithic heat strengthened reflective glass
Insulated Glass
Laminated Glass
Tempered Glass
2. Aluminium Extrusions
3. Stainless Steel
4. EPDM
5. Aluminium Cladding panels
a)
Composite
b)
Solid
Glaverbel (Europe)
Pikington (USA, UK)
St. Gobain (France)
Asahi (Japan)
Interpane (USA)
Guardian (USA)
Hindalco Industries or approved equivalent
Subject to specified tolerance stardrads
Salem Steel or approved equivalent
AMEE Rubber Industries Pvt. Ltd. or approved equivalent
Alucobond
Alpolic
Reynolds
ALCAN or approved equivalent
6. Expansion anchors
HILTI or approved equivalent (with stainless steel
616 bolts nuts & washers)
7. Chemical anchors
8. Door & Window furniture
a) 4 points lockset
b) S.S friction hinges
c) Patch fittings
e) Floor springs, handles etc.
f) Adhesive film
9. Structural sealant
10. Weather sealant
11. Foam Spacers and Mounting tapes
12. PVDF Coatings
HILTI or approved equivalent
GIESSE or approved equivalent
COTSWLOD or approved equivalent
DORMA
DORMA
3M or approved equivalent
Dow Corning, GE
Dow Corning, GE
NORTON
VALSPAR corporation or approved equivalent
`
354
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
28
Section – 13
DESIGN DATA
•
Temperature Range
mbient
or Materials
•
Wind Load
d all components including glass in edge zones on each
side of building corners shall be designed for heavier
wind suction as require by design code)
•
Seismic Load
Codes
•
Deflections
ons
or 15mm whichever is less
oms, sills, heads, gutters
nent deflection in Mullions
anent deflection in transoms, sills, heads,
gutters
nent deflection in cladding frame members
panels
•
0 at 300 kg/sqm wind pressure
mes dead load
kg/sqm wind pressure
or as recommended by glass manufacturer for each
typical panel, which ever is less
R.C.C. Grade
minimum cement content 360 kg/cm)
355
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
•
Section – 13
Anticipated Building Movements
The following movements are anticipated by the Structural Consultants after the building structure is
completed. The Contractor shall adequately allow for these movements in his design.
a)
Differential horizontal displacement of building face between
+/- 12mm
b)
Consecutive floors due to wind or earthquake
Differential vertical displacement of building face at any floor
6 mm
c)
Max. axial compression in columns per floor height
1.6mm
d)
Differential horizontal displacement between 2 consecutive
e)
Steel floor trusses in atrium
Expansion / Contraction of R.C.C. fascia per 10m length per
+/- 12mm
+/- 12 mm 10 deg.C temperature difference.
29
1
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS OF GLASS PANELS
Note
The characteristics given above are the Standard characteristics of glass & the tenderers may offer
makes which shall satisfy the above, providing a sample of the proposed alternative glass and the glass
characteristics are submitted to the architects at least 10 days before the date of opening of tender and
duly approved by a tender Bulletin. Some variation in colour and light characteristics may be accepted
at the Architect’s discretion. The relative gain offered shall not exceed that specified by more than
3%.
2.
ARCHITECTS reserves the right to change the color of the glass before the award of the work.
30
SCHEDULE OF TESTS AND CERTIFICATION
The contractor shall carry out the following tests in approved independent laboratories in
manufacturer’s test facilities/ in his fabrication shop / on site as applicable and shall submit test
reports in duplicate to ARCHITECTS. The cost of the tests shall be borne the contractor and shall
356
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
be deemed to be included in his prices. The extent of tests shall not be limited to the list given hereunder. The
manufacturers shall carry out all other tests on materials during and after processing as required
by codes/trade practice and shall produce test certificates if so demanded by ARCHITECTS.
1.
GLAZING SYSTEM
1.1
Performance Tests
The tests as specified in Specifications 24.1 to 24.11 shall be performed in an approved laboratory
to prove the performance of the contractor’s design and details prior to construction.
The Contractor shall provide attendance for the full duration of the test including installation in
laboratory and modifications to the test unit. The test shall be performed in the
prese3nce of ARCHITECTS if so requested.
1.2
Site tests for water penetration
Site tests shall be performed as specified in Specification 25.12
7 nos. Tests shall be performed on GLAZING SYSTEM in locations selected by ARCHITECTS
and 1 no. Test shall be carried out on Front Entrance Door.
2.
Glass
2.1
Tests in Approved independent laboratory
3 samples of each type of vision and spandrel panels (except for glass with ceramic frit) shall be
tested for:
357
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
a) American summer U Value in W/m2 (ASHRAE standard)
b) Shading coefficient (ASHRAE standard)
2.2
Certification by Manufacturer
For each lot of glass supplied, the Manufacturer shall certify the following:
2.2.1 Characteristics
- Light Transmittance (380 to 780) mm
%
- Light reflectance
(external)
%
- Light reflectance
(internal)
%
- UV Transmittance (280 to 380 mm) %
- Direct energy transmittance (300 to 2150) mm %
- Energy reflectance
%
- Energy absorption
%
- Shading Coefficient
%
= Total Solar energy flux entering thru glass
0.87 x incident solar energy
- U value (American summer)
w/m2K
ASHRAE conditions
2.2.2
Compliance with Codes
358
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
- ASTM 1036-91 for vision glass
-ASTM C 1048-92 for spandrel glass
-CBA rating with IGCC in accordance with ASTM E 773 and
insulating glass
E 774 for
-ASTM C 1048 – 92 for heat processing
-ANSI Z 97.1 and CPSC 16 CFR 1201 for safety glazing
2.2.3
Sealant – Substrate test report
2.2.4
Surface compression in heat strengthened glass
2.2.5
Manufacture’s certification of cyclic thermal stress test as per
ASTM C 1048-92 on heat processed glass
2.2.6
Manufacturers report on heat –soaking program for each lot of glass
supplied
2.2.7
Visual Inspection Reports
-
Thickness and dimension tolerances
-
Pinholes
-
Uniformity of colour and opacity
359
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
3
-
Distortion
-
Scratches
STRUCTURAL SEALANT
3.1
3.1.1
Tests on 1 – component sealants
Skin – overtime / Elastomeric tests
Perform tests in fabrication shop on each new lot and once a week to check on shelf life of
one part sealant as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.1.2
Standard Field adhesion test
Perform 10 tests for the first 300m of sealant application and one test for every 300 m
thereafter in fabrication shop as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
3.2
Tests on 2-component sealants
3.2.1
Perform test every time mixing pump is started up to check on
adequate mix of base and curing agent components.
3.2.2
3.3
Snap time test
Perform test daily to relate the mix proportion to the curing rate of the sealant
recommended by the manufacturer.
Deglazing
Deglaze complete panels from frame confirm proper adhesion and joint fill.
360
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Inspection of at least 3% of first 100 glazed panels and at least 1% of panels thereafter shall be
carried out after deglazing in presence of sealant manufacturer.
The following documentation shall be certified jointly by the sealant manufacturer and the
contractor:
a) size of structural bite-design and actual
b) size of structural glue-line
c) adhesion of sealant with panel and frame
d) joint type/condition/penetration of sealant applied.
3.4
Laboratory tests by manufacturer
a) Peel adhesion test as per ASTM C 794-93
b) Compatibility test for sub strates as per ASTM C 1248-93
c) Indentation Hardness durometer test as per ASTM C 661-93
d) Adhesion and Cohesion test under cyclic movement as per ASTM C 719-93
e) Tensile adhesion test as per ASTM C 1135-90
f)
3.5
Ultimate elongation and tensile strength as per ASTM D 412
The sealant manufacturer shall submit laboratory test results for adhesion and
compatibility for each lot of aluminium extrusions and glass.
4
Weather Sealant
4.1.1
Laboratory tests by Manufacturer
a) Durometer Shore Hardness as per ASTM D 2240
b) Tensile strength @ 150% elongation as per ASTM D 412
c) Staining Test as per ASTM D-510
1 set of test certificates shall be submitted for each lot supplied.
361
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
5.
Aluminium Extrusions
5.1
Each lot and type of aluminium extrusions shall be accompanied with :
5.2
a)
certificate of mechanical properties and chemical compositions
b)
certificate of dimensional tolerances to DIN standard
c)
certificate of temper
Section – 13
The contractor shall certify minimum anodising thickness for each lot and type of aluminium
extrusions.
5.3
Anodising thickness shall be checked on site on 10% of extrusions
5.4
PVDF coating thickness shall be checked on site on 10% of extrusions
6
6.1
Composite Aluminium Panels
The manufacturer shall submit one test certificate for each lot type of composite aluminium panels for
:
6.2
a)
Tensile strength and yield strength of composite panels as per ASTM E-8
b)
Tensile and yield strength of aluminium skin
c)
Elongation as per ASTM E 8
d)
Punching shear resistance as per ASTM D 732
e)
Impact test for denting (DUPONT) (0.5 kg and 1 kg steel balls at 500 mm heigt)
The following test result from approved fire test laboratory shall be submitted
a)
Flame spread and smoke developed indices as per ASTM E-84
362
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
b)
UBC 26-9 & NFPA for 30 minute Intermediate scale multi-storey apparatus test to prove no
flame spread beyond area exposed directly to fire source.
6.3
The following test certificates shall be submitted for PVDF/fluoropolymer coating satisfying AA
2605-98
6.4
a)
Corrosion resistance
b)
Salt spray resistance
c)
Weathering
d)
Colour retention
e)
Chalking resistance
f)
Glass retention
g)
Resistance to erosion
The coating agency shall certify performance requirements of all tests as per AAMA 2605-98 –
voluntary specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedure for superior performing
organic coating on Aluminiunm Extensions & panels.
6.5
The coating agency shall certify the minimum thickness of PVDF/fluoropolymer coating
6.6
The Manufacturer shall certify conformance with BS 476, part 6, Class 0 and Part 7, Class 1 6.5. The
manufacturer shall certify the percentage of resin in PVDF / fluoropolymer coating.
7. EPDM.
For each lot of EPDM, test certificates shall be submitted for
a) shore hardness
b) tensile strength
c) elongation
d) ozone resistance
363
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
8. PTFE (Teflon)
For each lot of polytetrafluorothylene (TEFLON) seperators, a set of manufacturer’s test certificates shall
be supplied for
a) tensile strength for elongation as per ASTM D-1457
b) compressive strength as per ASTM D-695
c) shore D-hardness as per ASTM D 2240
d) flexural strength as per ASTM D 790
e) Impact strength as per ASTM D 256
f)
Deformation as per ASTm D 621
g) Coefficient of friction
9. Foam spacers and Mounting Tapes :
For each lot, manufacturer’s test certificates shall be submitted for
a) weathering
b) tensile strength
c) compression
d) elongation
SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES
1
PREAMBLE
General
The schedule of Quantities inclusive of its preamble shall be read in conjunction with all other section of
tender/contract documents and drawings and, after award of contract, with approved shop drawings.
The contractor’s rates and prices shall be deemed to include compliance with the above mentioned
documents. The Contractor shall tender on the basis of the design, supply, installation, guarantees, testing,
protection and maintenance up to the defects liability period GLAZING SYSTEM, STONE Cladding,
front entrance doors.
364
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
2
Section – 13
Item Description
The cost of the following shall be deemed to be included in the rates of all items of GLAZING SYSTEM,
STONE Cladding, Front Entrance Doors.
a) Complete design, supply, installation, guarantees, testing and maintenance.
b) Labour and all cost in connection therewith.
c) Materials including those required for wastage, lapping, joinery and their transport and delivery to site
d) Unloading, storing, packing, handling, hoisting and replacement of defective and rejected materials.
e) Fabricating, assembling, setting, fitting, and fixing materials in position.
f)
All taxes (inclusive of works contract tax) duties, levies and fees payable to authorities and others in
connection with all aspects of the works.
g) Use of construction equipment, tools, scaffolding and temporary supports, ties/struts.
h) Overhead charges and profits.
i)
Protection as specified and required as per site conditions including peel-off film and cleaning on
completion of the works.
j)
Providing samples, mockups, engineering design, calculations and testing as specified in the technical
specifications.
k) Preparing preliminary drawings, shop drawing and as-build drawings
l)
Energy for installation on site.
m) Insurance and guarantees for design and installation
n) Compliance with the drawings, specifications and conditions of contract.
o) Everything necessary-whether specified or otherwise to manufacture and install the items to best
standards and trade practices
p) Co-ordination of site activities and program with those of the Contractors working on site under
ARCHITECTSs directions.
q) GLAZING SYSTEM and cladding shall have provision of perforated bid/vermin proof closures at
bottom as required.
365
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
3
a)
Section – 13
GLAZING SYSTEM
the prices for the glazing system, cladding doors windows and louvers are to include for :
Supports, mullions, transoms, sills, closures and sealing at all interfaces with structure, blind or
shade pockets, splices, linings, fixing accessories, brackets, shims, expansion joints, caulking,
flashing, cappings, sealants, sealant backing materials, gaskets, drainage, sealing screw and bolt
heads etc. hardware, weather stripping around openings, sashes, access hatches and panels,
windows and doors, fixed and openable panels, bird-and-vermin-proof closers, bimetallic
isolation, moiseless joints, and specified lightening protection and all other items required for
proper completion.
b) The prices for glazed panels shall include grinding, polishing and swiping glass edges, glazing beads,
gaskets, glass adaptors, setting blocks, glazing sealants, accessories for fixing, replacing damaged or
defective glass and all other items required for proper completion.
4
CLADDING SYSTEM
The rate for cladding shall include for factory-fabricated composite cladding panels, brakcets, shims,
fixing accessories, closures, and sealing at interfaces with structure, flush setting of windows and louvers,
drainage, sealants, bird-and-vermin-proof closers and all other items required for proper completion.
5
MODE OF MEASUREMENT
All measurements shall be in metric system:
a) GLAZING SYSTEM framework shall be measured overall on the external face as fixed on site
b) Single and double glazed fixed panels and aluminium in-fill panels shall be measured to the overall
dimensions on external face as fixed on site.
366
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
c) Shadow boxes shall be measured clear between mullions and transoms as fixed on site
d) Openable panels for doors and windows shall be measured to overall dimensions on external face and
in sq.m
e) Capping shall be measured in Running Meters on external edge
f)
Fire stops shall be measured in Running Meters at outer edge of R.C.C. structure
g) All flashings, seals and interfaces with building structure other than (e) and (f) above as specified shall
not be separately measured, and their cost shall be included in the item of GLAZING SYSTEM
framework cladding or louvers as applicable.
h) The measurable area of GLAZING SYSTEM framework shall equal the sum of areas of all in fill
panels and visible area of grooves i.e. externally area of item (a) will exceed area of items (b) and (d)
above by the visible are of grooves between the panels.
i)
Cladding will be measured overall on external face as fixed on site after deduction of openings for inbuilt windows, doors and louvers if any
j)
Louvers shall be measured within masonry openings or to overall dimensions on external face if
peripherally linked to cladding / glazing.
367
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
1
Section – 13
INTELLIGENT LIGHTING / SKYLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
1.1
The Programmable Lighting management System shall be supplied, installed and
commissioned in accordance with the KNX / European Installation Bus (EIB)
technology.
1.2
A two-wire bus cable shall link all sensors (push buttons, brightness sensors, motion
sensors, timers etc.) and actuators (on/off controllers, dimming controllers, etc.) to each
other. The bus cable shall be a twisted pair, screened & shielded with solid conductors
and shall be capable of handling information exchange and supplying power to the bus
devices. The bus cable shall be laid in the building in the form of a linear, star or tree
structure similar to the power mains. The bus cable shall follow a free topology (linear,
star or tree structure) to facilitate quicker and reliable installation.
1.3
The system shall be completely de-centralized and programmable. The programming
shall be implemented via a PC or notebook computer located anywhere in the system and
having access level passwords. Any device in the system shall be accessed for
programming from the PC location without having to manipulate the device locally.
1.4
Each device in the system shall be addressable via a software programmable physical
address. Any device in the system shall communicate with any other device via software
programmable group addresses (telegrams). Each individual device will respond to only
those group addresses for which they are programmed to do so. There shall be a nonvolatile memory storing the physical address, group addresses & other software
parameters for every device, thus making it intelligent. No centralized processors or
centralized memory storage devices shall be permitted.
1.5
It shall be possible to program any of the devices on-line at the working site without
affecting any of the system devices or the system operation as well as off-line prior to the
dispatch of the material to site.
1.6
The entire system shall consist of bus line each consisting of up to 64 devices. Two
consecutive lines shall be connected to each other via line couplers that act as network
filters and also provide communication between devices in different lines. In the event of
failure of a device in one line, only the control functions controlled by that device shall
be affected.
1.7
The power supply module feeding power to the network shall consist of a built in backup power to compensate short voltage interruptions of up to 200 ms. This back-up power
shall enable the system to put all actuators in a fail-safe position (either on or off or as it
is) in the event of power failure. Separate power supply to any of the sensors shall not be
acceptable.
368
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
1.8
2
Section – 13
It is electrical Contractors scope and responsibility to re-arrange circuiting to achieve
the functionality of EIB system as explained without any claims. This should include at
the least complete laying of EIB cable YCYM 2x2x0.8.
CONTROL SYSTEM CONCEPT
The programmable lighting management and control system shall consist of following levels
of control.
3
2.1
All circuits which are controlled based on occupancy sensors, daylight, local switches
etc. shall at all times be working in the standalone ‘Auto’ mode with monitoring and
override control possible from the remote operator.
2.2
A second level of standalone operation shall also be possible via local timer modules
capable of being programmed with switching times locally without the need to connect a
PC. A 16-channel timer with 500 permanently storable switching times shall be provided
to ensure this standalone operation. This shall ensure that the system remains operational
at all times in the auto mode. Apart from the standard week program, it shall be possible
to enter 9 additional week programs for each channel. It should be possible to call this
week programs by entering start and the end date.
2.3
It should be possible to remotely access the EIB installation through Ethernet. For the
purpose an IP router shall be provided to connect bus lines with an Internet Protocol (IP)
data network.
LIGHTING CONTROL CONCEPT
All Lighting shall be controlled such that necessary lights shall be switched ‘Off’ based on
occupancy. Also lights redundant due to sufficient daylight shall be switched ‘Off’ based on
light sensor and time schedules.
The Motion Detectors shall have a built-in-lux sensor, adjustable in steps from approx. 1 to
1000 lux (night to day operation), as not to switch ‘On’ circuits even after detecting
movement due to sufficient natural light. There shall also be an adjustable ‘Off’ delay on the
movement sensor from 1 sec to 16 mins., so as to ensure that circuits are not switched ‘Off’
immediately.
All motion detectors shall be wall mounted type integrated passive infrared motion sensors to
react to temperature change in its monitoring range. In addition, based on the requirements
like in bedrooms etc, ceiling mounted presence detectors shall be used.
The scenes or requirements listed below must be programmable as per site requirements.
369
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
4
Section – 13
LIGHT SWITCHES AND SOCKETS
4.1
All lighting switches shall be supplied complete with EIB bus coupling unit inserts.
4.2
All switches shall have screw less clamping.
4.3
Socket outlets in bedroom, living rooms hall etc. shall be schuko/BS type rated for
16/13A, 250V AC;. Outlets shall be provided with 16A switch actuator with integrated
bus coupling unit, to ensure operation of plug in equipments through EIB.
4.4
Suitable wall boxes should be used to all proper mounting of switches with inserts
(60mm deep).
4.5
If conventional switches / push buttons are directed by the architect / client in specific
places, a flush mounted universal interface (2 and 4 channels) for linking via the bus
these switches / push buttons to the switching / dimming control modules. Each channel
of this interface shall be capable of switching, dimming, control and storing of light
scenes.
5
LOAD SWITCH (for ‘On-Off’ switching control)
5.1
The lighting control modules shall be DIN rail mounted consisting of eight or four or
two outputs (bistable relays, volt free contacts).
5.2
It shall be possible to operate each output manually via a slide switch or alternatively
via a pushbutton with an integrated LED indicating the switching position.
5.3
It shall be possible to switch the current of 0.01 to 16A /AC-1 at 230V AC. Additional
contactors shall not be used to control any of the lighting controls.
5.4
The load switch shall have an electromagnetic compatibility complying with EN
50081-1, EN 50082-1 and EN 50090-2-2.
5.5
The load switch should operate reliably with rate of failure: 766 fit at 40°C. with
100,000 switching cycle for each output
5.6
It should be possible to set the behavior of the relay contact on bus voltage failure to
‘Off’, ‘On’ or ‘no action’.
5.7
The load switch shall be capable of being programmed with different applications to
suit site requirements. The application for which a relay has been
370
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
programmed shall apply irrespective of the signal from which it is switched. It shall be
possible to invert the output function as normally open or normally closed.
5.8
5.9
The System shall also support master slave combination for all 10 Amps, 16 Amps and
20 Amps Switching Actuators with Load check and energy monitoring feature with
runtime hour and automatic fault detection.
The main Module should support up to 4 Sub modules of rating 10/16/20 Amps
5.10 Each master slave module shall be C-Load AC3 with 200 micro Farad Capacitor to
compensate high Inrush current from High Pressure lamps.
6
BRIGHTNESS SENSOR
The brightness sensor shall provide ambient light level and outdoor temperature values.
These values can be sent onto the bus. It should be possible to control load switches,
dimmers, blinds/shutters based on threshold settings for ambient light level and outdoor
temperature.
The Brightness Sensor should have in built lux calculator and separate unit for lux-calcualtor
sending the lux-values to the EIB unit shall not be accepted.
The Brightness Sensor shall have built-in temperature sensor for logic operation in order to
avoid false trigger arising due to sudden artificial brightness change.
Measurement range
Light Level
Temperature
-
1………..100,000 lux
-5………+55°C
Power supply
-
via EIB bus
Protection
-
IP 54 in accordance with DIN EN 60 529.
Ambient temperature operating Ambient temperature non operating -
-5° C to + 55° C
-5° C to + 70° C
371
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
7
Section – 13
MOTION SENSOR, CEILING – MOUNTED
Motion device sensor with sensor angle 290 degrees is used to send switch-on commands to
actuators via EIB. Installation wall mounted or external weather proof mounting to
engineer’s approval. Supplier must provide all mounting accessories required.
Sensing
passive infrared motion detector 290°
Horizontal detection angle on two levels
Power supply
-
EIB
Ambient temperature
Operation
Storage
IP Rating
-
-5°C to + 45°C
-25°C to +70°C
IP 55
Relative humidity (not condensing)-
Range
Detecting Range:
5% to 93%.
Adjustable in steps from
2000lux (night to day operation).
approx. 16mts.
approx.
0.5
to
Operating Elements
Potentiometer for steeples adjustment of the range
between 100% to 20%.
Protection type
-
IP 20 according to EN 60529
Protection class
-
III according to IEC 61140.
Over Voltage category
-
III according to IEC 60664-1.
8
TIME MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
8.1
There shall be DIN rail mounted time management controller devices allowing to
program up to 200 event programs.
8.2
The time controller shall be synchronized by a DIN rail mounted time switch. The time
switch shall have 500 switching times and 16 time dependant channels.
372
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
9
Section – 13
8.3
It shall be possible to perform switching as per daily, weekly, date, and priority and
impulse instructions.
8.4
The module shall manage up to 125 diary entries per day. Together these diary entries /
day programs shall contain up to 400 timed jobs.
DIMMER CONTROL
9.1 Where dimming is required for incandescent and halogen lamps, universal dimming
devices mounted on a DIN rail EN 60715-TH35-7.5 shall be used to switch and dim these
lamps. It shall be possible to connect the EIB bus to these dimmers through data rail
and/or through bus terminals. Short circuit protection shall be provided by electronic
fuse. Dimmers shall work automatically in accordance with the generalized phase control
principle
9.2 Dimmers shall allow switching on bus voltage recurrence and shall allow reading the
state via bus. Short circuit protection shall be provided by electronic fuse that switches
the device down for one minute when it detects a short circuit.
9.3 Dimmers shall not be operated with a combination of different loads simultaneously.
Though electronic transformers for dimming with phase control may be used with AC
230V incandescent lamps. Universal Dimming modules shall have automatic load
detection facility, so that the dimmer is able to set the operating mode accordingly
(trailing or leading edge).
9.4 All Universal Dimmers shall have a manual override for manual Dimming with built in
inputs to connect conventional switch for Dimming.
9.5 The Universal Dimmer should support master slave combination up to 5 modules.
9.6 Paralleling between 2 modules shall be easily achieved and a load up to 2000 VA can be
independently dimmed using 2 KNX sub modules.
10
DIMMING MODULES FOR FLUORESCENT AND COLD CATHODE LIGHT
FITTINGS:
10.1 Where dimming is required for fluorescent lamps or cold cathode light fittings, DIN
rail-mounted dimming modules comprising of eight 16A switching channels (latch-on
type relay) and eight 1 – 10 VDC channels shall be used.
373
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
10.2 Each of the switching channels shall be used to switch the light fittings On/Off while
the corresponding 1 – 10 VDC channel shall provide the control (dimming) for the high
frequency dimmable ballasts. Dimmers without latch-on type relay switching channel
shall not be acceptable. Each of the channels shall be individually programmed to control
a circuit irrespective of the other channel-controlled circuit.
10.3 Dimming circuits shall be able to be switched on with preprogrammed value from 10 –
100%, additionally dimming shall be also possible between preprogrammed minimum
and maximum values. Fluorescent & Cold Cathode type light fittings shall be equipped
with High Frequency Dimmable Ballasts accepting 1-10 VDC signal. These High
Frequency dimmable ballasts shall be an integral part of the light fittings and supplied by
the light-fitting manufacturer.
10.4 If the light fittings are provided with DALI interface, appropriate switching/Dimming
actuators with digital primary switching devices that have DALI Interface and connected
to the KNX EIB shall be used. There shall be eight channels, of which one shall have the
capacity of a switching/dimming actuator. The DALI operating devices of each
individual channel shall be directly wired so that no further additional commissioning
procedure is necessary for the primary switching devices. The status (brightness & error
messages of lamps and ballast) of the DALI primary switching devices shall be
transmitted on the EIB BUS.
10.5 DALI Controllers should support additional built in features like Scenes, Effects/
Sequence without additional hardware.
11
SHUTTER / BLIND CONTROL
11.1 Shutter / Blind controllers shall be DIN rail-mounted suitable for controlling up to
four(4) independent 230 VAC drive mechanisms. Shutter controller shall have four(4) or
eight(8) independent channels, each with 2 switch contacts for up/down control. Each
channel contact shall be rated at 6 A per switch contact.
11.2 The controller shall incorporate a feature of direct manual operation with or without the
bus voltage connected. The control module shall have a safety feature that avoids any
possible damage to drive mechanism due to sudden changes in direction. Mechanism
protecting shall be via identifying a fixed time base for determining the pause between
changes in direction.
11.3 The shutter actuator should have a push button with a LED to switch between
automatic and manual operation. Each channel shall have the facility of saving and
recalling two intermediate sunshade settings.
374
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
11.4 The control module shall have manual override facility to ensure increased operational
reliability in the event of bus voltage failure.
11.5 There shall be LED indications on the module to indicate the direction of travel.
12
LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS (LCP)
There shall be a dedicated Lighting Control Panel (LCP) for every DB. The LCP shall house
the system devices and the related control equipment depending on the number of circuits
being controlled. This is to ensure the power wiring between the DB’s and the control
modules inside the LCP’s is kept to a minimum. The LCP’s shall be provided with built-in
DIN-rails for easy installation of the control equipment.
13
CONDUTING AND WALL BOXES
13.1 It is electrical Contractors scope and responsibility to re-arrange circuiting to achieve
the functionality of EIB system as explained without any claims. This should include at
the least complete laying of EIB cable YCYM 2x2x0.8 and the required conducting.
13.2 Suitable wall boxes to be fixed, to allow proper mounting of switches with inserts
(60mm deep).
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF FIRE FIGHTING WORK
WORKMANSHIP
The workmanship shall be best of its kind and shall conform to the specifications, as below or
Indian Standard Specifications in every respect or latest trade practices and shall be subject to
approval of the Owner’s Site Representative. All materials and/or Workmanship which in the
opinion of the Owner’s Site Representative / Architect / Consultant is defective or unsuitable shall
be removed immediately from the site and shall be substituted with proper materials and/or
workmanship forthwith.
375
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
2. MATERIALS
All materials shall be best of their kind and shall conform to the latest Indian Standards.
All materials shall be of approved quality as per samples and origins approved by the Owner’s Site
Representative / Architect / Consultants.
SECTION-01 :: FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
1.
SCOPE
The scope of this section consists of but is not necessarily limited to supply, installation,
testing and commissioning of the fire protection system. The philosophy of the system is as
follows :
a.
The Fire fighting System shall comprise the Fire Hydrants System with fire pumps
b.
Water from the underground / static water storage tank of RCC Fire Water Storage
Tanks, each of 100 cum capacity for each building , shall be supplied for the uses
listed below.
i.
Fire Hydrant System (Pressurised) both for the external hydrants, the internal
landing valves and the hose reels at landings.
c.
The Hydrant System under normal conditions, shall be pressurized by means of the
electric motor driven Jockey Pump.
d.
The Hydrant System shall be provided with two pump sets including one standby.
e.
The piping and valve connections shall be done so that the water from the discharge
of the Hydrant Pump
f.
The starting and stopping of the Jockey pump shall be automatic based on the
pressure switches at preset low and high pressure.
g.
The electric motor driven Hydrant Pump starts automatically at a preset pressure by
means of a pressure switch. As soon as the Hydrant Pump starts, the Jockey Pump
Stops. If for any reason the electric motor driven Hydrant Pump does not start at the
preset pressure or is unable to maintain the pressure, the standby Diesel Engine
driven Pump starts at the preset pressure.
h.
The Hydrant Pump shall be stopped only manually.
376
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
i.
Section – 13
Contractor shall ensure Hydro Testing for the complete system.
2. PIPE WORK
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
All materials shall be of the best quality conforming to the specifications and subject to the
approval of the Consultants.
Pipes shall be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for repair and maintenance
and shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passages etc.
Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable clamps and supports at
intervals specified. Only approved type of anchor fasteners shall be used for RCC slabs and
walls / floors etc.
Valves and other appurtenances shall be so located that they are easily accessible for
operations, repairs and maintenance.
Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required in a neat
workman like manner.
Pipe accessories such as gauges, meters, control devices, etc. shall have the same working
pressure rating as the associated pipe work. All pipe work shall be free from burrs, rust and
scale and shall be cleaned before installation. All personnel engaged on welding operations
must possess a certificate of competence issued by an acceptable / recognized authority.
2.2
PIPING
Pipes of following types are to be used:
Galvanised iron pipes as per IS:1239 heavy grade(for pipes of sizes 150 mm N.B. and
below) suitably lagged on the outside to prevent soil corrosion. G.I. pipes buried below
ground shall also be suitably be lagged with 4mm thick protection coating over 2 coats of
primer.
Pipelines upto 150 mm dia shall be as per IS: 1239, Part-I (heavy grade) while pipelines
above 150 mm dia shall be as per I.S.:3589.
377
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Pipes shall be hung by means of expandable anchor fastener of approved make and design.
The hangers and clamps shall be fastened by means of galvanised nuts and bolts. The
size/diameter of the anchor fastener and the clamps shall be suitable to carry the weight of
water filled pipe and dead load normally encountered.
Hangers and supports shall be thoroughly galvanised after fabrication. The selection and
design of the hanger & support shall be capable of carrying the sum of all concurrently
acting loads. They shall be designed to provide the required supporting effects and allow
pipeline movements as necessary.
The piping system shall be tested for leakages at 2 times the operating pressure or 1.5 time
shut-off pressure, which ever is highest including testing for water hammer effects for a
period of 4 hr. minimum.
Flanged joints shall be used for connections for vessels, equipment, flanged valves
For pipes under ground installation the pipes shall be buried at least one meter below ground
level and shall have 230 mm x 230 mm masonry or concrete supports at least 300 mm high
at 3m intervals. Masonry work to have plain cement concrete foundation (1 cement: 4
coarse sand : 8 stone aggregate) of size 380x380x75 thick resting on firm soil.
Mains below ground level shall be supported laid at least 2.0 metre away from the building.
2.3
PIPING INSTALLATION & SUPPORT
Tender drawings indicate schematically the size and location of pipes. The Contractor, on
the award of the work, shall prepare detailed working drawings, showing the crosssections, longitudinal sections, details of fittings, locations of isolating and control
valves, drain and air valves, and all pipe supports. He must keep in view the specific
openings in buildings and other structure through which pipes are designed to pass.
Piping shall be properly supported on support or suspended from , on stands, clamps,
hangers as specified and as required. The Contractor shall adequately design all the
brackets, saddles, anchor, clamps and hangers.
Pipe work and fittings shall be supported by hangers or brackets so as to permit free
expansion and contraction. Risers shall be supported at each floor with clamps. To permit
free movement of common piping support shall be from a common hanger bar fabricated
from Galvanised steel sections.
378
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Pipe hangers shall be provided at the following maximum spacings:
Pipe Dia
(mm)
Hanger Rod Dia
(mm)
Spacing between Supports
(m)
Up to 25
10
3.0
32 to 50
10
3.0
65 to 80
10
3.0
80 to 100
10
3.0
125 to 150
12
4.0
200 to 300
12
4.0
The end of the steel rods shall be threaded and not welded to the threaded bolt.
All pipe work shall be carried out in a proper workman like manner, causing minimum
disturbance to the existing services, buildings, roads and structure. The entire piping
work shall be organized in consultation with other agencies work, so that area can be
carried out in one stretch.
Cut-outs in the floor slab for installing the various pipes area are indicated in the
drawings. Contractor shall carefully examine the cut-outs provided and clearly point out
wherever the cut-outs shown in the drawings, do not meet with the requirements.
The contractor shall make sure that the clamps, brackets, saddles and hangers provided
for pipe supports are adequate or as specified. Piping layout shall take due care for
expansion and contraction in pipes and include expansion joints where required.
All pipes shall be accurately cut to the required sizes in accordance with relevant BIS
codes and burrs removed before laying. Open ends of the piping shall be closed as the
pipe is installed to avoid entrance of foreign matter.
Automatic air valves shall be provided at all high points in the piping system for venting.
All valves shall be of 15mm pipe size and shall be associated with an equal size gate
valves.
Discharge from the air valves shall be piped through a pipe to the nearest drain or sump. All pipes shall be
pitched towards drain points.
Pressure gauges shall be provided as shown on the approved drawings. Care shall be
taken to protect pressure gauges during pressure testing.
379
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
2.4
Section – 13
PIPE FITTINGS
Pipe fittings mean tees, elbows, couplings, unions, flanges, reducers etc and all such
connecting devices that are needed to complete the piping work in its totality.
Forged steel screwed type fitting / Forged socket fitting shall be used for pipes of 50 mm
dia & below.
Butt Weld fittings shall be used for pipes of 65 mm dia & above..
2.5
PROCEDURE FOR PIPE PROTECTION APPLICATION
A)
Surface Preparation - The pipe surface shall be cleaned by a wire brush.
B)
Application of Primer - Primer is to be applied on pipes immediately after cleaning.
This is to prevent any further accumulation of rust on the pipe. This is a cold applied
primer and is applied by brush.
C)
Application of 4 mm bitumastic Tape - After the primer is applied on the pipe, it is
allowed to dry for about 30 min. till it becomes touch dry. Before adhering the tape to
the pipe, it is advisable to gently heat the primer coated pipe by a run of LPG torch.
Remove the bottom polyethylene from the tape & then heat bottom surface of the tape
by LPG torch or any heat source & start wrapping the tape to the pipe by heating the
primer coated pipe & by removing the bottom polyethylene from the tape before
wrapping better adhesion between the tape & pipe is obtained. Overlaps are
maintained with a minimum of 15.0 mm.
D)
Tape coating of weld joints - The tape is applied over the weld joints after the
necessary welding & testing methods of the joints is completed. The procedure for
application of tape shall be the same as bare pipe procedure. Overlaps on each side of
the weld joints shall be 50 mm.
2.6
JOINTING
2.6.1
Welded Joints :
Joints between pipes and fittings shall be butt joint made with the pipes and fittings having “V” groove and
welded with electrical resistance welding in an approved manner.
380
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
3.SYSTEM DRAINAGE
The system shall be provided with suitable drainage arrangement with drain valves complete with
all accessories.
4.VALVES
4.1
BUTTERFLY VALVE
The butterfly valve shall be suitable for waterworks and rated for Pressure requirement as
mentioned in the Schedule of quantities.
The body shall be of cast iron to IS:210 in circular shape and of high strength to take the
water pressure . The disc shall be heavy duty cast iron with anti corrosive epoxy or nickel
coating.
The valve seat shall be replaceable of high grade elastomer EPDM or nitrile rubber with
hard backing. The valve is closed position shall have complete contact between the seat and
the disc throughout the perimeter. The elastomer rubber shall have a long life and shall not
give away on continuous applied water pressure . The shaft shall be EN 8 grade carbon
steel.
The valve shall be fitted between two flanges on either side of pipe flanges. The valve edge
rubber shall be projected outside such that they are wedged within the pipe flanges to
prevent leakages.
4.2
BALL VALVE
The ball valve shall be made forged brass and suitable for test pressure of pipe line. The
be internally threaded to receive pipe connections.
valve shall
The ball shall be made from brass and machined to perfect round shape and subsequently
chrome plated. The seat of the valve body-bonnet gasket and gland packing shall be of
Teflon.
The handle shall be provided with PVC jacket. The handle shall also indicate the direction
of ‘open’ and ‘closed’ situations. The gap between the ball and the teflon packing shall be
sealed to prevent water seeping.
The handle shall also be provided with a lug to keep the movement of the ball valve within
90°. The lever shall be operated smoothly and without application of any unnecessary force.
381
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
4.3
Section – 13
GUN METAL VALVES
Gun metal Valves shall be used for smaller dia pipes, and for threaded connections. The
Valves shall bear certification as per IS:778
The body and bonnet shall be of gun metal to IS:318. The stem gland and gland nut shall be
of forged brass to IS:6912. The hand wheel shall be of cast iron to IS:210.
The Hand wheel shall be of high quality finish to avoid hand abrasions. Movement shall
also be easy. The spindle shall be non rising type.
4.4
FLAP TYPE - NON-RETURN VALVE
Non-Return valves shall be cast iron double flanged with cast iron body and gun metal/ S.S.
internal parts conforming to IS:5312.
5.PRESSURE SWITCH
The pressure switches shall be employed for starting and shutting down operation of pumps
automatically, dictated by line pressure. The Pressure Switch shall be diaphragm type. The housing
shall be die cast aluminium, with SS 316 movement, pressure element and socket. The set pressure
shall be adjustable.
The Switch shall be suitable for consistent and repeated operations without change in values. It
shall be provided with IP:55 water and environment protection.
6. PRESSURE GAUGE
Pressure gauge shall be provided as indicated in the drawing. Pressure gauge shall be 50 mm dia
gunmetal bourdon type with gunmetal isolation ball valve, tapping and connecting pipe and nipple.
The gauge shall be installed at appropriate height for easy readability.
7.PAINTING
All Hydrant and Sprinkler pipes shall be painted with post office red colour paint. All pipes shall
first be cleaned thoroughly before application of primer coat. After application of primer coat two
coats of enamel paint shall be applied. Each coat shall be given minimum 24 hours drying time. No
thinners shall be used.
Painting shall be expertly applied, the paint shall not over run on surfaces not requiring painting
such as walls, surfaces etc. Nuts and bolts shall be painted black, while valves shall be painted blue.
382
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
8.EXCAVATION
Excavation for pipe lines shall be in open trenches to levels and grades shown on the drawings or as
required at site. Pipe lines shall be burried with a minimum cover of 1 meter or as shown on
drawings.
On completion of testing in the presence of the Project Manager and pipe protection, trenches shall
be backfilled in 150 mm layers and consolidated.
Contractor shall dispose off all surplus earth as directed by the Project Manager.
9.ANCHOR / THRUST BLOCK
Contractor shall provide suitably designed anchor blocks in cement concrete/steel support
to cater to the excess thrust due to work hammer and high pressure
Thrust blocks shall be provided at all bends, tees and such other location as determined by the
Project Manager.
Exact location, design, size and mix of the concrete blocks/steel support shall be as shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Project Manager prior to execution of work.
10. FIRE HYDRANTS
10.1
Internal Hydrants
a.
Contractor shall provide on each landing as shown on the drawings Single / double
headed gunmetal / stainless steel landing valve with 100 / 80 mm dia inlet as per
IS:5290, with shut off valves having cast iron wheels as shown on the drawings and
BOQ. Landing valve shall have flanged inlet and instantaneous type outlets as
shown on the drawings.
b.
Instantaneous outlets for fire hydrants shall be standard pattern and suitable for fire
hoses.
c.
Contractor shall provide for each internal fire hydrant station two numbers of 63 mm
dia. 15 m long rubberized fabric lined hose pipes with gunmetal male and female
instantaneous type coupling machine would with GI wire (hose to IS:636 type 2 and
couplings to IS:903 with IS certification), fire hose reel, gunmetal branch pipe with
nozzle to IS:903. This shall be measured and paid for separately.
383
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
10.2
Section – 13
d.
Contractor shall provide standard fire hose reels of 19mm dia high pressure dunlop
rubber hose 36.5 m long with nozzle, all mounted on a circular hose reel of heavy
duty mild steel construction with brackets. Hose reel shall be connected directly to
the wet riser with an isolating valve. Hose reel shall conform to IS:884 and shall be
mounted vertically . This shall be measured and paid for separately.
f.
Each internal hydrant hose cabinet containing items as above
g.
Each hose cabinet shall be conspicuously painted with the letters “FIRE HOSE”.
Hose Reel
Hose reel shall conform to IS : 884, heavy duty, 19 mm dia and shall be 36.5 metre long
fitted with nozzle, mild steel pressed reel drum which can swing upto 170 degree with wall
brackets finished with red and black enamel complete.
10.3
Fire Hose
All hose pipes shall be of 63 mm diameter RRL/ CP as required, conforming to IS : 636 or
IS : 8423. The hose shall be provided with copper alloy / Gunmetal delivery coupling. The
hose shall be capable of withstanding a bursting pressure of 35.7 Kg/Sq.cm without undue
leakage or sweating. Hose shall be provided with instantaneous spring-lock, type couplings.
10.4
Branch Pipe, Nozzle
Branch pipes shall be of gun metal with loaded tin GM ring at the discharge and to receive
the nozzle and provided at the other with a leaded tin Gm to fit into the instantaneous
coupling. Nozzle shall be of spray type of diameter of not less than 16 mm and not more
than 25 mm. Nozzle shall be of loaded GM branch pipe and nozzle shall be of instantaneous
pattern conforming to Indian Standard - 903.
10.5
Fire shaft door
Fire shaft door shall be provided for all internal fire hydrants. The door shall be fabricated
from 16 gauge MS powder coated sheet of fully welded construction with hinged double
front door partially glazed (3 mm glass panel) with locking arrangement, stove enamelled
fire red paint (shade No. 536 of IS:5) with “FIRE HOSE” written on it prominently (size as
given in the schedule of quantities).
384
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
11.
11.1
Section – 13
FIRE PUMPS AND ALLIED EQUIPMENTS
SCOPE
Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all labour, materials, equipment and
appliances necessary and required to completely install electrically operated as required by
drawings and specified hereinafter or given in the schedule of rates.
11.2.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Pumps shall be installed true to levels on suitable concrete foundations. Base plate shall be
firmly fixed by properly grouted foundation bolts.
Pumps and motors shall be truly aligned by suitably instruments. Record of such alignment
shall be furnished to the Project Manager.
All pump connections shall be standard flanged type with number of bolts as per relevant
standard requirement for the working pressure. Companion flanges shall be provided with
the pumps.
Manufacturers’ instructions regarding installation, connections and commissioning shall be
strictly followed.
Contractor shall provide necessary test certificates, type test certificates, performance curves
and NPSH curves of the pumps from the manufacturer when called for. The contractor shall
provide facilities to the Project Manager & Consultant for inspection of equipment during
manufacturing and also to witness various tests at factory at the manufacturer’s works
without any cost to the Project Manager or Consultant.
The contractor shall submit with this tender a list of recommended spare parts for three
years of normal operation and quote the prices for the same as a separate submittal /
annexure.
11.3.
PUMP
Electrical motor driven Main Hydrant Pump of centrifugal horizontal end suction back pull
out type with gland packing and capable to deliver 2280 LPM at 70 MWC .The pump shall
be coupled to TEFC motor of suitable HP & speed and complete set shall mounted on
385
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
common base frame . The quoted rate shall includes providing & fixing of coupling,
coupling gaurd.matching flanges for suction & delivery side, Foundation bolts and RCC
foundation as recommended by manufacturer etc. RCC Foundation will be done by the civil
agency
Diesel Engine driven common stand by pump, horizontal centrifugal end suction back pull
out type with gland packing and capable to deliver 2280 at 70 MWC. The pump shall
coupled to suitable HP of Diesel engine radiator water cooled type and mounted on common
base frame, two sets of Batteries & battery leads with stand, Fuel tank (For 6 Hrs. running
and filled fully) with stand &Fuel piping etc. The quoted rate shall includes coupling,
coupling guard, and other standard accessories,RCC foundation (as recommended by
manufacturer) and foundation bolts, etc, complete., RCC Foundation will be done by the
civil agency
Electrical motor driven Jockey pump of centrifugal horizontal end suction type with gland
packing .bronze impeller and capable to deliver 180 LPM at 70 MWC.The pump shall be
coupled to TEFC motor of suitable HP & speed and complete set shall mounted on common
base frame. The quoted rate shall includes providing & fixing of coupling, coupling
gaurd.matching flanges for suction & delivery side, Foundation bolts and RCC foundation
as recommended by manufacturer etc.
11.4.
Motor Starter
The motor starter shall be as per detail in MCC. The unit shall include suitable current
transformer and ammeter of suitable range on one line to indicate the current. The starter
shall not incorporate under voltage, no voltage trip overload or SPP.
The starter assembly shall be suitably integrated in the power and control panel for the wet
riser system.
SECTION-03 :: ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION FOR TERRACE BOOSTER PUMP
1. CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
The Motor Control Centre (MCC) electrical panels shall be sheet steel cabinet for indoor
installation, dead front, floor mounting/wall mounting type and shall be 3b construction.
The control panel shall be totally enclosed, completely dust and vermin proof and shall
be with hinged doors with Neoprene gasket. Control panel shall be suitable for the
climatic conditions as specified in Specifications. Steel sheets used in the construction of
Control panel shall be 2 mm thick and shall be folded and braced as necessary to provide
a rigid support for all components. Joints of any kind in sheet metal shall be seam
386
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
welded, all welding, slag shall be rounded off and welding pits wiped smooth with
plumber metal. The general construction shall confirm to relevant BIS Codes.
All panels and covers shall be properly fitted and square with the frame, and holes in the
panel correctly positioned. Fixing screws shall enter into holes tapped into an adequate
thickness of metal or provided with wing nuts. Self threading screws shall not be used in
the construction of Control panels. A base channel of 75 mm x 40 mm x 5 mm thick shall
be provided at the bottom for floor mounted panels. Minimum clearance of 275 mm shall
be provided between the floor of control panel and the lowest unit.
The control panel shall be of adequate size with a provision of 25% spare space to
accommodate possible future breakers. Breakers shall be arranged in multi-tier. Knockout
holes of appropriate size and number shall be provided in the Motor Control Centre in
conformity with the location of cable/conduit connections. Removable sheet steel plates
shall be provided at the top to make holes for additional cable entry at site if required.
All panels shall be provided with circuit diagram mounted on inside of door shutter
protected with Hylam sheet. All live accessible connections shall be shrouded and shall
be finger touch proof and minimum clearance between phase and earth shall be 20 mm
and phase to phase shall be 25 mm.
Panels with ACB shall necessarily have front and rear access as per requirement whereas
panels with all MCCB breaker shall be provided with front access with sufficient
clearance. Dual sources of incoming power supply is required.
2.WIRING SYSTEM
All control wiring shall be carried out by using PVC insulated copper conductor wires in
conduits. Minimum size of control wiring shall be 1.5 sq mm. Minimum size of
conductor for power wiring shall be 4 sq. mm 1100 volts grade PVC insulated copper
conductor wires in conduits.
3.CIRCUIT COMPARTMENT
Each circuit breaker, contactor and relay shall be housed in a separate compartment and
shall have steel sheets on top and bottom of compartment. Sheet steel hinged lockable
door shall be duly interlocked with the breaker in the “ON” position. Safety interlocks
shall be provided to prevent the breaker from being drawn-out when the breaker is in
‘ON’ position. The door shall not form an integral part of the draw-out portion of the
panel. Sheet steel barriers shall be provided between the tiers in a vertical section.
387
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
4.INSTRUMENT ACCOMMODATION
Adequate space shall be provided for accommodating instruments, indicating lamps,
control contactors and control MCBs. These shall be accessible for testing and
maintenance without any danger of accidental contact with live parts of the circuit breaker
and bus bar `ON’ lamps shall be provided on all outgoing feeders.
5.BUS BAR CONNECTIONS
Bus bar and interconnections shall be of high conductivity electrolytic aluminium
complying with requirement of grade E91E of IS:5082-1981 and shall be of rectangular
cross section suitable for carrying the rated full load current and short circuit current
without overheating of phase and neutral bus bar and shall be extendable on either side.
Bus bar and interconnections shall be insulated with heat shrinkable sleeve and shall be
colour coded and shall be supported on glass fiber reinforced thermosetting plastic
insulated supports at regular intervals to withstand the force arising from in case of short
circuit in the system. All bus bar shall be provided in a separate chamber and all
connections shall be done by bolting. Additional cross sectional area shall be added to the
bus bar to compensate for the holes. All connections between bus bar and breaker shall be
through solid aluminium strips of proper size to carry full rated current as per approved
for construction shop drawing and insulated with insulating sleeves. Bus bar shall be
rated for current density of 1.0 amps/mm2 cross section area.
6.TEMPERATURE - RISE LIMIT
Unless otherwise specified, in the case of external surface of enclosures of bus bar
trunking system which shall be accessible but do not need to be touched during normal
operation, an increase in the temperature up to 85° C shall be permissible for metal
surface as per relevant IS Codes.
7.CABLE COMPARTMENTS
Cable compartment of adequate size shall be provided in the control panel for easy
clamping of all incoming and outgoing cables entering from the top/bottom. Adequate
supports shall be provided in cable compartment to support cables as per approved for
construction shop drawing.
388
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
8.MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCCB)
All MCCB’s shall be motor duty and Current Limiting type, and comprise of Quick
Make - break switching mechanism, preferably Double Break Contact system, arc
extinguishing device and the tripping unit shall be contained in a compact, high strength,
heat resistant, flame retardant, insulating moulded case with high withstand capability
against thermal and mechanical stresses. All MCCB’s shall be capable of defined
Variable overload adjustment. All MCCB’s rated 200 Amps and above shall have
adjustable Magnetic short circuit pick up.
The trip command shall override all other commands. MCCB shall employ maintenance
free double break contact system to minimise the let thru’ energies and capable of
achieving discrimination upto full short circuit capacity of downstream MCCB. The
manufacturer shall provide both discrimination tables and let thru energy curves.
The breaking capacity of MCCB’s shall be asked for in the schedule of quantities. The
breaking capacities specified will be ICU=ICS i.e type-2. Co-ordination as per relevant IS
and IEC Codes.
The MCCB’s shall be provided with rotary handle operating mechanism. The handle
position shall give positive indication of ‘ON’, ‘OFF’ or ‘Tripped’ thus qualifying to
Disconnection as per the IS/IEC indicating the true position of all the contacts. In case of
4 pole MCCB the neutral shall be defined and capable of offering protection.
9.MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCB)
Miniature Circuit Breaker shall comply with relevant IS Codes and shall be quick make
and break type for 230/415 VAC 50 Hz application with magnetic thermal release for
over current and short circuit protection. The breaking capacity shall not be less than 10
KA at 415 VAC. MCBs shall be DIN mounted. The MCB shall be Current Limiting type
(Class-3). MCBs shall be classified (B,C,D ref IS standard) as per their Tripping
Characteristic curves defined by the manufacturer. The MCB shall have the minimum
power loss (Watts) per pole defined as per the IS/IEC and the manufacturer shall publish
the values.
The housing shall be heat resistant and having a high impact strength. The terminals shall
be protected against finger contact to IP20 Degree of protection. All DP, TP and TPN
miniature circuit breakers shall have a common trip bar independent to the external
operating handle.
389
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
10.PAINTING
All sheet steel work shall undergo a process of degreasing, pickling in acid, cold rinsing,
phosphating, passivating (seven tank processing) and then painted with electrostatic paint
(Powder coating). The shade of colour of panel inside/outside shall be as specified in the
datasheet as per relevant BIS code.
11.LABELS
Engraved PVC labels shall be provided on all incoming and outgoing feeder. Circuit
diagram showing the arrangements of the circuit inside the control panel shall be pasted
on inside of the panel door and covered with transparent plastic sheet.
12.METERS
i.
All voltmeters and indicating lamps shall be through MCB’s.
ii.
Meters and indicating instruments shall be plug type.
iii.
All CT’s connection for meters shall be through Test Terminal Block (TTB).
iv.
CT ratio and burdens shall be as specified on the Single line diagram.
13.CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Current transformers shall be provided for Control panels carrying current in excess of 60
amps. All phase shall be provided with current transformers of suitable VA burden with 5
amps secondaries for operation of associated metering.
The CTs shall confirm to relevant Indian Standards. The design and construction shall be
dry type, epoxy resin cast robust to withstand thermal and dynamic stresses during short
circuits. Secondary terminals of CTs shall be brought out suitable to a terminal block
which shall be easily accessible for testing and terminal connections. The protection CTs
shall be of accuracy class 5P20 and measurement CTs shall be of accuracy class I.
14.SELECTOR SWITCH
Where called for, selector switches of rated capacity shall be provided in control panels,
to give the choice of operating equipment in selective mode.
390
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
15.STARTERS
Each motor shall be provided with a starter of suitable rating. contractor shall select
suitable rating and type of starter for the motors as per directions and approval from
relevant authorities. Starters shall be in accordance with relevant IS Codes.
The following capacity contactors and overload relays shall be provided for different
capacity motors or as per Type 2 Coordination chart published by manufacturer
whichever is suitable as per selected make.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TYPE OF
CONTACTOR
OVERLOAD
STARTER
CURRENT
RELAY
CAPACITY RANGE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5 HP Motors D O L
16 amps
6-10 amps
7.5 HP motors
DOL
16 amps
9-15 amps
10 HP Motors
DOL
25 amps
9-15 amps
12.5 HP Motors D O L
16 amps
9-15 amps
15 HP Motors
Star Delta
25 amps
9-15 amps
20 HP Motors
Star Delta
32 amps
14-23 amps
25 HP Motors
Star Delta
32 amps
14-23 amps
200 HP Motors
DOL
325 amps CT Operated relay
Two speed motors when specified, shall be provided with DOL starter irrespective of it
rating.
6.CONTACTOR
Contractor shall be built into a high strength thermoplastic body and shall be provided
with an arc shield for quick arc extinguishing. Silver alloy tips shall be provided to ensure
a high degree of reliability and endurance under continuous operation. The magnet
system shall consist of laminated yoke and armature to ensure clean operation without
hum or chatter.
Starters contactors shall have 3 main and 2 Nos. NO / NC auxiliary contacts and shall be
air break type suitable for making and breaking contact at minimum power factor of 0.35.
For design consideration of contactors the starting current of connected motor shall be
assumed to be 6 times the full load current of the motor in case of direct-on-line starters
and 3 times the full load current of the motor in case of Star Delta and Reduced Voltage
Starters. The insulation for contactor coils shall be of Class “E”.
391
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Coil shall be tape wound vacuum impregnated and shall be housed in a thermostatic
bobbin, suitable for tropical conditions and shall withstand voltage fluctuations. Coil shall
be suitable for 220/415±10% volts AC, 50 cycles AC supply.
17.THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
Thermal over load relay shall have built in phase failure sensitive tripping mechanism to
prevent against single phasing as well as on overloading. The relay shall operate on the
differential system of protection to safeguard against three phase overload, single phasing
and unbalanced voltage conditions.
Auto-manual conversion facility shall be provided to convert from auto-reset mode to
manual-reset mode and vice-versa at site. Ambient temperature compensation shall be
provided for variation in ambient temperature from -5° C to +55°C.
All overload relays shall be of three element, positive acting ambient temperature
compensated time lagged thermal over load relays with adjustable setting. Relays shall be
directly connected for motors up to 35 HP capacity. C.T. operated relays shall be
provided for motors above 35 HP capacity. Heater circuit contactors may not be provided
with overload relays.
18.TIME DELAY RELAYS
Time delay relays shall be adjustable type with time delay adjustment from 0-180
seconds and shall have one set of auxiliary contacts for indicating lamp connection.
19.INDICATING LAMP AND METERING
All meters and indicating lamps shall be in accordance with IS:1248 and IS-1258. The
meters shall be flush mounted type. The indicating lamp shall be of low wattage . Each
MCC and control panel shall be provided with voltmeter 0-500 volts with three way and
off selector switch, CT operated ammeter of suitable range with three nos. CTS of
suitable ratio with three way and off selector switch, phase indicating lamps, and other
indicating lamps as called for. All phase indicating lamp shall be backed up with MCB.
392
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
20.TOGGLE SWITCH
Toggle switches, where called for in Schedule of Quantities, shall be in conformity with
relevant IS Codes and shall be of 5 amps rating.
21.PUSH BUTTON STATIONS
Push button stations shall be provided for manual starting and stopping of motors /
equipment Green and Red colour push buttons shall be provided for ‘Starting’ and
‘Stopping’ operations. ‘Start’ or ‘Stop’ indicating flaps shall be provided for push
buttons. Push Buttons shall be suitable for panel mounting and accessible from front
without opening door, Lock lever shall be provided for ‘Stop’ push buttons. The push
button contacts shall be suitable for 6 amps current capacity.
22.CONDUITS
Conduits and Accessories shall conform to relevant Indian Standards. Wall thickness
shall be 16 gauge up to 32 mm dia and 14 gauge above 32 mm dia conduit. Screwed G.I.
Conduits shall be used. Joints between conduits and accessories shall be securely made,
to ensure earth continuity. All conduit accessories shall be threaded type only. All raw
metal shall be painted with bitumastic paint.
Only approved make of conduits and accessories shall be used.
Conduits shall be delivered to the site of construction in original bundles and each length
of conduit shall bear the label of the manufacturer.
Maximum permissible number of 650/1100 volt grade PVC insulated wires that may be
drawn into rigid non metallic or GI Conduits are given below :
393
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Size
of
wires
Nominal Cross
section Area (Sq.
mm.)
1.5
2.5
4
6
10
16
25
35
Section – 13
Maximum number of wires within conduit
size(mm)
20
25
32
40
50
5
5
3
2
-----
10
8
7
5
3
2
---
14
12
10
8
5
3
2
--
----6
-4
3
-----6
6
5
23.CABLES & CABLE SIZES
1100V grade Cables of sizes 25 sq. mm. and above shall be XLPE FRLS insulated
aluminium conductor armoured type and PVC insulated Copper conductor armoured
cables for sizes 16 sq. mm. and below. All cables shall be conforming to IS Codes.
Cables shall be suitable for laying in trenches, ducts, and on cable trays as required.
Cables shall be termite resistant. Cable glands shall be heavy duty double compression
brass glands. Control cables and indicating panel cables shall be multi core PVC
insulated copper conductor and armoured cables.
1100V grade Cables shall be with FRLS grade outer sheath PVC insulation and armoured
conforming to IS Codes. Cables shall be suitable for laying in trenches, ducts, and on
cable trays as required. 1100V grade Cables shall be termite resistant. Cable glands shall
be double compression glands. Control cables and indicating panel cables shall be multi
core PVC insulated copper conductor and armoured cables.
The equipment inside plant room shall be connected to the control panel by means of
suitable cables of adequate size. An isolator shall be provided near each motor/equipment
(mounted within 10 ~ 15 mtr distance on nearest wall or self supported on floor)
wherever the motor/equipment is separated from the supply panel through a partition
barrier or through ceiling construction. PVC insulated copper conductor wires shall be
used inside the control panel for connecting different components and all the wires inside
the control panel shall be neatly dressed and plastic beads shall be provided at both the
ends for easy identification of control wiring.
Contractor shall select suitable rating and type of starter for the motors as per directions
and approval from relevant authorities. Power cabling shall be suitable for selected rating
and type of starter selected. Power cabling shall be of the following sizes:
394
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
Power wiring, cabling shall be of the following sizes:
i.
Up to 5 HP motors/ 5 KW heaters 1no. 3C x 4 sq. mm Copper conductor,
( DOL Starter )
PVC insulated armoured cable on motor
side and same size cable but of 4C on supply
side till starter panel.
ii.
From 6 HP to 12.5 HP motors
1no.3C x 6 sq. mm Copper
conductor
6 KW to 7.5 KW heaters ( DOL Starter )
PVC insulated armoured cable on
motor side and same size cable but of 4C on
supply side till starter panel.
.
iv.
From 15 HP to 25 HP motors
(Star-Delta Starter)
1 No. 4C x 10 sq. mm Copper
conductor, PVC insulated armoured cables
on supply side and 2 nos. 3C x 4 sq. mm
Copper conductor, PVC insulated armoured
cables on motor side.
v.
From 30 HP to 35 HP motors
(Star-Delta Starter)
1 no. 4C x 16 sq.mm Copper Conductor
PVC insulated, armoured cable on supply
side and 2 nos. 3C x 6 sq. mm Copper
conductor, PVC insulated armoured cables
on motor side.
vi.
From 40 HP to 50 HP motors
(Star-Delta Starter)
1 No. 3.5C x 35 sq.mm aluminium
conductor, XLPE insulated, armoured
Cable on supply side and 2 nos. 3C x 10 sq.
mm Copper conductor, PVC insulated
armoured cables on motor side.
vii.
From 60 HP to 75 HP motors
(Star-Delta Starter)
1 No. 3.5C x 70 sq. mm aluminium
conductor, XLPE insulated, armoured
Cable on supply side and 2 nos. 3C x 35 sq.
mm Aluminium conductor, XLPE insulated
armoured cables on motor side.
395
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
viii.
100 HP motors
(Star-Delta Starter)
1 No. 3.5C x 95sq. mm. aluminium,
conductor, XLPE insulated, armoured cable
on supply side and 2 nos. 3C x 50 sq. mm
Aluminium conductor, XLPE insulated
armoured cables on motor side.
ix.
125 HP motors
(Star-Delta Starter)
1 No. 3.5C x 150 sq. mm. aluminium,
conductor, XLPE insulated, armoured cable
on supply side and 2 nos. 3C x 70 sq. mm
Aluminium conductor, XLPE insulated
armoured cables on motor side.
x.
150 HP motors
(Star-Delta Starter)
1 No. 3.5C x 185 sq. mm. aluminium,
conductor, XLPE insulated, armoured cable
on supply side and 2 nos. 3C x 95 sq. mm
Aluminium conductor, XLPE insulated
armoured cables on motor side.
xi.
200 HP motors
(Star-Delta Starter)
1 No. 3.5C x 240 sq. mm. aluminium,
conductor , XLPE insulated, armoured cable
supply side and 2 nos. 3C x 120 sq. mm
Aluminium conductor, XLPE insulated
armoured cables on motor side.
24.CABLE LAYING
Cable shall be laid in accordance with IS code of Practice. Cables shall be laid on 14 gage
factory fabricated perforated Hot Dip galvanized sheet steel cable trays, and cable drops /
risers shall be fixed to ladder type cable trays factory fabricated out of galvanized steel
angle. Access to all cables shall be provided to allow cable withdrawal / replacement in the
future. Where more than one cable is running on a cable tray, one dia spacing shall be
provided between cables to minimise the loss in current carrying capacity.
Cables shall be suitably supported with Galvanized saddles when run on walls / trays.
When buried, they shall be laid in 350 mm wide and 750 mm deep trench and shall be
covered with 250 mm thick layer of soft sifted sand & protected with bricks/tiles. Special
care shall be taken to ensure that the cables are not damaged at bends. The radius of bend
of the cables when installed shall not be less than 12 times the diameter of cable.
396
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
25.EARTHING
Earthing shall be provided in accordance with relevant BIS Codes and shall be copper
strips /wires .The main panel shall be connected to main earthing system of the power
supply. All single phase metal clad switches and control panels be earthed with minimum
3 mm diameter copper conductor wire. All 3 phase motors and equipment shall be
earthed with 2 numbers distinct and independent copper wires / GI tapes of minimum
sizes as follows:
i.
Motor upto and including
10 HP rating.
2 Nos. 3 mm dia copper
wires.
ii.
Motor 12.5 HP to 40 HP capacity
2 Nos. 4 mm dia copper wires
iii.
Motor 50 to 75 HP capacity.
2 Nos. 6 mm dia copper
iv.
Motor above 75 HP.
2 Nos. 25 mm x 3 mm
copper tapes.
Above sizes are the minimum sizes to be provided. The contractor shall do a check for expected fault current at the motor end and
shall provide a higher size conductor if necessary in order to withstand the fault current for 1sec.
All switches shall be earthed with two numbers distinct and independent copper wires’
tapes as follows:
i.
3 phase switches
2 Nos. 3 mm dia copper
and control panels upto
wires.
60 amps rating.
ii.
3 phase switches, and
control panels 63 amps to
100 amps rating.
2 Nos. 4 mm dia copper
wires.
iii.
3 phase switches and control
panels 125 amps to
200 amps rating.
2 Nos. 6 mm dia copper
wires.
iv.
3 phase switches, control
panels, bus ducts, above
200 amps rating.
2 Nos. 3 mm x 25 mm
copper tapes.
397
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
Section – 13
The earthing connections shall be tapped off from the main earthing of electrical
installation. The overlapping in earthing strips at joints where required shall be minimum
75 mm. These straight joints shall be riveted with brass rivets & brazed in approved
manner. Sweated lugs of adequate capacity and size shall be used for all termination of
wires. Lugs shall be bolted to the equipment body to be earthed after the metal body is
cleaned of paint and other oily substance, and properly tinned.
26. DRAWINGS
Shop drawings for control panels and for wiring of equipment showing the route of
conduit & cable shall be submitted by the contractor for approval of Project
Manager/Consultant before starting the fabrication of panel and starting the work. On
completion, four sets of complete “As-installed” drawings incorporating all details like,
conduits routes, number of wires in conduit, location of panels, switches, junction/pull
boxes and cables route etc. shall be furnished by the contractor.
27.TESTING
Before commissioning of the equipment, the entire electrical installation shall be tested in
accordance with relevant BIS codes and test report furnished by a qualified and
authorised person. The entire electrical installation shall be gotten approved by Electrical
Inspector and a certificate from Electrical Inspector shall be submitted. All tests shall be
carried out in the presence of Project Manager. Testing of the panels shall be as per
relevant BIS Codes :
28. PAINTING
All sheet steel work shall undergo a process of degreasing, thorough cleaning, and
painting with a high corrosion resistant primer. All panels shall then be baked in an oven.
The finishing treatment shall be by application of powder coating of approved shade.
29.MEASUREMENT OF ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS
Each panels shall be counted as one unit. Quoted rates shall include as lumpsum (NOT
measurable lengths) for all internal wiring, power wiring and earthing connections from
the control panel to the starter and to the motor, control wiring for interlocking, power
and control wiring for automatic and safety controls, and control wiring for remote
start/stop as well as indication as per the specifications. Cables shall be separate item (1
lot) in BOQ. Similarly earthing shall be separate item (1 lot) in BOQ. The quoted rate of
panel shall also include all accessories, switchgear, contactors, indicating meters and
lights as per the Specifications and Schedule of Quantities.
398
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
LIST OF MATERIALS OF APPROVED BRAND AND / OR MANUFACTURERS
SL.NO.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
DESCRIPTION
CEMENT
STEEL
BRICK
SAND
METAL
CHIPS
WATER PROOF MATERIALS
CHOWKATH
HARD WARE FITTING
GLASS
P.V.C. SEWERAGE PIPE 6 KG /
CM2
G.I. PIPE
27.
ALL SANITARY FITTINGS
HARDWARE / LOCKING
SYSTEM
FLOOR SPRING
SS SCREW
LEAPING
C.C. PAVERS
MARBLE
CERAMIC WALL TILE
CERAMIC FLOOR TILE
ANTISKID VITRIFIED FLOOR
TILE
VITRIFIED FLOOR TILE (Single
charged soluble salt)
ALUMINIUM FRAME
ADHESIVE
ALL G.I. FIXTURES (TEE, BED,
ELBOW ETC.)
FULL WAY VALVE
28.
ALL H.C.I. PIPES
29.
30.
31.
PLASTIC W.C. SHEET
RAIN WATER PIPE 4 KG / CM2
PRE-CAST TERRAZO TILE
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
MAKES
ULTRATECH / ACC / LAFARZ / KONARK.
TISCON / VIZAG / SAIL
K.B. BRICK (75 KG/ CM2)
SWEET RIVER SAND
CRUSHER BROKEN GRANITE CHIPS
CRUSHER BROKEN GRANITE CHIPS
SIKA/ PERMA/ LATICRETE
WELL SEASONED SAL WOOD CHOWKATH
S.S. I.S.I. MARK MAT FINISH
MODIGUARD / SAINT GOBIN / AIS FLOAT
SUPREME / PRINCE / FINOLEX
TATA HEAVY MEDIUM / JINDAL HISSAR - B
CLASS
JAQUAR / ROCA / KHOLER
GODREJ / HURRSSION
GODREJ / HARDWYN / DOOR SET
H.F. BRAND
1ST QUALITY TEAK WOOD
KAJARIA/ULTRA/UROCAN
DUNGURI 2ND QUALITY
KAJARIA/ASIAN/RAK
KAJARIA/ASIAN/RAK
RAK/ASIAN/ NITTCO/
ASIAN / RAK / NITTCO
JINDAL / INDAL / OEL
FEVICOL / JEEVAN JHOR / CENTURY
HEAVY TYPE C.R. MAKE / UNIK MAKE
GUN METAL FULL WAY VALVE OF
LEADER MAKE / SANT MAKE
STANDARD I:S:I MARKED PIPES.
(SUSHILA MAKE / GAJA LAXMI MAKE
JAQUAR / ROCA / KHOLER
SUPREME / PRINCE / FINOLEX
NITCO / GICO / R.K. CEMENT BONDED TILE
399
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
EXTERIOR VITRIFIED TILE
ALL C.P. FITTINGS
ANCHOR FASTNER
ACRYLIC EMULSION PAINTS
PUTTY
EXTERIOR EMULSION PAINT
WEATHER COAT PAINT
ENAMEL PAINT
U.P.V.C WINDOW FRAME
S.S.RAIL
BONDING AGENT
ADMIXTURE
POLYSULPHIDE SEALANT
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52
53
STRUCTURAL SEALANT
FOAM SPACER
WEATHER SEALANT
ALUMINIUM DOOR FRAME
FLOOR SPRING
SS HANDLE
SS 304 MORTICE LOCK
DEAD LOCK
SS 304 CONCEALED TOWER
BOLT
SS 304 DOORS STOPPER
DOOR SILENCER
NIGHT LATCH
SS 304 BALL BEARING HING
SYNTHETIC ENAMEL PAINTS
ADHESIVE
ACRYLIC EMULSION PAINTS
AUTO HINGES
MAGNATIC CATCHER
S.S HANGER HOOK
ANTI TERMITE
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
PVC/ PVDF COMPOSITION OF
PRECONTRAINT 902 /502 S2
STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS
SHEAR STUDS
MONOLITHIC
HEATSTRENGTHENED GLASS
INSULATED GLASS
LAMINATED GLASS
TEMPERED GLASS
EUROCON / MULTIWYN / ULTRA
JAQUAR / KOHLER /ROCA
HILTI / FISHER
BERGER / NEROLAC / ASIAN
BIRLA / ASIAN / JK/PERMA
BERGER / ASIAN/NEROLAC
BERGER / ASIAN/NEROLAC
BERGER / ASIAN/NEROLAC
DURO PLAST / FINESTA
OZONE/KICH/DQUNAX
SIKA /PEDILITE/LATECRETE/PERMA
SIKA/PEDILITE/LATECRETE/PERMA
SIKA DUR COMPBIFLEX/LATAPOXY SP-100
OF LATICRETE SYSTEM/STAINLESS EPOXY
GROUT/PERMA
DOW CORNING/INDISEAL-9012/GE
GRINDWELL NORTON LTD/DOW CURING
DOW CORNING/INDISEAL-8020/GE
JINDAL/OEL / HINDAL CO
DORMA/ DOORSET/LINK
GODREJ/ DOORSET/LINK/OZONE
GODREJ/ DOORSET/LINK/DORMA
GODREJ/ DOORSET/LINK
GODREJ/ DOORSET/LINK/ARK/OZONE
SS 304 ISI MARKED
P.V.C OF APPROVED MAKE
GODREJ/ DOORSET/LINK
HAFLE/ARK/DOORSET
BERGER / NEROLAC / ASIAN
FEVICOL/ CENTURY/VAMICOL
BERGER / NEROLAC / ASIAN
HETICH/HAFLE/OZONE/DOORSET
ARK/SUNI/SONAL
HETIC/HAFLE/JAQGUAR
BIFLEX/ LENTRC/PIDLITE
SERGE FERRARI OR EQUIVALENT
TATA / CORUS / JINDAL / ESSAR
HILTI MAKE OR EQUIVALENT
GLAVERBEL
(EUROPE)/PILKINGTON(USA,UK)/ST. GOBAIN
(JAPAN)/VIRACON(USA)/GUARDIAN(USA)
400
72
73
ADHESSIVE FILM
EPDM
74
FOAM
SPACER
MOUNTING TAPES
PVDF COATING
75
76
A
B
ALUMINIUM
PANELS
COMPOSITE
SOLID
3M OR EQUIVALENT
AMEE RUBBER INDUSTRIES PVT. LTD. OR
APPROVED EQUIVALENT
AND NORTON OR EQUIVALENT
VALSPAR CORPORATION OR APPROVED
EQUIVALENT
CLADDING
ALUCOBOND/ALPOLIC/REYNOLDS
ALCAN OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT
401
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
SL.
NO
1
2
3
4
5
LIST OF MATERIALS OF APPROVED BRAND AND / OR MANUFACTURERS
PRODUCTS
BRAND
GRADE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
PLYWOOD
FLUSH
DOOR
HIPPO/TRUWOOD/
GREEN
CLUB/CENTURY /TAJ
IS 710
HIPPO/TRUWOOD/VISH
AL/CENTURY
IS 2202
LAMINATES ROYAL TOUCH/
MERINO/SONEA/ASIS
PRE
ACTION TESA/
LAMINATE NOVANPAN/BHUTAN
D BOARD
BOARD/CROSS
BAND/ASIS
BLOCK
HIPPO/TRUWOOD/GRE
BOARD
EN CLUB/CENTURY
/TAJ
IS 2046
IS 12823
IS 1659
6
DECORATIV TRUWOOD/GREEN/CEN
E VEENER TURY/ARIN
IS 1328
7
ADHESIVES
IS 4835
8
GYPSUM
FALSE
CEILING
GRID
CEILING
METAL
CEILING
WOODEN/
LAMINATE
9
10
11
Section – 13
ROYAL BOAD AND
EQUIVALENT
USG-BORAL/SAINT
GOBIN
Plywood should be phenol bonded
with 11 layers of core veneer of gurjan
timber and two layers of face veneers
with thickness of 0.5mm confirming
to IS 710.
Flush doors frames should be of pine
timber without any joint and filler
should be of red miranti hardwood all
seasoned and chemical vacumm
treated and core, face veneer bonded
with phenol formaldehyde confirming
to IS 2202 part I
Laminates should be of 1mm/1.25mm
thick confirming IS 2046
Particles should be of wood based and
of uniform structure bonded with urea
formaldehyde.
Frames and all the filler should be of
pine wood, seasoned and chemically
treated and the core veneer should be
of gurjan timber and bonded with
phenol formaldehyde confirming to IS
1659
The decorative veneer on top surface
should be min 0.6mm thickness and
uniformly sanded and the base ply
should be of gurjan timber and all face
veneers bonded with phenol
formaldehyde confirming to IS 1328
Polyvenyle Acetate dispersion based
adhesive.
12.5mm thick Gypsum board
ARMSTRONG/USG
ARMSTRONG/ TECHNO
ACTION
TESA/EURO/PERGO/AR
8mm thick laminated HDF flooring of
AC4 grade
402
12
13
14
D
FLOORING
WATER
ROOF
CEILING
ACCESSES
FLOORING
METAL
CEILING
SECTION
MSTRONG
HILUX/ EVERST/SHERA
IS 14862
EVEREST /LABAN
USG-BORAL/SAINT
GOBIN/DIAMOND
Ceiling section, perimeter channel,
ceiling section should be of .55mm
thickness GI frame and intermediate
channel should be of 0.8mm thickness.
Note:
1.
2.
3.
THE MATERIAL SPECIFICATION MAY CHANGE AS PER THE DESIGN.
All approved makes shall be ISI Marked.
The Make/Brand and Shade of the materials to be used shall be approved by
NLUO/ PMC.
Followings are the I.S code to be followed for procurement of flush door, block
board, ply board
Ply Board – I.S.I – 710 B.W.P Grade
Block Board – I.S.I – 1659 B.W.P Grade (Pine timber frame filler)
Flush Door – I.S.I – 2202 B.W.P Grade
LIST OF APPROVED MATERIALS
The contractor shall use materials in their works subject to inspection prior to
despatch, by NLUO/ PMC of any materials, as deemed necessary in accordance with
the following list, all materials not otherwise specified shall be in accordance with the
latest Indian Standard Specification, where such exists and prior approval of NLUO /
PMCs. The contractor shall be bound to offer sample of materials. Which are claimed
to be conforming to I.S. specifications, for testing at an approved Test Laboratory.
Contractor shall purchase all materials from the makers or their authorized stockists only.
Necessary documentary evidences must be produced to the NLUO / PMC their authorized
representative on demand. Contractor shall be bound to supply items of any make of the items as
per the choice of the NLUO / PMC.
1.
Acceptable Materials List
(Internal)
403
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
1.1
Conduits - P.V.C.
a)
b)
1.2
1.3
1.4
Section – 13
Make
Accessories
:
:
ISI Marked.
Same make as that of conduit.
Wiring Cables - PVC Insulated Copper
a)
Make
:
b)
Voltage Grade :
Finolex./ Havell’s / Polycab
1100 Volts & as per IS 694 / 1990
Distribution Boards
a)
Make
:
b)
Make of MCB’s :
Schneider (protect) / Legrand / Hovel’s
Schneider (Protect) / Legrand / Havell’s /
Wiring Accessories
a)
b)
5A / 15A switches
sockets, antenna
sockets & telephone
sockets
:
Schneider (Clipsal - Opale) / Legrand /
Havell’s / Crabtree (Athena)
Ceiling roses /
Angle holders
:
Cona / Anchor
Switch plates /
Covers
:
(d)
Switch box
:
(e)
Tumbler switch / :
Socket
Schneider (Clipsal - Opale) / Legrand /
Havell’s / Crabtree (Athena)
Schneider (Clipsal-Opale) / Legrand
(Mosaic)/Crabtree (Athena) Havell’s
Anchor/ Cona
c)
404
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
f.
Conduit Pipe
:
Section – 13
ISI Mark/AKG/BEC/Kingal
Note : All approved makes shall be ISI Marked
EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE AND LIST OF ACCEPTABLE MATERIALS MEDIUM
VOLTAGE SWITCHES GEAR AND TRANSFORMER
1.
List of Acceptable Materials
1.1.
The following makes of equipment / materials shall be acceptable under this contract.
(A)
Medium Voltage Switch-gear
(B)
i)
Air circuit breakers
:
Larasen & Toubro / Schneider
ii)
Switch-fuse units
:
Larsen & Toubro / G.E. / SCHNEIDER / SIEMENS
iii)
HRC fuses
:
G.E. / Larsen & Toubro / SIEMENS / Schneider
iv)
Change over switch
:
Schneider / Larsen & Toubro / G.E.
v)
M.C.C.B.
:
Larsen & Toubro / Schneider / G.E.
H.T. Cable
:
ICC / CCI Gloster / Nicco / Polycab /KEI
Cables
i)
Havelles.
ii)
(C)
L.T. Cable
:
ICC / CCI / Gloster / NICCO /Havells / Poly cab
Meters & Indicators
i)
ii)
Ammeter / Voltmeter /
P.F. Meters
:
AEP / UE / IMP / Automatic Elect.
Kwh Meter
:
REMCO / GEC / SEMS / HPL / ALTHOM /
SECURE
iii)
Frequency Meter
:
AEP / NIPPON / UE
iv)
Indicating Lamps
:
Siemens / Larsen & Toubro / Binay / Concord.
405
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
(D)
(E)
(F)
Section – 13
Instrument Transformers
i)
H.T. Current Transformers : VE / EMS / KAPPA / AUTOMATIC ELECTRIC.
ii)
H.T. Potential Transformers :
Jyothi / VE / ESM.
iii)
D.T. Current Transformers :
ANP / KAPPA / ESM.
iv)
Selector Switches
: Larsen & Toubro / Kaycee / Thakoor.
Relays
i)
Over current and earth fault relay : AREVA / Siemens / Larsen & Toubro.
ii)
Power factor correction relay
:
NIPPO / MSIL / AVMACO / Siemens.
iii)
AX relay
:
AREVA / ABB
Miscellaneous
i)
Cable gland
:
APT / ELECTROMAG
ii)
Lugs
:
Dowels.
iii)
Connectors
:
Indian Engineering Company / ELMEC / Schneider
iv)
Capacitors
:
Khatau Junker / Voltas / BSES / MSIL / Powercap /
Crompton Greaves.
N.B.:
v)
Contactors
:
Larsen & Toubro / Siemens / BCH / Schneider
vi)
Starters
:
Larsen & Toubro / Siemens / BCH
All material to be used should be of standard / make / specification as specified in
the Tender and only after approval of the Concerned NLUO/ PMC
406
Project: National Law University Auditorium
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list,
Section – 13
Note: All approved makes shall be ISI Marked
LIST OF APPROVED MAKES OF MATERIALS FOR PLUMBING / SANITARY /
DRAINAGE
S. No.
Details of Materials / Equipments
Manufacturer's Name
1.Vitreous China Sanitary ware
:
Jaquar / ROCA/Koehler
2.C.P. Brass fittings
:
Jaquar(continental range)/
ROCA/Koehler
3. Manhole
:
App equal & ISI marked.
4.R.C.C pipe
:
App. Equivalent ISI marked
5. Gully traps
:
6. G.M. / Forged brass valves
:
Zoloto / Leader
7 .Check valve/Butterfly valve
:
SKS / C & R / Advance
8 .Paints
:
Asian Paints /Berger/Nerolac
9. Pressure Gauge
:
H Guru / Approved Equal ISI marked
10. UPVC Pipes
:
Supreme / Prince/Finolex
11. S. S. Sink
:
Neelkanth / Jayana/ Nerali
12. CPVC Pipes
:
Astral flowgard / HIF Poly/Oriplast /
Ashirvad flowgard/Supreme
13. G.I Pipes
:
Jindal / Tata
Perfect Potteries / Approved equal ISI marked
Note : All approved makes shall be ISI Marked
407
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
LIST OF APPROVED MAKES/BRANDS OF VARIOUS MATERIALS.
The materials to be used should be form the following list of approved makes/brands or of
equivalent quality as approved. Any other make/brand of a materials will also be allowed
to be used if approved by consultant.
1.
2.
3.
FERRULES
A) LEADER
G) HVI
B) JCSWR
WATER METER
A) CAPSTAN B) RAWCO
BALL COCKS
A) KINGSTON
C) ACB
D) NETA
E) NEW
HIMSON
C) DAS MASS
B) ARK
C) LUSTER
4.
POLYTHIENE FLOATS
A) COMMANDER CHAMPION B) COMMANDER-WATER BIRD
C) CMCOS BSJ. D) PEACOCK
5.
MIRRORS
A) GOLDEN FISH
B) SWAN
6.
POLYTHIENE OVERFLOW PIPES
A) EMCO
B) PEACOCK
7.
CEMENT CONCRETE PIPES
A) INDIAN HUME PIPES CO.
8.
F)
B) M.M. METAL & CO.
WATER PROFING COMPOUND FOR INTEGRAL CEMENT BASED WATER
PROOFING
A) IMPERUM-(2% BY WT. BY CEMENT) M/S SNOCEM INDIA LTD.,
B) CICI-(3% BY WT. OF CEMENT) M/S STRUCTURAL WATER PROOFING COL,
C) CHOCKSEY.
408
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
LIST OF APPROVED MATERIALS/FIRE FIGHTING AGENCY
The contractor shall use materials in their works subject to inspection prior to
dispatch, by owner or his authorized representative of any materials, as deemed
necessary in accordance with the following list, all materials not otherwise specified
shall be in accordance with the latest Indian Standard Specification or equivalent ,
where such exists and prior approval of NLUO / PMC. The contractor shall be bound
to offer sample of materials. Which are claimed to be conforming to I.S.
specifications, for testing at an approved Test Laboratory.
FIRE FIGHTING EXECUTING AGENCY :
CEASEFIRE / TYCO / MX SYSTEM
INTERNATIONAL (P) LTD
The executing agency should have their office and necessary infrastructure in the state of Odisha,
at least for a minimum period of 10 years or above with all necessary statutory registrations. The
Technicians ( Welders, Fitters & Electrical ) being deployed in the project must be trained,
skillful, experienced with necessary proof / certifications and must be employed by the company
directly on their payrolls with necessary statutory requirements like ESIC, PF and insurance
APPROVED MAKE LIST
1.
Electric motor driven pump
Kirloskar/ Equivalent
2.
Diesel Engine Driven Pump
Kirloskar / Koel / Equivalent
3.
Jockey pump
Kirloskar / Equivalent
4.
Battery
Exide / Amco
5.
MCC panel
Venus / Load Controls
6.
Power and Control Cable
Polycab / Finolex / Equivalent
7.
Cable Tray
Profab / Paifab
8.
Pipe
Jindal / Tata / Equivalent
9.
Gate Valve
Kartar / H.Sarker/Equivalent
10.
Non Return Valve
H. Sarkar /Intervalve / Equivalent
11.
Butterfly Valve
H. Sarkar /Intervalve / Equivalent
12.
Ball Valve
Zoloto / Leader / Neta / Equivalent
13.
Pressure Switch
Indfos / Danfoss / Equivalent
14.
Pressure Gauge
H.Guru / Fiebig
15.
Anti Corrosive Material
IWL
16.
Fire Brigade Inlet
Newage / Winco
17.
Hydrant Valve
Newage / Winco
409
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 13
_________Technical specification of materials, Approved material list
18
RRL Hose
Newage/ EverSafe
19.
Brach pipe
Newage / Winco
20..
Hose Reel Drum
Newage/ EverSafe
21.
Hose Cabinet / Fire Duct Shutter
Fabricated
22.
Air Release Valve
Elems / Leader
23.
RCC Hume Pipe
Indian Hume Pipes
24.
Paint
Asian Paint / Berger
25.
Welding Rod
Esab/ Equivalent
26.
Fastener
Hitech / Hilti
410
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 14
411
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 14
412
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 14
413
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 14
414
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 14
415
Project: National Law University Auditorium
Section – 14
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement